Diploma in Civil Engineering C18 Curriculum: Sankethika Vidya Bhavan, Masab Tank, Telangana, Hyderabad

DIPLOMA IN CIVIL ENGINEERING
C18 CURRICULUM
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING

SANKETHIKA VIDYA BHAVAN, MASAB TANK, TELANGANA,
HYDERABAD
1
C-18 - CURRICULUM
FOR DIPLOMA PROGRAMMES IN TELANGANA
I. PREAMBLE
The State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana under the aegis of the
Department of Technical Education, Telangana regularly reviews the Curricula in tune with the
developments both in academic and industry side. However, recognizing the changing needs as stated
by the catchment industries, the Board has decided to bring about the revision of curriculum. Thus,
the Board, with the assistance of senior faculty of the branches concerned, has reviewed C-16/C-16S
Curriculum in force. On finding the merits and shortcomings of C-16/C-16S Curriculum, the faculty
has made a thorough assessment of the curricular changes that have to be brought in. It was felt that
there is an urgent need to improve hands-on experience among the students pursuing diploma
courses. Further, the urgency of enhancing communication skills in English has also been
highlighted in the feedback and suggestions made by the user industries. Keeping these in view, a
number of meetings and deliberations were held at State level, with experts from industry, academia
and senior faculty of the department. The new Curricula for the different diploma courses have been
designed with the active participation of the members of the faculty teaching in the Polytechnics of
Telangana, besides reviewed by Expert Committee constituted with eminent academicians.
The new C-18 curriculum is designed, duly taking into consideration the Outcome Based
Education model as per NBA norms and Credit system has also been introduced.
This new Curriculum has taken the Telangana State Industrial Policy in the course of
Industrial Management and Entrepreneurship. Skill Upgradation is given importance by allotting
2.5 grade points per semester.
The primary objective of the curriculum change is to produce best technicians in the country
by correlating growing needs of the industries with the academic inputs.
The revised New Curriculum i.e., Curriculum – 2018 or C-18 is planned and designed by
making 6 months industrial training is mandatory.
Salient Features:
1. Duration of course is 3 years of Regular Academic instruction.

 The Curriculum is Outcome based, Semester Pattern, more practical oriented, Flexible,
Relevant to the industry needs and oriented to develop entrepreneurship skills in Diploma
students.
2
 A maximum of 20% credits be permitted in specialized electives offered in VI semester
that can be pursued through MOOC like SWAYAM / NPTEL
 To start with a robust curriculum structure is designed
 Course structure contains 5 theory courses and 5 Laboratory courses per semester
 All theory courses will be of Lecture -Tutorial-Practicals (L:T:P) pattern
 In order to ensure continuous evaluation, total course content is divided into 3 parts i.e.,
Mid Semester- I should be conducted for 20 marks from part I and Mid Semester- II
should be conducted for 20 marks from part II, End Examination shall be conducted for
40 marks of which 20 marks should be covered from part III, 20 marks covered from
overall course content.
 The sessional marks of 20 are assigned to slip tests, assignments, seminars, quiz etc.
 The question paper pattern is comprising of short answer questions, Essay questions,
Application based Questions covering the attributes of understanding, remembering and
Application.
 Scoring of the candidate in the examination is reflected in terms of grade points blending
with relative grade point award system.
2. Keeping in view the increased need of communication skills that is playing a vital role in the success
of Diploma Level students in the Industries, emphasis is given for learning and acquiring
listening, speaking, reading and writing skills in English. Communication Skills lab and Life
Skills lab are therefore introduced in III Semester and Advanced Communication Skills lab and
Life Skills lab as lab electives from IV Semester for all the branches.
3. Latest topics relevant to the needs of the industry and global scenario suitable to be taught at
Diploma level are also incorporated in the curriculum.
4. CAD specific to the branch has been given more emphasis in the curriculum. Preparing drawings
using CAD software has been given more importance.
5. Every student is exposed to the computer lab at the 1 styear itself in order to familiarize
himself/herself with skills required for keyboard/mouse operation, internet usage and e-mailing.
6. The number of teaching hours allotted to a particular topic/chapter has been rationalized keeping in
view the past experience.
7. Upon reviewing the existing C-16 curriculum, more emphasis is given to the practical content of
Laboratories and Workshops, thus strengthening the practical skills in C-18 Curriculum.
8. With increased emphasis for the student to acquire Practical skills, the course content in all the
courses is thoroughly reviewed and structured as outcome based than the conventional procedure
based. While the course content in certain courses felt overloaded is reduced, in rest of the courses
the content has been enhanced as per the need.
3
9. Curriculum of Laboratory and Workshops have been thoroughly revised based on the suggestions
received from the industry and faculty, for better utilization of the equipment available at the
Polytechnics. The experiments /exercises that are chosen for the practical sessions are identified to
conform to the field requirements of industry.
10. The course of skill up-gradation in each semester is incorporated in the time table for one complete
day consisting of 7 periods..
11. The student shall be awarded satisfactory through RUBRICS only if he/she puts in at-least 75%
attendance in the skill up-gradation course apart from the satisfactory performance in the activities
allotted.
12. The activities suggested for skill up-gradation in the curriculum at the end of each course will be
assessed by the respective course teacher through RUBRICS and duly certified by the
HOS/Principal.
13. The Members of the working group are grateful to Sri Navin Mittal I.A.S., Commissioner of
Technical Education & Chairman, S.B.T.E.T.(TS) for his constant guidance and valuable inputs in
revising, modifying and updating the curriculum.
14. The Members acknowledge thanks for cooperation and guidance extended by Sri. U.V.S.N. Murthy,
Secretary and his team of SBTET, Telangana, Dr C. Srinath, Additional Secretary, SBTET and Sri
A. Pullaiah, RJD and other officials of Directorate of Technical Education and the State Board of
Technical Education, Telangana.
15. The Members acknowledge thanks for cooperation and guidance extended by Dr.Uma Shanker
Sahu of NITTTR, Hyderabad and experts from industry, academia from the universities and
higher learning institutions and all teaching fraternity from the Polytechnics who are directly and
indirectly involved in preparation of the curricula.
II. RULES AND REGULATIONS

1. ADMISSION PROCEDURES:
1.1 DUR ATION AND PATTERN OF THE COURSES
All the Diploma programs run at various institutions are of AICTE approved 3 years
duration of Academic Instruction.
All the Diploma courses are run on semester-wise pattern.
1. 2 PROCEDURE FOR ADMISSION INTO THE DIPLOMA COURSES:

Selection of candidates is governed by the Rules and regulations laid down in this regard
from time to time.
4
i) Candidates who wish to seek admission in any of the Diploma courses will have to appear
for Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET) conducted by
the State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana, Hyderabad.
The candidates satisfying the following requirements only are eligible to appear for the
Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET).
a) The candidates seeking admission should have appeared for the X class examination, conducted by
the Board of Secondary Education, Telangana or equivalent examination at the time of making
application to the Common Entrance Test for Polytechnics for admissions into Polytechnics
(POLYCET). In case of candidates who apply with pending results of their qualifying examinations,
their selection shall be subject to production of proof of their passing the qualifying examination in
one attempt or compartmentally at the time of counselling for admission.
b) Admissions are made based on the merit obtained in the Common Entrance Test (POLYCET) and
the reservation rules stipulated by the Government of Telangana from time to time.
c) For admission into the Diploma in Pharmacy Course for which entry qualification is 10+2,
candidates need not appear for POLYCET. A separate notification will be issued for admission into
these courses.
d) Admission into DHMCT Course shall be based on the Merit in Intermediate for which admissions
are made by DOST conducted by TSCHE.
1.3 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION
The medium of instruction and examination shall be English.
1.4 PERMANENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)
A cumulative / academic record is to be maintained of the Marks secured in sessional work

and end examination of each year for determining the eligibility for promotion etc., a
Permanent Identification Number (PIN) will be allotted to each candidate, which is
computer generated so as to facilitate this work and avoid errors in tabulation of results.
1.5 NUMBER OF WORKING DAYS PER SEMESTER:
a). The Academic Year for all the Courses usually shall be from June 1 st week of the year of admission
to the 31st March of the succeeding year.

b). The Working days in a week shall be from Monday to Saturday
c). There shall be 7 periods of 50 minutes duration on all working days.
d). The minimum number of Instructional working days for each semester shall be 90 days
excluding examination days/ Public holidays/ orientation programme/ Sports and games Period.
If this prescribed minimum is not achieved due to any reason, special arrangements shall be
5
made to conduct classes to cover the syllabus.
6
1.6 ELIGIBILITY OFATTENDANCE TO APPEAR FOR THE END
EXAMINATION
Note: Student attendance is recorded, twice a day using Aadhar Based Attendance System
with Bio metric Device.
a). A candidate shall be permitted to appear for the end examination in all courses, if he or she has
attended a minimum of 75% of Instructional working days during the Semester.
b). Condonation of shortage of attendance in aggregate upto 10% (65% and above and below 75%) in
each semester may be granted on medical grounds.
c). Candidates having less than 65% attendance shall be detained.
d). Students whose shortage of attendance is not condoned in any semester are not eligible to take their
end examination of that class and their admissions shall stand cancelled. They may seek re-
admission for that semester when offered next.
e). A stipulated fee shall be payable towards condonation for shortage of attendance.
1.7 READMISSION
Readmission shall be granted to eligible candidates by the respective Principal of the
institutions concerned. 10% of approved intake are eligible for Readmission and preference
will be given to first-cum-first-serve basis, while according permission for re-admission of
the Diploma candidates:-
1. The percentage of attendance to a readmitted candidate is to be calculated from
the first day of beginning of the class work of that year / semester, but not from
the date, a readmitted candidate reports for class work, after given readmission.
No. of working
No. of working
S No. of days required
Year/Semester days required for
No Working days for 65%
75% attendance
attendance
Any Semester
1 (Except for 90 67.5 58.5
Industrial Training
2. The Principals of all Polytechnics shall ensure that the readmission cases should
considered and granted:-
a) Within 15 days after commencement of class work in any semester

Otherwise such cases should not be considered for readmission for that Semester/year, and
the candidates concerned may be advised to seek readmission in the next subsequent semester/year.
7
Before issuing readmission orders, an undertaking letter from the student is to be obtained,
stating that he/she will agree to the rule that the percentage of attendance to him/her shall be
calculated from the first day of beginning of the regular class work for that year / semester, as
officially announced by DTE/SBTET but not from the day on which he/she has actually reported to
the class work, after readmission is granted, and that he/she will complete the Diploma in twice the
duration of the course from the date of the first admission, otherwise he/she will forfeit the claim for
qualifying for the award of Diploma.
2. SCHEME OF EXAMINATION
2.1 I, II, III, IV, V and VI Semesters:
THEORY EXAMINATION: Each semester end examination carries 40 marks in

respect of specified courses of 2 hours duration, along with 60 marks for continuous
evaluation.
 The Semester End Examination paper shall be set for 40 marks
 PRACTICAL EXAMINATION: Each laboratory course carries 40 marks of 2/3
hours duration and 60 sessional marks for continuous internal evaluation.
2.2 ASSESSMENT SCHEME

I. Assessment: In order to ensure continuous evaluation the examination pattern is
formulated as
End 40 marks
Examination
Mid Sem 1 20 marks
Mid Sem 2 20 marks
Tutorials 20 marks
/Sessionals
Total marks 100 Marks
 Total course content shall be divided into three parts as Part 1, Part 2, Part 3
 Mid sem 1 Exam should be conducted from Part 1
 Mid sem II Exam should be conducted from Part 2
 End Examination to be conducted for 40 marks of which
 20 Marks should be covered from Part 3
8
 Remaining 20 marks covered from over all course contents
 The tutorial/sessionals shall consist of following marks division
1. Slip test 1 -- 5 marks
2. Slip test 2 -- 5 Marks
3. Assignments -- 5 Marks
4. Seminar/paper presentation/group discussion -- 5 Marks
II. Mid semester Question paper pattern
 Part A shall consist of ‘Remember’ based questions
 Part B shall consist of ‘Understanding’ questions
 Part C shall be of ‘Application’ based Questions
III. Semester End Examination:
 The Regular Examinations and Backlog Examinations shall be conducted separately.
 Backlog examinations should be held before the commencement of Academic Year to give
sufficient time for the student to prepare for Backlog examinations.
IV. Examination Pattern (End Semester Examination):
Part 3 Unit 5&6 ‘Remember’ based questions
Part A
Entire syllabus ‘Remember’ based questions
Part 3 ‘Understanding’ based

Part B Unit 5&6 questions
‘Understanding’ based
Entire syllabus
questions
Part 3
‘Application’ based questions
Unit 5&6
Part C
‘Application’ based
Entire syllabus
questions
V. Award of Grades and Grade points criteria for C-18 Curriculum

1. Marks : In order to ensure continuous evaluation the examination pattern is formulated as:
Theory Practical
End Examination 40 marks End Examination 40 marks
Mid Sem-I 20 marks Mid Sem-I 20 marks
Mid Sem-II 20 marks Mid Sem-II 20 marks
Internal 20 marks Internal 20 marks
Total marks 100 Marks Total marks 100 Marks
9
2. Hybrid grading system for regular students:
Absolute Grade Cut off Hybrid Grade Cut off
Grade Relative Grade Cut
Grade Practical &
Point Theory Subjects off
Drawing
Min of
A+ 10 > 90% > 90% Min of Top 1/8
Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
A 9 > 80 to < 90% > 82.5 to < 90% Min of Top 2/8
Min of
B+ 8 > 70 to < 80% > 75 to < 82.5% Min of Top 3/8
Min of
B 7 > 60 to < 70% > 67.5 to < 75% Min of Top 4/8
Min of
C+ 6 > 50 to < 60% > 60 to < 67.5% Min of Top 5/8
Min of
C 5 > 40 to < 50% > 55 to < 60% Min of Top 6/8
Min of
D 4 > 35 to < 40% > 50 to < 55% Min of Top 7/8
E 0 Rest of the Candidates
Based on the minimum of Absolute Grade cut off and Relative Grade cut off, a Hybrid
grade cut off shall be arrived and the appropriate grade shall allotted to the student and based on the
Grade, a Grade point shall be allotted in each subject provided the Candidate passes in the subject.
Pass Criteria for Regular Candidate: The Candidate is declared pass only if he/she
secures above the Hybrid Grade cut off of ‘D’ grade and 35% or above in Theory Examination and
50% or above in Practical and Drawing Examinations, as per the formula below in Sem End
Examination:-
End semester marks secured X 100
End semester Topper marks
Grades for backlog subjects : The Candidate shall be awarded ‘P’ or ‘F’ Grade based on
‘Pass’ or ‘Fail’ respectively in the Backlog Subjects. The ‘P’ or ‘F’ Grade has no Grade point but P
grade will count towards credits earned for awarding Diploma. The Candidate shall get P Grade if
he/she secures 35% or above in Theory Examination and 50% or above in Practical and Drawing
Examinations, as per the formula below in End Sem Examination:-
End semester marks secured X 100
End semester Topper marks of Regular exam of that batch
VI. Credits:
For theory courses-- 3 Credits
For Laboratory courses- 1.5 Credits
Skill up-gradation 2.5 Credits
Total credits per semester 25 Credits
10
 CGPA will be calculated for Regular Examinations only and not for backlog exams.
 Backlog exams will count for credits.
 Skill up gradation course will not count for CGPA but for Credits.
 Minimum credits for obtaining Diploma are 130 out of 150
VII. Electives:
a) The students are permitted to choose two electives in V semester.

Or
Specialized electives related to V semester course contents offered in MOOCs, like
SWAYAM/NPTEL
b) The student has to complete one Project in V Semester
Industrial Training (VI Semester)
Swapping of Industrial Training in C-18 Curriculum in V and VI Semesters

(50% of each Polytechnic students undergo Industrial Training in V Semester and
remaining in VI Semester).
 Evaluation and assessment of Industrial Training, shall be done and marks be awarded in
the following manner, provided the candidates concerned have put up minimum 90%
attendance of Industrial Training.
Industrial assessment at Industry : 600 marks (in two spells of 300 marks each)
Institutional Evaluation : 300 marks
Semester End Examination : 100 marks

(Seminar/viva-voce at Institution)
_________
TOTAL 1000 marks
Assessment parameters at Industry

Assessment I Assessment
Sl No (First II (Second
Learning Parameter
Quarter) Quarter)
1 Attendance and punctuality 20 20
2 Familiarity of tools and material 30 30
3 Engineering skills 50 50
4 Application of knowledge & Problem solving skills 50 50
5 Comprehension and observation 10 10
11
6 Professionalism/Professional ethics 20 20
7 Safety and environmental consciousness 10 10
8 Communication skills 20 20
9 Supervisory skills 50 50
10 General conduct during the period 40 40
Total marks for Industry Evaluation 300

300
600 marks
Assessment parameters at Institution (End Examination)
Institution Level Evaluation Scheme

Sl Criteria Marks Time
No
1 1st Report Submission 50 within 4 Weeks
2 Seminar-I 50 9th to 10th week
3 2nd Report Submission 50 Within 12 weeks
4 Log book 100 --
5 Seminar-II 50 Before Viva-Voce
Institute Evaluation 300
Total
Semester End Examination
1 Viva-Voce 50 After 24 weeks
2 Presentation/Demonstration 50
of skills
Total 100
 The assessment at the institute level will be done by a minimum of three members i.e.
Internal Faculty, Industrial Experts/External Examiner and H.O.D. and the shall be
averaged
a) Theory Courses: Theory Courses carry 20 marks for Mid Sem I and 20 marks for Mid Sem II and 20
marks for Tutorials which consists of Slip Test-I 5 Marks, Slip Test-II 5 Marks, Assignment-5 Marks
and Seminar -5Marks. Mid Sem examinations will be conducted on the dates specified by SBTET.
The remaining 40 marks of theory will be conducted as End Semester Exam.
b) Practicals: Student’s performance in Laboratories / Workshop shall be assessed during each
semester of study for 40 marks in end practical course and internal assessment carries 20 marks for
Mid Sem I and 20 marks for Mid Sem II and 20 marks for Tutorials . Each student has to write a
record / log book for assessment purpose. In the course of Drawing, which is also considered as a
practical paper, the same rules hold good. Drawing exercises are to be filed in seriatim.
c) Internal assessment in Labs / workshops / Survey field etc., during the course of study shall be done
12
and sessional marks shall be awarded by the concerned Lecturer / Senior Lecturer / Workshop
superintendent with the concurrence of concerned HOS as the case maybe.
d) For practical examinations, there shall be two examiners. External examiner shall be appointed
by the Principal in consultation with respective head of the department preferably choosing a person
from an Industry/Academician. At least one External Examiner from Industry should be
appointed for core labs.The Internal examiner shall be the person concerned with internal
assessment as in (c) above. The end examination shall be held along with all theory papers in
respect of drawing.
e) Question Paper for Practicals: Question paper should cover all the experiments / exercise
prescribed.
f) Records pertaining to internal assessment marks of both theory and practical courses are to be
maintained for official inspection.
g) In case of D.C.C.P., though the pass mark for typewriting and short hand is 50% in the end
examination, equivalency will be given for the students who got 45% with the examinations held
by SBTET, TS.
3 RULES OF PROMOTIONTI ON FOR NEXT LEVEL:
3.1 For Diploma Courses for 1st ,2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5thand 6thSemesters:
1. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for first Semester examination provided he / she puts the
required percentage of attendance (i.e., 75%) and pays the examination fee. However, attendance can
be condoned by the Principal on Medical grounds upto 10% (i.e. attendance after condonation on
Medical grounds should not be less than 65%) and he/she has to pay the condonation fee along with
examination fee as prescribed by SBTET from time to time.
2. A candidate shall be promoted to 2ndsemester if he/she puts the required percentage of attendance
(i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) in the first semester and pays the examination
fee. A candidate who could not pay the first semester examination fee has to pay the promotion fee
as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time before
commencement of 2nd semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 2nd semester exam if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical condonation) in the 2nd semester.
3. A candidate shall be promoted to 3rdsemester if he/she puts the required percentage of attendance
(i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) in the 2nd semester and pays the examination fee
and earned more than 25 credits (upto regular End Semester Exams of 2 nd semester). A candidate
who could not pay the 2nd semester examination fee has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by
State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time before commencement of 3 rd
semester.
13
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 3 rd semester exam if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical condonation) and pays the
examination fee in the 3rd semester and earned 25 credits up the end of 2nd Semester.
4. A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the required percentage of
attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical condonation) in the 3rdsemester and pays the
examination fee and earned 25 credits up the end of 2 nd Semester. A candidate, who could not pay
the 3rdsemester exam fee but fulfilling all other conditions has to pay the promotion fee as
prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time before
commencement of 4th semester. IVC pass out students admitted into 3 rd semester through lateral
entry shall be promoted to 4th Semester, if he/she Puts the required percentage of attendance (i.e.,
75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) and pays examination in the 3 rd semester.
5. A candidate shall be promoted to 5 thsemester provided he / she puts the required percentage of
attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) in the 4 thsemester and pays the
examination fee and earns 75 Credits (upto regular End Semester Exams of 4 th semester). A
candidate, who could not pay the 4thsemester examination fee but earned 75 credits has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time
before commencement of 5thsemester as the case may be.
6. A candidate shall be promoted to 6 thsemester provided he / she puts the required percentage of
attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) in the 5 thsemester and pays the
examination fee and earned 75 credits upto the end of 4 th Semester. A candidate, who could not pay
the 5thsemester examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of
Technical Education and Training from time to time before commencement of 6 thsemester as the case
may be.
(a) A candidate is eligible to appear for the 6th semester (Theory) exam if he/she
i) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 6 th semester
ii) Should have appeared for 5th semester examination.
(b) A candidate is eligible to appear for 6th (Industrial Training) semester

examination if he/she
i) Puts the required percentage of attendance i.e., 90% in 6thsemester (Industrial

Training)
ii) Should have completed the Industrial Training
iii) Should have submitted Industrial Training assessment report.
(c) In case a candidate does not successfully complete the Industrial training, he / she
will have to repeat the training at his / her own cost.
14
Promotion rules for C-18
S From To Cumulative
Attendance Remarks
No. Sem Sem Credits
75%
1 I II -
(65% on medical grounds)
Cumulative credits are
2 II III -do- 25
applicable from the
3 III IV -do- 25
A.Y. 2021-22 onwards
4 IV V -do- 75
5 V VI -do- 75
Note: Ineligible candidates are not permitted to next higher semester classwork till he/she
fulfills the above eligibility criteria.
Promotion rules for C-18 (IVC)
From To Cumulative
S No. Attendance Remarks
Sem Sem Credits
75% (65% IVC candidates should be
1 III IV on medical - allotted 50 credits during
grounds) admission into 3rd semester
2 IV V -do- 75 From A.Y. 2021-22
3 V VI -do- 75 -do-
Note: Ineligible candidates are not permitted to next higher semester classwork till he/she
fulfills the above eligibility criteria.
4.1 EXAMINATION FEE SCHEDULE:

The examination fee should be paid as per the notification issued by State Board of
Technical Education and Training from time to time.
4.2 ISSUE OF GRADE CARD:

All candidates who appear for the end examination will be issued Grade Card without any
payment of fee. However, candidates who lose the original Grade Card have to pay the
prescribed fee to the Secretary, State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana
for each duplicate Grade Card.
4.3 MAXIMUM PERIOD FOR COMPLETION OF DIPLOMA COURSES:
Maximum period for completion of the course is twice the prescribed duration of the course
from the date of First admission (includes the period of detention and discontinuation of
studies by student etc) failing which they will have to forfeit the claim for qualifying for the
award of Diploma. (They will not be permitted to appear for examinations after that date).
This rule applies for all Diploma courses of 3 years of engineering and non-engineering
15
courses including candidates seek admission under lateral entry. In respect of Pharmacy
courses the completion period s 4 years as the prescribed duration of the course is 2
years.
4.4 ELIGIBILITY FOR AWARD OF DIPLOMA
A candidate is eligible for award of Diploma Certificate if he / she fulfill the following
academic regulations.
i. He / She pursued a course of study for not less than 3 academic years & not more than 6 academic
years.
ii. He / she should have earned 130 credits out of 150 credits.
Students who fail to fulfill all the academic requirements for the award of the Diploma
within 6 academic years from the year of admission shall forfeit their seat in the course &
their seat shall stand cancelled.
4.5 RE-VALUATION / ISSUE OF PHOTO COPY:
4.5.1 a) As per the SBTET notification.
A candidate desirous of applying for Revaluation / issue of Photocopy of valued answer
scripts should submit the application online to the Secretary, State Board of Technical Education
and Training, Telangana., Hyderabad – 500 063 as per the notification issued for Revaluation /issue
of Photo copy of answer Script.
4.5.2 MALPRACTICE CASES:

If any candidate resorts to any Mal Practice during examinations, he / she shall be booked
and the Punishment shall be awarded as per rules and regulations framed by SBTET,TS
from time to time.
4.5.3 DISCREPANCIES/PLEAS:
Any Discrepancy regarding results etc., shall be represented to the Board within one month
from the date of issue of results. Thereafter, no such cases shall be entertained in any
manner.
4.6 EQUIVALENCE:
In general there is no equivalency of CGPA and marks percentage:
However : 60% is insisted a CGPA of 6.50
55% is insisted a CGPA of 6.00
50% is insisted a CGPA of 5.50
16
With respect to the intermediate vocational candidates, who are admitted directly into
diploma course at the 3rdsemester (i.e., second year) level, the CGPA over 4 semesters shall
alone be taken into consideration for award of Diploma.
5 ISSUE OF CERTIFICATES :
5.1 ISSUE OF DUPLICATE DIPLOMA:
If the candidate desires for a duplicate certificate of Diploma, he/she may obtain on payment
of prescribed fee, duly following the procedure.
5.2 ISSUE OF MIGRATION CERTIFICATE AND TRANSCRIPTS:
The Board on payment of prescribed fee will issue these certificates for the candidates who
intend to pursue Higher Studies in India or Abroad.
5.3 GENERAL
i. The Board may change or amend the academic rules and regulations or syllabi at any time
and the changes or amendments made shall be applicable to all the students, for whom it is
intended, with effect from the dates notified by the competent authority.
ii. All legal matters pertaining to the State Board of Technical Education and Training are
within the jurisdiction of Hyderabad.
iii. In case of any ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules, the decision of the
Secretary, SBTET (TS) is final
17
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME
I Semester
Sl Course Course Name Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
N Code
Instruction Total Credits Continuous internal Semester end examination
o
periodsp Periods evaluation
er week per
semest
er
L T P Mid Mid Internal Max Min Total Min marks
sem1 sem evaluatio Marks Marks Marks for Passing
2 n including
internal
18C- Basic English

1 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
101F
Basic Engineering
18C-
2 Mathematics 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
102F
18C Basic Physics
3 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
103F
General Engineering
18C- Chemistry
4 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
104F
18C- Basic Surveying

5 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
105C
Basic Engineering
18C-
6 Drawing 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
106P
18C- Basic Computer Aided
7 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
107P Drafting
Basic Surveying Lab
18C-
8 Practice 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
108P
18C-
Basic Science Lab
9 109P- 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
Practice
A+B
Computer fundamentals
18C- Lab Practice
10 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
110P
11 Skill Upgradation 0 0 7 105 2.5 0 0 Rubrics -- -
20 5 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 170 1000 425

Activities: student performance is to be assessed through Rubrics
18
Basic English
Course Title :Basic English Course Code : 18C-101F
Semester : I Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P:) : Credits :3
45:15:00
Methodology : Communicative Language Total Contact Periods : 60 periods
: Lecture + Tutorial
CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks
Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of English Language
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, the students will have the ability to:
101.1 communicate effectively, express their likes, dislikes and feelings and
make requests
101.2 listen and reciprocate appropriately
101.3 use a dictionary and acquire vocabulary for social interaction
101.4 speak and write grammatically correct sentences
101.5 analyse and evaluate the written material
101.6 convey ideas in the form of paragraphs and letters
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – 1: SPEAKING Duration: 12 Periods

1. Need For English
2. Classroom English
3. Expressing Feelings
4. Expressing Likes & Dislikes
5. Making Requests
UNIT - 2: LISTENING Duration: 6 Periods
6. Describing Words
UNIT –3: VOCABULARY Duration: 8 Periods
7. How to use a Dictionary

8. Words Often Confused
UNIT -4 : GRAMMAR Duration: 16 Periods
9. Tenses
10. Basic Sentence Structures
19
11. Voice
12. Asking Questions
UNIT - 5: READING Duration: 6 Periods

9. The Mighty Mountain and Little Lads of Telangana
10. The Adventures of Toto
11. Tiller turns Engineer - An Innovation
UNIT- 6: WRITINGDuration: 12 Periods
16. Paragraph Writing - I

17. Paragraph Writing - II
18. Letter Writing – I
19. Letter Writing – II
Suggested Learning Outcomes:
On completion of the course the students will be able to

 express feelings, likes and dislikes and make requests.
 communicate fluently.
 use dictionary
 use describing words and distinguish between confusing words.
 read, comprehend and answer the questions.
 use appropriate tenses, voices, structures and ask questions.
 write paragraphs and letters.
Internal evaluation
Test Units Marks Pattern
Mid Sem 1 Speaking Part A 4short answer questions
Listening 20 Part B 2 short essay questions with internal
choice
Part C 2 essay questions with internal choice
Mid Sem 2 Vocabulary Part A 4short answer questions
Grammar 20 Part B 2 shortessay questions with internal
choice
Slip Test 1 Speaking 5 2 questions out of 3 questions
Listening
Slip Test 2 Vocabulary 5 2 questions out of 3 questions

Grammar
20
Assignment One assignment per one 5 Different group assignments of higher order
semester questions that develop problem solving skills
and critical thinking should be given
Seminars One seminar per one 5 Oral presentations using audio –visual
semester equipment, charts, etc.
Total 60
Suggested Student Activities

 Setting short term goals for learning English
 Identifying the suitable solutions for the skill gap
 Listen to a passage/conversations/dialogues/speeches and answer the questions
 Self introduction
 Talking about routines
 Talking about one’s emotions
 Debates
 Elocution
 Role Plays
 Quiz
 Reading a selected text/news paper for specific purpose
 Reading aloud with proper pronunciation and intonation
 Describing people
 Describing places
 Describing events
 Creating Advertisements
 Selling a product with appropriate vocabulary
 Interpreting advertisements
 Writing short messages
 Writing a bio note / paragraph / letter
 How to use translate using Google application
 Using a dictionary
 Vocabulary games
Textbook: English for Polytechnics

(English Textbook for First-Year Diploma Students)
REFERENCES:
1. Practical English Grammar by A.J Thomson and A.V. Martinet
2. A Course in Phonetics and Spoken English by J. Sethi and P.V Dhamija
21
3. Word Power Made Easy by Norman Lewis
4. Games for Language Learning by Andrew Wright, David Betteridge and Michael Buckby
5. Five Minute Activities by Penny Ur
6. English Dialogues by M. Martin
e-learning:
1.www.duolingo.com
2. www.bbc.co.uk
3. www.babbel.com
4. www.merriam-webster.com
5. www.ello.org
6. www.lang-8.com
7. youtube.com
8. Hello English(app)
9. mooc.org
10. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in
CO-PO Matrix
CO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 Mapping POs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
101.1 2 1 1 - - 2 - 3 3 3 1,2,3,6,8,9,10
101.2 2 2 -- 2 -- 2 -- 3 3 3 1,2,4,6,8,9,10
101.3 2 2 -- -- 1 1 2 3 3 3 1,2,5,6,7,8,9,10
101.4 2 2 2 -- 2 1 2 3 3 3 1,2,3,5,6,7,8,9,10
101.5 2 2 -- -- 2 -- 2 3 3 3 1,2,5,6,7,8,9,10
101.6 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- 3 3 3 1,2,8,9,10
22
MID SEM-I EXAM
S.No Unit Name R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Questions to be set for SEE Remarks
Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
Remembering (R) 1 Mark

Legend: Understanding (U) 3 Marks
23
Application (A) 5 Marks
24
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION (C-18)
FIRST SEMESTER C-101F
BASIC ENGLISH
Mid Sem -I
Time : 1 Hour Total Marks: 20 Marks
PART - A 1X4= 4
Instructions: Answer all thequestions. Each carriesone mark.
1. Rewrite the following as requests.
a. Pass the milk.
b. Give me your cell.
2. Write your feelings in the given situations.
a. Your mother scolded you.
b. Your friends gave you a surprise party.
3. Describe your classroom in a couple of sentences.
4. Fill in the blanks with the suitable describing words.
My friend is ________. She bought a _______ house.
(dirty, clever, rich, fat, intelligent, big)
PART-B 2 X 3=6
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks
5. a.) What are the advantages of learning English?
(Or)
b). Write three situations in which you feel the following emotions.
i. Anger ii. Jealousy iii. Worry
6. a) Identify the describing words in the following sentences.
Harry Potter series is very interesting and popular. He is very sensitive and brave.
The author was once poor. But now she has become rich.
(Or)
b) Fill in the blanks with the appropriate words of description given below in brackets.
25
The Sun was shining brightly. It was a ___ day. The sky was ___. There were no clouds in
the sky. A __ girl came out of her house. She was very ___. Suddenly a ___ cloud loomed
over. There was ___ rain.
( large, dark, pretty, young, sunny, clear, heavy. silly)
PART-C 2 X 5 = 10
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks.
7 a) Mention any five problems you faced in learning English?
(Or)
b) Write any five expressions used by the teacher in the classroom.

8 a). Describe your friend using appropriate describing words.
(Or)
b) Use the following words and write a paragraph on your town.
(spacious, big, beautiful, narrow, clean, dirty, wide, small, tall, polluted)
26
FIRST SEMESTER COMMON-101F
BASIC ENGLISH
Mid Sem -II
PART - A 1X4= 4
Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question carries one mark.
1. Use the following pair of homonyms in your own sentences to bring out the difference in
meaning.
a. Watch
b. Watch
2. Write any three basic uses of a dictionary?
a. He always ____ (visit) his parents on Sunday.

b. She ___(be) late yesterday.
3.Change the voice.

a. Cats chase mice.
b. The wires were cut by him.
4. Change the following into yes/no questions.
a. Satish likes sweets.

b. Desserts are hot.
PART – B 2X3=6
5a). Write about different kinds of dictionaries.

(Or)
b). Fill in the blanks with the appropriate homophones given below in brackets.
I tell _______(stories, storeys) to my friends. My hobby is to tell _______( tales, tails) with
animal characters in them. _______ (Two, Too) of my friends like to listen to my stories
27
always.I told them a story about a ______(bear, bare). I bought it for them at a _______ (fair,
fare). Ibecame very _______(week, weak) as I suffered from fever.
6 a). Frame three ‘wh-’ questions for the following passage.
One of the most famous monuments in the world, the Statue of Liberty was presented
to the U.S.A.by the people of France. It took ten years to complete it. It was made ofcopper
with a metal frame to support it. The sculptor Auguste Bartholdi made it.
(Or)
b). Change the voice.
a. He plays hockey.
b. The novel had been written by him.
c. We will be helped by them.
PART-C 2 X 5 = 10
7a). How will you locate a word in a dictionary?
(Or)
b). Write the following pairs of words in your own sentences.
i. Son, Sun
ii. Live, Live
iii. Hair, Hare
iv. Meet, Meat
v. Air, Heir
8a). Write five sentences about your childhood using past tense.
(Or)
b). Write one sentence each for the given structures.
i. S.V.
ii. S.V.O.
iii. S.V.SC.
iv. S.V.O.OC.
v. S.V.IO.DO.
28
FIRST SEMESTER COMMON-101F
BASIC ENGLISH
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
Time: 2 Hours Total Marks: 40
PART – A 8 X 1 = 08
Instructions: 1. Answer all the questions.
2. Each question carries one mark.
1. Fill the blanks with suitable expressions of feelings:
a) I feel _________ when I get a first class in diploma first semester.
b) The teacher was ________ with me when I was late to class.
2. Use raise and rise in your own sentences.
3. Write at least four supporting sentences for the following topic sentence:
I want to become an engineer.
4. Write one sentence each for the following structures:
a. S V IO DO
b. S V SC
5. Read the following passage and answer the questions that follow:
Communication is the process of transmitting ideas from a human communicator to a
human communicate, directly or through a medium. Technical communication, which
is concerned with the transmission of technical information, uses a variety of
graphics, such as charts, diagrams, pictures and tables to illustrate the information
presented in a language. Every illustration communicates facts clearly, concisely,
attractively and accurately. A technician should shape his ideas into language as well
as graphics. It must also be possible for a technician to convert the ideas available in
the form of language into graphics and vice versa.
a) What is technical communication concerned with?
b) Why does technical communication use graphics?
6. Read the above paragraph and answer the following questions:
a) How should the technician develop his ability of communication?
b) Suggest a suitable title for the passage.
7. Write any three complimentary closures used in official letters.
29
8. Write a short paragraph on your long term goal.
PART- B 4 X 3 = 12
Instructions: 1. Answer the following questions.

2. Each question carries three marks.
9 a. Write any five expressions used by your teacher in classroom.
(or)
b). Read the following paragraph and answer the questions that follow:
JalagamVengal Rao open caste mine is located in Sathupally in Khammam district.
When coal deposits were discovered in Sathupally, it was tested by its owners –
Singareni Collieries Company Limited, to determine the quality. Surveys showed that
coal available underneath Sathupally area would last for about 50 years.
The farmers who had to leave their lands were compensated with lands
elsewhere and some of them were given jobs in mines. Open cast mining started at
Sathupally in 2005.
Almost all the work at this mine are done using machines such as bulldozers,
motor graders, shovels, drills, water sprinklers, tipper trucks, dumpers and different
trucks which can carry heavy loads of coal. Shovel and bulldozers are first used to
remove top soil or overburden and rocks. Then a series of benches are made (benches
are vertical sections of a mine from where the coal or overburden is removed). Roads
have been laid in the mining area all the way down to the bottom of the mine, connecting
all the benches. Over burden and waste rocks are removed from sides of benches by
blasting. Coal blasted in benches is then lifted using shovels and dumpers and
transported through tipper trucks. Coal is transported to the coal handling plant and
through railway wagons to power plants, cement factories and other industries. Every
day, about 10,000 tonnes of coal is mined and transported from JVR Open Cast Mine.
Questions:
a) Where is JalagamVengal Rao Open Cast Mine located?
b) Why were the farmers compensated with land or given jobs in mines?
c) What is a bench in a coal mine?
10 a). Rewrite the following sentences changing the voice.
a) I was helped by her.
30
b) She cleaned the house.
c) Windows have been painted by Ramesh.
(or)
b) Write a letter to your principal requesting him to issue a duplicate hall ticket.
11 a). Read the following paragraph and answer the questions that follow:
Subhash Chandra Bose was born on 23 January 1897 in Cuttack, Orissa. He studied
in Cuttack and then moved to Presidency College in Calcutta for further studies. He did his
B.A. in Philosophy and went to England to appear for the Civil Services examination
Although he did well in the exam he soon resigned from the services because it meant
working against the interests of his country. .He returned to India and started a newspaper
called Swaraj. His mentor Chittaranjan Das was active and open in his criticism of British
rule.Bose followed his footsteps and was arrested and sent to prison in Mandalay. He joined
the Indian National Congress. Later he parted ways with the Congress. He revived the Indian
National Army. He is believed to have coined the slogan Jai Hind.
Questions:
a) What was ChittaranjanDas's attitude towards the British?
b) How did Bose fight against the British?
c) Why did Bose resign from the Civil Services?
(or)
b) Read the following paragraph and answer the questions that follow:
What influenced Asuthosh most was the company of the brilliant friends of his father.
They were eminent men in their several walks of life, and they fired the boy’s ambition. He
was especially impressed by Mr. Justice Dwarka Nath Mitter who often visited their house.
In his heart he wanted to emulate him in all ways. Thus at a very early age Asutosh formed
the ambition of being a judge of the Calcutta High Court. He also wanted to be a scholar and
win the PremchandRoychand Studentship which is held to be the most coveted academic
distinction in Bengal. It will be seen later how he was able to realize both his ambitions.
But he had to cut his studies short because he fell seriously ill. The doctors said that he
suffered from palpitation of the heart and advised him to have a complete rest and change.
His father sent him to Muttra for a holiday. The change had a very beneficial effect on him,
for Muttra had a fine climate and beautiful scenery, and Autosh returned fully restored in
health and sprits.
31
Mathematics attracted Asutosh most, and he came to be looked upon as a prodigy in this
subject. One day one of his teachers thought of testing his ability in mathematics and set the
class very difficult problem. All the other students looked blank on reading the problem, but
not so Asutosh. He solved it correctly in a few minutes and showed it to the teacher, who
was amazed at the evidence of his ability. As time went on he developed much originality in
solving other mathematical problems.
Questions:
a) What was Asutosh’s ambition?

b) What did he want to win?
c) Why did doctors advise him to take rest?
12 a). Write a paragraph using the hints given below.

Library in our polytechnic – a big hall – several tables and chairs – newspapers –
journals – visiting hours – two computers with internet – three cards to each student –
20000 books – many reference books
(or)
b). Write a letter to your friend describing your first day in your institute.
PART-C 4 X5 = 20
Instructions: 1. Answer the following questions.
2. Each question carries five marks
13 a). List any five problems you face in learning English and suggest solutions.
(or)
b). Read the following paragraph and answer the question given below it.
In1920, the Congress meeting was held at Nagpur under the leadership of Gandhiji.
It was attended by 15000 delegates and the Congress Constitution was amended and
resolutions were taken to fight for Swaraj by nonviolent methods and undo the injustice
done to Punjab and Turkey.
This movement was called Non-Cooperation Movement. Renunciation of

honorary titles like ‘Sir’ given by British, boycott of legislatures, schools and colleges,
courts, tendering resignation to government jobs nonpayment of taxes to government
were the important programmes of this movement. Gandhi returned his Kaiser-i-Hind
32
title in August, 1920. There were strikes, hartals and burning of foreign goods all over
the country. Many Indians were killed in firings and many others were jailed.
In Kerala, a rebellion broke out by Mophlah peasants and it was suppressed
brutally. Though Gandhiji warned the people many times not to resort to violent
methods, on 5th February, 1922 in Chauri-Chaura in Uttar Pradesh people resorted to
violence. When policemen opened fire on peaceful demonstrations, the angry people set
ablaze the police station and 22 policemen were killed. Gandhiji stopped the movement
because it lost its nonviolent nature. On 10th March, 1922 Gandhiji was arrested for six
years.
Questions:
a) What resolutions were taken at the Congress meeting held at Nagpur?
b) Why was the movement called Non-Cooperation Movement?
c) Why did Gandhiji return his Kaiser-i-Hind title?
d) Why did people set ablaze the police station at Chauri-Chaura?
e) Why did Gandhiji stop the movement?
14 a). Write the basic uses of a dictionary.
(or)
b). Write a letter to the Principal of your institute requesting him to provide you admission
into hostel.
15 a). Read the passage given and answer the questions.
It was way back in 1972 that NASA began developing a space shuttle that could
launch like a rocket but fly and land like an airplane—a unique transportation system for
deploying satellites and payloads into outer space. It was indeed a technological wonder as it
was reusable unlike the earlier , one shot disposable rockets, which were used to place
astronauts and equipment into the Earth's orbit. Basically , a space shuttle consists of an
orbiter that carries astronauts and payload attached to solid rocket boosters and an external
fuel tank.To lift the space shuttle , weighing about 2 million kg, from the launch pad to its
orbit that is about 185 to 643 km above the Earth , the shuttle uses two poweful solid rocket
boosters, which provide a thrust of about 11.7 million N. In addition the SRB's support the
entire weight of the space shuttle orbiter and fuel tank on the launch pad.
33
Questions:
a) Why is the space shuttle unique?
b) What are the parts of the space shuttle?
c) What are the functions of the solid rocket boosters?
d) What is the space shuttle used for?
e) Find one word in the passage that means throw away after use.
(or)
b). Read the following paragraph and answer the questions given below it.
Another important environmental movement is the Chipko Movement which started
in the early 1970s in the Garhwal Himalayas of Uttarakhand by Sunderlal Bahuguna. Like
the tribal people of Narmada valley, the forests are a critical resource for the subsistence of
people in hilly and mountainous areas. This is both because of their direct provision of food,
fuel and fodder and because of their role in the stabilizing soil and water resources. As these
forests were being increasingly felled for commerce and industry, villagers sought to protect
their livelihoods through non-violent resistance. The name of the movement comes from the
word ‘chipko’ meaning ‘embrace’: the villagers hugged the trees, saving them by interposing
their bodies between them and the contractors’ axes. Village women were the main force of
this movement. It inspired many people to look closely at the issue of environment
sustainability.
Questions:
1. Where was Chipko movement started?
2. Why did the villagers want to protect the trees?
3. How did the villagers protect the trees?
4. What is the synonym of the word, ‘important’?
5. What do you think of this movement?
16 a). Write a letter to your uncle about your plan to visit his place during summer.
(or)
b). Write a paragraph in 150 words about the importance of following traffic rules.
34
BASIC ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
Course Title : BASIC ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS Course Code : 18C-102F

SEMESTER : I Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme in periods ( L : T : P ) : 45 :15: Credits : 3 Credits
00
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorial Total Contact Periods : 60
Programme : Common to all Engineering Diploma Programmes
Pre requisites :
This course requires the basic knowledge of Algebra, Trigonometry in Mathematics at Secondary
school level
Course Outcomes: COs
At the end of the course, the student will have the ability to:
CO 1 Solve the problems on Logarithms

CO 2 Resolve a given fraction into Partial Fractions
CO 3 Find the Sum, Product of Matrices, Value of the determinant and Inverse of a Matrix .
CO 4 Solve simple problems using concepts of Trigonometric Functions
CO 5 Solve simultaneous Linear Equations using Matrices and Determinants
CO 6 Solve a Triangle and an Inverse Trigonometric Equation.
Course Content:
Algebra
Unit-I Duration: 06 Periods (L: 4.5 – T: 1.5)
1. Logarithms:
Definition of logarithm and its properties, natural and common logarithms; the meaning of e and
exponential function, logarithm as a function and its graphical representation – Solve some simple
problems.
2. Partial Fractions:
Rational, proper and improper fractions of polynomials. Resolving rational fractions in to their
partial fractions covering the types mentioned below:
f ( x) f ( x)
i) ii) 2
( x  a )( x  b)( x  c ) ( x  a ) ( x  b)( x  c)
f ( x) f ( x)
iii ) 2
iv)
( x  a)( x  b) ( x  a)( x 2  b) 2
35
Unit – II Duration: 12Periods (L: 9.0 – T:3.0)
3. Matrices and Determinants: Definition of matrix, types of matrices-examples, algebra of
matrices-equality of two matrices, sum, difference, scalar multiplication and product of matrices.
Transpose of a Matrix- Symmetric, Skew symmetric matrices- Minor, cofactor of an element-
Determinant of a square matrix up to 3rd order -Laplace’s expansion, properties of determinants.
Singular and non-singular matrices-Adjoint and multiplicative inverse of a square matrix –related
problems.
Trigonometry:
Unit-III Duration: 12Periods (L: 9.0 – T:3.0)
4. Compound angles: Formulae of Sin (A±B), Cos (A±B), Tan (A±B), Cot(A±B), and related
identities with problems - Derive the values of sin15 0, cos150 , sin750 , cos750 , tan 150 , tan750
etc.-Derive identities like sin(A+B) sin(A-B) = sin 2 A –sin2 B etc.,
5. Multiple and sub multiple angles: Trigonometric ratios of multiple angles 2A,3A and
submultiples angle A/2 with problems - Derive useful allied formulas like
sin 2 A= ( 1−cos2 2 A ) etc., - Solve simple problems using the above formulae
Unit – IV Duration: 08Periods (L: 6.0 – T: 2.0)
6. Properties of triangles: Statements of Sine rule, Cosine rule, Tangent rule and Projection rule
7. Hyperbolic functions: Definitions of hyperbolic functions – Sinh(x), cosh(x) ,tanh(x) etc., -

identities of hyperbolic functions, inverse hyperbolic functions and expression of inverse
hyperbolic functions in terms of logarithms.
8. Complex Numbers: Definition of a complex number, Modulus and conjugate of a complex

number, Arithmetic operations on complex numbers, Modulus- Amplitude (polar) form,
Exponential (Euler) form of a complex number.
Algebra & Trigonometry
Unit – V Duration: 12Periods (L: 9.0 – T: 3.0)
9. Transformations: Transformation of products into sums or differences and vice versa -

Simple problems - Solve problems by applying these formulae to sum or difference or product of
three or more terms.
36
10 Inverse trigonometric functions: Define inverses of six trigonometric functions along with
their domains and ranges - Derive relations between inverse trigonometric functions so
that given A=sin-1x, express angle A in terms of other inverse trigonometric functions -
with examples - State various properties of inverse trigonometric functions and identities

like sin-1x+cos-1 x = 2 etc - Derive formulae like
x+ y
tan−1 x + tan−1 y=tan−1 ( 1−xy ) where x ≥ 0 , y ≥ 0 , xy <1 etc., and solve simple
problems.
Unit – VI Duration: 10Periods (L:7.5 – T:2.5)
11.Solution of Simultaneous equations using Matrices & Determinants.: System of linear

equations in 3 Variables-Solutions by Cramer’s rule, Matrix inversion method – Examples-
Elementary row operations on Matrices -Gauss-Jordan method to solve a system of equations
in 3 unknowns.
12. Solutions of triangles: Solve a triangle when (i) three sides (SSS) (ii) two sides and an
Included angle (SAS) (iii) one side and two angles are given (SAA) - Simple problems.
References
1. Text Book of Matrices – by Shanti Narayan
2. Plane Trigonometry - by S.L.Loney
3. NCERT Mathematics Text Books Of ClassXI, XII .
4. Intermediate Mathematics Text Books (TeluguAcademy)
Suggested E-Learning references
1. www.freebookcentre.net/mathematics/introductory-mathematics-books.html
2. E-books:www.mathebook.net
Suggested Learning Outcomes
Algebra
UNIT – I
1.0 Use Logarithms in engineering calculations
37
1.1 Define logarithm and list its properties.
1.2 Distinguish natural logarithms and common logarithms.
1.3 Explain the meaning of e and exponential function.
1.4 State logarithm as a function and its graphical representation.
1.5 Use the logarithms in engineering calculations.
2.0 Resolve Rational Fraction into sum of Partial Fractions in engineering problems
2.1 Define the following fractions of polynomials:
1. Rational
2. Proper and
3. Improper
2.2 Explain the procedure of resolving rational fractions of the type mentioned below into
partial fractions
f ( x) f ( x)
i) ii ) 2
( x  a)( x  b)( x  c) ( x  a ) ( x  b)( x  c)
f ( x) f ( x)
iii ) 2
iv )
( x  a )( x  b) ( x  a )( x 2  b) 2
UNIT – II
3.0 Use Matrices for solving engineering problems

3.1 Define a matrix and order of a matrix.
3.2 State various types of matrices with examples (emphasis on 3 rd order square matrices).
3.3 Compute sum, difference, scalar multiplication and product of matrices.
3.4 Illustrate the properties of these operations such as associative, distributive, commutative
properties with examples and counter examples.
3.5 Define the transpose of a matrix and write its properties.
3.6 Define symmetric and skew-symmetric matrices.
3.7 Resolve a square matrix into a sum of symmetric and skew- symmetric matrices with
examples in all cases.
3.8 Define minor, co-factor of an element of a 3x3 square matrix with examples.
3.9 Expand the determinant of a 3 x 3 matrix using Laplace expansion formula.
3.10 Distinguish singular and non-singular matrices.
3.11 Apply the properties of determinants to solve problems.
3.12 Define multiplicative inverse of a matrix and list properties of adjoint and inverse.
3.13 Compute adjoint and multiplicative inverse of a square matrix.
Trigonometry:
UNIT – III
38
4.0 Solve simple problems on Compound Angles
4.1 Define compound angles and state the formulae of sin(A±B), cos(A±B), tan(A±B) and
cot(A±B)
4.2 Give simple examples on compound angles to derive the values of sin15 0, cos150 , sin750 ,
cos750 , tan 150 , tan750 etc.
4.3 Derive identities like sin(A+B) sin(A-B) = sin 2 A –sin2B etc.,
4.4 Solve simple problems on compound angles.
5.0 Solve problems using the formulae for Multiple and Sub- Multiple Angles
5.1 Derive the formulae of multiple angles 2A, 3A etc and sub multiple angles A/2 in terms of
angle A of trigonometric functions.
5.2 Derive useful allied formulas like sin A= (1- cos2A)/2 etc.,
5.3 Solve simple problems using the above formulae
UNIT – IV
6.0 Appreciate Properties of triangles

6.1 State sine rule, cosine rule, tangent rule and projection rule.
7.0 Represent the Hyperbolic Functions in terms of logarithm functions
7.1 Define Sinh x, cosh x and tanh x and list the hyperbolic identities.
7.2 Represent inverse hyperbolic functions in terms of logarithms.
8.0 Represent Complex numbers in various forms
8.1 Define complex number, its modulus, and conjugate and list their properties.
8.2 Define the operations on complex numbers with examples.
8.3 Define amplitude of a complex number
8.4 Represent the complex number in various forms like modulus-amplitude (polar) form,
Exponential (Euler) form – illustrate with examples.
UNIT – V
9.0 Apply Transformations for solving the problems in Trigonometry

9.1 Derive the formulae on transforming sum or difference of two trigonometric ratios in to a
product and vice versa- examples on these formulae.
9.2 Solve problems by applying these formulae to sum or difference or product of three or
more terms.
10.0 Use Inverse Trigonometric Functions for solving engineering problems
10.1 Explain the concept of the inverse of a trigonometric function by selecting an appropriate
domain and range.
39
10.2 Define inverses of six trigonometric functions along with their domains and ranges.
10.3 Derive relations between inverse trigonometric functions so that given A= sin -1x, express
angle A in terms of other inverse trigonometric functions - with examples.
10.4 State various properties of inverse trigonometric functions and identities like sin -

1
x+cos-1 x = 2 etc.
10.5 Derive formulae like

tan
1
x  tan
1
y  tan
1
 
x y
1  xy
, where x  0, y  0, xy  1
etc., and solve simple problems.
UNIT – VI
11.0 Apply Matrices and Determinants in solving system of Linear Equations
11.1 Solve system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns using Cramer’s rule.

11.2 Solve system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns by matrix inversion method
11.3 State elementary row operations.
11.4 Solve a system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns by Gauss- Jordan method
12.0 Apply Properties of Triangles to solve a triangle.

12.1 Solve a triangle when (i) three sides (SSS), (ii) two sides and an included angle(SAS),
(iii) one side and two angles are given(SAA).
1. Student visits Library to refer Standard Books on Mathematics and collect related material.
2. Quiz
3. Group discussion
4. Surprise tests
5. Seminars
6. Home Assignments.
CO / PO - MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 Mapped POs
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
40
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
MID SEM-I EXAM

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
5 V 4 5, 6
11(a) 15(a)

3 11(b) 15(b)
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)

41
Code: C18-Common-102F
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING, TELANGANA
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS
MID SEM –I, MODEL PAPER, I SEMESTER
TIME: 1: 00 Hour Max. Marks: 20
PART-A
Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions 04 X 01 = 04
2 Each question carries ONE mark
1. Find the value of

log8 2
2. Define Proper fraction and give an example.
[ 1 2¿]¿¿¿
3. If A= ¿ Compute 3A+ 5B.
4. Find the value of |13 24| .
PART-B
Instructions: 1. Answer any TWO questions 02 X 03 = 06
2. Each question carries THREE marks
x
5(a) Resolve: in to partial fractions
( x−1 ) (x−2)
Or
+ 3log 8 32
5(b) Find the value of log 2 16
2 1 2
6 (a) If
( )
1 4 1 , then Compute A2 +2 A−3 I , where I is a unit matrix of order 3 .
1 3 2
Or
1 0 0
6 (b) Find x , if
| 2 3 4 =48
5 −6 x |
42
43
PART C
Instructions: 1. Answer any two questions 2X 05 = 10
2. Each question carries FIVE marks
9
Resolve into Partial fractions: ( x  1)( x  2)
2
7 a).
Or
75 5 32
7b) . Prove that log −2 log +log =log 2
60 9 243
1 1 2 2
8 a). If A=
3[ ] −1
2 1 −2 , then show that A = A
−2 2 −1
T
Or
b +c a a
8 b). Show that b
c |
c +a
c
b =4 abc .
a+ b |
@@@
44
MID SEM –II, MODEL PAPER, I SEMESTER
TIME: 1: 00 Hour Max. Marks: 20
PART-A
1. Write the formulae for Sin (A - B) and Cos (A – B)
2. If TanA = 2, Find the valueof Cos2A.
3. Write the formula for Cosine rule.
2
4. Find the Modulus of 3  2i
PART-B
cos 12+sin 12
5 a)Show that = Tan570
cos 12−sin 12
Or
√3
5 b)Prove that Cos200 Cos300 Cos400 Cos800 = 16 .
6 a) Write any 3 formulae from Hyperbolic functions.
Or
1
6 b) Find the modulus of z=
2+4 i
45
PART C
1 1 π
7a).If TanA= ∧TanB= then show that A +B=
2 3 4
Or
7 b) If A+ B=1350 ,then prove that ( 1+CotA ) ( 1+ CotB )=2
8 a) Find the additive and multiplicative Inverse of 4 + 3i
Or
1+i
8 b) Express the complex number in Exponential form
1−i
@@@
46
C18-common
SUB.CODE:102F
MODEL PAPER
I SEMESTER EXAMINATION

Time: 2 hours [Total Marks: 40]
PART-A
1. Define proper fraction.

2. Write the formula for cos ( A+ B ) ∧cot ( A + B ) .
3. Define solution of a triangle.
4. Find the value of log 4 16.
5. Convert cos 4 A+cos 6 A into product.
−1 3
6. Ifsin =A then find cotA.
5
7. List the elements of a triangle ABC.
8. What is the formula for the solution of triangle ABC when three sides are given
PART-B
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions 04 X 03 = 12
1
9 (a)Resolve: into partial fractions.
( x+1 ) ( x+ 3 )
Or
sin 8 A+sin 6 A
9(b). Prove that =tan 7 A
cos 8 A+cos 6 A
9
10(a). Express in the form of a+ib .
4+ 3i
Or
10(b)Solve the triangle ABC with a=2, A=300 , C=300 .
11(a)Prove thatsin 500−sin70 0+ sin10 0=0 .
47
Or
−1 2 1 17
11(b) Prove that tan +tan −1 =tan−1 .
7 5 33
12(a) Solve [ 32 −32 ][ xy ]=[ 47 ] .

Or
12 (b)Find the angle C in any triangle ABC if b=√ 2 ,c =√3 , B=450 .
PART C
1 2 2
13(a) Find the inverse of the matrix 2 1 2
2 2 1 [ ]
Or
13 (b)Prove that sinA +sin ( 1200 + A ) −sin ( 1200− A )=0
0 0 0 0 1
14 (a)Prove that cos 20 cos 40 cos 60 cos 80 = .
16
Or
14 (b)Solve x + y + z=6 , x+ 2 y +3 z=14 , x +4 y+ 9 z=3 by using Gauss Jordan methods.
15(a)In any triangle ABC prove that sin 2 A +sin 2 B+sin 2 C=4 sinAsinBsinC .
Or
15(b) if tan−1 x + tan−1 y+ tan −1 z=π then prove that x + y + z=xyz .
16(a)Solve x +2 y −z=−3 , 3 x+ y + z=4 , x− y +2 z=6 by Cramer’s Rule.
Or
16 (b) Solve the triangle ABC with a=1 b=2 c= √2.
@@@
48
Basic Physics
Course Title Basic Physics Course Code 18C-103F

Semester I Course Group Foundation
Teaching Scheme in 45:15:00 Credits 3
Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture+Tutorial Total Contact 60
Periods
CIE 60 Marks SEE 40 Marks
Pre requisites: Basic High School Science, Basic Mathematics
Course Objectives: After studying this course, the student will be able to understand and appreciate the
role of Physics in different areas of engineering and technology.
Course Outcomes: On successful completion of the course, the student will have the ability to attain
below Course Outcomes (CO):
Course Outcomes Linked POs Teaching

Periods
Write the correct units and dimensions of physical quantities and

CO 1 PO1,PO2 10
know the concept of friction
Apply knowledge of vectors as a tool to solve engineering
CO 2 PO1, PO2 10
problems
CO 3 Apply knowledge of mechanics to solve engineering problems PO1, PO2 10
Apply knowledge of properties of matter to understand
CO 4 PO1, PO2 10
engineering problems
Apply Heat and thermodynamic processes to solve engineering
CO 5 PO1, PO2 10
problems
Apply conservation laws to engineering problems and utilization PO1, PO2,
CO 6 10
of energy sources PO3,PO6
49
BASIC PHYSICS
Course Contents
1. UNIT – 1 UNITS, DIMENSIONS AND FRICTION

Duration: 10 periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)
Physical quantity - Fundamental and derived quantities – Unit –definitions - S.I units -
Advantages of S.I. units - Dimensions and dimensional formula - definitions-units and
dimensional formula for physical quantities - Principle of homogeneity - Applications of
dimensional analysis–Friction – causes - types of friction - Normal reaction - Laws of static
friction - coefficients of friction - expression-rough horizontal surface - expressions for
Acceleration, Displacement, Time taken to come to rest and Work done - Advantages and
disadvantages of friction - Methods to reduce friction – Problems on friction only.
2. UNIT – 2 ELEMENTS OF VECTORS Duration: 10 periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)

Scalar and vector quantities – definitions and examples –Graphical representation of a vector -
Classification of vectors (Proper vector, Unit vector, Equal vector, Negative vector, Collinear
vector and Position vector) Resolution of a vector - Triangle law of vector addition –
Parallelogram law of vectors – statement- expression for magnitude and direction of resultant
vector –derivation- illustrations (working of sling and flying bird) - Representation of a
vector in unit vectors i, j and k– Scalar product of vectors-definition- application to work
done by force – properties of scalar product - Vector product of vectors –definition – Right
hand thumb rule and right hand screw rule - application to moment of force - properties of
vector product - area of parallelogram and triangle in terms of vector product - related
problems
3. UNIT – 3 MECHANICS Duration: 10 periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)
Projectile motion – definition - examples - Horizontal projection – Time of flight and

Horizontal range – derivations - Oblique projection – Expression for path of a projectile in
oblique projection - derivation– Maximum height, Time of ascent, Time of descent, Time of
flight, Horizontal range and maximum horizontal range - derivations – Circular motion,
angular velocity, time period and frequency of revolutions–Definitions– Relation between
linear velocity and angular velocity - derivation–centripetal force – centrifugal force –
definitions and expressions only- application (banking of curved path) - angle of banking-
expression only - related problems
4. UNIT – 4 PROPERTIES OF MATTER Duration: 10 periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)
Elasticity and plasticity- definitions – examples - Stress and Strain – definitions and
expressions - elastic limit - Hooke’s law – statement - modulus of elasticity - Young’s
modulus – Derivation – Cohesive and adhesive forces - Surface tension - Illustrations -
Capillarity –angle of contact – definition- examples for capillarity- Formula for Surface
tension based on capillarity (no derivation) – Viscosity - Illustrations of viscosity - Newton’s
formula for viscous force – derivation - Coefficient of viscosity - Poiseuille’s equation -
Effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases– streamlines - laminar flow - turbulent
flow - Reynold’s number - equation of continuity – statement - related problems.
50
5. UNIT – 5 HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS
Heat – expansion of gases - Boyle’s law –concept of absolute zero - Absolute scale of
temperature – Charles’ laws - Ideal gas equation – derivation - value of universal gas
constant ‘R’ –Isothermal and Adiabatic processes - Differences between isothermal and
adiabatic processes - Internal energy and external work done – Expression for work done –
derivation – first law of thermodynamics –application of first law to isothermal and adiabatic
processes - second law of thermodynamics – specific heat of a gas – molar specific heat of a
gas – definitions – derive relation between CP and Cv- related problems.
6. UNIT – 6 CONSERVATION LAWS AND ENERGYSOURCES

Work and Energy - Potential Energy and kinetic energy–examples – expressions for PE and
KE - derivations - Work-Energy theorem – derivation – Law of conservation of energy –
examples - Law of conservation of energy in the case of freely falling body – proof –
Illustration of conservation of energy in the case of simple pendulum– Non renewable and
renewable energy sources – definition and applications (solar cooker, wind mill and biogas) –
Green house effect - related problems
References:
1. Engineering. Physics by R.K. Gaur, S.L. Gupta, Dhanpatrai Publications, New Delhi.
2. ISC Physics, Book I&II, P. Vivekanandan, DK Banerjee, S Chand, New Delhi.
3. Intermediate Physics, Vol. I&II, Telugu Academy, TS, Hyderabad.
4. Fundamentals of Physics by Halliday and Resnick.
Suggested learning outcomes:
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
1. know the concepts of units, dimensions and friction
1.1 Define Physical quantity, fundamental quantity and derived physical quantities
1.2 Define Unit.
1.3 S.I. Units. List the advantages of S.I. units.
1.4 Define dimensions and dimensional formula.
1.5 Write dimensional formulae of physical quantities.
1.6 State principle of homogeneity of dimensions.
1.7 State applications of dimensional analysis.
1.8 Define friction and state its causes.
1.9 State types of friction.
1.10 Explain normal reaction.
1.11 State laws of static friction.
1.12 Define coefficients of friction.
1.13 Derive expression for acceleration of a body moving on rough horizontal surface.
1.14 Derive expressions for displacement and time taken to come to rest and work done in the
case of a body moving on a rough horizontal surface.
1.15 List the advantages and disadvantages of friction.
1.16 Solve related numerical problems on friction only.
1.17 Explain the Methods to reduce friction.
51
2. know the concepts of Elements of Vectors
2.1 Define scalar and vector quantities with examples.

2.2 Represent a vector graphically.
2.3 Classify types of vectors – Proper vector, Unit vector, Equal vector, Negative vector,
Collinear vectors and Position vector.
2.4 Resolve a vector – Vector and Scalar components and relation between them.
2.5 State and explain Triangle law of vector addition.
2.6 State Parallelogram law of vectors – derive expressions for magnitude and direction of
resultant vector.
2.7 Illustrations of parallelogram law – working of sling and flying bird.
2.8 Representation of a vector in terms of unit vectors (i, j ,k)
2.9 Define Scalar product of vectors.
2.10 Application of scalar product for work done by force.
2.11 List the properties of scalar product.
2.12 Define Vector product of vectors.
2.13 Explain Right hand screw rule and right hand thumb rule.
2.14 Apply vector product in the case of moment of force.
2.15 Expressions for area of parallelogram and triangle in terms of cross product.
2.16 List the properties of vector product.
2.17 Solve related problems.
3. know the concepts of Mechanics
3.1 Define Projectile motion with examples.

3.2 Define Horizontal projection – Derive expressions for (a) Time of flight and (b)
Horizontal range
3.3 Define Oblique projection- Derive expression for path of a projectile in oblique projection.
3.4 Derive expressions for (a) Maximum height (b) Time of ascent (c) Time of descent
(d) Time of flight (e) Horizontal range and (f) maximum horizontal range in oblique
projection.
3.5 Define circular motion.
3.6 Define angular velocity, time period and frequency of revolutions in circular motion.
3.7 Derive the relation between linear velocity and angular velocity.
3.8 Define centripetal and centrifugal forces. Write their expressions.
3.9 Define angle of banking.
3.10 Explain banking of curved path and write the expression for angle of banking.
3.11 Solve related numerical problems.
4. know the concepts of Properties of matter
4.1 Define the terms Elasticity and Plasticity with examples.

4.2 Define Stress and Strain and write their expressions.
4.3 Define elastic limit and state Hooke’s law.
4.4 Define modulus of elasticity.
4.5 Define Young’s modulus.
4.6 Derive the formula for Young’s modulus.
4.7 Define cohesive force and adhesive force.
4.8 Define Surface tension. Give illustrations of Surface tension.
4.9 Define capillarity and angle of contact.
4.10 List the examples for capillarity.
4.11 Write the formula for Surface tension based on capillarity (T = ½ hdgr). Explain theterms.
4.12 Define Viscosity. Give illustrations of viscosity.
4.13 Derive Newton’s formula for viscous force.
4.14 Define coefficient of viscosity.
4.15 Write Poiseuille’s equation for coefficient of viscosity.
4.16 Discuss effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases.
52
4.17 Define streamline flow and turbulent flow.
4.18 Define Reynold’s number.
4.19 State equation of continuity and explain the terms with diagram.
4.19.1 Solve related problems.
5. know the concepts of Heat and Thermodynamics
5.1 Explain expansion of gases.

5.2 State and explain Boyle’s law. Mention its limitations.
5.3 Explain concept of absolute zero using the relations Pt=P0(1+t/273) and Vt= V0(1+ t/273)
5.4 Define Absolute scale of temperature.
5.5 State Charles’ laws in terms of absolute temperature.
5.6 Define Ideal gas and derive ideal gas equation.
5.7 Calculate the value of Universal gas constant (R).
5.8 State gas equation in terms of density.
5.9 Define Isothermal and Adiabatic processes.
5.10 Distinguish between isothermal and adiabatic processes.
5.11 Explain the terms internal energy and external work done.
5.12 Derive the expression for work done by the gas [W=P(V2-V1)].
5.13 State first law of thermodynamics.
5.14 Application of first law of thermodynamics to isothermal and adiabatic processes.
5.15 State second law of thermodynamics.
5.16 Define specific heat of a gas.
5.17 Define molar specific heat of a gas.
5.18 Derive the relation between CP, Cv and R.
5.19 Solve related problems
6. know the concepts of conservation laws and energy sources
6.1 Define work and energy.

6.2 Define potential energy and kinetic energy with examples.
6.3 Derive the expressions for Potential energy and Kinetic energy.
6.4 State and prove Work-Energy theorem.
6.5 State law of conservation of energy with example.
6.6 Prove law of conservation of energy in the case of a freely falling body.
6.7 Illustrate law of conservation of energy in the case of simple pendulum.
6.8 Define non renewable and renewable energy sources. Give examples.
6.9 Explain solar cooker, wind mill and biogas.
6.10 Explain briefly Green house effect.
53
MID SEM-I EXAM
S.N
Unit Name R U A Remarks
o
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
S.N
Unit Name R U A Remarks
o
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
54
55
C-18 COMMON-103F
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-18)

MIDSEM – I
FIRST SEMESTER EXAMINATION
BASIC PHYSICS
TIME: 1 Hour TOTAL MARKS: 20
Important Note: Wherever any question has choice, marks will be allotted only to first attempted
question. No marks will be allotted for extra questions answered
PART - A (4x1 = 4M)
Note: Answer ALL the questions. Each question carries 1 mark.

The length of the answer shall not exceed 1/4 of page
1. Define unit.
2. State principle of homogeneity.
3. Define vector quantity.
4. Define position vector.
PART- B (2 x 3 = 6M)
Note: Answer the following questions. Each question carries 3 marks.

The length of the answer shall not exceed 1 page
5 (a). State three laws of static friction.

(OR)
(b). State three applications of dimensional analysis.
6 (a). State and explain triangle law of vector addition.
(OR)
(b). State any three properties of scalar product of two vectors.
PART-C (2×5=10M)
Note: Answer the following questions. Each question carries 5 marks

The length of the answer shall not exceed 2 pages
7 (a). Derive the expression for acceleration of a body moving on rough horizontal surface.
(OR)
(b). Explain any five methods of reducing friction.
8 (a). Derive the expression for magnitude of resultant of two vectors using parallelogram
law of vectors.
(OR)
(b). Find the area of parallelogram formed by two vectors
A=2 i+3 ^j+5 k^ ∧⃗
⃗ ^ ^
B =2 i−3 ^j + k^ as two adjacent sides.
56
C-18 COMMON-103F

MIDSEM – II
BASIC PHYSICS
PART - A (4x1 = 4M)

1. Define projectile.
2. Define centripetal force.
3. Define stress.
4. Write the formula for surface tension based on capillarity.
PART- B (2 x 3 = 6M)

5 (a). A body is projected into air with velocity of 20 ms-1 at an angle 300 with the earth
surface. Find the maximum height reached.
(OR)
(b). Explain banking of curved path.
6 (a). Distinguish between Cohesive force and Adhesive force.

(OR)
(b). Discuss the effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases.
PART-C (2×5=10M)

7 (a). Derive the expression for path of a projectile in oblique projection.

(OR)
(b). Derive the relation between linear velocity and angular velocity.
8 (a). Derive the formula for Young’s modulus.
(OR)
(b). Derive Newton’s formula for viscous force.
57
C18 – COMMON 103F

MODEL PAPER
COMMON – I SEMESTER EXAMINATION
BASIC PHYSICS
Time: 2 Hours] [Total Marks: 40
PART – A
Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions. 8X1=8

2. Each question carries ONE mark.
1. Write dimensional formula of Pressure.

2. Define modulus of elasticity.
3. Define non renewable energy source.
4. Define absolute zero.
5. State Charles’ constant pressure law.
6. Define molar specific heat of a gas.
7. Define Energy.
8. What is basic principle of wind mill?
PART – B
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions. 4X3=12

2. Each question carries THREE marks.
9(a). State any three laws of friction.

(or)
9(b). State first law of thermodynamics and write mathematical expression for it.
10(a). Distinguish between streamline and turbulent flow.

(or)
10(b). Derive an expression for Potential energy.
11(a). Derive formula for work done by the ideal gas.

(or)
11(b). Calculate the value of universal gas constant ( R ).
12(a). Prove work-energy theorem.

(or)
12(b). Explain briefly Green house effect.
58
PART – C 4X5 = 20
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions.

2. Each question carries FIVE marks.
13(a). Derive expressions for magnitude and direction of resultant of two vectors using
Parallelogram law of vectors.
(or)
13(b). Show that Cp - Cv = R.
14(a). Show that the path of a projectile is a parabola in case of oblique projection.
(or)
14(b). Prove law of conservation of energy in the case of a freely falling body.
15(a). Derive Ideal gas equation PV=RT

(or)
15(b). Distinguish between Isothermal and adiabatic processes.
16(a). Derive an expression for kinetic energy.

(or)
16(b). Explain solar cooker with neat diagram
** *** ***
59
General Engineering Chemistry
Course Title General Engineering Course Code 18C-104F

Chemistry
Semester I Course Group Foundation
Periods (L:T:P)
Periods
Prerequisite:Basic knowledge of chemistry in secondary education.

Course Objectives: After studying this course, the student will be able to understand and appreciate
the role of Chemistry and environmental studies in different spheres of industries.
Course Outcome:On successful completion of the course, the students will have ability to attain
below Course Outcomes (CO):
CO Course outcome CL Linked PO Teaching

periods
CO1 Explain Bohr’s atomic model, the different R/U/A 1,2,9 12

types of chemical bonding in certain
molecules and concept of oxidation,
reduction and oxidation number
CO2 Understand and explain mole, molarity and R/U/A 1,2,9 8
normality and solve the problems and
colloids and their applications.
CO3 Explain the different theories of acids and R/U/A 1,2,3,9 12
bases, concept of pH, buffer solutions and
buffer action.
CO4 Compare the renewable and non renewable R/U/A 1,2,5,6,7,9,10 8
energy sources, to take measures to protect
the biodiversity and also the environment.
CO5 Distinguish the temporary and permanent R/U/A 1,2,3,9,10 10
hardness, apply the different methods of
softening of hard water and desalination.
CO6 Explain electrolysis and applications of R/U/A 12,3, 4. 10
electrolysis, Solve the problems on
Faraday’s laws of electrolysis
Total Periods 60
Cognitive levels: R = Remember, U= Understand, A = Apply
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT-I: Fundamentals of Chemistry12Periods (L : 9.0 Periods, T : 3.0 Periods)
Atomic Structure: Introduction – Atomic number – Mass number- Bohr's Atomic theory - Aufbau principle -
Hund's rule - Pauli's exclusion Principle- Orbitals,shapes of s, p and d orbitals - Electronic configuration of
elements
Chemical Bonding: Introduction – Electronic theory of valency - Types of chemical bonds - Ionic, covalent and
co-ordinate covalent bond with examples - Properties of Ionic and Covalent compounds
Oxidation-Reduction: ElectronicConcepts of Oxidation-Reduction, Oxidation Number- calculations.
UNIT-II: Solutions andColloids8Periods (L : 6.0 Periods, T : 2.0 Periods)
60
Introduction-Classification of solutions based on physical state- Molecular weights ,Equivalent weights-
Expression of concentration – Mole concept, Molarity, Normality, Numerical problems on Mole, molarity and
normality - Colloids- Types of colloids- Lyophilic and Lyophobic- Industrial applications of colloids.
UNIT-III: Acids and Bases12Periods (L : 9.0 Periods, T : 3.0 Periods)

Introduction - theories of acids and bases and limitations - Arrhenius theory-Bronsted -Lowry theory - Lewis
acid base theory - Ionic product of water - pH and related numerical problems - Buffer solutions- buffer action -
applications of buffer solution.
UNIT-IV: Environmental Studies-I 8Periods (L : 6.0 Periods, T : 2.0 Periods)

Introduction - environment -scope and importance of environmental studies- important terms - renewable and
non renewable energy sources - Concept of ecosystem, producers,consumers and decomposers - Biodiversity,
definition and threats to Biodiversity- Forest resources- Over exploitation-Deforestation.
UNIT-V: Water Technology10Periods (L : 7.5 Periods, T : 2.5 Periods)

Introduction -soft and hard water - causes of hardness – types of hardness -disadvantages of hard water - degree
of hardness (ppm) - softening methods - permutit process - ion exchange
process - drinking water - municipal treatment of water for drinking purpose - Osmosis, Reverse Osmosis -
advantages of Reverse osmosis – Desalination by Electro -dialysis – Defluoridation – Nalgonda technique.
UNIT-VI:Electrochemistry: 10Periods (L : 7.5 Periods, T : 2.5 Periods)

Conductors, insulators, electrolytes –Types of electrolytes - Arrhenius theory of electrolytic
dissociation - electrolysis –electrolysis of fused NaCl and aqueous NaCl – applications of electrolysis
- Faraday's laws of electrolysis- numerical problems .
Reference Books:
1. Engineering chemistry – Jain & Jain – Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company.

2. A Text book of Engineering Chemistry – S.S.Dara – S.Chand Publications.
3. Environmental Studies – A.K.De.
4. Environmental Studies, R. Rajagopalan, 2nd Edition, 2011, Oxford University Press
5. Intermediate Chemistry I and II – Telugu Academy TS
Specific Learning Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the student will have ability to

UNIT- I: FUNDAMENTALS OF CHEMISTRY
1.1 Explain the concept of atomic number and mass number
1.2 State the postulates of Bohr's atomic theory and its limitations
1.3 Explain 1.Aufbau's principle, 2.Hund's rule and 3.Pauli's exclusion principle with examples.
1.4 Define Orbital.
1.5 Draw the shapes of s, p and d Orbitals.
1.6 Distinguish between Orbit and Orbital
1.7 Write the electronic configuration of elements up to atomic number 30
1.8 Define chemical bond.
1.9 Explain the Postulates of Electronic theory of valency.
1.10 Define and explain three types of Chemical bonding viz., Ionic, Covalent, Coordinate
Covalent bond with examples.
1.11 Explain bond formation in NaCl and MgO.
1.12 List the Properties of Ionic compounds.
1.13 Explain covalent bond formation in Hydrogen molecule, Oxygen molecule, and Nitrogen
Molecules using Lewis dot method.
1.14 List the Properties of Covalent compounds.
1.15 Distinguish between ionic compounds and covalent compounds.
1.16 Electronic concept of Oxidation and Reduction.
61
1.17 Define Oxidation Number
1.18 Calculate the Oxidation Number.
UNIT-II:SOLUTIONS AND COLLOIDS

2.1 Define the terms 1.Solution, 2.Solute and 3.Solvent.
2.2 Classify solutions based on physical state.
2.3 Calculate Molecular weight and equivalent weights of acids, bases and salts.
2.4 Define mole.
2.5 Explain Mole concept with examples.
2.6 Define Molarity and Normality.
2.7 Solve Numerical problems on Mole, Molarity and Normality.
2.8 Define Colloids.
2.9 Types of colloids- Lyophilic and Lyophobic.
2.10 Industrial applications of colloids.
UNIT-III:ACIDS AND BASES

3.1 Explain Arrhenius theory of Acids and Bases.
3.2 State the limitations of Arrhenius theory of Acids and Bases
3.3 Explain Bronsted - Lowry theory of acids and bases.
3.4 State the limitations of Bronsted - Lowry theory of acids and bases.
3.5 Explain Lewis theory of acids and bases.
3.6 State the limitations of Lewis theory of acids and bases.
3.7 Explain the Ionic product of water.
3.8 Define pH and explain Sorenson scale.
3.9 Solve the Numerical problems on pH (Strong Acids and Bases).
3.10 Define buffer solutions and give examples of acidic and basic buffers.
3.11 State the applications of buffer solutions.
3.12 Explain the buffer action of acidic and basic buffers.
UNIT-IV:ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES-I
4.1 Define the term environment
4.2 Explain the scope and importance of environmental studies
4.3 Define and understand the following terms
1) Lithosphere, 2) Hydrosphere, 3) Atmosphere, 4) Biosphere, 5) Pollutant, 6) Contaminant
7) Pollution, 8)receptor, 9)sink, 10) particulates, 11) Dissolved oxygen (DO),
12) Threshold limit value (TLV),13).BOD and 14).COD
4.4 Explain the growing energy needs.
4.5 Explain renewable (non-conventional) and non renewable (conventional) energy sources
with examples.
4.6 Define an Ecosystem. Understand biotic and abiotic components of ecosystem.
4.7 Define and explain the terms:
1) Producers, 2) Consumers and 3) Decomposers with examples.
4.8 Explain biodiversity and threats to biodiversity.
4.9 Explain the uses of forests and over exploitation of forest resources and deforestation.
UNIT V:WATER TECHNOLOGY

5.1 State the various Sources of water.
5.2 Define the terms soft water and hard water with examples
5.3 Define hardness of water.
5.4 Explain temporary and permanent hardness of water.
5.5 List the usual chemical compounds causing hardness (with Formulae)
5.6 Disadvantages of using hard water in industries.
5.7 Define Degree of hardness, units of hardness in ppm (mg/L) and numerical problems related
to hardness.
62
5.8 Explain the methods of softening of hard water: a) Permutit process b).Ion-Exchange
process.
5.9 Essential qualities of drinking water.
5.10 Explain municipal treatment of water for drinking purpose.
5.11 Define Osmosis and Reverse Osmosis(RO).
5.12 List the applications and advantages of RO.
5.13 Desalination of sea water by Electro dialysis.
5.14 Defluoridation - Nalgonda Technique.
UNIT VI: ELECTROCHEMISTRY

6.1 Define the terms1. Conductor, 2. Insulator, 3.Electrolyte and 4.Non - electrolyte
6.2 Types of electrolytes - strong and weak electrolytes with examples.
6.3 Distinguish between metallic conductors and Electrolytic conductors.
6.4 Arrhenius theory of electrolytic dissociation
6.5 Explain electrolysis of fused NaCl and aqueous NaCl
6.6 Applications of Electrolysis- Electroplating-Electrolytic refining of metal (Copper)
6.7 Explain Faraday's laws of electrolysis
6.8 Define chemical equivalent, electrochemical equivalent.
6.9 Relationship between chemical equivalent and electrochemical equivalent
6.10 Solve the Numerical problems based on Faraday's laws of electrolysis
Suggested Student Activities or Induction Program:
Forenoon Afternoon
Day1 Registration Class work as per Time table
Day2 Rules and Regulations Chemistry Lab practice classes may be
Day3 Getting acquainted with Head and faculty conducted
Day4 Familiarization with Institutional facilities
Day5 Interaction with Class teacher and Seniors
Day6 Introducing the mentor
Day7 Parent –Teacher meeting
1. Student visits Library to refer to Text books, reference books and manuals to find their
specifications
2. Student inspects the available equipment in the Chemistry Lab to familiarize with them.
3. Quiz
4. Group discussion
5. Seminar
6. Surprise test
E - learning links:
https://iupac.org/
https://www.youtube.com
https://www.khanacademy.org/
www.nptel.ac.in
63
Blue Print
MID SEM-I EXAM

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
64
Understanding (U) 3 Marks
Legend:
65
Model Question Papers
I SEMESTER, MIDSEM – I
Sub. Code: 18Common-104F
Time: 1 Hour Max. Marks: 20
PART – A
Instructions: Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark. 4 X 1 = 4 marks
1. State Hund’s rule.

2. Write the electronic configuration of Cr.
3. Define mole.
4. What are colloids?
PART – B
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks 2 x 3 =6 Marks
5. a. Draw the shapes of s and d orbitals.

or
b. Explain the covalent bond formation in Nitrogen molecule by Lewis dot method.
6. a. Classify solutions based on their physical state.
or
b. Compare any three properties of lyophilic and lyophobic colloids.
PART – C
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks 2 x 5 =10 Marks
7. a. Distinguish the ionic compounds from covalent compounds.

or
b. What is oxidation number? Find the oxidation number of ‘S’ in H2SO4 and ‘Mn’ in
KMnO4.
8. a. Define Molarity. Find the weight of H2SO4 required to prepare 400 ml of 0.5M solution.
or
b. Define Normality. Calculate the normality of 500 ml solution containing 0.53 grams of
Na2CO3.
66
I SEMESTER, MIDSEM – II
Time: 1 Hour Max.Marks : 20
PART – A
Instructions: i. Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark. 4 X 1 = 4 marks
1. What is conjugate acid base pair?

2. Define ionic product of water.
3. Define an ecosystem.
4. What is threshold limit value?
PART – B
5. a. What are the limitations of Arrhenius theory of acids and bases?

or
b. Explain the neutralization according to Lewis theory of acids and bases with an example.
6. a. Explain the terms producers, consumers and decomposers with example.
or
b. What are renewable and non renewable energy sources? Give examples.
PART – C
7. a. Define pH. Find the pH of 0.5M NaOH solution.

or
b. What are buffer solutions? State the applications of buffer solutions.
8. a. What is Biodiversity? Explain any two threats to biodiversity.
or
b. What is deforestation? What are its consequences?
67
C-18COMMON-104F
I SEMESTER EXAMINATION
Time: 2 Hours Max.Marks: 40
PART – A
1. Define atomic mass number.

2. What is biodiversity?
3. Define degree of hardness of water.
4. What are buffer solutions?
5. Define soft water and hard water.
6. Name the salts responsible for temporary hardness of water.
7. Define the terms conductor and insulator.
8. What is an electrolyte?
PART – B
9. a. State and explain Hund’ rule.

or
b. Write any six essential qualities of drinking water.
10. a. Explain the terms producers, consumers and decomposers with example.
or
b. What are strong and weak electrolytes? Give examples.
11. a. Define reverse osmosis and state its advantages.
or
b. Explain defluoridation of water by Nalgonda technique
12. a. Distinguish between metallic and electrolytic conductors.
Or
b. State Faraday’s Laws of electrolysis.
PART – C
13. a. Find the molarity and normality of the solution containing 10.6 grams of Na 2CO3 in 2 litres
of solution. .
or
b. Calculate the temporary and permanent hardness of water containing the following salts per
litre
i. Ca(HCO3)2 =32.4 mg, ii. Mg(HCO3)2 = 29.2 mg, iii. CaSO4 =13.6 mg, iv. MgCl2 = 19
mg
68
14. a. Explain Lewis theory of acids and bases.
or
b. Explain the process of electrolysis of fused NaCl.
15. a. Explain the permutit process of softening of hard water with a neat diagram.
or
b. What are the disadvantages of using hard water in industries?
16. a. Explain the process of electrolytic refining of copper.
Or
b. Calculate the weight of Al deposited on the cathode if 0.5 amperes of electric current is
passed through AlCl3 solution for 1 hour.
.
69
Department of Technical Education
State Board of Technical Education &Training (TS)
Course Title: Basic Surveying Course Code : 18C-105C
Semester: I Semester Course Group : Core

Teaching Scheme in 45:15:0 Credits : 3
Periods(L:T:P):
Type of Course Lecture+Assignments Total Contact Periods : 60 Periods
:
CIE 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks
:
This course requires the basic knowledge of Trigonometry and basics of map study
Pre requisites
Course Content and Blue Print of Marks for SEE

Unit Unit Name Periods Questions to be set for SEE
No
R U A
1 Introduction to surveying 08
2 Principles and instruments Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
in chain surveying
12
3 Operations and errors in
10
Chain Surveying
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
4 Obstacles and calculation Q4
of areas
10
5 Principles & instruments in Q9(b), Q13(b),
10 Q5,Q6
compass surveying Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
6 Compass Traversing and Q10(b), Q14(b),
errors
10 Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8
CO1 : Familiarize with the basic principles of Surveying
CO2 : Explain the Principles and instruments used in chain surveying in the field
CO3 : Familiarize with Standard operations and errors encountered in field during chain surveying
CO4 : Explain the methods of overcoming different obstacles in Chain Surveying and calculate the areas
of irregular boundaries
CO5 : Explain the principles and procedures of Compass Surveying and acquaint with checking for local
attraction to compute included angles from given bearings
CO6 : Plot the closed traverse for the given data and adjust the closing error by using Bowditch rule
Course
UponOutcomes
completion of the course the student shall be able to
Course Contents
70
UNIT 1: Introduction to Surveying Duration: 8Periods((L: 6 – T:2)
Concept of Surveying - purpose of Surveying - Divisions of
surveying- Classification of Surveying based on different criteria-
Fundamental principles of Surveying -Measurements-Units and
conversions-Instruments used for taking linear and angular
measurements-
UNIT 2: Principles and Instruments in Chain SurveyingDuration: 12Periods((L: 9 – T:3)
a) Purpose and Principle of Chain Surveying -Suitability of
ChainSurveying-Survey stations and their selection-Survey lines
and offsets -Purpose-Perpendicular and oblique- Instruments used
in Chain survey and their function
b) Ranging a survey line- Direct ranging and Indirect ranging
-Chaining a line -Duties of leader and follower- Chaining on a
sloping ground
UNIT 3:Operations and Errors in chain surveying Duration: 10Periods(L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
a) Errors in ordinary chaining -Correction due to incorrect length of
Chain- problems
b) Different operations in Chain Surveying- Setting out right angles
with cross staff- Cross staff survey - Field work procedure-
Recording field notes - Field book - Conventional signs.
UNIT 4:Obstacles and calculation of areas Duration: 10Periods(L: 7.5 – T:2.5)

a) Obstacles in chaining-methods to overcome obstacles-Problems
b) Calculations of area -Average ordinate, Mid-ordinate,
Trapezoidaland Simpson's rules.
UNIT 5:Principles and instruments in compass surveying
Duration: 10 Periods(L:7.5 – T:2.5)
a)
Introduction, Purpose, principle and uses of compass Survey-
-Description working and use of Prismatic compass - Operations
in using Compass before taking readings
b) Concept of Meridian-Types of meridians - Bearing and angle-
Designation of bearings- Whole Circle Bearing, Quadrantal
Bearing –Conversions
c) Local attraction-detection and correction
UNIT 6:Compass Traversing and errors Duration: 10Periods(L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
a) Field work in Compass Survey -field notesTraverse-Open and
Closed Traverse -traverse using prismatic compass.
b) Magnetic declination-Variation of Magnetic declination
-calculation of true bearings-Determination of included angles
from the given bearings and vice versa in compass traverse.
c) Plotting of Compass traverse - closing error and adjustment by
Bowditch graphical method.
d) Errors in Compass Surveying.
Recommended Books
1. Surveying - N.N.Basak - Tata McGraw Hill

2. Surveying Vol-I - S.K.Duggal -McGraw Hill Edn (India) Pvt Ltd
3. Surveying and Levelling Vol -1 -Kulkarni and Kanetkar
4. Surveying and Levelling Vol. - 1 - B.C. Punmia
5. Surveying and Levelling -Vol -1 -R.Agor- Khanna Publishers
71
1.www.elearning.com/survey
2. http://nptel.ac.in

Upon completion of the course, the student shall be able to
1.1 State the concept of surveying.
1.2 State the purpose of surveying.
1.3 Distinguish between Plane and Geodetic surveying.
1.4 List the units of linear and angular measurements in Surveyingand
conversions.
1.5 List the instruments used for taking linear and angular
measurements.
1.6 Classify surveys based on different criteria
1.7 State the fundamental principles of surveying.
1.8 State and explain the stages of survey operations.
2.1 State the purpose of Chain surveying
2.2 State the principle of Chain surveying.
2.3 Explain the principles used in Chain triangulation.
2.4 List different instruments used in Chain Surveying.
2.5 Explain the functions of different instruments used in ChainSurveying.
2.6 List the points to be followed while selecting the survey stations
2.7 Define ranging
2.8 Explain the methods of ranging a line.
3.1 List the operations involved in chaining on 1. Flat ground,2.Sloping ground
3.2 Describe the method of setting out right angles with or without Cross staff
3.3 Explain the field work procedure &Method of recording field observations.
3.4 Know the errors in Chain surveying.
3.5 Determine the corrections for measurement due to incorrect length of chain.
4.1 Explain the methods of overcoming different obstacles in chain surveying.
4.2 Calculate the areas of irregular boundaries using
a) Average Ordinate rule
b) Mid -Ordinate rule
c) Trapezoidal rule
d) Simpson's rule.
5.1 State the purpose of Compass surveying.
72
5.2 State the principles and uses of Compass surveying.
5.3 Identify the parts of Prismatic Compass
5.4 Explain the functions of parts of Prismatic Compass
5.5 Define terms
a) Whole Circle Bearing
b) Quadrantal Bearing
c) True meridian
d) Magnetic meridian
e) True bearing
f) Magnetic bearing
g) Dip
h) Declination
i) Local attraction.
5.6 Convert Whole Circle Bearing into Quadrantal Bearing and viceversa.
5.7 Explain the effect of local attraction
5.8 Compute corrected bearings for local attraction.
6.1 Compute the included angles of lines in a Compass traverse.
6.2 Explain the operations involved in field in compass Surveying
6.3 Explain methods of recording field notes.
6.4 Explain the method of plotting closed traverse and adjustingclosing error by
Bowditch rule.
6.5 List the errors in Compass surveying.
1. Tech fest/Srujana
2. Paper/Poster presentation
3. Quiz
4. Group discussion
5. Surprise test
CO-PO Mapping Matrix
Engineer and society
Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge
Discipline Knowledge
Engineering Tools
Ethics
Communication
Experiments and practice
Linked PO
sustainabilityEnvironment &
workIndividual and Team
CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10
CO1 2 3 2 2 2 1,2,3,8,9
73
CO2 1 3 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,8,9
CO3 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 1,2,3,4,7,8,9
CO4 3 3 2 3 1 1 1 2 2 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9
CO5 3 2 3 2 2,3,4,8
CO6 3 3 2 3 3 3 1,2,3,4,9,10
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks
Mid Sem 1 1 and 2 20
Slip Test 1 1 and 2 5
Assignments 5
Seminars 5
Total 60
74
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR MID SEMESTER EXAMS
Sl.N Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total

o Questions each Marks
question
01 Part-A Remembering(R) 4 1 Nil 4 Marks
02 Part-B Understanding(U) 4 3 2 6 Marks
03 Part-C Application(A) 4 5 2 10 Marks
Total Marks 20 Marks
MID SEM-I EXAM
S.No Unit No R U A Remarks
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not
exceed ¼ of a page,1 page and 2 pages respectively
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR SEMESTER END EXAM

Sl. Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total
No Questions each Marks
question
Questions to be set for SEE
Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV
Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
75
State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana
Model Question paper
DCE I semester Mid Semester-I Examination
Course Code:18C-105C Duration: 1hour

Course Name: Basic Surveying Max.Marks:20 Marks
PART-A
Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark 4x1 = 04 Marks
1) List the divisions of survey based on methods employed.
2) What are the units of angular measurements?
3) Define surveying
4) What is the principle of chain surveying
PART-B
Answer two questions, Each Question carries Three marks 2x3 = 06 Marks
5) (a) State any five points to be kept in mind while selecting a survey station.
(or)
5) (b) Brief any three purpose of chain surveying
6) (a) Define ranging and list types of ranging

(or)
6) (b) Write about GPS survey and Theodolite survey
PART-C
Answer two questions, Each Question carries five marks 2x5 = 10 Marks
7) (a) Name the stages of surveying operations and explain any two stages
(or)
7) (b) Explain the classification based on object of survey
8) (a) Explain the direct method of ranging a line

(or)
8) (b) Write about the construction of optical square.
76
State Board of Technical Education and Training,Telangana
DCE I semester Mid Semester-IIExamination
Course Code:18C-105C Duration: 1hour

Course Name: Basic Surveying Max.Marks:20 Marks
PART-A
1) Draw the conventional signs of a) Metalled road b) Hill.
2) List the errors in chain surveying
3) List the methods adopted to calculate area
4) What do you mean by obstacle in chain surveying?
PART-B
Answer two questions, Each Question carries Three marks 2x3 = 06 Marks
5(a) Write three precautions to be taken while entering/ measuring in field book.
(or)
5(b) Brief about reconnaissance during field work
6(a) State the classification of obstacles of chain survey

(or)
6(b) State and list the terms used in area calculation using average ordinate rule
PART-C
7(a) Explain the indirect method of calculating the horizontal distance using hypotenusal allowance
(or)
7(b) Explain about cumulative errors in chaining
8(a) B and C are two points on opposite banks of a river along a chain line ABC. A line BD, 60m
long is det out at right angles to the chain line at B. Another line DE is set out at right angles
to the line CD at D, such that the point E is on the chain line and 90m behind the point B. Fine
the width of the river.
(or)
8(b) The following off sets were taken from a survey line to a hedge. Find the areas between survey
line and hedge by using trapezoidal rule
Distance (m) 0 5 10 15
Offset (m) 3.29 4.05 6.23 5.75
77
DCE I semester End Semester-IIExamination
Course Code:18C-105C Duration:2hours
Course Name: Basic Surveying Max.Marks:40
Marks
PART-A
1) Define surveying.
2) What is an obstacle in chain surveying?
3) What is the use of compass?
4) What is an oblique offset?
5) State the principle of compass surveying
6) Define local attraction
7) List the errors in compass surveying
8) What is a traverse
PART-B
Answer Four questions, Each Question carries three marks 4x3 = 12 Marks
9(a) The area of the field measured with a chain which was 0.5% too short was found to be 32
hectares. What is the true area of the field
(or)
9(b) Write any two purpose and principle of compass surveying
10(a) The area of field was found to be 4000sq.m., when measured with a chain of 30m length. If the
length of the chain was 0.11m too short, find the correct area of the field.
(or)
10(b) Find the True bearing of the line with the following observed magnetic bearing
(i) Bearing of line AB = 189°12', Declination = 2°W
(ii) Bearing of line CD = 72°44', Declination = 1°12'E
11(a)Write three precautions to be taken while surveying to avoid error due to local attraction.
(or)
11(b) What is WCB, Convert the following into Reduced bearing(i) 44°30’ (ii)226° 30’
12(a) What is closing error in traverse, mention the methods to correct it.
(or)
12(b) Write any three precautions to be taken in compass surveying.
PART-C
Answer four questions, Each Question carries five marks 4x5 = 20 Marks
13(a) Explain the indirect method ranging

(or)
13(b) Sketch and label the part of Prismatic compass
14(a) A, B is a chain line crossing a lake. A and B are on the opposite sides of lake. A line AC 270m
long is ranged to the right side of AB. Similarly, a line AD is 330 m, ranged to the left side of
AB. The points C, B and D are collinear. The length of BC is 150 m. and length of BD is 165
m. Now find the length of AB.
78
(or)
14(b) Find the included angles for the given closed traverse ABCDEA from the following data.
Line F.B B.B
AB 45o15’ 225o15’
BC 123o15’ 303o15’
o
CD 181 00’ 1o00’
o
DA 289 30’ 109o30’
15(a) The following bearings were taken in a traversing with a compass in a place where local
attraction was suspected. At what stations do you suspect local attraction. Determine the
correct bearings each line.
Line F.B B.B
o
AB 44 30’ 226o30’
o
BC 124 30’ 303o15’
o
CD 181 00’ 1o00’
o
DA 289 30’ 108o45’
(or)
15(b) Explain with the help of sketch one method of plotting the compass survey
16(a) A closed traverse is conducted in anti-clockwise direction with five stations A,B,C,D and E in
the form of a regular pentagon. If the fore bearing of AB is 45°00’, find the fore bearings of
other sides
(or)
16(b)Explain any two situations which are favourable and unfavourable situations for conducting
compass survey
79
BASIC ENGINEERING
Course Title : Course Code 18C-106P
DRAWING
Semester I Course Group Practical
Teaching Scheme
15:30 Credits 1.5
in Periods (L :P)
Total Contact
Methodology Lecture + practice 45Pds
Periods:
***This Course is Common to all Programs of Diploma in Engineering Offered by State

Board of Technical Education –Telangana State.
This Course is aimed at developing basic graphic skills to enable them to use these skills in
preparation of engineering drawings, their reading and interpretation.
Prerequisites: Enthusiasm to learn this course and requires basic knowledge of
Mathematics.
Unit R U A
Name of the Unit
No Periods PART-A (2 PART-B (6
Marks Marks
Questions) Questions)
Importance of Engineering
Drawing and Instruments,
1, 2
Free hand lettering and 12 Q1 Q9(a)
&3
Numbering and
Dimensioning Practice
Geometric constructions (i.e.
4 up to construction of 06 Q2 Q9(b)
Polygon)
4 up to construction of general 06 Q3 Q10(a)
curves)
Projection of points, Lines,
5 06 Q4 Q10(b)
Planes
Q11(a),
6 Orthographic projections 15 Q5, Q6, Q7, Q8 Q11(b),
Q12(a), Q12(b)
Total Periods / Total Questions 45 8 4
[ R: Remembering, U: Understanding – 2 Marks Questions ] [A: Application – 6

Marks Questions]
80
Note: Question Paper consists PART – A and PART-B
PART – A consists 8 (Eight questions) and student have to answer ALL questions,
each question carries 2 marks. (8*2 = 16)
PART – B consists 4 questions (either or / (a) or (b)), student have to attempt FOUR
questions, each question carries 6 marks (4*6=24)
Course Outcomes (CO)
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to attain the following
Course Outcomes (CO):
Course Outcome
CO
Acquire the knowledge on Importance of Engineering drawing and instruments.
1
CO
Practice free hand Lettering in different styles.
2
CO
Acquire the knowledge on different styles of dimensioning systems.
3
CO Appreciate the usage of engineering curves for tracing the paths and surface profile
3 of the machine components such as gear profile from involute and cycloid.
Realize the concept of projection and attain visualization projection of points, Lines
CO
and Planes. The student will also be able to draw the views related to projection of
3
Points, Lines and Planes.
CO Realize the concept of orthographic projections and student will be able to draw
4 orthographic views of an object from its pictorial drawing.
Course Contents
NOTE
1. B.I.S Specification should invariably be followed in all the topics.
2. A-3 Size Drawing Sheets are to be used for all Drawing Practice
Exercises.
1.0 The importance of Engineering Drawing and Engineering Instruments (Periods:
3)
Explanation of the scope and objectives of the subject of Engineering Drawing Its
importance as a graphic communication -Need for preparing drawing as per standards
– (SP-46 –1988) – Mention B.I.S - Role of drawing in -engineering education – Link
between Engineering drawing and other subjects of study.
Engineering drawing Instruments

Classifications: Basic Tools, tools for drawing straight lines, tools for curved lines,
tools for measuring distances and special tools like mini drafter & drafting machine –
Mentioning of names under each classification and their brief description -Scales:
Recommended scales reduced & enlarged -Lines: Types of lines, selection of line
thickness - Selection of Pencils -Sheet Sizes: A0, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, Layout of
drawing sheets in respect of A0, A1, A3 sizes, Sizes of the Title block and its
contents, Care and maintenance of Drawing Sheet,
Drawing plate: La out of sheet – as per SP-46-1988 to a suitable scale.
81
2.0 Free hand lettering & numbering (Periods: 3)
Importance of lettering – Types of lettering -Guide Lines for Lettering
Practicing of letters & numbers of given sizes (7mm, 10mm and 14mm)
Advantages of single stroke or simple style of lettering - Use of lettering stencils
3.0 Dimensioning practice (Periods: 6)
Purpose of engineering drawing, Need of B.I.S code in dimensioning -Shape
description of an Engineering object - Definition of dimensioning size description
-Location of features, surface finish, fully dimensioned Drawing -Notations or tools of
dimensioning, dimension line, extension line, leader line, arrows, symbols, number
and notes, rules to be observed in the use of above tools -Placing dimensions: Aligned
system and unidirectional system (SP-46-1988)-Arrangement of dimensions - Chain,
parallel, combined progressive and dimensioning by co-ordinate methods- Rules for
dimensioning standard - features: Circles (holes) arcs, angles, tapers, chamfers, and
dimension of narrow spaces.
4.0 Geometric Construction (Periods: 12)
Division of a line: to divide a straight line into given number of equal parts internally
examples in engineering application. Construction of tangent lines: to draw tangent
lines touching circles internally and externally.
Construction of tangent arcs
a) To draw tangent arc of given radius to touch two lines inclined at given angle
(acute, right and obtuse angles).
b) Tangent arc of given radius touching a circle or an arc and a given line.
c) Tangent arcs of radius ‘R’, touching two given circles internally and externally.
Construction of polygon: construction of any regular polygon of given side length

using general method.
Conical Curves: Explanation of Ellipse, Parabola, Hyperbola, as sections of a double

cone and a loci of a moving point, eccentricity of above curves – Their engineering
application viz. Projectiles, reflectors, P-V Diagram of a hyperbolic process.
Construction of any conic section of given eccentricity by general method.
Construction of ellipse by concentric circles method.
Construction of parabola by rectangle method.
Construction of rectangular hyperbola.
General Curves: Involute, Cycloid and Helix, explanations as locus of a moving
point, their engineering application, viz, Gear tooth profile, screw threads, springs
etc. - their construction
5.0 Projection of points, lines and planes (Periods: 6)
Projecting a point on two planes of projection -Projecting a point on three planes of
projection -Projection of straight line.
a) Parallel to both the planes.
b) Perpendicular to one of the planes.
c) Inclined to one plane and parallel to other planes.
Projection of regular planes.
a) Plane perpendicular to HP and parallel to VP and vice versa.
b) Plane perpendicular to HP and inclined to VP and vice versa.
6.0 Orthographic Projections (Periods: 15)
Meaning of orthographic projection -Using a viewing box and a model – Number of
views obtained on the six faces of the box - Legible sketches of 3 views for describing
object -Concept of front view, top view, and side view for sketching these views of
82
engineering objects - Explanation of first angle projection. – Positioning of three
views in First angle projection - Projection of points as a means of locating the
corners of the surfaces of an object – Use of miter line in drawing a third view when
other two views are given -Method of representing hidden lines -Selection of
minimum number of views to describe full object.
Reference Books
Engineering Drawing by Kapildev – (Asian Publisher)

Engineering Drawing by BasantAgarwal&C.M Agarwal - (McGraw-hill)
Engineering Drawing by N.D.Bhatt. (Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.)
A Textbook on Engineering Drawing by P. Kannaiah, K. L. Narayana, K. Venkata
Reddy
NPTEL Videos of Engineering Dwawing.
Suggested Specific Learning Outcomes
Upon completion of the subject, the student shall be able to -

1.0 Understand the basic concepts of engineering drawing
1.1 State the importance of drawing as an engineering communication medium
1.2 State the necessity of B.I.S. Code of practice for Engineering Drawing.
1.3 Explain the linkages between Engineering drawing and other subjects of study
in diploma course.
Use of Engineering Drawing Instruments
1. 4 select the correct instruments and draw lines of different orientation.
1.5 Select the correct instruments and draw small and large Circles.
1.6 Select the correct instruments for measuring distances on the drawing.
1.7 Use correct grade of pencil for different types of lines, thickness and given
function.
1.8 Select and use appropriate scales for a given application.
1.9 Identify different drawing sheet sizes as per I.S. and Standard Lay- outs.
1.10 Prepare Title block as per B.I.S. Specifications.
2.0 Write Free Hand Lettering and Numbers
2.1 Write titles using sloping lettering and numerals of 7mm, 10mm and 14mm
height
2.2 Write titles using vertical lettering and numerals of 7mm, 10mm and 14mm
height
2.3 Select suitable sizes of lettering for different layouts and applications
2.4 Practice the use of lettering stencils.
3.0 Understand Dimensioning Practice
3.1 Define “Dimensioning.
3.2 State the need of dimensioning of drawing according to accepted standard.
3.3 Identify notations of Dimensioning used in dimensioned drawing.
3.4 Identify the system of placement of dimensions in the given dimensioned
drawing.
3.5 Dimension a given drawing using standard notations and desired system of
dimensioning.
3.6 Dimensioning standard features applying necessary rules.
3.7 Arrange dimensions in a desired method given in a drawing.
3.8 Identify the departures if any made in the given dimensioned drawing with
reference to SP-46-1988, and dimension the same correctly.
83
4.0 Apply Principles of Geometric Constructions
4.1 Divide a given line into desired number of equal parts internally.
4.2 Draw tangent lines and arcs.
4.3 Use General method to construct any polygon.
4.4 Explain the importance of conics.
4.5 Construct conics (ellipse, parabola and hyperbola) by general method.
4.6 Construct ellipse by concentric circles method.
4.7 Construct parabola by rectangle method.
4.8 Construct rectangular hyperbola from the given data.
4.9 Construct involute from the given data.
4.10 Construct cycloid and helix from the given data.
4.11 State the applications of the above constructions in engineering practice.
5.0 Apply Principles of Projection of points, lines and planes (06 Hours)
5.1 Visualize the objects
5.2 Explain the I-angle and III-angle projections
5.3 Practice the I-angle projections
5.4 Draw the projection of a point with respect to reference planes (HP&VP)
5.5 Draw the projections of straight lines with respect to two reference
Planes (up to lines parallel to one plane and inclined to other plane)
5.6 Draw the projections of planes (up to planes perpendicular to one plane and
inclined to other plane)
6.0 Apply principles of orthographic projection
6.1 Explain the principles of orthographic projection with simple sketches.
6.2 Draw the orthographic view of an object from its pictorial drawing.
6.3 Draw the minimum number of views needed to represent complete engineering
component.
CIE Question Paper Pattern and Syllabus

Uni R U A
Unit Name
t No 6 Marks
2 Marks Questions
Questions
Mid Semester - I Examination
Free hand lettering,
1, 2,
Numbering & Dimensioning Q1, Q2 Q5 (a), Q5(b),
3
Practice
4 up to construction of Q3, Q4 Q6(a), Q6(b)
Polygon)
Total 4 2
Mid Semester - II Examination
4 up to construction of general Q1, Q2 Q5 (a), Q5(b),
curves)
Projection of points, Lines,
5 Q3, Q4 Q6(a), Q6(b)
Planes
84
Total 4 2
[R: Remembering, U: Understanding – 2 Marks Questions ] [A: Applying – 6 Marks
Questions]
CIE Question Paper Pattern:
Maximum Marks: 20, Time: 1 Hour
Part A:
Consists 4Short questions, students have to attempt 4 questions and each question carries 2
Marks.(4 X 2 = 08 Marks)
Part B:
Consists 2 (Either or type) Essay type questions, students have to attempt 2 questions and
each question carries 06 Marks.(2 X 6 = 12 Marks)
Linked
Cognizant Program
Course Outcome
Level Objectives
(PO)
CO Acquire the knowledge on Importance of

R 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
1 Engineering drawing and instruments.
CO
Practice free hand Lettering in different styles. R/U 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
2
CO Acquire the knowledge on different styles of
R/U 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
3 dimensioning systems.
Appreciate the usage of engineering curves for
CO tracing the paths and surface profile of the
R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
3 machine components such as gear profile from
involute and cycloid.
Realize the concept of projection and attain
visualization projection of points, Lines and
CO
Planes. The student will also be able to draw R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
3
the views related to projection of Points, Lines
and Planes.
Realize the concept of orthographic
CO projections and student will be able to draw
R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
4 orthographic views of an object from its
pictorial drawing.
Course-PO Attainment Matrix

Course Program Outcomes (PO)
Name
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Basic
Engineering 3 3 3 2 -- -- -- -- 3 3
Drawing
Level 3- Highly Addressed, Level 2-Moderately Addressed, Level 1-Low Addressed
85
MID SEMESTER – I MODEL PAPER
18C-106P
DCE – I SEMESTER
MID SEMESTER - I EXAMINATION
BASIC ENGINEERING DRAWING
Time: 1 Hour] [Total Marks: 20
___________________________________________________________________________
PART-A
04X02=08
Instructions : 1. Answer ALL questions.

2. Each question carries TWO marks.
1. Write freehand the following, using single stroke vertical CAPITAL letters:
BE A LEADER NOT A FOLLOWER (h = 10)
2. Represent the following Figure in Chain Dimensioning Method.
3. To divide a straight line of 90mm into 5 equal parts.

4. Bisect a given angle of 65 Degrees.
PART-B
02X06=12
Instructions : 1. Answer any TWO questions.
2. Each question carries SIX marks.
5. (a) Redraw the following Figure with Correct Dimensioning Rules.
86
(or)
5. (b) Represent the following Figure in a) parallel and b) Uni-directional system.
6. (a) Draw an arc of given radius 30 mm touching two straight lines at right angles to
each other.
(or)
6. (b) Draw a tangent to a circle from a point P at 50 mm distance on the circle of
Radius 30 mm.
87
MID SEMESTER – II MODEL PAPER
18C-106P
DCE – I SEMESTER
MID SEMESTER - II EXAMINATION
___________________________________________________________________________
PART-A
04X02=08

1. Draw an arc of given radius 30 mm touching two straight lines at right angles to
each other.
2. Draw a tangent to a circle from a point P at 50 mm distance on the circle of
Radius 30 mm.
3. Draw the projections of a point A lying on VP and 70 mm above HP.
4. A line of 30 mm long is parallel to both the planes. The line is 40 mm above HP and 20
mm in front of VP. Draw its projection.
PART-B
02X06=12
5. (a) Draw a parabola with the distance of the focus from the directrix at 50 mm
using Eccentricity method also draw a normal and tangent through a point 40 mm
from the directrix.
or
5. (b) Draw a cycloid, given the radius 30 mm of the generating circle.
6. (a) Draw the projections ofstraight line AB 60 mm long parallel to HP and
inclinedat an angle of 400 to VP. The end A is 30 mm above HP. and 20 mm in
front of VP.
or
6. (b) Rectangle 30mm and 50mm sides is resting on HP on one small side which is
300 inclined to VP, while the surface of the plane makes 450 inclination with HP.
Draw it’s projections.
88
MODEL PAPER SEE
18C- 106P
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C–18)
DCE – I SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
Time: 2hours] [Total Marks:40
Important Note: Wherever any question has choice, marks will be allotted only to first
attempted question. No marks will be allotted for extra questions answered.
PART-A
08X02=16
3. All the dimensions are in mm.
1. Write freehand the following, using single stroke vertical CAPITAL letters:
BE A LEADER NOT A FOLLOWER (h = 10)
2. Bisect a given angle of 450.
3. Inscribe a hexagon in a given circle of Radius 60 mm.
4. Draw the projections of a point A lying on VP and 70 mm above HP.
5. Draw the top view of the cone resting base on the ground with base diameter
50mm height 60mm.
6. Draw the top view with the given front and right side views of the componenet shown in
Figure (1) assuming suitable dimentions.
Right Side View Front View
Figure (1)
7. Draw the front view of the block shown in Figure (2)
8. Draw the front view of the block shown in Figure (3)
Figure (2) Figure (3)
89
PART-B
04X06=24
Instructions : 1. Answer any FOUR questions.
9. (a) Draw the below Figure (4) with correct dimensioning principles.
Figure (4)
(or)
9. (b) Circumscribe a hexagon on a given circle of radius R is 30mm.
10. (a) Draw a parabola with the distance of the focus from the directrix at 50 mm using
eccentricity method and draw a normal and tangent through a point 40 mm from the directrix.
(or)
10. (b) A line AB 40 mm long is parallel to V.P. and inclined at 300 to H.P. The end A is 15
mmabove H.P and 20 mm in front of V.P. Draw the projections of the line and find its traces.
(or)
11. (a) Draw the front view of the component shown in Figure (5).
Figure (5). Figure (6).

(or)
11. (b) Draw the Top View from the component as shown in Figure (6).
12. (a) Draw the Top View of component shown in Figure (7)
90
or
12. (b) Develop the Top View from the Front and Right side views as shown in Figure (8)
assuming suitable dimensions.
91
Basic Computer Aided Drafting
Course Title : Basic Computer Aided Drafting Course Code 18C-107P
Semester I Course Group :Practical
Teaching Scheme in
15:0:30 Credits : 1.5
periods (L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practice Total Contact periods 45Periods
Pre requisites :
This course requires the Basic Computer Skills and Practice concepts of engineering drawing
Course Outcomes
CO1 Importance and advantages of CAD. Set drawing area and draw geometric shapes and
modify as per requirement
CO2 Add text with required font and size and also dimension by various methods
CO3 Generate isometric model and draw circle on three iso planes
CO4 Create 2D drawings with front, side view with all above features
UNIT -1 Duration: 15 periods (T:5 + P:10)
1.1 The Computer Aided Drafting and its software

Definition of Computer Aided Drafting, the Advantages and importance of CAD software
Course Content
LIKE Auto CAD, Intelli Cad, ProG CAD etc., the features of Graphic Work station, CAD
Environment: Screen, Various tool bars and menus.
1.2 Selection of commands

Commands using toolbars, menus, command bar. Repeating a command, Nesting a command
and modifying a command.Use of prompt history window and scripts, mouse
shortcuts.Creating the drawing.Opening existing and, saving of drawing, setting up a drawing.
Setting and changing the grid and snapping alignment, and the Entity snaps.
1.3 Use of viewing tools of CAD & Use of coordinate systems of the drawing
Use of mouse, Scroll bar to move around within drawing, changing of magnification of
drawing. Displaying of multiple views, the use of controlling visual elements like Line weight.
Two dimensional coordinates such as Absolute, Cartesian, Relative Cartesian and Polar
coordinates and direct method of drawing line.
1.4 Creating simple and complex entities

Drawing of lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, rays and infinite lines, rectangles,
polygons,
1.5Use the Modifying tools to modify the properties of entities
92
Entity selection and de selection methods, the Deletion of entities. Copying of entities within a
drawing, between drawings, parallel copies, Mirroring entities and arraying entities. The
Rearranging of entities by Moving, Rotating and Reordering. The Resizing of entities by
Stretching, Scaling, Extending, Trimming, and editing the length. The Braking and joining of
entities. Editing of polylines: The Exploding of entities, the Chamfering and Filleting of
entities
UNIT -2 Duration: 15 periods (T:5 + 10P)
2.1 Creating complex entities

Drawing of shapes like polylines, Splines, donuts, and adding of hatch pattern
2.2 Use the drawing information retrieving tools Measure, Divide, Calculate and Display
Creating and editing of point entities. Dividing the entities in to segments. Calculation of areas
of defined by points, closed entities, and combined entities, calculate the distance and angle
between the entities. Displaying the information about the entities and drawing status.
2.3 Use the Text tool to create and formatting the various types of text Fonts and its styles
The creating, naming and modifying the text fonts, the Creation of line text, paragraph text,
setting of line text style and its alignment. The Setting of Paragraph text style and its alignment,
and modifying the text.
2.5 Use Dimensioning concepts to create, Edit ,Control dimension styles & variables and
Adding geometric tolerances
The creating of linear, Angular, Diametral, Radial, Ordinate dimensions. The creating leaders
and annotations, making dimensions oblique, Editing the dimension text, controlling of
dimension arrows and format. The Controlling of line settings and dimension text, the
Controlling of dimension units, and dimension tolerance.
2.6Isometric Views
Setting of isometric grid – change of iso planes, drawing straight line and circle
Create Isometric views of simple objects
.UNIT -3 Duration: 15 periods (T:5 + P:10)
Practice of 2D Drawings consisting of different line types, line weights, hatch, dimensioning
and Text
Using
Specific appropriate
Learning commands creation of 2D drawings of standard components
Outcomes
1 Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to Understand about the Computer
Aided Drafting and its software
1.1 Define Computer Aided Drafting
1.2 List the Advantages of CAD and also various CAD software’s
1.3 Explain the importance of CAD software
1.4 Explain the features of Graphic Work station
1.5 Explain CAD Screen, Various tool bars and menus
1.6 Explain the benefits of Templates
3 Use appropriate selection commands
2.1. Practice commands using toolbars, menus, command bar
2.2. Practice repeating a command, Nesting a command and modifying a command
93
2.3. Use prompt history window and scripts
2.4. Practice mouse shortcuts
2.5. Practice the Creating the drawing, saving the drawing with .drawing extension and
Opening Existing drawing
2.6. Practice the setting up a drawing with drawing limits and drawing units.
2.7. Practice the setting and changing the grid and snapping alignment
2.8. Practice the Entity snaps
3 Use viewing tools of CAD & Use coordinate systems of the drawing
3.1. Practice the use of Scroll bar, pan command and rotating view to move around within
drawing
3.2. Practice the changing of magnification of drawing
3.3. Practice how the coordinate system work and it is displayed
3.4 Practice the Find tool to determine the coordinates of a point
3.5. Practice the Two dimensional coordinates such as Absolute Cartesian, Relative
Cartesian, Polar coordinates and direct method to draw a line.
3.6. Explain importance and use of Osnap/ Esnap points.
3.7. Practice to draw with other drawing commands like circle, polygon and other.
4 Create the simple and complex entities
4.1. Draw the lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, rays and infinite lines and shapes
like Rectangles, Polygons, Polylines, Splines, donuts
4.2. Practice the adding of hatch with required pattern and adjusting line angle and line
space.
5 Use the modifying tools to modify the properties of entities
5.1. Practice the various methods of entity selection like window, cross window, fence, last
and previous methods and deselection method
5.2. Practice the Deletion, breaking and trimming of entities
5.3. Practice the Copying of entities within a drawing, between drawings
5.4. Practice the Chamfering and Filleting of entities
5.5. Practice the making of parallel copies, Mirroring entities and Arraying entities
5.6. Practice the Rearranging of entities by Moving, Rotating and Reordering
5.7. Practice the Resizing of entities by Stretching, Scaling, and Extending.
5.8. Practice the Editing of polylines: Opening, Closing, Curving, Decurving, Joining,
Changing width and editing vertices
5.9. Practice the Exploding of entities
6. Use the drawing information retrieving tools Measure, Divide, Calculate, Display, and
Track
6.1. Divide the entities in to required number of segments
6.2. Calculate the areas defined by points, of closed entities, and combined entities
6.3. Calculate the distance between the entities
6.4. Calculate the angle between the entities
6.5. Display the information about the entities and drawing status
6.6. Track time spent working on a drawing
7. Use the Text tool to create and formatting the various types of text fonts and its styles
7.1. Practice the creating, naming and modifying the text fonts
7.2. Practice the Creation of line text, paragraph text
7.3. Practice the Setting of line text style and its alignment
7.4. Practice the Setting of Paragraph text style and its alignment
94
7.5. Practice the Changing of line text and Paragraph text
7.6. Practice the use of alternate text editor
8 Use Dimensioning concepts to create dimensions, Edit dimensions, Control dimension
styles & variables and Adding geometric tolerances
8.1. Practice the creating of linear, Angular, Diametral, Radial, Ordinate dimensions
8.2. Practice the creating leaders and annotations
8.3. Practice the making dimensions oblique,
8.4. Edit the dimension text
8.5. Practice the Controlling of dimension properties like arrow types, size, dim line
adjustment, dim offset, text size: primary and secondary units and format
8.6. Practice the Controlling of dimension units, and dimension tolerance
9 Create 2D Drawings
Create 2D drawings of standard mechanical components
Recommended Books
1. Auto cad by George Omura
2. 4MCAD User Guide- IntelliCAD Technology Consortium
Key competence to be achieved by students / Suggested Learning Outcomes
S.No Experiment Title Key components

 Open / close AutoCAD program
1 Introduction to CAD  Understands AutoCAD Graphic User
 Interface(GUI) and various toolbars
2  Use prompt history window and scripts
Selecting commands &
Working withdrawing
 Practice the setting up a drawing
 Practice the Entity
 Use Scroll bar, pan command, and rotating view
a) Viewing drawing to move around within drawing
 Control visual elements like Fill, Text, Blips and
 Line weight
3  Use Two dimensional coordinates and Three
 dimensional coordinates
b) Working with coordinates  Use right-hand rule
 Use filters in two and three dimensions
 Define user coordinate system
 Draw the simple shapes like lines, circles, arcs
Creating simple and complex
4
entities
and complex shapes like polygons, planes etc.,
 Practice adding of hatch pattern
 Measure the intervals and distance between
Entities.
5 Getting Drawing information  Divide the entities in to segments
 Calculate the areas defined by points, of closed
entities, and Combined entities
6 Use the Text tool to create various  Calculate the areas defined by points, of closed
types of text fonts and its styles entities, and Combined entities
 Use filters in two and three dimensions
 Draw the simple shapes like lines, circles, arcs
95
and complex shapes like polygons, planes etc.,
 Practice the adding of hatch pattern
 Practice the Controlling of dimension properties like

arrow types, size, dim line adjustment, dim offset, text
7 Dimensioning drawing size , primary and secondary units and format
 Practice the Controlling of dimension units, and
dimension tolerance
Use Iso snap command to create Isometric views

8 Isometric Views
Use proper 2D commands to create 2D drawings

9 2D Drawings
Teaching
Course Outcomes CL Linked PO
Hours
Importance and advantages of CAD. Set drawing area and

CO1 U/A 1,2,3,9,10 15
draw geometric shapes and modify as per requirement
Add text with required font and size and also dimension
CO2 U/A 1,2,3,9,10 9
by various methods
Generate isometric model and draw circle on three iso

CO3 U/A 1,2,3,9,10 6
planes
Create 2D drawings with front, side view with all above

CO4 A 1,2,3,10 15
features
96
MID SEM-I EXAM
S.No Unit Name R A Remarks
1 Unit-I 1, 2,3,4 5,6
Total Questions 4 2
MID SEM –II EXAM
S.No Unit Name R A Remarks

1 Unit-II 1, 2,3,4 5,6
Total Questions 4 2

SN Unit name R,U (Q
A (Q No’s)
No’s)
1 Unit-1 1,2
Unit-2 3,4
Unit-3 5,6
97
18C107P- Basic Computer Aided Drafting
MODEL PAPER FOR MID -1
TIME: 1hr Marks:
20M
PART-A
NOTE: Answer all questions 4 X 2 = 8marks
1. Draw a rectangle of 80x30mm by using any CAD software.
2. Draw an equilateral triangle of 50mm side by using any CAD software.
3. Draw a pentagon by circumscribe method for a radius of 60mm by using any CAD
software.
4. Draw an ellipse of major and minor axis of 60 & 25mm respectively by using any CAD
software.
PART-B
NOTE: Answer any one questions 1 X 12 = 12marks
5. Draw the following using any CAD software without dimensioning.
6. Draw the following using any CAD software without dimensioning.
98
99
TIME: 1hr Marks:
20M
PART-A
1. Write text ”CAD Lab” with Calibri font style and font size 10 by using any CAD
software.
2. Draw a line of 10mm and divide it into four equal parts by modifying the point style to x
shape.
3. Add continuous dimensions to divided line drawn in Q no. 2 .
4. Draw a pentagon of side 60mm and calculate its area by using any CAD software.
PART-B
5. Draw the following using any CAD software and add dimensioning.
100
101
MODEL PAPER FOR SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
TIME: 2hr Marks:
40M
PART-A
1. Draw the following fig by using any CAD software, change the line type and add
dimensions. Also list the commands used in sequence.
2. Draw the following arrow mark by using any CAD software, and add complete
dimensions.
Also list the commands used in sequence.
.
3. Redraw the following figure and add dimensions as shown in figure.
102
4. Draw isometric view of acube of 100mm side by using any CAD software.
PART-B
5. (a) Draw the following using any CAD software and add dimensioning. 15+5+4 marks
(b) List the commands in sequence and also write the procedure
(c) Add title box containing Student PIN, name and college name
103
6. (a) Draw the following using any CAD software and add dimensioning. 15+5+4 marks
(c) Add title box containing Student PIN, name and college name
104
Course Title: Basic Surveying Lab Practice Course Code : 18C-108P
Semester: I Semester Course Group : Practical

Teaching Scheme in Periods(L:T:P): 15:0:30 Credits : 1.5
Methodology : Lecture+Practical Total Contact Periods : 45Periods
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of Trigonometry and basics of map study
Course Outcomes
CO1 : Apply standard practices to perform different operations of Chain Surveying in the field
CO2 : Plot the traverse and Calculate the areas of the given irregular boundary by different methods of
chain surveying
CO3 : Apply principles and practices of Compass Surveying to perform Traversing in the field
CO4 : Perform and plot the closed traversing using compass and adjust for errors by using Bowditch rule
Course Content
Unit Unit Name Hours/Periods

No
1 Basic operations of Chain Surveying 9

2 Chain Triangulation and areas 18
3 Introduction to Compass Surveying 6
4 Traversing using compass 12
Total 45
Course Contents
UNIT 1: Basic Operations of Chain Surveying Duration: 9 Periods(L:3-P:6)

a) Practice unfolding and folding of a chain.
b) Ranging and chaining of lines on level ground and recording
in field book to measure the distance between two stations.
c) Chaining a line involving indirect ranging.
d) Setting and measuring the offsets-Perpendicular and Oblique
offsets
105
UNIT 2:Chain Triangulation and areas Duration:18 Periods(L:6-P-:12)
a) Measurement of land areas -cross staff survey
b) Chain triangulation around the building covering a small area
with other details taking offsets and recording.
UNIT 3: Introduction to Compass Surveying Duration: 6 Periods(L:2-P:4)

a) Setting up the compass - observations of bearings
b) Calculation of included angles from the observed bearings
UNIT 4: Traversing using Compass Duration: 12 Periods(L:4-P:8)
a) Traversing with prismatic compass and chain - Open Traverse.
b) Traversing with prismatic compass and chain- Closed traverse.
c) Plotting the closed traverse from field data & adjust for closing error-
Bowditch rule.
d) Determination of area bounded by the given points by the method of
Radiation
e) Determination of the distance between two accessible points involving
single setting of the instrument.
Reference Books


1.1 Practice unfolding and folding a chain.
1.2 Perform direct ranging on level ground and measure the distance
between two given stations and record the measurements in the
field book
1.3 Perform indirect ranging and measure the distance between two
given stations when a high ground intervenes to prevent
intervisibility of ends of line.
1.4 Set out a right angle to a given chain line by using chain only.
1.5 Set and measure offsets for a given chain line by
1. Perpendicular offsets 2.Oblique offsets.
106
2.1 Perform triangulation survey of a given area with chain and cross staff and record
all necessary nearby details.
2.2 Calculate the area bounded by the given points by chain triangulation
2.3 Carry out chain survey to overcome obstacles like pond, building.
3.1 Identify the parts of a prismatic Compass

3.2 Set up the compass at a station and carry out temporary adjustments.
3.3 Take bearings of two points from instrument station and calculate the included
angle.
4.1 Perform an open compass survey with Compass and Chain.
4.2 Perform a closed traverse with compass and chain.
4.3 Calculate the included angles of a closed traverse.
4.4 Plot the closed traverse from field data and adjust for closing error by Bowditch
rule.
1.Conduct Chain Triangulation survey around the main building of the institute
2. Compute the area of the given ground by compass survey and plot it
3.Conduct a survey camp to familiarize with practical procedures of Chain and compass survey

Communication
Lifelong learning
Ethics
Basic knowledge
societyEngineer and
Team workIndividual and

practiceExperiments and
ToolsEngineering
KnowledgeDiscipline
Linked PO
CO1 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 1,2,3,4,7,8,9
CO2 2 3 3 3 3 3 1,2,3,4,8,9
CO3 2 3 3 3 3 1,2,3,4,8
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2,3,4,8,9
107
Mid Sem-I Model Question Paper
DCE I semester
Course Code:18C-108P Duration:1 hours
Course Name: Basic Surveying Lab Practice Max.Marks:20 Marks
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Instructions to the Candidate:
(i)Answer any One of the following Questions.
(ii) Plot the details of field work for illustration and conclude your observation of the experiment
1) Carry out unfolding and folding of given chain as per the standard procedure
2) Measure the distance between two stations by ranging and chaining of lines on level
ground and record in field book
3) Find out the distance between given points using indirect ranging
4) Measure the area of given land using cross staff

Mid Semester-II Model Question paper
DCE I semester
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Perform Chain Triangulation survey around the given building and plot the details
2) Conduct Compass Open traversing with a prismatic compass for the given road
3) Conduct Compass Closed traversing with a prismatic compass for the given area and
adjust the closing error
108
Semester End Examination Model Question paper
DCE I semester
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Carry out unfolding and folding of given chain as per the standard procedure
2) Measure the distance between two stations by ranging and chaining of lines on level
ground and record in field book
3) Find out the distance between given points using indirect ranging
4) Measure the area of given land using cross staff
5) Perform Chain Triangulation survey around the given building and plot the details
6) Conduct Compass Open traversing with a prismatic compass for the given road
7) Conduct Compass Closed traversing with a prismatic compass for the given area and
adjust the closing error
8) Calculate the area of given land by method of radiation using prismatic compass
9) Determine the distance between two inaccessible points using compass
109
Basic Science Lab Practice (Physics Lab + Chemistry Lab)
Course Title Basic Science Lab Course Code 18Common-

Practice (Physics Lab + 109P
Chemistry Lab)
Semester I Course Group Practical
Teaching Scheme in 15:0:30 Credits 1.5

Periods (L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact Periods 45
Physics Lab – 109P(A)
Pre requisites: Knowledge of basic concepts of High School Science, Basic Mathematics
Course objectives: To provide practical knowledge about the basics ofPhysics instrumentation
and calculations/measurements.
Lecture and Demonstration: 1 Period
1. Introduction to Physics practical and its importance, safety precautions in maintenance of

equipment in the laboratory.
2. Maintenance of apparatus and equipment.
3. Following Do’s and Don’ts.
4. Maintenance of data in manual and record book.
5. Write the procedure of the experiment before the commencement of each experiment.
6. Strictly following of instructions given from time to time by the lecturer-in-charge.
7. Demonstration of each experiment by the lecturer in charge.
Conduct of an experiment: 2 Periods
Course outcomes:
On successful completion of the course, the student will have ability to:
1. Use Vernier caliper to determine the volumes of objects like cylinder and sphere.
2: use Screw gauge to determine thickness /diameter of small objects like glass plate and wire.
3: prove Boyle’s law employing Quill tube.
4: determine the viscosity of liquid using capillary method.
5: verify the parallelogram law and triangle law of forces.
References:
1. Basic Applied Physics – R.K. Gaur

2. Laboratory manual for class XI and XII - NCERT
110
PHYSICS PRACTICALS
List of experiments
Semester I
1. Vernier calliper - determine the volumes of a cylinder and sphere.

2. Screw gauge - determine thickness of a glass plate and cross section of a wire.
3. Boyle’s law - verification using Quill tube.
4. Coefficient of viscosity of liquid - using capillary method.
5. Parallelogram law and Triangle law of forces – verification.
Course Delivery:
The course will be delivered through lectures, class room interaction, group discussions, graded
exercises, demonstration and practice.
Conduction of experiments: 2 periods/Experiment.
Student must perform experiment individually under the supervision of the lecturer-in charge.
On successful completion of the course, the student will have the ability to attain below Course
outcomes (CO):
Course Outcomes CL Linked Teaching

POs Periods
CO 1 Hands on practice on Vernier Caliper U/A 1,2,3,8,9 L:P::1:2
CO 2 Hands on practice on Screw gauge U/A 1,2,3,8,9 L:P::1:2
CO 3 Boyle’s law verification U/A 1,2,3,8,9 L:P::1:2
CO 4 Coefficient of Viscosity by capillary method U/A 1,2,3,8,9 L:P::1:2
CO 5 Verification of Parallelogram law of forces U/A 1,2,3,8,9
and Triangle law of forces L:P::1:2
CO 6 Relate the answers to the oral questions
Cognitive levels (CL): U=Understand, A=Application
111
Specific learning outcomes:
Name of the Experiment

Competencies Key competencies
1. Hands on practice on Vernier  Find the Least count  Read the scales
 Fix the specimen in position  Calculate the volume
Calipers – Cylinder and sphere  Read the scales of given object
 Calculate the volume of given
object
2. Hands on practice on Screw

 Find the Least count  Read the scales
gauge – Wire and glass plate  Fix the specimen in position  Calculate thickness of
 Read the scales given glass plate
 Calculate thickness of glass plate  Calculate cross section
and cross section of wire of wire
3. Boyle’s law verification – Quill  Find the length of air
tube  Note the atmospheric pressure column
 Fix the quill tube to retort stand  Find the pressure of
 Find the length of air column enclosed air
 Find the pressure of enclosed air  Find the value P x l
 Find and compare the calculated
value P x l
4. Coefficient of viscosity by  Find the least count of vernier  Find the pressure head
capillary  Fix the capillary tube to aspiratory  Calculate rate of
bottle volume of liquid
Method - water  Find the mass of collected water collected
 Find the pressure head
 Find the radius of
 Calculate rate of volume of liquid
collected capillary tube
 Find the radius of capillary tube  Calculate the
 Calculate the viscosity of water viscosity of water
using capillary method
5. Verification of Parallelogram  Fix suitable weights  Find the angle at

law of forces and Triangle law of  Note the positions of threads on equilibrium point
forces drawing sheet  Constructing
 Find the angle at equilibrium point parallelogram
 Construct parallelogram
 Compare the measured diagonal  Construct triangle
 Construct triangle  Compare the ratios of
 Find the length of sides force and length
 Compare the ratios
112
EXAMINATION& EXPERIMENTS
S.NO EXAMINATION EXPERIMENTS

1 MIDSEM-I EXPERIMENT NO 1 & 2
2 MIDSEM-II EXPERIMENT NO 3 & 4
3 SEMESTER END EXAMINATION EXPERIMENT NO 1,2,3,4 and 5
Scheme of Valuation of SEE

S.No Particulars Marks
1. Objective/Aim 01
2. Apparatus/Equipment 02
3. Observations 02
4. Principle including formula 02
5. Experiment (Tabular form, readings, etc) 05
6. Calculation and Result 05
7. Viva Voce 03
Total 20
Chemistry Lab - 109P(B)
Prerequisite:
Knowledge of basic concepts of chemistry of secondary education.
Course Objectives:
To provide practical knowledge about the basics of preparation of chemical solutions and volumetric
analysis of chemical compounds.
Course Outcomes:
On successful completion of the course, the student will have ability to attain CO:
Course Outcome CL Linked PO Teaching

Periods
CO1 Prepare the standard solution. U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::1:2
CO2 Estimate the amount of the chemical U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::1:2
substance in the given sample of
solutions(HCl, NaOH& H2SO4).
CO3 Determination of hardness of water U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::1:2
in the given sample.
CO4 Relate the answers to the oral U/A
questions
U = Understand, A = Application
113
Course Delivery:
The course will be delivered through lectures, classroom interaction, group discussion,
demonstration and practicals.
Conduction of experiments: Lecture 1 period + Experiment 2 periods.
Student must conduct experiment individually under the supervision of the staff-in-charge.

1. Introduction of chemistry practical and its importance, safety precautions in maintenance
of cleanliness and orderliness of chemicals in the laboratory.
3. Follow of DO’s and Don’ts.
4. Maintenance of data in record book.
6. Strict following of instructions given from time to time by the staff-in- charge.
7. Demonstration of each experiment by the staff in charge.
Course content
Volumetric Analysis: (22.5 Periods)
Volumetric analysis by Titrimetric Method:-
Volumetric Analysis -Titration – Standard Solutions- Concentration of solutions-

Indicators- acid base indicators- selection of indicators-endpoint of titration-Neutralization.
List of experiments:
1. Preparation of 0.05M sodium carbonate solution.
2. Estimation of hydrochloric acid present in 250 ml of solution by using
Standard sodium carbonate solution.
3. Estimation of sodium hydroxide present in 250ml of solution by using standard hydrochloric
acid solution.
4. Estimation of sulphuric acid present in 250ml of solution by using standard sodium
hydroxide solution.
5. Determination of total hardness of water sample by 0.02N EDTA solution.

1. Prepare standard sodium carbonate solution.
2. Estimate hydrochloric acid present given volume of solution by using
standard sodium carbonate solution.
3. Estimate sodium hydroxide present in the given volume of solution by using standard
hydrochloric acid solution.
4. Estimate sulphuric acid present in the given volume of solution by using standard sodium
hydroxide solution.
5. Determine the total hardness of water sample by using 0.02N EDTA solution.
Reference Books:
1. Vogel’s Inorganic Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.
2. Practical chemistry by O.P.Pande& others.
3. Qualitative and quantitative analysis by Alex.
114
Scheme of Valuation for MID I & II and SEE
Sl. No. Particulars Marks
1 Identification of apparatus/equipment/chemical 2
compounds/tools/etc.
2 Writing Procedure 5
3 Conducting of experiment 4
4 Observation and Results 6
5 Viva-voice 3
Total 20
115
C-18 COMMON-109P

MIDSEM – I
BASIC SCIENCE LAB PRACTICE
Instructions: (1) Answer both PART-A AND PART-B on separate answer sheets.
(2) Each question carries TEN marks.
PART-A (PHYSICS LAB)
Perform ONE experiment allotted by the examiner. 1 x 10 = 10
1. Find the volume of given sphere using Vernier caliper.

2. Find the volume of given cylinder using Vernier caliper.
3. Determine the thickness of given glass plate using Screw gauge.
4. Find the cross sectional area of given wire using Screw gauge.
PART-B (CHEMISTRY LAB)
5. Prepare 250 ml of 0.05M sodium carbonate solution.

6. Estimate the amount of hydrochloric acid present in 500 ml of the given solution using 0.02M
sodium carbonate solution.
116
C-18 COMMON-109P

MIDSEM – II
1. Verify Boyle’s law using Quill tube.

2. Determine coefficient of viscosity of water using capillary method.
3. Estimate the amount of NaOH present in 500 ml solution using 0.02M HCl solution
4. Find the Molarity and estimate the amount of Sulphuric acid present in 250 ml solution using
0.01M NaOH solution.
C18 – COMMON 109P
117
MODEL PAPER
COMMON – I SEMESTER END EXAMINATION

(2) Each question carries TWENTY marks.
1. Find the volume of given sphere using Vernier caliper.

2. Find the volume of given cylinder using Vernier caliper.
3. Determine the thickness of given glass plate using Screw gauge.
4. Find the cross sectional area of given wire using Screw gauge.
5. Verify Boyle’s law using Quill tube.
6. Determine coefficient of viscosity of water using capillary method.
7. Verify parallelogram law of forces.
8. Verify triangle law of forces.
9. Prepare 250 ml of 0.05M sodium carbonate solution.

12. Find the Molarity and estimate the amount of NaOH present in 100 ml of the given solution
using 0.01M HCl solution.
13. Estimate the amount of Sulphuric acid present in a litre of solution using 0.01M NaOH
solution.
14. Determine the total hardness of the given water sample using 0.02N EDTA solution
118
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS LAB PRACTICE
Course Title :COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS LAB Course Code :18C-110P

PRACTICE Course Group :Practical
Semester :I Credits :1.5
Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P) :15:0:30 Total Contact Periods : 45 Pds
Methodology: Tutorial + Practicals SEE :40 Marks
CIE :60 Marks
Prerequisites
Knowledge of English comprehension , Basic Computer operation and IO devices.
Course Outcome
On successful completion of the course, the students will be able to attain below Course Outcome
(CO):
Course Outcome CL Linked PO Teaching Hours
CO1 Identify hardware and software components R,U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 5
and work with DOS OS
CO2 Operate the computer system with Windows OS R,U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15
CO3 Access the internet R,U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 5
CO4 Draft the documents using word processing R,U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 20
software
Total Sessions 45
Legends: R = Remember U= Understand; A= Apply and above levels (Bloom’s revised taxonomy)
Course Contents
COMPUTER BASICS
1. Identify the various components of a Computer system

2. Differentiate between hardware and software
3. State the configuration of a computer system
4. Practice on DOS Internal and External commands.
5. Create and use Batch Files.
6. Know the usage of Editors.
WINDOWS Operating System
7. Exercise on creation of text Files using Notepad, WordPad

8. Exercise on creation of .jpeg, .bmp files using MS Paint
9. Exercise how to use calculator
10. Exercise on creation of folders and organizing files in different folders
11. Exercise on use of Recycle Bin, My Computer and My Documents
12. Exercise on creation of shortcut to files and folders (in other folders) on Desktop
13. Exercise on arranging of icons – name wise, size, type, Modified
14. Exercise on searching, accessing and organizing files / folders
15. Change resolution, colour, appearance, screen server options of Display, date and time
INTERNET
16. Importance of web browser software
17. Structure of URL
18. Create an E-mail account
119
19. Send & Receive an E-mail
20. Browse the Internet using various search engines
WORD Processing Software
21. Open MS-word and Identify the components on the screen

22. Create a document using MS-word and save it.
23. Create a table using MS-Word and save it.
24. Apply formulas in table & sort the table
25. Convert text into table & table into text.
26. Insertion of new rows and columns in the existing table and changing background colour in
Table
27. Merge and split cells in a Table
28. Change the font of a text
29. Exercise with Headers and Footers, paragraph tool bar
30. Insert objects into the document like pictures, shapes, charts, and word-art.
31. Printing a document , page setting, different views of a document
32. Import & export files to & from Word.
33. Create a letter and send to multiple users using mail merge tool of MS-word
34. Create a Simple Newsletter with minimum three columns. Insert a Clip Art in the Newsletter.
35. Create a Resume for a Job Application.
36. Create the Cover Page of a Project Report (use Word Art, insert Picture Image).
37. Prepare the class time table of your class.
Resources:
1. Computer Fundamentals Concepts, Systems, Application, D.P. Nagapal, S. Chand
Publication, RP-2014, ISBN: 81-219-2388-3
2. http://www.tutorialsforopenoffice.org/
3. http://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/documentation/
Software Tool
Any open source tool or equivalent proprietary tools
Composition of Educational Components:
Questions for CIE and SEE will be designed to evaluate the various educational components
(Bloom’s taxonomy) such as:
Sl. No. Bloom’s Category %

1 Remembrance 20
2 Understanding 20
3 Application 60
120
Mapping Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes:
(Course Outcome linkage to Cognitive Level)
Course Outcome Experiment Linked Linked PO CL Lab

Sessions
CO1 Identify hardware and software 1,2,3,4,5,6 1,2,3,4,8,9,1 R, U, A 5
components and work with 0
DOS OS
CO2 Operate the computer system 7,8,9,10,11,12,13, 1,2,3,4,8,9,1 R, U, A 15
with Windows OS 14,15 0
CO3 Access the internet 16,17,18,19,20 1,2,3,4,8,9,1 R,U, A 5
0
CO4 Draft the documents using word 21,22,23,24,25,26, 1,2,3,4,8,9,1 U, A 20
processing 27,28,29,30,31,32, 0
software 33,34,35,36,37
U-Understanding; A-application/ Analysis; App-Application
Student Activity
1. Observe newspaper pattern of printing.
2. Submit a report of one page
3. Collection of data
Internal Assessment
Activity Marks
Writing the experiment, record evaluation 30
Execution of the given experiment 20
Viva-voce 10
Total 60
Model Question Bank
1. Identify Physical components of a Computer System.

2. Demonstrate Internal and External DOS Commands and differentiate between them.
3. Create and Rename the file using DOS Commands.
4. Create a directory and copy a file inside the directory using DOS Commands.
5. Demonstrate the basic formatting features in Text Editors.
6. Create two file in a folder and place the shortcut of these files on the desktop.
7. Demonstrate how search engine may be used in browsing Internet.
8. Create an E-mail account
9. Create and Send an E-mail with a picture attachment.
10. Demonstrate how documents can be downloaded using Internet.
11. Using Word Processor Application create a Simple Newsletter with minimum of three
columns. Insert a Clip art in the newsletter.
12. Using Word Processor Application create a Resume for a Job application.
13. Using Word Processor Application create the cover page of a Project Report (use
Word Art, insert Picture Image).
14. Prepare the class time table for your class using Word Processor Applica
121
C-18 DCE I SEMESTER
Course Title: Skill Upgradation Course Code :
Semester: I Semester Course Group : Practical
Type of Course : Practicals Total Contact Periods : 105Periods
SKILL UPGRADATION ACTIVITIES
1. Conduct chain survey around the college and plot the details and give Power
Point Presentation.
2. Prepare a presentation on survey for construction of compound wall around
the college.
3. Conduct compass survey in the college and plot the details in AUTOCAD
and give demonstration through PPT.
4. Prepare a presentation in MS Excel on available and required facilities in the
college as per the guidelines laid down in AICTE Hand Book.
5. Prepare a presentation explaining the concepts of Heat and Thermodynamics
in the subject of Physics.
6. Prepare a model to carry out the purification of water supplied in the college.
7. Listen to passages/ conversations/ dialogues/ speeches and answer the
questions to improve the listening skills.
8. Read out a selected text/ an excerpt from a newspaper depicting an incident
to enhance the reading skills
9. Read aloud the selected text with proper pronunciation and intonation to
improve the accent of the language.
10.Perform the following vocabulary games:
i) Cross words
ii) Guessing the missing letter
iii) Dumb charades
122
11.Visit the library to refer Standard Books on Mathematics and collect related
material pertaining to Inverse of a Matrix and Hyperbolic functions in
Trigonometry.
12.Make a visit to the library to refer Text books, reference books and manuals
to find their specifications.
13.Student inspects the available equipment in the Physics Laboratory and
prepares a report on functioning of the equipment and accessories along with
the details regarding repairs to be carried out.
14.Student inspects the available equipment in the Chemistry Laboratory to
familiarize with the methods of preparing standard solutions for specific
experiments.
15.Prepare a presentation to explain Logarithms.
16.Prepare a list of articles purchased from a super market and arrange in a
matrix form to compute the total amount using matrix multiplication.
17.Prepare a presentation to resolve a Partial fraction into simpler fractions.
18.Prepare a presentation stating the applications of Trigonometry.
19.List the methods to solve system of equations using Matrices and
Determinants. Describe their features.
20.Visit the library, refer books on Mathematics and collect the details related
to two Mathematicians.
21.Prepare a presentation to solve a triangle ABC in different cases.
22.Prepare a list of available reference books in Physics with details such as
author, publisher, edition etc.
23.Prepare a list of Physics/Science journals, magazines, monographs with
details.
24.Prepare a log book of your visits to college library with brief description.
25.Discover some physical equations and apply principle of homogeneity.
123
26.Visit your College Physics laboratory. Collect equal amounts (mass in gm)
of water and mercury. Calculate the density of each in CGS units. Express
them in SI system of units using dimensional analysis. Infer the result.
27.Identify the bodies which have rolling objects like wheels, ball bearings.
Prepare a chart with drawings and explain the importance of rolling friction.
28.Identify the objects where you apply various methods of reducing friction.
Make each method as a module to one individual. Integrate all modules and
generate a chart with brief explanation by the use of drawings.
29.Take two vectors with varying angles of inclination. Find the resultant using
triangle law of vector addition by drawing the vectors in each case on a
graph paper. Draw the conclusions. Correlate the result using parallelogram
law of vector addition.
30.Three forces F1, F2 and F3 are acting on a body with an angles θ1, θ2, and
θ3 with the horizontal respectively. Calculate the resultant force acting on
that body. Draw the diagram.
31.Survey the places where curved paths are banked. Take photographs and
reconstruct on the chart. Prepare a report.
32.Verify Hooke’s Law by performing experiment using weights, spring and
ruler.
33.Explore the internet. Prepare a power point report on surface tension and
wetting.
34.Construct a model thermometer having centigrade scale and absolute scale
with the help of available simple objects. Formulate the method of
development.
35.Debate on green house effect and global warming. Justify the advantage of
green house effect. Prepare a video clip and power point report with
diagrams.
36.Design a mini wind mill as an application of conversion of energy.
124
37.Oral/Power point presentation on the different types of orbitals and
electronic configuration:
Step-1: Data collection on orbitals and rules to be followed to write the
electronic configuration.
Step -2: Prepare for a oral/power point presentation on shapes of orbitals
and electronic configuration
Step-3: Explain the electronic configuration with oral presentation or
power point presentation
Step-4: Submission of the report.
38.Oral/Power point presentation on ionic and covalent bonding:

Step-1: Data collection on electronic configuration and chemical bonding.
Step -2: Prepare for a oral/power point presentation on ionic and covalent
bonding
Step-3: Explain the ionic and covalent bonding with oral presentation or
power point presentation
Step-4: Submit the report along with ppt.
39.Preparation and study of physical properties of True Solution, Colloidal

Solution, and Suspension
Step-1: Data/ literature collection.
Step-2: Summarization of data collected.
Step -3: Preparation/ collection of true solution, colloidal solution and
suspension
Step-4: Recording of observations and comparison of physical properties
like Nature of the solutions, Diffusion of the solution, Sedimentation,
Visibility of particles, Tyndall effect.
Step-5: Overall presentation of the activity
40.Study of the acidic, basic or neutral nature of water sample collected from
various sources.
Step-2: Summarization of data/ literature collected.
Step -3: Collection of water samples from various sources.
Step-4: Recording the pH values of different water samples by using
universal indicator, pH paper, pH meter etc.
41. Comparison of renewable and non renewable energy sources.

Step -3: Comparison of renewable and non renewable energy sources
available.
125
Step-4: Identify the advantages of renewable energy sources over non
renewable energy sources in protecting the environment.
42.Study and analysis of ecosystem (lake, pond etc) existing in your

surroundings.
Step -3: Study of the biotic and abiotic components and effect of the
pollutants if any on them.
Step-4: Prepare a report on the selected ecosystem and suggest measures
to protect it from pollution.
43.Study of bio diversity in your surroundings.

Step -3: Study of the biodiversity in your surroundings, understand its
advantages and threats that affect the bio diversity.
Step-4: Prepare a report on the selected bio diversity and suggest measures
to protect it.
44.Importance of forests resources.

Step -3: Study of the nearby forest area.
Step-4: Prepare a report on the forest selected and report its importance
and resources.
45.Importance of osmosis and reverse osmosis.

Step -3: Demonstrate the process of osmosis and reverse osmosis by using
any semi permeable membrane .
Step-4: Prepare a report on the advantages of osmosis and reverse
osmosis.
46.Method of purification of drinking water adopted at your residence .

126
Step -3: Explanation of the process through oral presentation or power
point presentation
Step-4: Prepare a report on the advantages of the process.
47.Oral/Power point presentation on the softening of water by different methods

and comparison.
Step -3: Explain the process and compare them with the help of power
point presentation.
Step-4: Submit the report.
48.Study of electrolytes and non electrolytes .

Step -3: Differentiate the electrolyte from non electrolyte through the process
of electrolysis.
Step-4: Prepare a report on electrolytes and non electrolytes.
Note:
1.The above activities are indicative. The teacher may assign any
other activity relevant to the course based on resources available.
2. Rubrics for student activities can be generated by subject teacher
3. The above student activities will be assessed using rubrics. A

sample rubrics template is given below. The subject teacher can
assess students using rubrics with atleast four relevant aspects.
127
Rubrics for Activity assessment(in Mathematics)
CATEGORY 4 3 2 1
Explanation Explanation Explanation shows
shows substantial shows some very limited
Explanation shows complete
understanding of understanding of understanding of the
Mathematical understanding of the
the mathematical the mathematical underlying concepts
Concepts mathematical concepts used
concepts used to concepts needed needed to solve the
to solve the problem(s).
solve the to solve the problem(s) OR is not
problem(s). problem(s). written.
Sometimes uses
Typically, uses an
an effective
Typically, uses an efficient effective Rarely uses an
procedure to
Procedures and effective procedure to procedure to effective procedure to
solve problems,
solve the problem(s). solve the solve problems.
but does not do it
problem(s).
consistently.
Explanation is a Explanation is
little difficult to difficult to understand
Explanation is detailed and Explanation is
Explanation understand, but and is missing several
clear. clear.
includes critical components OR was
components. not included.
Student was an
Student was an engaged Student
engaged partner
partner, listening to cooperated with Student did not work
Working with but had trouble
suggestions of others and others, but needed effectively with
Others listening to others
working cooperatively prompting to stay others.
and/or working
throughout lesson. on-task.
cooperatively.
Almost all (85-

Most (75-84%) of
89%) of the steps More than 75% of the
90-100% of the steps and the steps and
Mathematical and solutions steps and solutions
solutions have no solutions have no
Errors have no have mathematical
mathematical errors. mathematical
mathematical errors.
errors.
errors.
128
Rubrics for Activity assessment (in Physics)
Type of
4 3 2 1
Skill/Score
All All
All Data/Material
All Data/Material was Data/Material Data/Material
Data/Material was collected one
collected more than one was collected was collected
Collection time
time independently. several times several times
independently.
independently. with assistance.
Procedures
were outlined
Procedures were Procedures that
Procedures were outlined in a step-by-
outlined in a step- were outlined
in a step-by-step fashion step fashion,
by-step fashion were incomplete
that could be followed by but had 1 or 2
Methodology/ that could be or not
anyone without additional gaps that
Procedure followed by sequential, even
explanations. Expert help require
anyone without after Expert
was needed to accomplish explanation
additional feedback had
this. even after
explanations. been given.
expert
feedback.
Skill is present
Activity/ Quality of Skill is Skill is mastered to the Skill needs
but with errors
Development high. level of expectation. improvement.
and omissions.
Student
Student provided a Student provided a provided a
Interpretation/ No conclusion
detailed conclusion somewhat detailed conclusion
summary was apparent.
clearly. conclusion clearly. with some
reference.
NOTE: The above types of skills are indicative. The teacher may change the skills
depending on type of activity.
129
Rubrics for Activity assessment(in General Engineering Chemistry)
S. Sub Performance
No activity excellent Good Satisfactory Need
improvement
Data was collected from Data was Data was Data was
more than four sources. collected from collected from collected only
1 Step-1
three to four two sources. one source.
sources
All materials and data Almost all The materials The materials
required for the activity materials and data and data and data
were accurately prepared required for the required for the required for
based on the data collected activity were activity were the activity
independently. accurately accurately were
2 Step-2
prepared based on prepared based inaccurately
the data collected on the data prepared
independently. collected with
the help of
teacher.
Procedures were outlined in Procedures were Procedures that Procedures that
a step-by-step fashion that outlined in a step- outlined were outlined were
could be followed by by-step fashion, complete with 1 not sequential,
anyone & performed the require or 2 gaps and & performed
3 Step-3 activity effectively. explanation & require the activity in a
performed the explanation & poor way
activity performed the
effectively. activity
normally
Presented/ explained the Presented/ Presented/ Presented/
information about the explained the explained the explained the
activity in logical, information about information information
interesting sequence with the activity in about the about the
4 Step-4 attractive visuals or logical sequence activity in activity
diagrams. with visuals or logical sequence without
diagrams. with less visuals sequence and
or diagrams. visuals or
diagrams.
Provided a detailed Provided a Student Conclusions
Conclu
conclusion/ summary conclusion / provided a /summary was
sion /
5 clearly based on the data summary clearly conclusion/ not relevant.
summa
and activity based on the data summary less
ry
and activity effectively
Note: Separate rubrics may be prepared according to the activity.
130
RUBRICS MODEL (For assessing Presentation skills)
Needs
Aspects Satisfactory Good Exemplary
improvement
Collect much Collects
Collects very Collects a
Information with some basic
Collection limited great deal of
very information with
of data information information with
limited relevance little bit of
relevance
to the topic irrelevance
Presents data Presents data in
Clumsy well; but Presents data an
Presentation
presentation of presentation well but need to understandable
of data
data needs to be more improve clarity yet concise
meaningful manner
Performs all
Fulfill Performs very Performs very Performs
duties of
team’s roles little duties but little duties and nearly all
assigned
& duties Unreliable. is inactive duties
team roles
Rarely does Usually does Always does
Normally
Shares the assigned the assigned the assigned
does the
work work; often work; rarely work without
assigned
equally needs needs having to be
work
reminding reminding reminded
Usually does Talks good;
Interaction Listens, but
most of the but never Listens and
with sometimes
talking; rarely show interest speaks a fair
other team talks too
allows others in listening to amount
mates much
to speak others
Audibility and Very little Audible most of
Hardly audible Audible and
clarity in audibility and the time with
and unclear clear
speech clarity clarity
Some depth of
Lacks content Insight and
Little depth of content
Understanding understanding depth of content
content understanding is
content and is clearly a understanding
understanding evident but needs
work in progress are evident
improvement
Content is Content is Content is
inaccurate and accurate and accurate but
Content is
information is information is some information
accurate and
Content not presented in not presented in is not presented
information is
Presentation a logical order a logical order in a logical order
presented in a
making it making it but is still
logical order
difficult to difficult to generally easy to
follow follow follow
131
Suggested additional aspects for assessing Leadership Qualities:
1. Carrying self
2. Punctuality
3. Team work abilities
4. Moral values
5. Communication skills
6. Ensures the work is done in time
Suggested additional aspects for assessing “Participation in social task”
1 Interested to know the current situation of society.

2 Shows interest to participate in given social task.
3 Reliable
4 Helping nature
5 Inter personal skills
6 Ensures task is completed
Suggested additional aspects for assessing “Participation in Technical task”
1. Updated to new technologies

2. Identifies problems in society that can be solved using technology
3. Interested to participate in finding possible technical solutions to
identified project
4. Reliable
5. Interpersonal skills
Suggested additional aspects for Carrying Self:
1 Stand or sit straight.

2 Keep your head level.
3 Relax your shoulders.
4 Spread your weight evenly on both legs.
5 If sitting, keep your elbows on the arms of your chair, rather than tightly
against your sides.
6 Make appropriate eye contact while communicating.
7 Lower the pitch of your voice.
8 Speak more clearly.
132
II SEMESTER
133
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME
II SEMESTER
Sl Course Course Name Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme

N Code
Instruction Total Credits Continuous internal Semester end examination
o
Periods Periods evaluation
per per
week semest
er
L T P Mid Mid Internal Max Min Total Min marks
sem1 sem evaluatio Marks Marks Marks for Passing
2 n including
internal
18C- Advanced English
1 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
201F
Engineering
18C- Mmathematics
2 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
202F
18C Applied Physics

3 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
203F
EngineeringChemistry&
18C- Environmental studies
4 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
204F
18C- Levelling Surveying

5 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
205C
Advanced Engineering
18C- Drawing
6 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
206P
18C- Advanced Computer

7 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
207P Aided Drafting
Levelling Surveying
18C- Lab Practice
8 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
208P
18C-
Applied Science Lab
9 209P- 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
Practice
A+B
Information Technology
18C- LabPractice
10 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
210P
11 Skill Upgradation 0 0 7 105 2.5 0 0 Rubrics -
20 5 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 170 1000 425
Activities: student performance is to be assessed through Rubrics
134
Advanced English
Course Title :Advanced English Course Code : 18 C-201F
Semester : II Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P:) : Credits :3
45:15:00
Methodology : Communicative Language Total Contact Periods : 60 periods
Lecture + Tutorial
Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of English Language

COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the students will have the ability to:
201.1 communicate effectively in English
201.2 listen for specific details and use prepositions appropriately.
201.3 learn vocabulary and use them in professional interaction
201.4 analyse errors and make communication flawless
201.5 comprehend central idea and minute details
201.6 make notes, write resumes, prepare cover letters and draft reports
CO-PO Matrix
CO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 Mapping POs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
201. 2 2 2 -- 1 -- -- 3 3 3 1,2,3,5,8,9,10
1
201. 2 2 1 2 -- -- -- 3 3 3 1,2,3,4,8,9,10
2
201. 2 2 -- 1 1 1 2 3 3 3 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,1
3 0
201. 2 2 2 2 1 -- 2 3 3 3 1,2,3,4,5,7,8,9,1
4 0
201. 2 2 2 -- 1 -- 2 3 3 3 1,2,3,57,8,9,10
5
201. 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- 3 3 3 1,2,8,9,10
6
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – 1 SPEAKING Duration: 12 Periods

1. Expressing Obligation
2. Fixing and Cancelling Appointments
3. Extending and Accepting Invitations
135
4. Giving Instructions
5. Asking for and Giving Directions
UNIT - 2: LISTENING Duration: 6 Periods

6. The Here and Now!
UNIT –3: VOCABULARY Duration: 8 Periods

7. How to Learn a New Word
8. Synonyms, Antonyms and One word Substitutes
UNIT -4: GRAMMAR Duration: 12 Periods

9. Reported Speech
10. Error Analysis - I
11. Error Analysis - II
12. Error Analysis - III
UNIT - 5: READING Duration: 6 Periods
13. An Environmental challenge

14. The Will to Succeed
15. Waiting for Mr. Clean
UNIT- 6: WRITING Duration: 16 Periods

16. Data Interpretation- I
17. Data Interpretation- II
18. Data Interpretation- III
19. Writing a Resume
20. Writing a Cover Letter
21. Note Making
22. Writing a Report
Suggested Learning Outcomes:
On completion of the course the students will be able to:
136
 express obligation, fix and cancel appointments
 extend, accept and decline invitations.
 give instructions and directions
 identify and use prepositions
 enhance their vocabulary
 learn synonyms, antonyms and use one word substitutes
 read and understand main ideas and answer the questions
 write in reported speech
 identify and correct common errors
 interpret data and write a paragraph
 learn to prepare cover letter and resume
 make notes and write reports
Internal evaluation
Test Units Marks Pattern
Mid Sem 1 Speaking 20 Part A 4short answer questions

Listening Part B 2 short essay questions with internal
choice
Mid Sem 2 Vocabulary 20 Part A 4short answer questions
Grammar Part B 2 short essay questions with internal
choice
Slip Test 1 Speaking 5 2 questions out of 3 questions
Listening
Slip Test 2
Vocabulary 5 2 questions out of 3 questions
Grammar
Assignment One assignment per 5 Different group assignments of higher order
one semester questions that develop problem solving
skills and critical thinking should be given
Seminars One seminar per one 5 Oral presentations using audio –visual
semester equipment, charts, etc.
Total 60

 Listen to a passage /conversation / dialogue / speech and answer the questions
 Group Discussions
137
 Seminars
 Review a movie
 Review a book
 Narrating a story
 Chain stories
 JAM
 Speak about incidents/events/memories/dreams/role model
 Interview with famous personalities
 Reading for main ideas and specific details
 Summarizing
 Picture description
 Writing a recipe
 Describing a process
 Giving directions using maps
 Surveys
 Filling forms
 e-mail etiquette
 Preparing reports on field visits, experiments, projects
Textbook: English for Polytechnics

(English Textbook for the First-Year Diploma Students)
REFERENCES:
1. Practical English Grammar by A.J Thomson and A.V. Martinet
2. A Course in Phonetics and Spoken English by J. Sethi and P.V Dhamija
3. Word Power Made Easy by Norman Lewis
4. Keep Talking by Friederike Klippel
5. More Grammar Games by Mario Rinvolucri and Paul Davis
6. Essential English Grammar by Raymond Murphy
7. Spoken English-A Self Learning Guide to Conversation Practice by V Sasi Kumar
e-learning:
1.www.duolingo.com
2. www.bbc.co.uk
3. www.babbel.com
4. www.merriam-webster.com
5. www.ello.org
6. www.lang-8.com
7. youtube.com
8. Hello English(app)
138
9. mooc.org
10. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in
MID SEM-I EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
139
Legend:
140
SECOND SEMESTER COMMON-201F
ADVANCED ENGLISH
MID SEM - I
PART-A 4X1=4
Instructions: Answer all thequestions. Each question carries one mark.
1. I strongly recommend you to read this novel. (Rewrite the sentence using suitable
words of obligation).
2. Invite your friend to attend a seminar on Yoga.
3. Fill in the blanks using suitable prepositions.
a. I usually go to polytechnic _______ foot.
b. Suman has been suffering ___________ malaria.
4. Fill in the blanks using suitable preposition.

a. She is jealous ______________ her best friend.
b. Madhu jumped__________ the well.
PART-B 2X3=6
Instructions: Answer the followingquestions. Each question carries three marks.
5. a) Extend an invitation to your friend to attend your brother’s marriage and write
expressions showing his/her acceptance or inability.
Or
b) Give directions to your sister on how to reach the nearest branch office of State
Bank of India from your house.
6. a) Give directions to your house from polytechnic using at least three prepositions.
Or
b) Complete the paragraph using suitable prepositions.
We went _____the zoo ____ Sunday. We saw a python ____ a branch of a tree.
There were several parrots _______ the cages. In the zoo, we boarded a train
that passed __________ a tunnel. There we saw a lion going ______ its cave.
PART-C 2 X 5 = 10
141
7. a) Write on how to send an image from your mobile to another mobile number using
WhatsApp.
Or
b) Write a dialogue to fix an appointment with an orthopedic surgeon on 5th January
at
10.00 a.m.
8. a) Use the following words or phrases in your own sentences.
i) across ii)against iii) in front of iv) since v) along
Or
b) Correct the words in italics.
i. I’ve got the key on my pocket.
ii. She was sitting among her two friends.
iii. There is a tree besides the house.
iv. I was born in Monday.
v. He came in the room.
142
SECOND SEMESTER COMMON-201F
ADVANCED ENGLISH
MID SEM - II
PART - A 4X 1 = 4
Instructions: Answer all thequestions. Each question carries one mark.
5. Write the synonym and antonym of lazy.

6. Write any two different forms of the word, ‘beauty’.
7. Rewrite the following making necessary corrections.
a) She travelled to her village every week.
b) Raghu returned the money back.
8. Change as directed.
a) Sita said, “She is a teacher.” (Change it into indirect speech)
b) He told me that she was going to market. (Change it into direct speech.)
PART-B 2 X 3=6
9. a. Write down the one word substitutes of the following.

a) A person who does not believe in God.
b) The study of planets.
c) A person who loves reading books.
(Or)
b. Write antonyms for the words in italics.
My friend Rani is young and attractive. She is very sharp and loves to eat fresh
food.
10. a. Rewrite the following making necessary corrections.

I go to college everyday by walk. I am getting up late every morning. I work very
hardly.
(Or)
b.Change the following as directed.
i. He said to her, “I will teach you Chemistry today.” (Change it into

Reported speech)
ii. She said to him, “Take me to Central Library now.” (Change it into
reported speech)
iii. Gopal said to Mamatha, “ Please lend me your calculator.”
PART-C 2 X 5 = 10
143
11. a) What are the five aspects you learnwhen you learn a new word?
(Or)
b) Suggest any five ways to improve your vocabulary.

12. a) Rewrite the following making necessary changes.
a. My luggage were in the store room.
b. The teacher stressed on the importance of team work.
c. My friend and I gone for a movie.
d. The team is loving the food.
e. I have three son –in –laws.
(Or)
b) Rewrite the following sentences as directed.
i. He said that he was not feeling well. (Change to direct speech).
ii. Amala said that she would visit us the next day. (Change to direct speech).
iii. She said that their team had won the match. (Change to direct speech).
iv. The teacher said, “Australia is an island.” (Change to reported speech).
v. She says, “They will help us.” (Change to reported speech).
144
SECOND SEMESTER 18 COMMON-201F
ADVANCED ENGLISH
SEMESTER END EXAM
Time : 2 Hours Total Marks: 40 Marks
PART-A 8X1=8
Instructions: Answer all questions.
Each question carries one mark.
1. Fill in the blanks with appropriate prepositions.
a) They went___ a walk.
b) He went to college____bus.
2. Write one word substitutes for the given meanings.
a) Study of planets.
b) Something that cannot be heard.
3. What will you write under achievementssecton in your resume?
2. Fill in the blanks with words of obligation.
a) I ____wear a helmet when I drive a two wheeler.
b) We ____- respect our elders.
5. Answer the questions given in 5 and 6 after reading the passage,
Mammals are among the most successful animals to have lived. Because they are warm
blooded, they can survive in almost any environment. To take advantage of different
environments mammals have evolved different body shapes.
a) Why do mammals have different body shapes?
6. How can mammals survive in any environment?
3. Make notes for the given passage.
About 40 million years ago new kinds of primates — monkeys and apes—- began to take
over lemurs. Today, there are two groups of monkeys: the old world monkeys which live
in Africa and Asia and the New world monkeys which live only in Central America.
145
1. Write a short paragraph
based on the flowchart
given.
Finding a
lost Item
Part -B 3 X4 = 12
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks.
9.(a) Invite a celebrity to your college sports day. The celebrity accepts your invitation.
Write a conversation.
(Or)
(b) Answer the questions after reading the passage
There are almost 2,400 species of snake. From the 20 cm long thread snake to the gaint
anaconda, which can reach 36 feet. Snakes have many colours, patterns and ways of killing
their prey. They eat everything from ants, eggs , snails to animals as big as goats.
1. What is the largest snake?
2. What do snakes eat?
3. Are all snakes similar?
10(a). Write three things you learn when you learn a new word?
146
OR
10 (b) Write a paragraph based on the tree diagram
11. (a). Read the following passage and answer the questions given in 11 a or 11 b
Humans communicate with each other everyday using sounds and body movements .Most
commonly , we share information about the world around us through spoken languages.
These are in special sounds we make to represent objects, actions, numbers, colours and other
features. We use our brains to remember words, put them in the correct order and make the
larynx, or voice ,box,produce the correct sounds. If a person is unable to speak they can
communicate by using sign language. We also have written and pictorial languages.
1. How do human beings communicate?
2. What is the larynx?
3. When do we use sign language?
(Or)
(b) 1. What do we use to remember words?
2. How do we share information?
3. What are some forms of communication mentioned in the passage ?
12 (a).Make notes for the given passage
147
Sleep is as important to healthy life style as eating and exercising. On an average healthy
adult requires just over eight hours of sleep at night. Yet polls show that the increasing
numbers of people are suffering from sleep disorder or significant sleep loss. A study shows
that 29% of Indians sleep only after midnight and 61% slept for seven hours or less. Sleep is
crucial to maintain one’s health. Without it, you increase your susceptibility to a wide range
of health problems .including heart disease, stroke, diabetes, obesity and depression. Not
sleeping enough can affect the immune system. The immune system works when you are
asleep. That is when natural killer cells are generated in the bone marrow. These killer cells
help in protecting the body against the viruses, bacteria and even cancer.
(Or)
12 (b) Write a paragraph based on the table given
Apes Country Habitat

Orangutan Sumatra live in trees
Gorilla Africa live on ground
Chimpanzee Africa live on ground
Part-C 5X4=20M
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries 5 marks.
13(a) Take an appointment with a doctor for your grandmother.
(Or)
(b) Read the passage and answer the questions.
Reading skills are considered the most important tools for academic success. Printed
materials serve as a source of information and entertainment. Reading is an important activity
in life with which one can update one’s knowledge . Speech precedes reading and reading is
the input for writing. Reading is an active process which involves recognition and
comprehension. A reader can understand a text only when he or she uses his or her mental
faculties. A reader should have the knowledge of the writing system, the knowledge of the
language , the ability to interpret , the knowledge of the world, a reason for reading and a
reading style.
1. What are the advantages of reading?
2. What comes before reading?
148
3. What does the process of reading involve?
4. What are the inputs required by a reader to read something?
5. What is the purpose of printed information?
14(a). Correct the following sentences.

1. My friend like me very much.
2. This is the best if the two.
3. He sat among the two girls.
4. He is running daily.
5. This is the boy which won the race.
OR
(b) Write a cover letter applying for the post of a software engineer at an MNC.
15 ( a). Read the given passage and answer questions given in 15 a or 15 b
The first elephants were pig-sized creatures without tusks or trunks that lived in Northern
Africa about 150 million years ago. Today there are only two species of elephant: the Indian
Elephant and the African elephant - the largest mammal living on land. Both species live in
family groups, which sometimes join to from herds of hundreds of animals. Elephants spend
upto twenty on hours a day eating as much as 320kgs of leaves ,bark , fruit and grass. An
adult elephant needs to drink 90 litres of water a day. Elephants travel through forests on
traditional paths called elephants’ roads .These intelligent animals have good memories and
can live for more than 60 years. Both Indian and African elephants are endangered because
humans take over their habitats for farming and poachers kill them for their tusks.
1. What is the largest mammal on land?

2. What is an elephant road?
3. Which word in the passage means home?
4. Do elephants live alone?
5. Why are elephants killed?
(Or)
(b)
1. What do elephants eat?
2. How long does an elephant live?
3. Who is putting elephants in danger?
4. What was the size of the first elephants?
5. Elephants have tusks and_______.
16(a). Write your resume for the post of an Assistant Engineer at TESCO Company.
(Or)
149
(b) Write a report about an industry you visited
150
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
Course Title : ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS Course Code : 18C-202F

SEMESTER : II Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme ( L : T : P ) : 45 :15 : 0 ( in Credits : 3 Credits
Periods )
Pre requisites:
This course requires the basic knowledge of Algebra, Trigonometry in Mathematics at Secondary
school level and Basic Engineering Mathematics at Diploma 1 st Semester level
CO 1 Formulate the equations of Straight Line, Circle and Conic Sections

CO 2 Evaluate the Limits of different Functions
CO 3 Determine the Derivatives of Various Functions
CO 4 Find the Successive Derivatives and Partial Derivatives of Functions
CO 5 Use Differentiation in Geometrical and Physical Applications
CO 6 Use Differentiation for finding Maxima and Minima.
Course Contents:
Co-ordinate geometry
Unit – I Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
1. Straight lines: Write the different forms of a straight line – point slope form, two point
form, intercept form, normal form and general form - Find distance of a point from a line, acute
angle between two lines, intersection of two non-parallel lines and distance between two parallel
lines - perpendicular distance from a point to a line - Solve simple problems on the above forms
2. Circle:Define locus of a point, circle and its equation. Find equation of the Circle given (i) Centre
and radius, (ii) two ends of a diameter (iii) Centre and a point on the circumference (iv) three non
collinear points and (v) Centre and tangent equation - general equation of a circle - finding
Centre, radius - tangent, normal to circle at a point on it - simple problems.
Unit – II Duration: 8 Periods (L: 6.0 – T:2.0)
151
3.Conic Sections: Define a conic section, focus, directrix, eccentricity, axes and latus rectum – Find
equation of a conic when focus directrix and eccentricity are given. Properties of parabola,
ellipse and hyperbola - standard forms with Vertex (Centre) at the Origin and Axis (Axes) along
Co – Ordinate Axes only – Simple Problems.
Differential Calculus
Unit-III Duration: 12 Periods (L: 9.0 – T:3.0)
4. Functions & Limits : Concept of Limit- Definition- Properties of Limits and Standard Limits
1
xn  an sin x tan x a x 1 ex 1
lim , lim , lim , lim , lim , lim (1  x) x ,
xa x  a x0 x x 0 x x 0 x x0 x x 0
( without proof ) -
x
 1 a x2  b x  c
lim 1   lim 2
x   x  - Simple Problems . Evaluate the limits of the type x  l  x   x   and
f ( x)
lim
x  g ( x)
5. Differentiation – I : Concept of derivative - definition from first principle as

f ( x  h)  f ( x)
lim
h0 h - different notations - derivatives of elementary functionslike x n , ax, ex, log
x, sin x, cos x, tanx, Secx, Cosecx and Cotx.Derivatives of sum, product, quotient, scalar
multiplication of functions - problems. Derivative of function of a function (Chain rule) with
illustrative examples such as
2 x
t2  2 log  sin(cos x) 
(i) t (ii) x sin 2 x (iii) x2  1 (iv) .
Unit – IV
Duration: 12 Periods (L: 9.0 – T:3.0)
6. Differentiation – II: Derivatives of inverse trigonometric functions, derivative of a function with

respect to another function, derivative of parametric functions, derivative of hyperbolic, implicit
functions, logarithmic differentiation – problems in each case. Higher order derivatives -
examples – functions of several variables – partial differentiation, Euler’s theorem-simple
problems.
152
Applications of Derivatives:
Unit – V Duration: 8 Periods (L: 6.0 – T:2.0)
7. Geometrical Applications: Geometrical meaning of the derivative, equations of Tangent and

normal to a curve at any point on the curve. Lengths of tangent, normal, sub tangent and
subnormal to the curve at any point on it. Angle between two intersecting curves - problems.
Unit – VI Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
8. Physical Applications: Physical applications of the derivative – Explain the derivative as a rate
of change in distance-time relations to find the velocity and acceleration of a moving particle
with examples. Explain the derivative as a rate measure in the problems where the quantities like
volumes, areas vary with respect to time- illustrative examples– Simple Problems.
9. Maxima & Minima: Applications of the derivative to find the extreme values – Increasing and
decreasing functions, finding the maxima and minima of simple functions - problems leading to
applications of maxima and minima.
References
1. Co - Ordinate Geometry – by S.L. Loney
2. Thomas Calculus, Pearson Addison – Wesley Publications
3. Calculus – I by Shanti Narayan and Manicavachagam Pillai, S.V Publications.
4. NCERT Mathematics Text Books Of ClassXI,XII.
5. Intermediate Mathematics Text Books (Telugu Academy)
2.E-books:www.mathebook.net

Coordinate Geometry
Unit – I
1.0 Solve the problems on Straight lines
153
1.1 Write the different forms of a straight line – point slope form, two point form, intercept
form, normal form and general form
1.2 Solve simple problems on the above forms
1.3 Find distance of a point from a line, acute angle between two lines, intersection of two
non-parallel lines and distance between two parallel lines.
2.0 Solve the problems on Circles

2.1 Define locus of a point, circle and its equation.
2.2 Find the equation of a circle given
(i) Centre and radius
(ii) Two ends of a diameter
(iii) Centre and a point on the circumference
(iv) Three non collinear points
(v) Centre and tangent
2.3 Write the general equation of a circle and find the centre and radius.
2.4 Write the equation of tangent and normal at a point on the circle.
2.5 Solve the problems to find the equations of tangent and normal.
Unit – II
3.0 Appreciate the properties of Conics in engineering applications
3.1 Define a conic section.
3.2 Understand the terms focus, directrix, eccentricity, axes and latus rectum of a conic with
illustrations.
3.3 Find the equation of a conic when focus, directrix and eccentricity are given
3.4 Describe the properties of Parabola, Ellipse and Hyperbola
3.5 Solve problems in simple cases of Parabola, Ellipse and Hyperbola.
Differential Calculus
UNIT - III
4.0 Use the concept of Limit for solving the problems

lim f ( x)  l
xa
4.1 Understand the concept of limit and meaning of and state the properties of
limits.
154
xn  an sin x tan x a x 1
lim , lim , lim , lim ,
xa x  a x0 x x 0 x x 0 x
4.2 Mention the Standard limits
1 x
ex 1  1
lim , lim (1  x) x , lim 1  
x0 x x 0 x   x  (All without proof).
4.3 Solve the problems using the above standard limits
a x2  b x  c f ( x)
lim
2 lim
x l  x   x   x  g ( x )
4.4 Evaluate the limits of the type and
5.0 Appreciate Differentiation and its meaning in engineering situations

5.1 State the concept of derivative of a function y = f(x) – definition, first principle as
f ( x  h)  f ( x )
lim
h0 h and also provide standard notations to denote the derivative of a function.
5.2 State the significance of derivative in scientific and engineering applications.
5.3 Find the derivatives of elementary functions like xn , ax, ex, log x, sin x, cos x, tanx, Secx,
Cosecx and Cot x using the first principles.
5.4 Find the derivatives of simple functions from the first principle.
5.5 State the rules of differentiation of sum, difference, scalar multiplication, product and
quotient of functions with illustrative and simple examples.
5.6 Understand the method of differentiation of a function of a function (Chain rule) with
illustrative examples such as
2 x
t2  2 log  sin(cos x) 
(i) t (ii) x sin 2 x (iii) x2  1 (iv) .
Unit – IV
6.0 Appreciate Differentiation and its meaning in engineering situations
6.1 Find the derivatives of Inverse Trigonometric functions and examples.
6.2 Understand the method of differentiation of a function with respect to another function and
also differentiation of parametric functions with examples.
6.3 Find the derivatives of hyperbolic functions.

6.4 Explain the procedures for finding the derivatives of implicit function with examples.
6.5 Explain the need of taking logarithms for differentiating some functions with examples
like [f(x)]g(x).
6.6 Explain the concept of finding the higher order derivatives of second and third order with
examples.
155
6.7 Explain the concept of functions of several variables, partial derivatives and difference
between the ordinary and partial derivatives with simple examples.
6.8 Explain the definition of Homogenous function of degree n
6.9 Explain Euler’s theorem for homogeneous functions with applications to simple problems.
Applications of Differentiation
UNIT - V
7.0 Understand the Geometrical Applications of Derivatives

7.1 State the geometrical meaning of the derivative as the slope of the tangent to the curve
y=f(x) at any point on the curve.
7.2 Explain the concept of derivative to find the slope of tangent and to find the equation of
tangent and normal to the curve y=f(x) at any point on it.
7.3 Find the lengths of tangent, normal, sub-tangent and sub normal at any point on the curve
y=f(x) .
7.4 Explain the concept of angle between two curves and procedure for finding the angle
between two given curves with illustrative examples.
Unit – VI
8.0 Understand the Physical Applications of Derivatives

8.1 Explain the derivative as a rate of change in distance-time relations to find the velocity and
acceleration of a moving particle with examples.
8.2 Explain the derivative as a rate measurer in the problems where the quantities like
volumes, areas vary with respect to time- illustrative examples.
9.0 Use Derivatives to find extreme values of functions
9.1 Define the concept of increasing and decreasing functions.
9.2 Explain the conditions to find points where the given function is increasing or decreasing
with illustrative examples.
9.3 Explain the procedure to find the extreme values (maxima or minima) of a function of
single variable - simple problems yielding maxima and minima.
9.4 Solve problems on maxima and minima in applications like finding areas, volumes, etc.
2. Quiz
3.Group discussion
156
4.Surprise tests
5. Seminars
6. Home assignments.
CO / PO - MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 Mapped
POs
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
@@@
157
MID SEM-I EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
158
Legend:
159
MID SEM –I, MODEL PAPER, II SEMESTER
TIME: 1: 00 Hours Max. Marks: 20
PART-A
1. Find the slope of the straight line 3x + 4y + 9 = 0
2. Write the equation of circle whose centre (h,k) and radius r given.
3. Define conic section.
x2 y2
4. Find the Length of major and minor axes of the Ellipse + =1
16 9
PART-B
. 5 a) Find the distance between parallel lines 2x + 3y + 5 =0 and 2x + 3y + 9 = 0
Or
5 b) Find the centre and radius of the circle x2+ y2 – 6x + 4y – 12 = 0.
6 a) Find the vertex , focus ,equation of directrix and length of latus-rectum of the parabola y2
= 20x
Or
x2 y2
6 b) Find the centre, vertices and foci of Ellipse + =1
25 16
PART C
Instructions: 1. Answer any two questions 02 X 05 = 10
7 a) Find the angle between the lines 2x – y + 3 = 0 and x + y – 2 = 0
Or
7b) Find the equation of the Circle passing through the points (0, 0), (1,0) and (0,2)
8 a) Find the equation of the Parabola with focus at (2 , -3 ) and whose directrix is
3x – 4y + 16 = 0
Or
8 b) Find the Centre,Vertices, Eccentricity, Foci, Lengths of axes, Length of Latus Rectum,
x2 y2
and equations of directrices of the Hyperbola − =1
16 9
160
@@@
MID SEM –II, MODEL PAPER, II SEMESTER
PART-A
3 2
Lt 2 x −3 x +1
9 x 2 + 8 x +7
1. Evaluate x →0
2. Differentiate x3 + Tanxw.r.t. x
3. Differentiate log(sinx) w.r.t x
∂u
4. Find if U=x 3 + y 3
∂x
PART-B
1+2+3+… .+ n
5 a). Evaluate ; lim
n→∞ ( n2 )
Or
dy
5 b). If y = e .cotx, find dx
x
dy
6 a). Find if x=at 2 , y=2 at .
dx
Or
dy
6 b) If x + y + 3xy = 7, then find dx
2 2
PART C
dy 1+ x 2
log
7 a). Find dx , If y = 1−x 2
Or
7 b) Differentiate log[log(logx)] w. r. t. x
8 a). If y=sin ( logx ) , prove that x 2 y 2 + x y 1+ y =0.
Or
161
x 2+ y2 ∂u ∂u
8 b) If U =sin−1 ( x+ y ) then prove that x
∂x
+y
∂y
=tanu
@@@
C18-common
SUB.CODE:202F
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION,(C-18)
MODEL PAPER
II SEMESTER EXAMINATION
PART-A
9. Write the intercept form of a straight line ax +by +c=0

x 3−8
10. Evaluate lim
x →2 x−2
11. Write the conditions for an increasing function and a decreasing function off (x) in
the interval [ a , b ]
12. Write the equation of a circle whosecentre is ( h , k ) and radius is r.
13. Write the slope of a curve y=f ( x ) at the point ( x 1 , y 1 ) .
14. Define Orthogonal curves.
15. Write the conditions for a point to be a maximum point on the curve y=f ( x ) .
16. Write the quantities to denote the rate of change of volume and area with respect to t.
PART-B
9(a). Find the perpendicular distance of the point (2, 4) from the line 4 x−3 y−6=0.
OR
9(b). Find the length of the tangent to the curve y=x 2 +2 x+1 at (1,4).
162
10(a). Differentiate log ⁡(tanx) with respect to x.
OR
1 3 2
10 (b). A particle is moving along a line such that s= t −3t +8 t+5. Find its velocity
3
and acceleration at t=2 sec .
11 (a). Find the equation of the normal to the curve y 2=16 x at (2,4).
OR
11 (b). Find the equation of the tangent to the curve y=x 3−2 x +5 at (1,4).
12 (a). Find the rate of change of Area of the circle with respect to the radius when
r =6 cm.
OR
12 (b). Find the maximum value of 2 x3 −9 x 2+12 x+ 5.
PART C
13(a). Find the equation of the parabola whose focus is the point (3, -4) and directrix is
the line x− y +5=0.
OR
13 (b). Find the angle between the curves y 2=2 x , x + y = 8 at their point of intersection
(2, 2)
dy
14 (a). Find , if x=a ( θ−sinθ ) , y=a ( 1−cosθ ) .
dx
OR
14 (b). The sum of two numbers is 24. Find them if their product is maximum
15(a). Find the lengths of the normal, subtangent and subnormal to the curve
y=x 3−3 x +2 at ( 0,2 ) .
OR
2 k
15 (b). show that the curves y =x∧ y = cut at right angles if 8 k 2−1=0.
x
16 (a). A circular metal plate expands by heat so that its radius is increasing at the rate of
0.02 cm/sec. At what rate its area is increasing when the radius is 10 cms.
OR
163
16 (b). A wire of length 40 cm is bent so that to has to form a rectangle. Find the maximum
area that can be enclosed by the wire
164
Applied Physics
Course Title Applied Physics Course Code 18C-203F

Semester II Course Group Foundation
Periods (L:T:P)
Periods
Pre requisites: Basic High School Science, Basic Mathematics
Course Objectives: After studying this course, the student will be able to understand and appreciate the
role of Physics in different areas of engineering and technology.
Course outcomes: On successful completion of the course, the student will have the ability to attain
below Course outcomes (CO):
Course Outcomes Linked POs Teaching

Periods
Apply knowledge of waves and sound in engineering problems.
CO 1 PO1,PO2 10
Apply knowledge of Simple Harmonic Motion to solve

CO 2 PO1, PO2 10
engineering problems
PO1,
CO 3 Use modern instruments in engineering PO2,PO3, 10
PO4
PO1,
CO 4 Use various magnetic materials in engineering equipments 10
PO2,PO3
PO1,
Use various electrical measuring instruments as tools in
CO 5 PO2,PO3,PO 10
engineering
4
PO1,
CO 6 Apply Electronics principles in engineering problems PO2,PO3,PO 10
4
APPLIED PHYSICS
Course Contents
1. UNIT – 1 WAVES AND SOUND Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)
Wave motion – definition and characteristics – audible range – infrasonic and ultrasonic –
longitudinal and transverse waves – examples – Relation between wavelength, frequency and
velocity of a wave – derivation –stationary waves- beats - applications of beats - Doppler
effect – list the applications – ultrasound and radar in medicine and engineering as special
emphasis- echo –definition - applications - relation between time of echo and distance of
obstacle –derivation- Reverberation and time of reverberation - Sabine’s formula - Free and
forced vibrations - Resonance - Conditions of good auditorium - noise pollution – definition
– causes, effects and methods to minimize noise pollution - problems
165
2. UNIT – 2 SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)
Periodic motion - Simple Harmonic Motion (SHM)– definition - examples - Conditions for
SHM –Projection of circular motion on any diameter of a circle is SHM - Expressions for
Displacement, Velocity and Acceleration of a particle executing SHM – derivations - Time
period, frequency, amplitude and phase of a particle in SHM - Ideal simple pendulum – time
period of simple pendulum –derivation - laws of simple pendulum-Seconds pendulum-
problems.
3. UNIT – 3 MODERN PHYSICS Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)
Photo electric effect - Einstein’s photo electric equation – Work function and threshold
frequency - laws of photo electric effect - applications of photo electric effect – photo cell -
concept of Refraction of light - critical angle and total internal reflection - principle of
Optical fiber - Applications of optical fiber – LASER – definition and characteristics –
principle of LASER - spontaneous emission and stimulated emission - population inversion -
examples of LASER – Uses.
4. UNIT-4 MAGNETISM Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)
Magnetic field - magnetic lines of force -properties - Uniform and Non-uniform magnetic field
– Magnetic length, pole strength – magnetic induction field strength- definition - Coulomb’s
inverse square law of magnetism - expression for moment of couple on a bar magnet placed
in a uniform magnetic field – derivation - expression for magnetic induction field strength at a
point on the axial line of a bar magnet –derivation - Dia, Para and Ferro magnetic materials –
examples - related problems.
5.UNIT-5 ELECTRICITY AND MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)
Ohm’s law – Ohmic and non ohmic conductors – examples - Temperature dependence of
resistance – coefficients of resistance with examples - Specific resistance – units –
conductance- series and parallel combination of resistors - moving coil galvanometer -
conversion of galvanometer into ammeter and voltmeter with diagram (qualitatively) –
Kirchhoff’s current and voltage laws in electricity – Expression for balancing condition of
Wheatstone’s bridge – derivation – Meter bridge –working with neat diagram –
Superconductivity-definition-superconductors - definition and examples – applications -
related problems.
6. UNIT – 6 ELECTRONICS Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)
Solids – definition – energy bands in solids- valence band, conduction band and forbidden
band – Energy band diagram of conductors, insulators and semiconductors – concept of Fermi
level - Intrinsic semiconductors - examples - Concept of holes in semiconductors - Doping -
Extrinsic semiconductor - P-type and N-type semiconductors - PN Junction diode – Forward
Bias and Reverse Bias - Applications of PN diode - Diode as rectifier – principle – principle
of Light Emitting Diode and solar cell.
166
References:
5. Engineering Physics by R.K. Gaur, S.L. Gupta, Dhanpatrai Publications, New Delhi.
6. ISC Physics, Book I&II, P. Vivekanandan, DK Banerjee, S Chand, New Delhi.
7. Intermediate Physics, Vol. I&II, Telugu Academy, TS, Hyderabad.
8. Fundamentals of Physics by Halliday and Resnick.
Suggested learning outcomes:
1. know the concept of Waves and Sound
1.1 Define wave. Explain the characteristics of a wave (frequency, wavelength, amplitude, time
period).
1.2 Explain audibility range of sound.
1.3 Define infrasonic and ultrasonic sounds.
1.4 Define longitudinal and transverse wave motion. Write examples for each. Distinguish
between them.
1.5 Derive the relation between wavelength, frequency and velocity of a wave (v ꞊ nλ)
1.6 Define stationary waves.
1.7 Explain the phenomenon of beats. List the applications of beats.
1.8 Explain Doppler Effect. List the applications of Doppler Effect.
1.9 Application of Doppler Effect in medicine and engineering - ultrasound and radar.
1.10 Define echo. List the applications of echo.
1.11 Derive the relation between time of echo and distance of obstacle.
1.12 Explain Reverberation and time of reverberation.
1.13 Write Sabine’s formula and explain the terms.
1.14 Define free and forced vibrations.
1.15 Define resonance with examples.
1.16 State the conditions of a good auditorium.
1.17 Define noise pollution.
1.18 List the causes, effects and methods to minimize noise pollution.
2. know the concept of Simple Harmonic Motion
2.1 Define periodic motion.

2.2 Define Simple Harmonic Motion (SHM).
2.3 List the examples of SHM.
2.4 State the conditions of simple harmonic motion.
2.5 Projection of circular motion on any diameter of a circle is SHM.
2.6 Define the terms time period, frequency, amplitude and phase of particle in SHM.
2.7 Derive the expressions for Displacement, Velocity and Acceleration of a particle executing in
SHM.
2.8 Define Ideal simple pendulum and derive the expression for time period of simple pendulum.
2.9 State the laws of simple pendulum.
2.10 Define seconds pendulum.
3. know the concept of Modern Physics
3.1 Explain Photo electric effect.

3.2 Define the terms work function and threshold frequency.
167
3.3 State Einstein’s photo electric equation and explain the terms.
3.4 State laws of photo electric effect.
3.5 List the applications of photo electric effect.
3.6 Explain working of photocell.
3.7 Explain the concept of refraction of light.
3.8 Define critical angle.
3.9 Define Total internal reflection.
3.10 State conditions for Total internal reflection.
3.11 Explain principle and working of optical fiber.
3.12 List the applications of optical fiber.
3.13 Define LASER. State the characteristics of LASER.
3.14 Explain the principle of LASER.
3.15 Define spontaneous emission and stimulated emission.
3.16 Define population inversion.
3.17 List the examples of LASER.
3.18 List the uses of LASER.
4 know the concept of Magnetism
4.1 Define magnetic field.

4.2 Define magnetic lines of force.
4.3 State the properties of magnetic lines of force.
4.4 Define Uniform and Non-uniform magnetic field.
4.5 Define the terms magnetic length and pole strength of a bar magnet.
4.6 Define magnetic induction field strength.
4.7 State and explain Coulomb’s inverse square law of magnetism.
4.8 Derive the expression for moment of couple on a bar magnet placed in a uniform
magnetic field.
4.9 Derive the formula for magnetic induction field strength at a point on the axial line of a bar
magnet.
4.10 Define Dia, Para and Ferro magnetic materials with examples.
5 know the concept of Electricity and measuring instruments
5.1 State Ohm’s law – Define ohmic and non ohmic conductors with examples
5.2 Explain temperature dependence of resistance – types of temperature coefficients with
examples
5.3 Define specific resistance. Write its units.
5.4 Define conductance.
5.5 Write the formulae for effective resistance in series and parallel combination of resistors with
diagram.
5.6 Explain moving coil galvanometer.
5.7 Conversion of a galvanometer into ammeter and voltmeter. Explain with diagram.
5.8 State and explain Kirchhoff’s current and voltage laws in electricity.
5.9 Derive an expression for balancing condition of Wheatstone’s bridge with legible sketch.
5.10 Explain briefly Meter Bridge with neat diagram.
5.11 Define superconductivity.
5.12 Define superconductor. Give examples.
5.13 List the applications of superconductors.
168
6 know the concepts of Electronics and applications
6.1 Define solid.

6.2 Define valence band, conduction band and forbidden band in solids.
6.3 Explain conductors, insulators and semiconductors on the basis of energy band diagram.
6.4 Explain the concept of Fermi level.
6.5 Define intrinsic semiconductors.
6.6 List the examples for intrinsic semiconductors.
6.7 Explain the concept of hole in semiconductors.
6.8 Define doping.
6.9 Define extrinsic semiconductors.
6.10 Explain P-type and N-type semiconductors.
6.11 Explain PN Junction Diode (formation only).
6.12 Explain forward and reverse bias of PN diode (biasing and flow of majority and minority
carriers with diagram only)
6.13 List the applications of PN Diode.
6.14 Explain the principle of diode as a rectifier.
6.15 Explain working principle of Light Emitting Diode (LED)
6.16 Explain the working principle of solar cell.
169
MID SEM-I EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
170
Legend:
171
C-18 COMMON-203F

MIDSEM – I
SECOND SEMESTER EXAMINATION
APPLIED PHYSICS
attempted question. No marks will be allotted for extra questions answered
PART - A (4x1 = 4M)

5. Write the Sabine’s formula.

6. Define longitudinal wave.
7. Define Second’s pendulum.
8. Define SHM.
PART- B (2 x 3 = 6M)

5 (a). Write any three applications of Beats.

(OR)
(b). Write any three effects of noise pollution.
6 (a). Write the conditions for SHM.

(OR)
(b). The displacement of a particle executing SHM is given by
Y=8Sin( πt + π /4 ) m. Find i) Amplitude ii) Angular velocity
and iii) Time period
PART-C (2×5=10M)

7 (a). Derive relation between time of echo and distance of obstacle.

(OR)
(b). State five conditions of a good auditorium.
8 (a). Derive the expression for time period of a simple pendulum.

(OR)
(b). Derive the expressions for velocity and acceleration of a particle in SHM.
*** ** ***
172
C-18 COMMON-203F
MIDSEM – II
APPLIED PHYSICS
PART - A (4x1 = 4M)

1. Define photoelectric effect.

2. Define total internal reflection.
3. Define magnetic field.
4. Write the formula for magnetic moment of a bar magnet.
PART- B (2 x 3 = 6M)

5 (a). State three laws of photo electric effect.

(OR)
(b). Distinguish between spontaneous and stimulated emission.
6 (a). Write three properties of magnetic lines of force.

(OR)
(b). Explain Coulomb’s inverse square law of magnetism.
PART-C (2×5=10M)

7 (a). Explain the principle of LASER.

(OR)
(b). Explain working principle of optical fiber.
8 (a). Derive the formula for moment of couple acting on a bar magnet placed in uniform
magnetic field.
(OR)
(b). Derive the expression for magnetic induction field strength at a point on the axial line
of a bar magnet.
** *** **
.
173
C18 – COMMON 203F

MODEL PAPER
COMMON – II SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
APPLIED PHYSICS
PART – A
Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions. 8X1=08

2. Each question carries ONE mark.
1. Define an echo.
2. Write any two uses of optical fiber.
3. State Ohm’s law.
4. Write any two laws of Reflection.
5. Write SI unit of specific resistance
6. Define non ohmic conductors and give one example.
7. Define Fermi level.
8. Write any two advantages of LED’s.
PART – B
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions. 4X3=12

2. Each question carries THREE marks.
9(a). Derive V= nλ.

(or)
9(b). Explain the temperature dependence of resistance on conductor.
10(a). Explain photo cell with neat diagram.

(or)
10(b). Define magnetic induction field strength, write its formula and SI unit.
11(a). State and explain Kirchhoff’s voltage law.

(or)
11(b). Write any three applications of Superconductors.
12(a). Explain principle of diode as a rectifier.

(or)
12(b). Write any three applications of p-n diode.
174
PART – C 4X5 = 20
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions.

2. Each question carries FIVE marks.
13(a). Derive the relation between time of an echo and distance obstacle
(or)
13(b). Derive the expression for balancing condition of Wheatstone’s bridge.
14(a). Explain working principle of optical fiber with neat diagram.

(or)
14(b). Explain forward and reverse bias of PN diode.
15(a). Explain briefly with neat diagram .

(or)
15(b). Explain moving coil galvanometer.
16(a). Explain the working principle of LED with neat diagram.

(or)
16(b). Explain the working principle of solar cell
175
Engineering Chemistry and Environmental Studies
Course Title Engineering Chemistry Course Code 18Common-204F

and Environmental
Studies
Semester II Course Group Foundation

Periods (L:T:P)
Periods
Prerequisite:
Basic knowledge of chemistry in secondary education.
Course Objectives: After studying this course the student will be able to understand and appreciate
the role of Chemistry and environmental studies in different spheres of industries.
Course Outcome:
On successful completion of the course, the students will have ability to attain below Course
Outcomes (CO):
CO Course outcome CL Linked PO Teaching
periods
CO1 Understand and explain the different metallurgical processes, R/U/A 1,2,9,10 10
alloys and applications of alloys
CO2 Understand and explain corrosion and preventive methods of R/U/A 1,2,9,10 10
corrosion
CO3 List out the different methods of preparation and industrial uses R/U/A 1,2,5,6,7, 12
of plastics, rubber and fibers. vulcanization of rubber and its 10
applications
CO4 Classify the fuels and explain basic terms of fuel, outline the R/U/A 1,2,10 8
composition and industrial use of gaseous fuels
CO5 Understand and Explain Galvanic cell, emf of cell -electro R/U/A 1,2,5 12
chemical series-Applications of Galvanic cells, batteries and cells
and distinguish the Galvanic and electrolytic cell
CO6 Explain the causes, effects and controlling methods of air and R/U/A 1,2,5,7 8
water pollutions.
Total Periods 60
Legends: R = Remember, U= Understand, A = Apply
176
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT - I: Metallurgy:10Periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)

Characteristics of Metals - distinguish between Metals and Non Metals- Ore, Gangue, Flux, Slag -
Concentration of Ore -Froth floatation - Methods of Extraction of crude Metal - Roasting,
Calcination, Smelting – Alloys-purpose of making alloys - Composition of Brass, German silver,
Nichrome, Stainless steel and Duralumin
UNIT – II:Corrosion: 10Periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)
Introduction - factors influencing the rate of corrosion - electrochemical theory of corrosion -

composition, stress and concentration cells- rusting of iron and its mechanism - prevention of
corrosion - coating methods, Paints-constituents and characteristics of paints-cathodic protection.
UNIT – III: Polymers: 12Periods (L : 9.0 - T : 3.0)
Introduction - polymerization - types of polymerization - addition, condensation with examples -

plastics - types of plastics - advantages of plastics over traditional materials - Disadvantages of using
plastics - preparation and uses of the following plastics: 1. Polythene 2. PVC 3.Teflon 4.
Polystyrene 5.Urea formaldehyde 6. Bakelite - Rubber - Elastomers –Preparartionof Butyl rubber,
Buna-s, Neoprene rubber and their uses-Fibres-Preparation and uses of fibres-Nylon 6,6-Polyester.
UNIT – IV: Fuels: 8Periods (L : 6.0 - T : 2.0) Definition and

classification of fuels- characteristics of good fuel - Calorific value-HCV and LCV-Calculation of
oxygen required for combustion of methane and ethane - composition and uses of gaseous fuels- a)
water gas b) producer gas, c) natural gas, d) coal gas, e) Bio gas
and f) acetylene.
UNIT – V: Electro Motive Force: 12Periods (L : 9.0 - T : 3.0)
Galvanic cell – standard electrode potential –electro chemical series -emf of cell-Batteries-Types of
batteries-Fuel cells.
UNIT – VI: ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES-II :8Periods (L : 6.0 - T : 2.0)
Introduction- classification of air pollutants based on origin and states of matter-Air pollution -
causes-Effects - control methods - Water pollution - causes - effects - control measures.
Reference Books:
1. Engineering chemistry – Jain & Jain – DhanpatRai Publishing Company.
2. A Text book of Engineering Chemistry – S.S.Dara – S.Chand Publications.
3. Environmental Studies – A.K.De.
4. Environmental Studies, R. Rajagopalan, 2nd Edition, 2011, Oxford University Press
5. Intermediate Chemistry I and II – Telugu Academy TS
177
UNIT – I: METALLURGY
1.1. List the Characteristics of Metals.
1.2. Distinguish between Metals and Non Metals
1.3. Define the terms 1.Mineral, 2.Ore, 3. Gangue, 4. Flux and 5.Slag
1.4. Describe Froth Floatation method of concentration of ore.
1.5. Describe the methods involved in extraction of crude metal- Roasting, Calcination and
Smelting.
1.6. Define an Alloy
1.7. Explain the purpose of making of alloys
1.8. Write the Composition of the following alloys:1.Brass, 2.German silver, 3.Nichrome
4. Stainless steel, 5. Duralumin
1.9. List the uses of following Alloys: Brass, German silver, Nichrome, Stainless steel,
Duralumin
UNIT – II: CORROSION

2.1. Define the term corrosion
2.2. Explain the Factors influencing the rate of corrosion
2.3. Explain the concept of electrochemical theory of corrosion
2.4. Describe the formation of a) composition cell, b) stress cell c) concentration cell
2.5. Define rust and explain the mechanism of rusting of iron with chemical reactions.
2.6. Explain the methods of prevention of corrosion:
a) Protective Coatings i) Metallic coatings (Anodic and cathodic coatings) ii) Inorganic
coatings iii) Organic coatings, paint,constituent of paint and characteristics of good paint.
b) Cathodic protection (Sacrificial anode process and Impressed - voltage process).
UNIT – III: POLYMERS
3.1. Explain the concept of polymerization
3.2. Describe the methods of polymerization a) addition polymerization
b) condensation polymerization with examples.
3.3. Define the term plastic
3.4. List the Characteristics of plastics.
3.5. State the advantages of plastics over traditional materials
3.6. State the disadvantages of using plastics.
3.7. Types of plastics with examples.
3.8. Distinguish between thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics
3.9. Explain the methods of preparation and uses of the following plastics:
1. Polythene, 2. PVC, 3.Teflon, 4.Polystyrene 5.Urea formaldehyde 6. Bakelite
(only flow chart for Bakelite i.e. without chemical equations).
3.10. Define the term natural rubber
3.11.Explain preparation of natural rubber
3.12. State the structural formula of Natural rubber
3.13. List the Characteristics of natural rubber
3.14. Explain the process of Vulcanization
3.15. List the Characteristics of Vulcanized rubber
3.16. Define the term Elastomer
3.17. Describe the preparation and uses of the following synthetic rubbers a) Butyl rubber,
b) Buna-s and c) Neoprene rubber.
3.18. Define fibre.
3.19.Explain the preparation and uses of fibres –Nylon 6,6 and Polyester
UNIT – IV: FUELS
4.1. Define the term fuel
4.2. Classify the fuels based on physical state - solid, liquid and gaseous fuels with examples.
4.3. Classify the fuels based on occurrence- primary and secondary fuels with examples.
4.4.List the characteristics of a good fuel
178
4.5.Advantages of gaseous fuels
4.6.Define Calorific value- HCV and LCV.
4.7. Calculate the oxygen required for the combustion of Methane and Ethane fuel gases.
4.8. State the composition and uses of the following gaseous fuels:
a) water gas, b) producer gas, c) natural gas, d) coal gas, e) Bio gas and f) acetylene
UNIT – V: Electro Motive Force

5.1. Define Galvanic cell
5.2. Explain the construction and working of Galvanic cell
5.3. Distinguish between electrolytic cell and galvanic cell
5.4. Explain standard electrode potential
5.5. Explain standard hydrogen electrode
5.6. Define electrochemical series and explain its significance.
5.7. Define and explain emf of a cell.
5.8. Solve the numerical problems on emf of cell
5.9.Explain Batteries (Cells) and types of batteries with examples –working and applications of
Dry cell (Leclanche cell), Lead storage battery, Ni-Cd cell
5.10. Explain working and advantages of Fuel cell (Hydrogen - Oxygen Fuel Cell)
UNIT – VI: ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES-II

6.1. Define air pollution
6.2. Classify the air pollutants- based on origin and states of matter
6.3. Explain the causes of air pollution
6.4. Explain the effects of air pollution on human beings, plants and animals
6.5. Explain the green house effect - ozone layer depletion and acid rain
6.6. Explain the methods of control of air pollution
6.7. Define water pollution
6.8. Explain the causes of water pollution
6.9. Explain the effects of water pollution on living and non living things
6.10. Explain the methods of control of water pollution.
Suggested Student Activities for Induction Program:
Forenoon Afternoon
Day1 Registration Class work as per Time table
Day2 Rules and Regulations Chemistry Lab practice classes may be
Day3 Getting acquainted with Head and faculty conducted
Day4 Familiarization with Institutional facilities
Day5 Interaction with Class teacher and Seniors
Day6 Introducing the mentor
Day7 Parent –Teacher meeting
1. Student visits Library to refer to Text books, reference books and manuals to find their
specifications
2. Student inspects the available equipment in the Chemistry Lab to familiarize with them.
3. Quiz
4. Group discussion
5. Seminar
6. Surprise test
E learning links:
https://iupac.org/
https://www.youtube.com
https://www.khanacademy.org/
www.nptel.ac.in
179
Blue Print
MID SEM-I EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)

180
Model Question Papers

II SEMESTER, MIDSEM – I
Time: 1 Hour Max. Marks: 20
PART – A
1. Define the terms mineral and ore.

2. Define an alloy.
3. Define corrosion.
4. What is paint?
PART – B
Instructions: Answer all questions. Each question carries three marks 2 x 3 =6 Marks
5. a. List any six characteristics of metals.

or
b. Explain the process of roasting of ore with an example.
6. a. List any six factors influencing the rate of corrosion.
or
b. Explain the formation of stress cell with an example.
PART – C
Instructions: Answer all questions. Each question carries five marks 2 x 5 =10 Marks
7. a. Explain the froth floatation process of concentration of ore .

or
b. Write the composition and uses of Brass, German silver .
8. a. Explain the mechanism of rusting of iron with chemical equations.
or
b. Explain sacrificial anode method of prevention of corrosion with a neat diagram.
181
II SEMESTER, MIDSEM – II
Sub. Code: 18common-204F
Time: 1 Hour Max.Marks : 20
PART – A
1. What is the chemical name of natural rubber?

2. Define polymerization.
3. What are fuels?
4. Mention any two characteristics of good fuel.
PART – B
5. a. Write any three advantages of plastics over traditional materials.

or
b. Write a method of preparation and uses of Nylon-6,6 .
6. a. Define colorific value and differentiate lower and higher calorific values.
or
b. Classify the fuels based on their physical state.
PART – C
7. a. What is vulcanization of rubber and explain with chemical equations.

or
b. Distinguish thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics.
8. a. Write the composition and uses of water gas and producer gas.
or
b. Calculate the mass and volume of the oxygen required for the complete combustion of 8
grams of CH4.
182
C-18COMMON-204F

II SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
Time: 2 Hours Max.Marks : 40
PART – A
1. Define gangue.
2. What are the different types of plastics?
3. Define Galvanic cell.
4. What is the chemical formula of rust?
5. What is electrochemical series?
6. What are the different types of batteries?
7. Define air pollution.
8. Define water pollution.
PART – B
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks 4 x 3 =12
Marks
9. a. Write any three differences between metals and non-metals.

or
b. Write any three significances of electrochemical series.
10. a. Write a method of preparation and two uses of polystyrene.
or
b. Classify the pollutants based on origin and give examples.
11. a. Write any three differences between electrolytic cell and galvanic cell.
or
b. Write the electrode reaction of lead storage battery during discharging.
12. a. Write a short note on Green house effect.
or
b.Write a note on Ozone layer depletion.
PART – C
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks 4 x 5 =20
Marks
13. a. Explain the formation of composition cell and stress cell.

or
b. Describe the construction and working principle of Leclanche cell.
14. a. Calculate the mass and volume of oxygen required for the complete combustion of 15 gm
of
ethane( C2H6).
or
183
b. Explain the causes of water pollution.
15. a. Explain the construction and functioning of Galvanic cell.
or
b. Explain working principle of H2-O2 fuel cell.
16. a. Explain the control methods of water pollution.
Or
b. Explain the causes of air pollution
184
Course Title: Levelling Surveying Course Code : 18C-205C
Semester: II Semester Course Group : Core

Teaching Scheme in Periods(L:T:P): 45:15:0 Credits : 3
Type of Course : Lecture+Assignments Total Contact Periods : 60 Periods
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of Surveying.
Course Outcomes
CO1 : Illustrate the basics in leveling and types of leveling Instruments
CO2 : Compute the Reduced Levels by different methods
CO3 : Calculate errors due to curvature and refraction, familiarize with precautions and corrections in
levelling
CO4 : Explain the different methods of levelling carried out in the field
CO5 : Explain different methods of drawing contours and their applications in Civil engineering
CO6 : Explain the use and working principle of various minor instrument

No
R U A
1 Introduction to levelling 10
2 Concept and calculation of Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
Reduced levels
10
3 Errors, precautions and
8
corrections in levelling Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
Q4
4 Methods of levelling 12
5 Permanent adjustments of a Q9(b), Q13(b),
10 Q5,Q6
level &Contouring Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
6 Minor Instruments Q10(b), Q14(b),
10 Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8
185
Course Contents
UNIT 1: Introduction to Levelling Duration: 10 Periods(L: 7.5 – T:2.5)

a) Levelling - Types of levelling instruments - component parts of a dumpy level and
their functions - Definitions of important terms used in Levelling - level surface,
level line, axis of telescope, line of collimation, back sight, fore sight, intermediate
sight, change point.
b) Temporary adjustments of a dumpy level
c) Types of Levelling Staves
d) Bench marks - different types of bench marks
UNIT 2:Concept and Calculation of Reduced Levels
Duration: 10Periods((L:7.5 – T:2.5)
a) Booking of readings in field book
b) Determination of Reduced levels by height of instrument and Rise and Fall
methods - Comparison of methods - Problems
c) Problems on missing entries
UNIT 3: Errors, precautions and Corrections in Levelling
Duration: 08Periods(L: 6 – T:2)
a) Errors in levelling -Personal, natural and instrumental errors – Precautions
b) Errors due to curvature and refraction and combined correction – problems
UNIT4: Methods of LevellingDuration: 12 Periods(L:9 – T:3)
a) Classification of Levelling - Detailed description of profile levelling andreciprocal
levelling - Problems on Reciprocal levelling.
UNIT 5:Permanent Adjustments of a level and Contouring
Duration: 10Periods((L:75 – T:2.5)
a) Permanent adjustments of a dumpy level (Two peg method)
b) Contouring - Characteristics-Uses
c) Methods of contouring: Squares method,Cross sections method - interpolation of
contours-tracing contour gradient.
UNIT 6: Uses and working principles of minor instruments
a) Electronic Planimeter
b) Pentagraph
c) Clinometer
Recommended Books
186

1.1 Define levelling and list the types of levelling instruments
1.2 Define the important terms in levelling
1.3 List the component parts of a dumpy level and their functions
1.4 Explain the steps involved in Temporary adjustments of a dumpy level.
1.5 List various types of levelling staves
2.1 Tabulate the levelling field data
2.2 Compute reduced levels by height of instrument and Rise and fall methods, and
apply check
2.3 Compare height of instrument and Rise and fall methods.
2.4 Calculate the missing entries
3.1 List the Errors in levelling and the precautions to avoid the errors
3.2 State the effect of Errors due to curvature and refraction
3.3 Compute the Error due to curvature, refraction and combined error and the
correction to be applied
4.1 Explain the methods of Levelling

4.2 Describe in detail the procedure of conducting profile levelling and reciprocal
levelling
4.3 List the errors eliminated in reciprocal levelling
4.4 Derive the formula for true difference in elevation anderror between two points in
reciprocal levelling
4.5 Calculate true difference in elevation and error in reciprocal levelling
5.1 List the fundamental lines of dumpy level and state the relationship among
them
187
5.2 Explain permanent adjustments of a dumpy level(Two peg method)
5.3 States the Characteristics and uses of Contour maps.
5.4 Explain the method of Contouring.
5.5 Explain the method of aligning a road, railway and Canal using Contour Map
6.1. Electronic Planimeter
6.2. Pentagraph
6.3. Clinometer
3. Seminar
4. Group discussion
5. Surprise test
Engineering Tools
Ethics
Basic knowledge
Communication
Lifelong learning
Linked PO
CO1 2 3 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,9
CO2 3 2 3 2,3,9
CO3 3 2 3 3 2,3,4,9
CO4 3 2 3 3 3 2,3,4,9,10
CO5 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,5,6,8
CO6 1 2 2 1,2,4
Internal evaluation
Test Units Marks

Assignment 1 5
Seminars 1 188 5
Total 60

question
MID SEM-I EXAM
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)

question

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
189
DCE II semester Mid Semester-I Examination
Course Code:18C-205C Duration:1 hour

Course Name: Levelling Surveying Max.Marks:20 Marks
PART - A 4x1 = 4M
Note: Answer ALL the questions. Each question carries onemark.
1. State any two objects of Leveling.

2. Define the terms a) Back sight b) Reduced level
3. What are the methods used for the reduction of levels.
4. Find the level difference between points A and B if BS and FS readings taken on them respectively
are 2.105 m and 3.220 m.
PART- B 2 x 3 = 6M
Note: Answer two questions. Each question carries three marks.
5(a) Briefly Explain Temporary adjustments of a Dumpy Level.

OR
5(b) Briefly Explain different types of Bench Marks.
6(a) Compare collimation method with Rise and Fall method.

OR
6(b) What are the points to be remembered while entering readings in the level Field Book.
PART - C 2x5 = 10M

Note: Answer two questions. Each question carries five marks
7(a) Draw a neat sketch of a Dumpy Level and label the parts.
OR
7(b) Explain in detail the types of levelling staves.
8(a) The following staff reading were observed successively with a level the instrument was shifted
after the second and fifth readings.
0.675, 1.230, 0.750, 2.565, 2.225, 1.935, 1.835, 3.220 mt.
The first staff reading was taken with the staff held on a Bench Mark of reduced level 125.325
m. Enter the readings in a level Book form and find the reduced levels of all points and apply
the check.
OR
8(b) Describe in detail the procedure of conducting profile levelling
190
DCE II semester Mid Semester-II Examination

PART - A 4x1 = 4M
Note: Answer ALL the questions. Each question carries onemark.
1. Define Refraction.
2. State any two natural errors in levelling.
3. List any four methods of levelling.
4. Define Differential levelling.
PART- B 2 x 3 = 6M
Note: Answer two questions. Each question carries three marks.
5(a) If a levelling staff is placed at a distance of 980m from the instrument,

Find i) Correction for curvature ii) Correction for refraction.
OR
5(b) Differentiate between Curvature and Refraction.
6(a) Explain Reciprocal levelling.

OR
6(b) In levelling between two pints A and B on opposite banks of a river, the level was set up near A
and the staff readings on A and B were 1.545 and 2.950 respectively. The level was then moved
and set up near B and the respective readings on A and B were 1.765 and 3.210. Find the true
difference of level between A and B.
PART - C 2x5 = 10M

Note: Answer two following questions. Each question carries five marks
7(a) The line of sight from two stations A and B just touches the sea level. If the height of A and B
above the sea level are 85 and 110m respectively, find the distance AB.
OR
7(b) State the precautions to be taken to prevent the errors in levelling.
8(a) Briefly explain the procedure of Profile levelling.

OR
8(b) The following details refer to reciprocal levels taken with a dumpy level
Instrument at Staff readings on Remarks

station A B
A 1.200 2.580 Distance between A & B =1550m
B 0.850 1.650 R.L of B = 130.0
191
DCE II semester EndExamination
Course Code:18C-205C Duration:2 hours

PART – A 8 x 01 =8 Marks
Instructions : (1) Answer all questions

(2) Each question carries one mark.
1) Define Back sight and Fore sight.

2) State the equation for combined correction for curvature and refraction.
3) State any two uses of planimeter.
4) What is meant by balancing fore sight and back sight?
5) Define contour interval,
6) State any two fundamental lines of a dumpy level.
7) State the principal on which pentagraph works.
8) Mention any two needs when minor instruments are used in surveying.
PART – B 4 x 3 =12 Marks

Instructions : (1) Answer any Four questions.
(2) Each question carries Three marks.
9(a) What is meant by reduction of levels? What are the methods used for the same?
OR
9(b) What considerations are taken into account, while selecting the contour interval?
10(a) What is reciprocal leveling? When it is used?

OR
10(b) Mention any six applications of an electronic planimeter.
11(a) What is the difference between temporary and permanent adjustments of a dumpy level.
OR
11(b) Define the terms:
(i) Contour gradient
(ii) Horizontal equivalent.
12(a) Mention any six special features of an electronic planimeter.

OR
12(b) Mention any three uses of :
(i) Pentagraph
(ii) Clinometer.
192
PART – C 4x5=20 Marks
Instructions: (1) Answer any Four questions

(2) Each question carries Five marks.
13(a) The following were the staff readings observed on a continuously sloping ground 0.605, 1.105,
1.895, 2.300, 0.950, 1.340, 1.975, 0.760, 1.785, 0.905 and 1.235. The R.L of the first point
was 120.650m.
i) Enter the readings properly into the leveling field book proforma in Rise and Fall method
ii) Reduce the levels.
iii) Apply the arithmetical check
OR
13(b) Explain briefly the characteristics of contours, with neat sketches.
14(a) The following details refer to reciprocal levels taken with a dumpy level.
Instrument near Staff readings on (m) Remarks

to station A B
A 1.505 2.875 Distance between A & B = 1150m
B 0.750 1.895 R.L of B = 100.00m
Find :
(i) The R.L of A
(ii) The combined error for curvature and refraction.
OR
14(b) Explain with neat sketch, how the pentagraph is used for enlargement and reduction of plans.
15(a) In a two-peg test of a dumpy level, the following readings were taken
Instrument at Staff reading on (m) Remarks
A B
Midway between A & B 1.585 1.225 Distance between the pegs A &B =100
A 1.425 1.160
(i) With the instrument at A, what should be the staff reading on B for the line of
collimation to be exactly horizontal?
(ii) Is the line of collimation is inclined upwards or downwards?
(iii) What is the amount of collimation error?
Or
15(b) The area within the contour lines at the site of a reservoir and the face of a proposed dam are as
follows:
Contour(m) 300 302 304 306 308 310 312 314 316
Area (m)2 620 8,400 60,240 90,510 1,00,200 3,01,500 3,75,000 4,50,500 5,27,280
Taking 300m as the bottom level of the reservoir and 314m as the water level, find the volume
of water in the reservoir by
(i) Trapezoidal formula
(ii) Prismoidal formula.
16(a) Explain the working principle of pentagraph, with neat sketch.

OR
16(b) Explain the method of measuring a ground slope using clinometers
193
Advanced Engineering Drawing
Advanced Engineering
Drawing
Semester II Course Group Practical
Teaching
Scheme in 15 :30 Credits 1.5
Periods (L :P)
Total Contact
Methodology Lecture + practice 45Periods
Periods :
***This Course is Common to all Programs of Diploma in Level Offered by State

Board of Technical Education – Telangana State
Prerequisites: Knowledge of Basic Engineering Drawing and Clear visualization and sound
pictorial intelligence to learn this course.
This Course is aimed at developing basic graphic skills so as to enable them to use these
skills in preparation of engineering drawings, their reading and interpretation.

R U A
Unit
Name of the Unit
No Periods PART-B (6
PART-A (2 Marks
Marks
Questions)
Questions)
1 Projection of Solids 10 Q1 Q9(a)
2 Sectional Views 08 Q2 Q9(b)
3 Auxiliary views 08 Q3 Q10(a)
4 Pictorial drawing 08 Q4 Q10(b)

Q11(a),
5 Development of surfaces 11 Q5, Q6, Q7, Q8 Q11(b),
Q12(a), Q12(b)
Total Periods / Total Questions 45 8 4
[ R: Remembering, U: Understanding – 2 Marks Questions ] [A: Application – 6 Marks

Questions]
Note: Question Paper consists PART – A and PART-B, Total Marks: 40, Time: 2 Hours
PART – A consists 8 (Eight questions) and student have to answer ALL questions, each
question carries 2 marks. (8*2 = 16)
PART – B consists 4 questions (either or / (a) or (b)), student have to attempt FOUR
questions, each question carries 6 marks (4*6=24)
Course Outcomes (CO)

Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to attain the following
194
Course Outcomes (CO):
Course Outcome
CO Apply the principles of Projection of solids also draw the projections of
1 solids.
CO Appreciate the need of Sectional views also draw the sectional views and
2 true sections of the engineering components.
CO Escalate the need of auxiliary views and draw the auxiliary views of the
3 given engineering components.
CO Gain the knowledge of Isometric views of engineering components also
4 draw the isometric views of given components.
CO Grasp the knowledge and draw the development of surfaces of different
5 engineering components
Course Contents
1.0 Projection of solids (10 Hours)

Projection of regular solids
(a) Axis perpendicular to one of the planes
(b) Axis parallel to VP and inclined to HP and vice versa.
2.0 Sectional views (08 Hours)
Need for drawing sectional views – what is a sectional view - Location of cutting
plane – Purpose of cutting plane line – Selection of cutting plane to give maximum
information (vertical and offset planes) - Hatching – Section of regular solids inclined
to one plane and parallel to other plane
3.0 Auxiliary views (08 Hours)
Need for drawing auxiliary views -Explanation of the basic principles of drawing an
auxiliary views - explanation of reference plane and auxiliary plane -Partial auxiliary
view.
4.0 Pictorial Drawings (08 Hours)
Brief description of different types of pictorial drawing viz., Isometric, oblique, and
perspective and their use - Isometric drawings: Iso axis, angle between them, meaning
of visual distortion in dimensions - Need for an isometric scale, difference between
Isometric scale and ordinary scale difference between Isometric view and Isometric
projection - Isometric and non-Isometric lines -Isometric drawing of common
features like rectangles, circular shapes, non-isometric lines - Use of box and offset
methods.
5.0 Development of Surfaces (11 Hours)
Need for preparing development of surface with reference to sheet metal work
-Concept of true length of a line with reference to its orthographic projection when
the line is (i) parallel to the plane of projection (ii) inclined to one principal and
parallel to the other -Development of simple solids like cubes, prisms, cylinders,
cones, pyramid (sketches only) -Types of development: Parallel line and radial line
development -Procedure of drawing development, drawings of trays, funnels, elbow
pipes and rectangular ducts.
195
Reference Books
Engineering Drawing by Kapil dev – (Asian Publisher)

Engineering Drawing by Basant Agarwal& C.M Agarwal - ( McGraw-hill)
Engineering Drawing by N.D.Bhatt. (Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.)
A Textbook on Engineering Drawing by P. Kannaiah, K. L. Narayana, K. Venkata
Reddy

1.0 Apply Principles of Projection of solids
1.1. Draw the projections of solids to axis of solids parallel to one plane.
1.2. Draw the projections of solids to axis of solid inclined to other plane.
2.0 Appreciate the need of Sectional Views

2.1 Explain the need to draw sectional views.
2.2 Select the section plane for a given component to reveal maximum information.
2.3 Explain the positions of section plane with reference planes
2.4 Differentiate between true shape and apparent shape of section
2.5 Draw sectional views and true sections of regular solids discussed in 6.0
2.6 Apply principles of hatching.
3.0 Understand the need of auxiliary views
3.1 State the need of Auxiliary views for a given engineering drawing.
3.2 Draw the auxiliary views of a given engineering component
3.3 Differentiate between auxiliary view and apparent view
4.0 Prepare pictorial drawings
4.1 State the need of pictorial drawings.
4.2 Differentiate between isometric scale and true scale.
4.3 Prepare Isometric views for the given orthographic drawings.
5.0 Interpret Development of surfaces of different solids
5.1 State the need for preparing development drawing.
5.2 Prepare development of simple engineering objects (cubes, prisms, cylinders,
cones, pyramid) using parallel line and radial line method.
5.3 Prepare development of surface of engineering components like trays,funnel,
900 elbow & rectangular duct.
Course Program Outcomes (PO)

Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Advanced
Engineering 3 3 3 2 -- -- -- -- 3 3
Drawing
Level 3- Highly Addressed, Level 2-Moderately Addressed, Level 1-Low Addressed
196
CIE Question Paper Pattern and Syllabus

Unit R U A
Unit Name
No
6 Marks
2 Marks Questions
Questions
Mid Semester - I Examination
1 Projection Solids Q1, Q2 Q5 (a), Q5(b),
2 Sectional Views Q3, Q4 Q6(a), Q6(b)

Total 4 2
Mid Semester - II Examination
3 Auxiliary views Q1, Q2 Q5 (a), Q5(b),
4 Pictorial drawing Q3, Q4 Q6(a), Q6(b)
Total 4 2
[R: Remembering, U: Understanding – 2 Marks Questions ] [A: Applying – 6 Marks

Questions]
CIE Question Paper Pattern: Total Marks : 20, Time: 1 Hour

Maximum Marks: 20, Time: 1 Hour
Part A: Consists 4Short questions, students have to attempt 4 questions and each question carries
2 Marks.(4 X 2 = 08 Marks)
Part B: Consists 2 (Either or type) Essay type questions, students have to attempt 2 questions and each question car
12 Marks)
197
MODEL PAPER MID SEMESTER – I
18C-206P
DCE – I SEMESTER
MID SEMESTER - I EXAMINATION
ADVANCED ENGINEERING DRAWING
___________________________________________________________________________
PART-A
04X02=08
2. Each question carries TWO mark.
1. Draw the projections of a cube 0f 35mm side, resting on one of its faces (bases) on H.P such
that one of its face is parallel to and 15 mm in front of V.P.
2. Draw the projections of the cylinder base resting on HP with diameter 30mm and height
60mm.
3. A cone of base 50 mm diameter and axis 70 mm long lies on its base on H.P. A sectional
plane parallel to H.P passes through the axis at a 40 mm from the base. Draw the top view of
the reaming Cone.
4. Draw the top view of the pyramid base resting on HP with side 20mm and height 60mm, the
same pyramid was cut by a section plane horizontally at 30mm from the HP.
PART-B
02X06=12
5. (a) A hexagonal prism with side of base 30 mm and axis 70 mm long, is lying one of its
rectangular faces on H.P. Draw the projections of the prism, when its axis is parallel to both
H.P and V.P
or
5. (b) A cylinder with base 40 mm diameter and 60 mm long rests on a point of its base on H.P
such that the axis makes an angle of 30 degrees with H.P. Draw the projections of the
cylinder.
6. (a) A cylinder of diameter 50 mm and axis 70 long rests with its base on H.P. It is cut by a
section plane parallel to V.P and passing through the solid at a distance 10 mm from the axis.
Draw the projections.
or
6. (b) A cube of edge 40 mm rests on H.P one of its edges and a face is parallel to V.P. One of
the face containing the resting edge is inclined at 30 degrees to H.P. It is cut by horizontal
section plane at 10 mm away from the axis. Draw the projections of the cube.
198
MODEL PAPER MID SEMESTER – II
18C-206P
DCE – I SEMESTER
MID SEMESTER - II EXAMINATION
___________________________________________________________________________
PART-A
04X02=08
2. Each question carries TWO mark.
1. What is the importance of auxiliary view?
2. A cube of side 30mm placed on HP and sectioned diagonally, draw the auxiliary view of
the inclined surface.
3. Draw the isometric view of a circular plane of diameter 60mm whose surface is vertical.
4. Draw the isometric view of a pentagonal plane of 30mm side when one of its sides is
parallel to H.P, when it is horizontal.
PART-B
02X06=12
5. (a) Draw the isometric drawing of a cone of base diameter 30mm and axis 50mm long.
or
5. (b) Draw the auxiliary view of the slopping surface of the cast iron block as shown in the
Figure. 1
Figure. (1) Figure. (2)

6. (a) Draw the auxiliary view of the slopping surface of the cast iron block as shown in the
Figure. 2
or
6. (b) Draw the isometric drawing of a cylinder of base diameter 20mm and axis 35mm
long.
199
MODEL PAPER SEE
18C- 206P
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C–18)
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
Time: 2hours] [Total Marks:40
attempted question. No marks will be allotted for extra questions answered.
PART-A
08X02=16
1. Draw the projections of the cylinder with 30mm height and 10mm radius, whose axis is
parallel to VP?
2. A cylinder with base radius 30mm height 60mm and based resting on the ground, a section
plane cuts the cylinder at 30mm from the ground. Draw the sectional top view of the cylinder.
3. Draw the auxiliary view of sloping surface of the object whose isometric view is given in
Figure (1).
4. Draw the isometric view of a block whose orthographic views are shown in Figure (2)
5. Draw the development of a cylinder with diameter 40mm and length 50mm.
6. Draw the development of a pyramid of side 20mm and height 50mm.
7. Draw the development of a cube of side 30 mm.

8. Draw the development of cone 25 mm base diameter and 40 mm height.
PART-B
04X06=24
200
Instructions : 1. Answer any FOUR questions.
9. a) Draw the projection of a cylinder of a diameter of base 50 mm and height 80 mm when its
axis is making an angle of 300 to the H.P and parallel to the V.P.
or
9. b) A cylinder of 50 mm diameter and 60 mm long is resting on its base on the ground and
the axis 30 mm in front of V.P It is cut by a section plane perpendicular to the V.P the vertical
trace of which cuts the axis at a point 40 mm from the base and makes an angle of 45 0 with
H.P. Draw its front view, sectional top view.
10. a) Draw the auxiliary view of sloping surface of the guide object shown in figure (3).
or
10. b) Draw the isometric view of the block, whose orthographic views are shown in
figure (4).
11. a) Draw the development of the truncated cylinder as shown in figure (5).
Figure (5) Figure (6) Figure (7)
or
11. b) Draw the development of truncated cone shown in below figure (6)
201
12. a) A right circular cylinder of 55 mm diameter and 66 mm long is cut by a section plane
perpendicular to VP and inclined at an angle of 60 0 to the HP. It is passing through a point on
the axis at a height of 45 mm from its base. Draw the development of bottom position of the
truncated cylinder.
or
b) Draw the development of the right circular cylinder shown in below figure (7)
202
Advanced Computer Aided Drafting
Advanced Computer Aided

Drafting
Teaching Scheme
15:0:30 Credits 1.5
in Periods (L:T:P)
Total Contact
Methodology Tutorials + Practice 45 Periods
Periods :
Pre course
This requisites
requires the Basic CAD Skills and concepts of engineering drawing
Course Outcomes
CO1 Significance of Layers. Create and assign properties to layers and modify layers
CO2 Importance and advantages of blocks. Use of standard blocks and user defined blocks
CO3 Need of solid modeling and various methods of solid modeling with different surfaces
CO4 Create and modify 3D drawings
Course Contents
UNIT -1 Duration: 15 periods (T:5 + P:10pds)
1.1 Organize the information on layers

Setting a current layer, layers color, line type, line weight, print style locking and unlocking of layers,
the layer visibility and layer printing. Setting of current line type.The loading of additional line types,
creating and naming of line type, editing of line type.
1.2 Use the Blocks, Attributes and External references to manage the drawing blocks
The purpose of a block, creating a block, inserting a block, redefining a block, exploding a block
1.3 Attribute
Editing attribute definitions, attaching attribute to blocks. Editing attributes attached to blocks,
Extracting attributes information.
UNIT -2 Duration: 15 periods (T:2.5 + P:10hrs)
2.0 Viewing entities in three dimensions
Setting a new viewing direction

Dynamically setting a view direction
2.1 Creation of three-dimensional entities using different methods
Drawing of two dimensional entities in three dimensional space.
203
Converting two dimensional planar entities into three dimensional entities by applying
elevation and thickness.
Converting two dimensional planar entities into three dimensional entities by revolving or
extruding.
Creation of three-dimensional faces, rectangular meshes, ruled surface meshes, extruded

surface meshes, revolved surface meshes, three dimensional entities such as boxes, Cylinders,
Cones, Spheres, wedges, torus, Regions, extruded solids, revolved solids, composite solids,
intersect solids
Boolean operations like union, subtract and interfere.
2.2 Editing in three dimensions
Rotating in three dimensions, Array in three dimensions (Rectangular and polar).
Mirroring in three dimensions, aligning in three dimensions.
2.3 Editing of three dimensional solids
Sectioning and Slicing of solids, hiding, shading and rendering.
2.4 Selection of material from library
Enable the material library, editing materials and material library.
UNIT- 3
Application of above three units
Recommended Books
1. Auto cad by George Omura

2. 4MCAD User Guide- IntelliCAD Technology Consortium
1.0 Organize the information on layers

1.1 Explain the need and importance of Layers.
1.2 Practice creating new layer, naming the layer and assigning properties like Layer
colour, Line type and line weight and setting the current layer
1.3 Practice the locking and unlocking of layers
1.4 Practice the Freezing and thawing of layers
1.5 Practice the layer visibility and layer printing
1.6 Practice the loading of additional line types
2.0 Use the Blocks, Attributes and External references to manage the Drawing
2.1 Define a block
2.2 Explain the purpose of a block
2.3 Practice the creating a block
2.4 Practice the inserting a block
2.5 Practice the redefining a block
2.6 Practice the exploding a block
2.7 Define an Attribute
2.8 Practice the editing attribute definitions
2.9 Practice the attaching attribute to blocks
2.10 Edit attributes attached to blocks
2.11 Extract attributes information
2.12 Define external reference
204
2.13 Practice the Attaching, Removing, and Reloading of external references
2.14 Practice the Binding, Clipping and changing the path of external references
3.0 Understand the concepts of 3D
View entities in three dimensions
3.1.1 To set a new viewing direction
3.1.2 To dynamically set a view direction
3.2 Create three-dimensional entities using different methods
3.2.1 Draw two dimensional entities in three dimensional space.
3.2.2 Convert two dimensional planar entities into three dimensional entities by applying
elevation and thickness.
3.2.3 Convert two dimensional planar entities into three dimensional entities by revolving
or extruding.
3.2.4 Create three-dimensional faces.
3.2.5 Create rectangular meshes.
3.2.6 Create ruled surface meshes.
3.2.7 Create extruded surface meshes.
3.2.8 Create revolved surface meshes.
3.2.9 Create three dimensional entities such as boxes, Cylinders, Cones, Spheres, wedges,
torus, Regions.
3.2.10 Create extruded solids.
3.2.11 Create revolved solids.
3.2.12 Create composite solids.
3.2.13 Create intersect solids.
3.3 Editing in three dimensions
3.3.1 Rotate in three dimensions
3.3.2 Array in three dimensions (Rectangular and polar)
3.3.3 Mirror in three dimensions
3.3.4 Align in three dimensions
3.4 Edit three dimensional solids
3.4.1 Practice Sectioning and Slicing solids
3.4.2 Practice hiding, shading and rendering
4 Practice applications on above units
Exercise Key components
 Importance of layers
Layers  Creation of new layers and controlling properties of
layers
 Create, insert and explode a block
Working with blocks  Attach attribute to blocks
 Edit and extract attributes attached to blocks
 Set a new viewing direction
View entities in three dimensions
 Set dynamically view direction
 Create three-dimensional faces
 Create rectangular meshes, ruled surface meshes,
Create three-dimensional entities extruded surface meshes, revolved surface meshes
 Create three dimensional entities such as boxes,
Cylinders.
205
 Rotate in three dimensions
 Array in three dimensions (Rectangular and polar)
Edit in three dimensions
 Mirror in three dimensions
 Align in three dimensions
 Practice Sectioning and Slicing solids
Edit three dimensional solids
 Practice hiding, shading and rendering
Practice the selection of material  Enable material library
from library  Edit materials and material library
Course Outcome Cognizant Linked PO Teaching

Level Hours
Significance of Layers. Create and assign

CO1 U/A 1,2,3,9,10 15
properties to layers and modify layers
Importance and advantages of blocks. Use of

CO2 U/A 1,2,3,9,10 9
standard blocks and user defined blocks
Need of solid modeling and various methods of

CO3 U/A 1,2,3,9,10 6
solid modeling with different surfaces
CO4 Create and modify 3D drawings A 1,2,3,10 15
MID SEM-I EXAM
SN Unit name R,U (Q A (Q No’s) Remarks

No’s)
1 Unit-1 1,2,3,4 5,6
MID SEM-2 EXAM
SN Unit name R,U (Q A (Q No’s) Remarks

No’s)
1 Unit-2 1,2,3,4 5,6
SEE

SN Unit name R,U (Q
A (Q No’s)
No’s)
1 Unit-1 1,2
Unit-2 3,4
Unit-3 5,6
206
18C207P- Advanced Computer Aided Drafting
MODEL PAPER FOR MID -1 (CIE)
TIME: 1hr Marks: 20M
PART-A
7. Create four layers, name the layers and assign different properties like linecolor, line type,
line weight to different layers.
8. Write the procedure to create a block.
9. What is meant by attribute..
10. What do you mean by layer and what are the advantages of it.
PART-B
11. Draw the following using Layers. Use different layers to different line types, text,
dimension and main figure.
207
12. Draw the following using Layers. Use different layers to different line types, text,
dimension and main figure.
208
PART-A
7. Draw rectangle of 100x60 and extrude to a depth of 25mm.
8. Draw a cylinder of dia 50mm and height 100mm.
9. List various Boolean operations
10. Draw a cube of 100mm side and make a hole of 25mm.
PART-B
209
210
MODEL PAPER
SEMESTER END EXAMINATIN
PART-A
NOTE: Answer all questions 4X4=
16marks.
1. Write the procedure to create and insert a block.
2. Create four layers, name the layers and assign different properties like line color,
line type, line weight to different layers.
3. Draw a 3D cone of base 30mm and height 50mm
4. Draw to 2 boxes of 50x30x20 and 30x50x20 mm and union them
.
PART-B
NOTE: Answer any one questions 1 X 24 =
24marks
5 (a) Draw the following 3D object CAD software. 20+4 marks

211
6 (a) Draw the following 3D object CAD software. 20+4 marks
212

Course Title: Levelling Surveying Lab Practice Course Code : 18C-208P
Semester: II Semester Course Group : Practical
Methodology : Lecture+Practical Total Contact Periods : 45Periods
Pre-requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of Surveying

Upon the completion of the course, the student shall be able to
CO1 : Apply standard practices to perform different operations of Levelling in the field
CO2 : Calculate the Reduced levels by Differential Levelling and Fly levelling
CO3 : Conduct Profile Levelling for the given alignment and Reciprocal Levelling in the field to find true
difference in elevation
CO4 : Perform contouring by method of squares and plot the drawings
CO5 Demonstrate the use of minor Instruments

Unit Unit Name Hours/Periods
No
1 Operations of Levelling 9
2 Differential and Fly Levelling 12
3 Profile and Reciprocal 12
Levelling
4 Contouring 06
5 Minor Instruments 06
Total 45
Course Contents
UNIT 1:Operations of Levelling Duration :9 Periods(L:3-P:6)

a) Study of dumpy level, levelling staves- performing Temporary
adjustments of level.
b) Taking staff readings of various stations - booking of readings in level
field book.
UNIT 2:Differential and Fly Levelling Duration :12 Periods(L:4-P:8)
213
a) Differential and Fly levelling - calculation of reducing levels by
Height of collimation and Rise & Fall methods (inverted levels also)
UNIT 3:Profile and Reciprocal Levelling Duration :12 Periods(L:4-P:8)

a) Profile levelling-recording of readings in level field book and
calculation of RLs.
b) Reciprocal levelling - True difference in elevation and collimation
error.
UNIT 4: Contouring Duration:6 Periods(L:2-P:4)
a) Contouring by squares
b) Contouring by cross-sections
c) Location of contour points by direct method
UNIT 5 : Minor Instruments(Demonstration only)Duration:6 Periods(L:2-P:4)

a) Electronic Planimeter
b) Pentagraph
c) Clinometer
Recommended Books

Suggested E-learning references

2. http://www.nitttrchd.ac.in/sitenew1/nctel/civil.php
214
1.1 Identify the component parts of a dumpy level

1.2 Study different types of levelling staves
1.3 Perform temporary adjustments of a dumpy level for taking
observations
1.4 Practice taking staff readings and recording them in level field book
2.1. Take staff readings for differential levelling and compute the differencein elevation
between two stations (take invert levels also)
2.2. Conduct fly levelling and determine RLs of required stations
3.1. Conduct profile levelling along a route and compute the RLs at variousstations
3.2. Conduct profile levelling by taking Cross sections across a route and compute the
RLsat various stations
3.3. Plot the LS and CS along a route from the data
3.4. Determine the true difference in elevation between two far off stations by conducting
reciprocal levelling
4.1 Contouring by squares
4.2 Contouring by cross-sections
4.3 Location of contour points by direct method
Demonstration of
5.1. Electronic Planimeter
5.2. Pentagraph
1 Prepare a spread sheet(Excel) by Rise and Fall method showing the calculation by using
formula bar and present it.
2 Prepare a spread sheet(Excel) by Height of Instrument method showing the calculation
by using formula bar and present it
3 Conduct a survey camp involving levelling and drawing contour map
4 Tech fest/Srujana
5 Paper/Poster presentation
6 Quiz
7 Group discussion
8 Surprise Test
215
CO
CO5
CO4
CO3
CO2
CO1
2
1
Basic knowledge
PO 1
2
3
3
3
2
PO 2
3
3
3
3
PO 3
2
3
3
3
Engineering Tools
PO 4

PO 5
216
PO 6
2
2
Ethics
PO 7
3
3
3
2

PO 8
3
3
3
2
Communication
PO 9
Lifelong learning
PO 10
2,4
1,2,3,8,9
2,3,4,8,9
2,3,4,7,8,9
Linked PO
1,2,3,4,7,8,9,10
Mid Sem-I Model Question paper
DCE II semester Examination
Course Name: Levelling Surveying Lab Practice Max.Marks:20 Marks
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Record the readings taken with the level and a 4 m levelling staff on continuously sloping
ground at a common interval of 1m in the field book. Take a bench mark of 100.000m. Calculate
the R.L of given points by height of collimation method
2) Note the observed readings taken with the level and a 4 m levelling staff on the given ground in
the field book. Take a bench mark of 95.000m. Calculate the R.L of given points by Rise and
fall method
3) Find out the true difference in elevation between the two given points 50 m apart.

Mid Sem-II Model Question paper
DCE II semester practical Examination
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Conduct Profile levelling for the given length of the road and plot the details
2) Conduct Cross sectioning for the given section of road and plot the details
3) Prepare the contour map for the given area with a contour interval of 2 m by method of squares
4) Prepare the contour map for the given area with a contour interval of 1 m by direct method of
contouring
5) Prepare the contour map from the given reduced levels with a contour interval of 1 m by
interpolation
217
DCE II semester practical Examination
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Record the readings taken with the level and a 4 m levelling staff on continuously sloping
ground at a common interval of 1m in the field book. Take a bench mark of 100.000m. Calculate
the R.L of given points by height of collimation method
2) Note the observed readings taken with the level and a 4 m levelling staff on the given ground in
the field book. Take a bench mark of 95.000m. Calculate the R.L of given points by Rise and
fall method
3) Find out the true difference in elevation between the two given points 50 m apart.
4) Conduct Profile levelling for the given length of the road and plot the details
5) Conduct Cross sectioning for the given section of road and plot the details
6) Prepare the contour map for the given area with a contour interval of 2 m by method of squares
7) Prepare the contour map for the given area with a contour interval of 1 m by direct method of
contouring
8) Prepare the contour map from the given reduced levels with a contour interval of 1 m by
interpolation
218
Applied Science Lab Practice (Physics Lab + Chemistry Lab)
Course Title Applied Science Lab Course Code 18Common-

Practice (Physics Lab + 209P
Chemistry Lab)
Teaching Scheme in 15:0:30 Credits 1.5

Periods (L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact Periods 45
Physics Lab – 209P(A)
Pre requisites: Knowledge of basic concepts of High School Science, Basic Mathematics
Course objectives:To provide practical knowledge about the basics of Physics instrumentation
and calculations/measurements.
1. Introduction to Physics practical and its importance, safety precautions in maintenance of

equipment in the laboratory.
3. Follow of Do’s and Don’ts.
4. Maintenance of data in manual and record book.
6. Strictly following of instructions given from time to time by the lecturer-in-charge.
7. Demonstration of each experiment by the lecturer in charge.
Conduct of an experiment: 2 Periods
Course outcomes:
On successful completion of the course, the student will have ability to:
1: Determine the Focal length and focal power of convex lenses using U-V and
graphical method.
2: Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity using Simple Pendulum and verify
with L-T2graph.
3: Determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature.
4: Determine the refractive index of a solid using travelling microscope.
219
5: Practice the mapping of magnetic lines of force-locating neutral points.
References:
3. Basic Applied Physics – R.K. Gaur

4. Laboratory manual for class XI and XII - NCERT
PHYSICS PRACTICALS
List of experiments
Semester II
1. Convex lens-Determination of Focal length and focal power using U-V and graphical method.
2: Simple Pendulum-Determination of the value of acceleration due to gravity and verify
with L-T2graph.
3: Resonance apparatus-Determination of velocity of sound in air at room temperature .
4: Travelling microscope-Determination of refractive index of a solid.
5: Practice the mapping of magnetic lines of force-location of neutral points
Course Delivery:
The course will be delivered through lectures, class room interaction, group discussions, graded
exercises, demonstration and practice.
Conduction of experiments: 2 periods/Experiment.
Student must perform experiment individually under the supervision of the lecturer-in charge.
On successful completion of the course, the student will have the ability to attain below Course
outcomes (CO):
CL Linked Teaching
Course Outcomes
POs Periods
CO 1 Focal length and Focal power of convex lens U/A 1,2,3,8,9

(Separate & Combination) L:P::1:2
CO 2 Acceleration due to gravity using simple U/A 1,2,3,8,9

pendulum L:P::1:2
CO 3 Velocity of sound in air – (Resonance U/A 1,2,3,8,9

method) L:P::1:2
CO 4 Refractive index of solid using traveling U/A 1,2,3,8,9 L:P::1:2
220
microscope
CO 5 Mapping of magnet lines of force-locating U/A 1,2,3,8,9

neutral points L:P::1:2
CO 6 Related the answers to the oral questions
Cognitive levels (CL): U=Understand, A=Application
Name of the Experiment

Competencies Key competencies
1. Focal length and Focal power of  Fix the object distance  Calculate the focal length
 Find the Image distance and power of convex
convex lens (Separate & lens
 Calculate the focal length and
Combination) power of convex lens and  Draw u-v and 1/u – 1/v
2. Simple pendulum – acceleration due to  combination
Fix the simpleofpendulum
convex lenses
to  graph
Find the time for number
gravity – length of seconds pendulum the stand of oscillations
 Adjust the length of pendulum  Find the time period
 Find the time for number of  Calculate the acceleration
oscillations due to gravity
 Find the time period  Draw l-T and l-T2 graph
 Calculate the acceleration due
to gravity
 Draw l-T and l-T2 graph
3. Velocity of sound in air  Adjust the reservoir level

 Arrange the resonance
 Find the first and second
–Resonance method apparatus
resonanting lengths
 Adjust the reservoir level for
 Calculate velocity of
booming sound
sound
 Find the first and second
 Calculate velocity of
resonanting lengths
sound at 00 C
 Calculate velocity of sound
221
4. Refractive index of solid using  Find the least count of vernier  Read the scale
on microscope  Calculate the refractive
traveling microscope
 Place the graph paper below index of glass slab
microscope
 Read the scale
 Calculate the refractive index
of glass slab
5. Mapping of magnet lines of  Draw magnetic meridian

 Place the bar magnet in
Force – neutral points NN(North pole of bar  Draw magnetic lines
magnet pointing North) of
and NS (South pole of bar force
magnet pointing North)
directions  Locate the neutral
 Draw magnetic lines of points
force along equatorial and
 Locate the neutral points
along equatorial and axial axial lines
lines
EXAMINATION & EXPERIMENTS
S.NO EXAMINATION EXPERIMENTS

1 MIDSEM-I EXPERIMENT NO 1 & 2
2 MIDSEM-II Scheme of Valuation of SEE EXPERIMENT NO 3 & 4
3 S.No Particulars
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION Marks
EXPERIMENT NO 1,2,3,4 and 5
1. Objective/Aim 01
2. Apparatus/Equipment 02
3. Observations 02
4. Principle including formula 02
5. Experiment (Tabular form, readings, etc) 05
6. Calculation and Result 05
7. Viva Voce 03
Total 20
222
Chemistry Lab – 209P(B)
Prerequisite:
Knowledge of basic concepts of chemistry of secondary education.
Course Objectives:
To provide practical knowledge about the basics of volumetric analysis of chemical compounds.
Course Outcomes:
On successful completion of the course, the student will have ability to attain CO:
Course Outcome CL Linked PO Teaching

Periods
CO1 Estimate the amount of the U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::1:2
mohr’s salt in the given
solution
CO2 Determination of acidity , U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::1:2
alkalinity and pH of given
water samples/
solutions.
CO3 Estimate the amount of the U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::1:2
chlorides in the given
solution.
CO4 Relate the answers to the U/A
oral questions
U = Understand, A = Application
Course Delivery:
The course will be delivered through lectures, classroom interaction, group discussion,
demonstration and practicals.
Conduction of experiments: Lecture 1 period + Experiment 2 periods..
Student must conduct experiment individually under the supervision of the staff-in-charge.
1. Introduction of chemistry practical and its importance, safety precautions in maintenance

of cleanliness and orderliness of chemicals in the laboratory.
3. Follow of DO’s and Don’ts.
4. Maintenance of data in record book.
6. Strict following of instructions given from time to time by the staff-in- charge.
7. Demonstration of each experiment by the staff in charge.
Course content
223
Volumetric Analysis: (22.5 Periods)
Volumetric analysis by Titrimetric Method:-
Volumetric Analysis -Titration – Standard Solutions- Concentration of solutions-

Indicators- acid base indicators- selection of indicators-endpoint of titration-Neutralization.
List of experiments:
1. Estimation of Mohr’s salt by using 0.02M potassium permanganate
solution.
2. Determination of acidity of water sample by using 0.02N NaOH solution.
3. Determination of alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N H2SO4 solution.
4. Estimate the chloride content present in water sample by using 0.0141N
AgNO3 solution.
5. Find out the pH of the given solution by using pH meter.

1. Estimate Mohr’s salt by using standard potassium permanganate solution.
2. Determine the partial and total acidity of water sample by using 0.02N
NaOH solution.
3. Determine the partial and total alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N
H2SO4 solution.
AgNO3 solution.
5. Find out the pH of the given solution by using pH meter.
Reference Books:
1. Vogel’s Inorganic Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.

2. Practical chemistry by O.P.Pande& others.
3. Qualitative and quantitative analysis by Alex.
Scheme of Valuation for MID I & II and SEE

Sl. No. Particulars Marks
1 Identification of apparatus/equipment/chemical 2
compounds/tools/etc.
2 Writing Procedure 5
3 Conducting of experiment 4
4 Observation and Results 6
5 Viva-voice 3
Total 20
224
C-18 COMMON-209P

MIDSEM – I
APPLIED SCIENCE LAB PRACTICE
1. Determine the Focal length and focal power of given convex lense using U-V method.
2. Determine the Focal length and focal power of given convex lense by U-V graph method.
3. Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity at your place sing Simple Pendulum.
4. Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity at your place sing Simple Pendulum by L-
T2 graph.
5. Estimate the amount of Mohr’s salt present in the given 500 ml of solution
by using 0.02M potassium permanganate solution.
6. Determine the partial acidity of water sample by using 0.02N NaOH solution.
7. Determine the total acidity of water sample by using 0.02N NaOH solution
C-18 COMMON-209P
225
MIDSEM – II
1. Determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature by resonance method.

2. Determine the refractive index of a solid using travelling microscope.
3. Determine the partial alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N H 2SO4 solution.
4. Determine the total alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N H 2SO4 solution
AgNO3 solution
C18 – COMMON 209P
226
MODEL PAPER
COMMON – II SEMESTER END EXAMINATION

(2) Each question carries TWENTY marks.
1. Determine the Focal length and focal power of given convex lens using U-V method.
2. Determine the Focal length and focal power of given convex lens by U-V graph method.
3. Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity at your place sing Simple Pendulum.
4. Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity at your place sing Simple Pendulum by L-
T2 graph.
5. Determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature by resonance method.
6. Determine the refractive index of a solid using travelling microscope.
7. Draw magnetic lines of force around a bar magnet placed in NN position of earth’s magnetic
field and locate neutral points.
8. Draw magnetic lines of force around a bar magnet placed in NS position of earth’s magnetic
field and locate neutral points.
9. Estimate the amount of Mohr’s salt present in the given one litre of solution
by using 0.02M KMnO4 solution.
10. Determine the partial acidity of water sample by using 0.02N NaOH solution.
11. Determine the total acidity of water sample by using 0.02N NaOH solution
12. Determine the partial alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N H2SO4 solution.
13. Determine the total alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N H 2SO4 solution
AgNO3 solution
Find out the pH of the given solution by using pH meter
227
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY LAB PRACTICE
Course Title :IT LAB PRACTICE Course Code :18C-210P

Semester :II Course Group :Practical
Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P) : Credits :1.5
15:0:30 Total Contact Periods : 45Periods
Methodology:Lecture + Practical SEE :40 Marks
CIE :60 Marks
Prerequisites
Knowledge of Computer basics and DOS
Course Outcome
On successful completion of the course, the students will be able to attain below Course Outcome
(CO):
Course Outcome CL
Linked PO Practical hrs
CO Demonstrate skills using spreadsheet software A1,2,3,4,8,9,1 15
1 0
CO Demonstrate skills using presentation software A 1,2,3,4,8,9,1 15
2 0
CO Demonstrate skills using database software A 1,2,3,4,8,9,1 15
3 0
Total Sessions 45
Legends: R = Remember U= Understand; A= Apply and above levels (Bloom’s revised taxonomy)
Course Content
Spread Sheet
1. Open MS-Excel and identify the components on the screen
2. Create a Worksheet in MS-Excel and save it in .xls or .xlsx format
3. Inserting column and row in Excel
4. Creation of new worksheet in the existing Excel Book file
5. Generate a Chart using the data in Excel-worksheet
6. Automate calculations in a worksheet using formula
7. Sort and filter data in a worksheet
8. Protecting a worksheet, working with multiple sheets
9.
Presentation Software
10. Create a simple Power point presentation for a small topic and saving in .ppt or pptx
format
11. Inserting a new slide in the existing PowerPoint file
12. Inserting chart or image in a PowerPoint slide
13. Exercise with animation and sound features in PowerPoint
14. Exercise with Rehearse Timings feature in PowerPoint
15. Exercise in printing the PowerPoint file in (a) Slides (b) Handouts
Database Management System

16. Create a table for given data and save in .mdb or .accdb format
17. Add, Delete and rename fields
228
18. Use the Primary key field
19. Enter and edit data
20. Use Relationships option
21. Create forms
22. Modify and save forms
23. Create and use queries
24. Sort data
25. Display data
26. Create and print reports
Resources:
1. Computer Fundamentals Concepts, Systems, Application, D.P.Nagapal, S.Chand
Publication, RP-2014, ISBN: 81-219-2388-3
2. http://www.tutorialsforopenoffice.org/
3. http://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/documentation/
Composition of Educational Components:

Questions for CIE and SEE will be designed to evaluate the various educational components
(Bloom’s taxonomy) such as:
Sl. No. Bloom’s Category %

1 Remembrance 20
2 Understanding 20
3 Application 60
Mapping Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes:

(Course Outcome linkage to Cognitive Level)
Course Outcome Experiment Linked Linked PO CL Practical

Sessions
CO1 Demonstrate skills using 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 A 15
spreadsheet software
CO2 Demonstrate skills using 9,10,11,12,13,14 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 A 15
presentation software
CO3 Demonstrate skills using 15,16,17,18,19,20,21, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 A 15
database software 22,23,24,25
U-Understanding; A-application/ Analysis; App-Application
Level 3- Highly Addressed, Level 2-Moderately Addressed, Level 1-Low Addressed.
Course Delivery
The course will be delivered through tutorial of one hour and one & half hours of hands on practice
per week.
Suggested Student Activities:

1. Create a spreadsheet for the class
2. Create power point presentation for a course
3. Create a database for the class
229
Format for Student Activity Assessment
Internal Assesment
Activity Marks
Writing the experiment, record evaluation 30
Execution of the given experiment 20
Viva-voce 10
Total 60
Model Question Bank
Course Title:IT LAB PRACTICE Course Code: 18CE210P
1. Using Spreadsheet Application, create a worksheet with five columns. Enter

tenrecords and find the sum of all columns using auto sum feature.
2. You have a monthly income of Rs.10000. Your monthly expenditures are Rent-
Rs3000, Food- Rs. 1500,Electricity- Rs.100, Phone- Rs. 150, and Cable TV-Rs. 200.
1. Prepare a worksheet with the Monthly Income, the Monthly Expenditures listed
andsummed, monthly savings amount (what’s left over each month) calculated, and
theamount saved per day (assuming 30 days in a month). Use Spreadsheet
Application.
2. Using Spreadsheet Application, create a worksheet containing the pay
details(containing Basic pay, DA, HRA,Other Allowance, Deductions- PF, PT,
Insurance,Gross and Net salary) of the employees using formulas.
3. Using Spreadsheet Application, create a Simple Bar Chart to highlight the results of
your institute
4. for three years.
5. Using Spreadsheet Application, create a Pie Chart for a sample data and give legends.
6. Using presentation tool, create a simple Presentation consisting of 4-5 slides about
Input and Output Devices.
7. Create a presentation about a book containing Title, Author, Publisher and Contents.
8. Create an automated (timings & animation) Presentation with five slides about
different Models of Computers. Use Presentation tool
230
Semester: II Semester Course Group : Practical
Teaching Scheme in 0:0:105 Credits : 2.5
Periods(L:T:P):
1. Conduct a survey around the college campus and plot the Contour map and
give Power Point Presentation.
2. Prepare action plan for construction of internal roads in college campus
based on measured data.
3. Prepare 3D models of different exercises given in isometric drawings using
AUTOCAD.
4. Prepare a 3D view of the college campus using AUTO CAD with
animation.
5. Calculate the volume of the nearby pond/reservoir using contours
interpreted from respective survey maps and topo sheets using
Trapezoidal/Simpson’s rule.
6. Prepare 3D models of different exercises given in isometric drawings using
fibre board.
7. Prepare a perspective view of entire college campus using AUTOCAD and
demonstrate with animation.
8. Prepare a presentation formulating an action plan to control air pollution in
the city
9. Give a presentation describing the detailed action plan to minimize water
pollution in the city.
10.Listen to given passages/conversations/dialogues/speeches and answer the
questions to improve the listening skills.
11.Conduct JAM on topics such as environment, pollution, ethics, morals,
responsibilities of citizens.
231
12.Speak about incidents/events/memories/dreams/role model to enhance
public speaking skills.
13.Conduct Interviews with famous personalities and prepare a report to cover
its essence.
14.Compare and contrast two people/pictures/news items/ideas and give
presentation
15.Student visits Library to refer Text books, reference books and manuals to
find their specifications.
16.Student inspects the available equipment in the Chemistry Lab to
familiarize with them.
17.Create a spreadsheet for the data pertaining to students bio-data.
18. Create a power point presentation on the performance of the students in
Games and Sports meet.
19.Prepare a presentation to describe various types of Straight lines.
20. Identify the geometrical shapes in and around your locality and give the
details about them.
21.Prepare a comparative study of conic sections and their uses in engineering
applications.
22.Prepare a detailed study report on differentiation using different methods.
23.List out and explain the applications of Differentiation.
24.Apply the differentiation in geometrical problems.
25.Apply the differentiation in rate measure problems.
26.Apply the differentiation to problem solving in finding maxima minima.
27.Prepare a list of available reference books with details such as author,
publisher, edition etc.
28.Prepare a list of Science journals, magazines, monographs with details.
29.Prepare a log book of your visits to college library with brief description.
30.Construct a blowing pipe to detect dangerous gases in mines.
31.Construct model stethoscope with known materials.
232
32.Conduct awareness program on noise pollution in your college, colony.
Prepare a video report.
33. Hypothesize seconds’ pendulum timer.
34.Prepare a power point presentation on photosensitive materials with
detailed specifications.
35.Prepare a report on Lasers where they are practically used.
36.Prepare a power point presentation on application of optical fibers in
medical and engineering field.
37.How can you produce electricity with a magnet? – (a) Develop a working
model/ prepare a power point presentation with animation/ prepare
drawings on a chart.
38.Construct an electric calling bell.
39.Setup a circuit on breadboard to verify Kirchhoff’s voltage law.
40.Prepare a power point presentation on Superconductors and their practical
applications with motion pictures embedded.
41.Collect various resistors, diodes and LEDs with specifications and compile
on a card board.
42.Oral/Power point presentation on the different methods of concentration of
ore :
Step-1: Data collection on the ores and different methods of concentration
of ore.
Step -2: Prepare for oral/a power point presentation on different methods
of concentration of ore.
Step-3: Explain the methods of concentration of ore with oral
presentation/ power point presentation
Step-4: Submit the report along with ppt.
43.Corrosion of a metal under different conditions:
Step-1: Collection of data related to the factors effecting the corrosion.

Step -3: Setting and Execution of experiment under different conditions
such as
i) Metal exposed to air only
233
ii) Metal exposed to dry air
iii) Metal partially dipped in salt water
iv) Metal completely dipped in water
v) Metal partially dipped in pure water
Note: This experiment may be conducted in other conditions also.
Step-4: Recording of observations and comparison of extent of corrosion
under different conditions after one week with explanation
Step-5: overall presentation of the activity
44.Comparison of Corrosion of different metals /alloys exposed to the same

environmental conditions:
Step-1: Data collection.
Step -3: Setting and Execution of experiment with different metals/alloys
such as Iron, stainless steel, aluminum, copper etc. under the same
conditions
on different metals after one week with explanation
45.Comparison of Corrosion of metal with different shapes and surfaces under

same environmental conditions:
Step -3: Setting and Execution of experiment with a metal having
different shapes and surfaces under the same conditions.
on different metals after one week with explanation
46.Study of Prevention of Corrosion of a metal by using different coating

materials
Step -3: Setting and Execution of experiment with a metal coated with
different materials like oil, paint, plastic, rubber etc
on the metals after one week with explanation
47.Study of plastics, recycling of plastics and their advantages and

disadvantages
234
Step -3: Preparation of power point presentation on recycling, advantages
and disadvantages of platsics
Step-4: Explain about the recycling, advantages and disadvantages of
plastics and suggest the measures to protect the environment
Step-5: Submission of the report along with the ppt.
48.Study on natural rubber and its uses

Step -3: Preparation of power point presentation on processing of natural
rubber from natural source and vulcanization..
Step-4: Explain about the properties and uses of natural and vulcanized
rubber.
49.Power point presentation on fossil fuels

Step -3: Preparation of power point presentation on fossil fuels.
Step-4: Explain about the advantages and disadvantages of solid , liquid
and gaseous fuels.
50.Study and analysis of environment related air pollution

Step -3: Identify the factors that affecting the quality of air.
Step-4: Explain about the quality of air and suggest the remedial measures
through ppt.
51.Study and analysis of environment related water pollution

Step -3: Identify the factors that affecting the quality of water body.
Step-4: Explain about the quality of water body and suggest the remedial
measures through ppt.
235
52.Study and analysis of college environment
Step -3: Identify the factors that affecting the environment of the
institution.
Step-4: Explain about the existing environment and suggest the measures
to improve it through ppt.
53.Construction of Galvanic cell

Step -3: Construction of any galvanic cell.
Step-4: Explain about the construction and functioning of Galvanic cell
through ppt.
Note:

236
Rubrics for Activity assessment-MATHEMATICS
CATEGORY 4 3 2 1
Mathematical Explanation Explanation Explanation Explanation
Concepts shows complete shows substantial shows some shows very
understanding of understanding of understanding of limited
the mathematical the mathematical the mathematical understanding of
concepts used to concepts used to concepts needed the underlying
solve the solve the to solve the concepts needed
problem(s). problem(s). problem(s). to solve the
problem(s) OR is
not written.
Procedures Typically, uses Typically, uses Sometimes uses Rarely uses an
an efficient and an effective an effective effective
effective procedure to procedure to procedure to
procedure to solve the solve problems, solve problems.
solve the problem(s). but does not do it
problem(s). consistently.
Explanation Explanation is Explanation is Explanation is a Explanation is
detailed and clear. little difficult to difficult to
clear. understand, but understand and is
includes critical missing several
components. components OR
was not included.
Working with Student was an Student was an Student Student did not
Others engaged partner, engaged partner cooperated with work effectively
listening to but had trouble others, but with others.
suggestions of listening to others needed
others and and/or working prompting to stay
working cooperatively. on-task.
cooperatively
throughout
lesson.
Mathematical 90-100% of the Almost all (85- Most (75-84%) of More than 75%
Errors steps and 89%) of the steps the steps and of the steps and
solutions have no and solutions solutions have no solutions have
mathematical have no mathematical mathematical
errors. mathematical errors. errors.
errors.
237
Rubrics for Activity assessment (in Applied Physics)
General Scale for scoring student performance in Skill Upgradation
Type of Skill/Score 4 3 2 1
All Data/Material was All Data/Material was All Data/Material All Data/Material
Data/Material collected one time collected more than one was collected was collected
Collection independently. time independently. several times several times with
independently. assistance.
Procedures were Procedures were Procedures were Procedures that
outlined in a step-by- outlined in a step-by- outlined in a step- were outlined were
step fashion that could step fashion that could by-step fashion, incomplete or not
Methodology/ be followed by anyone be followed by anyone but had 1 or 2 sequential, even
Procedure without additional without additional gaps that require after Expert
explanations. explanations. Expert explanation even feedback had been
help was needed to after expert given.
accomplish this. feedback.
Quality of Skill is Skill is mastered to the Skill is present Skill needs
Activity/
high. level of expectation. but with errors improvement.
Development
and omissions.
Student provided a Student provided a Student provided No conclusion was
Interpretation/
detailed conclusion somewhat detailed a conclusion with apparent.
summary
clearly. conclusion clearly. some reference.
NOTE: The above types of skills are indicative. The teacher may change the skills
depending on type of activity.
238
Rubrics for Activity assessment(in Engineering Chemistry and
Environmental Studies)
Model Rubrics
S. Sub Performance
N activity excellent Good Satisfactory Need
o improvement
1 Step-1 Data was collected Data was collected Data was collected Data was
from more than four from three to four from two sources. collected only one
sources. sources source.
2 Step-2 All materials and data Almost all materials The materials and The materials and
required for the and data required for data required for data required for
activity were the activity were the activity were the activity were
accurately prepared accurately prepared accurately prepared inaccurately
based on the data based on the data based on the data prepared
collected collected collected with the
independently. independently. help of teacher.
3 Step-3 Procedures were Procedures were Procedures that Procedures that
outlined in a step-by- outlined in a step-by- outlined were outlined were not
step fashion that step fashion, require complete with 1 or sequential, &
could be followed by explanation & 2 gaps and require performed the
anyone & performed performed the explanation & activity in a poor
the activity activity effectively. performed the way
effectively. activity normally
4 Step-4 Presented/ explained Presented/ explained Presented/ Presented/
the information about the information about explained the explained the
the activity in the activity in information about information about
logical, interesting logical sequence with the activity in the activity
sequence with visuals or diagrams. logical sequence without sequence
attractive visuals or with less visuals or and visuals or
diagrams. diagrams. diagrams.
5 Conclusion Provided a detailed Provided a Student provided a Conclusions
/ summary conclusion/ summary conclusion / summary conclusion/ /summary was not
clearly based on the clearly based on the summary less relevant.
data and activity data and activity effectively
239
Needs
improvement
relevance
Presentation
of data
meaningful manner
Performs all
duties of
assigned
team roles
Normally
does the
assigned
work
with sometimes
mates much
to speak others
and unclear clear
Some depth of
improvement
Content is
accurate and
information is
presented in a
logical order
240
1. Carrying self
2. Punctuality
4. Moral values

3 Reliable
4 Helping nature

identified project
4. Reliable

against your sides.
8 Speak more clearly
241
III SEMESTER
242
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEDULE
III SEMESTER
S.N Course Course Name Teaching Scheme Cre Examination Scheme

O Code Instruction Tot dits Continuous Internal Semester End Examination
periods per week al Evaluation
peri
ods
/se
mes
ter
L T P Mid Mid Inter Max Min Total Min
Sem Sem nal Mark Mar Mark Marks for
1 2 Evalu s ks s passing
ation including
internal
18C- Applied Engineering
1 3 1 - 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
301F Mathematics
18C-
2 Engineering Mechanics 3 1 - 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
302C
18C Building Materials and
3 3 1 - 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
303C Construction Practice
18C-
4 Advanced Surveying 3 1 - 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
304C
Transportation
18C-
5 Engineering 3 1 - 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
305C
18C-
6 Building Drawing 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
306P
18C- Material Testing Lab
7 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
307P Practice
18C- Advanced Surveying
8 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
308P Lab Practice
18C- Civil Engg CAD Lab
9 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
309P Practice
18C- Communications and
10 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
310P Life Skills Lab Practice
Skill Upgradation 0 0 7 105 2.5 0 0 Rubrics -- - 0
20 5 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 170 1000 425
243
APPLIED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
Course Title : APPLIED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS Course Code : 18C-301F

SEMESTER : III Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme ( L : T : P ) : 45 :15 : 0 ( in Periods ) Credits : 3 Credits
Programmes : Common to all Engineering Diploma Programmes
Pre requisites
This course requires the knowledge of Basic EngineeringMathematics and Engineering

Mathematics atDiploma 1st and 2nd Semester level.
CO 1 Integrate different kinds of functions

CO 2 Integrate functions using different methods
CO 3 Find the values of definite integrals.
CO 4 Solve simple problems of Areas, Volumes.
CO 5 Find the Mean and RMS values of various functions and Approximate values of Definite integrals
using Trapezoidal and Simpson’s 1/3rd rule
CO 6 Form the Differential Equation and Solve Simple DEs of 1 st order and 1stdegree.
Course Content:
Unit-I Duration: 10Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
Indefinite Integration-I
Integration regarded as anti-derivative – Indefinite integral of standard functions.

Properties
of indefinite integral. Integration by substitution or change of variable. Integrals of the form
sinmq. cosnq. where m and n are positive integers. Integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x, cosec x
and powers of tan x, sec x by substitution.
Evaluation of integrals which are reducible to the following forms:
244
1 1 1
i) 2 2
, 2 2, 2 2
a +x a −x x −a
1 1 1
ii) 2 2 , 2 2 , 2 2
√ a + x √a −x √ x −a
iii ) √ x 2 + a2 , √ a2 −x 2 , √ x 2 −a2
Unit – II Duration: 08 Periods (L: 6.0 – T:2.0)
Indefinite Integration-II
Integration by decomposition of the integrand into simple rational algebraic functions.

Integration by parts, Bernoulli’s rule.
Unit-III Duration: 06 Periods (L: 4.5 – T:1.5)
Definite Integral and its Properties:
Definite integral-fundamental theorem of integral calculus, properties of definite integrals,

evaluation of simple definite integrals. Definite integral as the limit of a sum.
Unit – IV Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
Applications of Definite Integrals:
Areas under plane curves – Sign of the Area – Area enclosed between two curves. Solid
of revolution – Volumes of solids of revolution.
Unit – V Duration: 08 Periods (L: 6.0 – T:2.0)
Mean, RMS values and Numerical Integration:
Mean values and Root Mean Square values of a function on a given interval.
Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rule to evaluate an approximate value of a definite integral.
Unit – VI Duration: 18 Periods (L: 13.5 – T:4.5)
Differential Equations of First Order:
Definition of a differential equation– order and degree of a differential equation– formation of

differential equations– solution of differential equation of first order, first degree: variables
-separable, homogeneous, exact, linear differential equation, Bernoulli’s equation.
245
Reference Books:
1. Integral Calculus Vol.I, by M.Pillai and Shanti Narayan
2. Thomas’ Calculus, Pearson Addison –Wesley Publishers
2.E-books:www.mathebook.net
Unit-I
1.0 Use Indefinite Integration to solve engineering problems
1.1 Explain the concept of Indefinite integral as an anti-derivative.
1.2 State the indefinite integral of standard functions and properties of Integrals ò (u + v)
dx
And òkudxwhere k isconstant andu, v are functions of x.
1.3 Solve integration problems involving standard functions using the above rules.
1.4 Evaluate integrals involving simple functions of the following type by the method of
substitution.
i) òf(ax + b) dx where f(x) dx is in standard form.
ii) ò [f(x)]n f ¢(x) dx
iii) òf¢(x)/[f(x)] dx
iv) òf {g(x)} g ¢(x) dx
1.5 Find the Integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x and cosec x usingthe above.
1.6 Evaluate the integrals of the formòSinmqCosnq. dq where m and n are positive
integers.
1.7 Evaluate integrals of powers of tan x and sec x.
1.8 Evaluate the Standard Integrals of the functions of the type
246
1 1 1
i) 2 2
, 2 2, 2 2
a +x a −x x −a
1 1 1
ii) 2 2 , 2 2 , 2 2
√ a + x √a −x √ x −a
iii ) √ x 2 + a2 , √ a2 −x 2 , √ x 2 −a2
1.9 Evaluate the integrals of the type
1 1 1
 a  bSin d ,  a  b cos  d and  a cos  b sin   c d .
Unit-II
2.0Use Indefinite Integration to solve engineering problems
2.1 Evaluate integrals using decomposition method.
2.2 Evaluate integrals using integration by parts with examples.
2.3 State the Bernoulli’s rule for evaluating the integrals of the form ∫ u.vdx .
2.4 Evaluate the integrals of the formòex [f(x) + f ¢(x)] dx.
Unit-III
3.0 Understand definite integral and use it in engineering applications
3.1 State the fundamental theorem of integral calculus
3.2 Explain the concept of definite integral.
3.3 Calculate the definite integral over an interval.
3.4 State various properties of definite integrals.
3.5 Evaluate simple problems on definite integrals using the above properties.
3.6 Explain definite integral as a limit of sum by considering an area.
Unit –IV
4.0 Understand definite integral and use it in engineering applications
4.1 Find the Areas under plane curves and area enclosed between two curves using
integration.
4.2 Obtain the Volumes of solids of revolution.
247
Unit –V
5.0 Understand Mean, RMS values and Numerical Methods
5.1 Obtain the Mean value and Root Mean Square (RMS) value of the functions in any
given Interval.
5.2 Explain the Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rules for approximation of definite
integrals and provide some examples.
Unit –VI
6.0 Solve Differential Equations in engineering problems.
6.1 Define a Differential equation, its order and degree
6.2 Form a differential equation by eliminating arbitrary constants.
6.3 Solve the first order first degree differential equations by the following methods:
i. Variables Separable.
ii. Homogeneous Equations.
iii. Exact Differential Equations
iv. Linear differential equation of the form dy/dx + Py = Q,
where P and Q are functions of x or constants.
v. Bernoulli’s Equation (Reducible to linear form.)
6.4 Solve simple problems leading to engineering applications by using above methods.
1. Student visits Library to refer Standard Books on Mathematics and collect related material
2.Quiz
3.Group discussion
4.Surprise tests
5. Seminars
6. Home Assignments
248
CO / PO - MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 Mapped
POs
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
249
MID SEM-I EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)

250
251
MID SEM –I MODEL PAPER, III SEMESTER
PART-A
1. Integrate( ex– sinx + x4) with respect to x

dx
2. Find ∫ 5 x+7 dx
3. Write Bernoulli’s rule of integration
4. Find ∫ xlogx dx
PART-B
x5
5 a). Evaluate∫ dx .
1+ x 12
Or
5 b) Evaluate
dx
∫ ¿¿ ¿
6 a) Evaluate∫ x sinxdx
Or
3 x +2
6 b) Evaluate∫ dx .
( x−1 ) ( 2 x +3)
252
PART C
2
7 a) Evaluate∫ √ x + 2 x +5dx
Or
7 b)Evaluate: ∫ cosxcos 2 xdx .
8 a) Find ∫ x tan−1 xdx .

Or
8 b) Find ∫ x 4 cos 2 xdx .

@@@
253
MID SEM –II, MODEL PAPER, III SEMESTER
PART-A
1
1. Find ∫ (x ¿¿ 4+1)dx ¿
0
π
2. Evaluate : ∫ sin 3 xdx
0
1
3. Evaluate : ∫ 1+1x 2 dx
0
4. Write the formula to find area bounded by the curve y= f(x) , x-axis, between the
limits x=a and x =b
PART-B

π
2
5 a) Evaluate:
∫ √1−sin2 x dx
0
Or
π
2
5 b) Evaluate:
∫ sin 2 xdx
0
6 a)Find the area bounded by the line 2x + y =8, x-axis and the lines x = 2 and x = 4.
Or
254
6 b) Find the Volume of the Solid generated by revolving the part of the Circle x 2+ y 2=36
From x = 0 to x = 4 about x – axis.
PART C

π
2
7 a) Evaluate: √ Sinx dx
∫ √ Sinx+ √ Cosx
0
Or
π
2
7 b) Evaluate:
∫ logsin xdx
0
8 a) Find the area enclosed between the Parabolas y=3 x−x 2∧ y =x 2−x .
Or
8 b) Find the Volume of the Solid generated by the revolution of the area bounded by the
x2 y2
Ellipse + =1, about x- axis.
25 16
@@@
255
C18-common
SUB.CODE:301F
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION,(C-18)
MODEL PAPER
III SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
PART-A
1. Find ∫ x 7 – 3/ x dx
1
2
2.Evaluate∫ ( x +1 )dx
0
3. Write the formula to find mean value of y = f(x), in the interval (a, b)
2
dy dy
4. Find the Order and Degree of the Differential Equation x
dx √
= 1+( ).
dx
b
5 Write Trapezoidal Rule to find the approximate value of∫ f ( x ) dx .
a
6. Write the formula to find RMS value of y = f(x) over the range x=a and x = b.
dy 2 x+ y
7. Solve =e
dx
8. Write the condition for exactness of the differential equation M(x,y)dx + N(x,y)dy =0
PART-B
256
π
2
9 a) Evaluate:
∫ √1−sin2 x dx
0
Or
6
dx
9 b) Find the approximate value of ∫ by taking n = 6 using Trapezoidal rule.
0 1+ x
10 a) Find the area bounded by the Parabola y = x2 – 2x + 1 and x-axis.
Or
10 b) Form the Differential Equation from y= A e x + B e 3 x where A, B are arbitrary constants
11 a) Find the RMS value of √ log x over the range x= 1 and x= e
Or
4
dx
11 b) Calculate approximate value of ∫ by taking n= 4 using Simpson’s 1/3 rule
0 1+ x
dy
12 a) Solve: x +2 y =logx .
dx
Or
12 b) Solve: x ( 1− y 2 ) dx+ y ( 1−x2 ) dy =0
PART C
1
13 a) Evaluate:∫ 2 dx
x + 2 x +2
Or
13 b) Find the RMS value of y = √ 8−4 x 2 between x = 0 and x = 2
x2 y 2
14 a) Find the volume of solid generated by revolving the Ellipse + =1 about Major
a2 b 2
axis
Or
dy
14 b) Solve: =sin( x + y )
dx
15 a) A curve is drawn to passing through the points given by the following table:
257
x 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4
y 3 3.4 3.7 3.8 2.7 2.6 2.1
Calculate the approximate area bounded by the curve, x-axis and the lines x= 1 and x=
4 using Simpson’s 1/3 rule
Or
1
15 b) Evaluate: ∫ √( 1−x2 ) dx approximately by taking n = 4 using
0
Simpson’s1/3 rd Rule.
16 a) Solve: ( y 2−xy ) dx =x2 dy .
Or
dy
16 b) Solve: + yCosx= y 3Sin2x.
dx
258

Course Title Engineering Mechanics Course Code 18C-302C
Semester III Semester Course Group Core
Teaching Scheme in Periods(L:T:P) 45:15:0 Credits 3
Methodology Lecture+Assignments Total Contact Periods 60 Periods
Pre requisites
Course Outcomes
Knowledge of Fundamentals of Engineering Physics.
CO1 Evaluate resultant force, its importance and calculation

CO2 Illustrate the concept of centroids for various shapes and its calculation
CO3 Calculate Moment of Inertia of standard sections.
CO4 Explain Simple stresses and strains and its effect on simple sections and composite
sections.
Unit
No Unit Name Periods Questions to be set for SEE
R U A
I Principles of Mechanics
10 Q9(a) Q13(a)
and Force system Q1
II Beams and Supports 10
III Centroid 10 Q10(a) Q14(a)
Q2
IV Moment of Inertia 10
V Q Q9(b),Q11(a), Q13(b),Q15(a),
Simple Stresses and 4 Q5,Q
12 Q11(b) Q15(b)
Strains 6
VI Composite sections and Q3 Q10(b),Q12(a),
Q7,Q Q14(b),Q16(a),
Mechanical properties 08 Q12(b)
8 Q16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8
Course Contents
UNIT - 1: Principles of Mechanics and Force system Duration: 10Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
259
Mechanics – Engineering Mechanics – Applications and branches of Engineering Mechanics
– Statics, Dynamics, Kinetics and Kinematics – Systems of measurements and Units – S.I and
M.K.S units of physical quantities used in Civil Engineering-Definition of force – vectors and
scalars – systems of forces – co-planar forces - Resultant of forces at a point – Parallelogram
Law and Triangle Law of forces – Lami’s theorem – Polygon law of forces – Resolution of
forces - Parallel forces – like and unlike – moment of force –couple- Conditions of
equilibrium of a rigid body subjected to a number of co-planar forces - Structural members
supporting co-planar forces
UNIT - 2: Beams and Supports Duration: 10Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)

Types of supports –Simple support, fixed support, hinged support, roller support
Types of beams –simply supported beams, cantilever, fixedbeams, overhanging beams,
continuous beams
Types of loading -point load, uniformly distributed load, Calculation of Reactions
UNIT - 3:Centroid Duration: 10Periods(L: 7.5 – T:2.5)

Definitions – Centroid, Centre of gravity - Position of Centroid of standard figures like
rectangle, triangle, circle, semi-circle, parallelogram and trapezium - Determination of
location of Centroid of standard steel sections – T, L, I, Channel section, Z section
andunsymmetrical I section - built up sections and plane figures having hollow portion.
UNIT - 4:Moment of Inertia Duration: 10 Periods(L: 7.5 – T:2.5)

Definition of Moment of Inertia - Perpendicular and parallel axes theorems - Moment of
Inertia of standard sections like rectangle, triangle, circle and hallow circular sections -
Moment of Inertia – T, L, I, Channel section,Z sections and unsymmetrical I section using
parallel axis theorem - Moment of Inertia and radius of gyration of built-up sections -
Polar Moment of Inertia of solid and hollow circular sections using Perpendicular axis
theorem
UNIT - 5: Simple Stresses and Strains Duration: 12Periods(L: 9.0 – T:3.0)

Stress and strain – type of stresses and strains - Stress strain curves for ductile materials
(like mild steel)–Hooke’s law – Young’s modulus – deformation under axial load - Shear
stress and Shear Strain – Modulus of rigidity - Longitudinal and lateral strain – Poisson’s
ratio, Bulk Modulus – relationship between elastic constants (proof not required, only
problems).
UNIT - 6: Composite sections and Mechanical properties
260
Duration: 08Periods(L: 6.0 – T:2.0)
Composite sections – effect of axial loads - Temperature stresses and strains – hoop stress
– Temperature stresses in compositesections - Mechanical properties of materials
Reference Books
1. Engineering Mechanics – N.H. Dubey (Tata Mc Graw Hill)
2. Engineering Mechanics – R.S.Khurmi
3. Engineering Mechanics – P.K. AbdulLatheef
4. Engineering Mechanics& Statics – Dayaratnam
5. Engineering Mechanics – N. Srinivasulu
6. Engineering Mechanics – S.S. Bavikatti
7. Engineering Mechanics – A.K. Tayal
1.1 Define Mechanics and Engineering Mechanics

1.2 State the applications of Engineering Mechanics
1.3 State the branches of Engineering Mechanics
1.4 Define the terms 1. Statics 2. Dynamics 3. Kinetics 4. Kinematics
1.5 State the systems of measurements and Units
1.6 State S.I and M.K.S units of physical quantities used in Civil Engineering
1.7 Define the following terms
a) Force
b) Moment
c) Resultant
d) Equilibrium of forces
e) Equilibrant
f) Moment of a couple
1.8 Distinguish between
1.8.1 Scalar and Vector quantities
1.8.2 Co-planar and Non co-planar forces
261
1.8.3 Parallel and non-parallel forces
1.8.4 Like and unlike parallel forces
1.9 Compute the resultant of two co-planar forces acting at a point by
1.9.1 Law of parallelogram of forces
1.9.2 Triangle law of forces
1.10 Explain and Solve simple problems using Lami’s Theorem
1.11 Solve problems on computation of the resultant of a system of coplanar concurrent
forces by
2.1.1 Law of polygon of forces
2.1.2 Resolution of forces
1.12 Solve problems on computation of the resultant of a system of coplanar parallel
forces.
1.13 Explain the properties of a couple.
1.14 State the conditions of equilibrium of rigid body subjected to a number of co- planar
forces.
1.15 Determine resultant of co-planar concurrent forces by analytical methods.
2.1 List and describe various types of supports (Simple support, fixed support, hinged
support, roller support)
2.2 List and sketch various types of beams(simply supported beams, cantilever, fixed
beams, overhanging beams, continuous beams)
2.3 List various types of loading (point load, uniformly distributed load, uniformly varying
load
2.4 To determine support reactions for cantilever, simply supported and overhanging beams
with point loads and uniformly distributed loads
3.1 Define Centroid and Centre of gravity.

3.2 Distinguish between Centroid and Centre of gravity.
3.3 State the need for finding the Centroid and Centre of gravity for various engineering
applications.
3.4 Calculate the positions of Centroid for simple plane figures from first principles.
3.5 Explain the method of determining the Centroid by ‘Method of moments.
3.6 Determine the position of Centroid of standard sections-T, L, I, Channel section, Z
section, unsymmetrical I section.
3.7 Determine the position of Centroid of built up sections consisting of RSJs, flange plates
and Plane figures having hollow portions
262
4.1 Define Moment of Inertia (MI), Polar Moment of Inertia, Radius of gyration.
4.2 State the necessity of finding Moment of Inertia for various engineering applications.
4.3 Determine Moment of Inertia and Radius of gyration for regular geometrical sections
like T, L, I, Channel section, Z section, unsymmetrical I section.
4.4 State 1. Parallel axes theorem 2. Perpendicular axes theorem to determine MI.
4.5 Determine MI of standard sections by applying Parallel axes theorem.
4.6 Determine MI of built-up sections by applying Parallel axes theorem.
4.7 Calculate radius of gyration of standard sections.
4.8 Determine the polar M.I for solid and hollow circular section applying Perpendicular
axes theorem.
5.1 Define the following terms
a) Stress
b) Strain
c) Modulus of Elasticity
d) Longitudinal Strain
e) Lateral Strain
f) Poisson’s ratio
g) Modulus of rigidity
h) Bulk Modulus
i) Factor of safety
j) Resilience
k) Strain Energy
l) Proof resilience
m) Modulus of Resilience
5.2 Distinguish between different kinds of stresses and strains.
5.3 Draw the stress-strain curve for ductile materials (Mild steel) and explain the
salient points in the curve.
5.4 State Hooke’s law and limit of proportionality.
5.5 Solve problems on relationship between simple stress and simple strain under axial
loading on uniform bars and stepped bars.
5.6 State the relationship among the elastic constants.
5.7 Solve problems on relationship between elastic constants.
6.1 Calculate stresses in simple and composite members under axial loading.
6.2 Explain and calculate temperature stress, strain, hoop stress, temperature stresses in
composite sections.
6.3 Explain the mechanical properties of materials
263
6.4 Elasticity, plasticity, ductility, brittleness, malleability, stiffness, hardness, toughness,
creep,fatigue – examples of materials which exhibit the above properties.

1. Prepare a program in MS Excel to find centre of gravity; IZZ and IYY of I, L,T and
channel sections.
2. Prepare a report on calculation of tensile stress induced in the rope made with any
material
3. Demonstrate the stresses developed in composite sections using AUTO CAD
Ethics
nCommunicatio
and practiceExperiments
ToolsEngineering
learningLifelong
societyEngineer and
knowledgeBasic
KnowledgeDiscipline
Linked PO
CO1 3 1 1 2 1 1,2,3,4,8
CO2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1,2,3,4,6,8
CO3 1 3 2 1 1,2,3,4
CO4 3 3 1 1 1 1 1,2,3,4,6,10
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks

Assignments 5
Seminars 5
Total 60
264

question
MID SEM-I EXAM
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)

question

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
265
DCE III Semester
Mid Semester-I Examination
Course Code: 18C-302C Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: Engineering Mechanics Max.Marks: 20 Marks
PART-A
1) Define Engineering Mechanics

2) State “Parallelogram law of forces”.
3) Draw the sketch of a) overhanging beam b) Cantilever beam
4) List types of loads.
PART-B
Answer twoquestions. Each question carries three marks 2x 3 = 6 Marks
5) a) Write any three applications of Engineering Mechanics

(OR)
b)Two forces acting at angle of 120o. The bigger force is 80N and Resultant is perpendicular to
smaller one. Find the magnitude of the smaller force
6) a) Draw the sketch of a cantilever beam of 4m length with a central point load of 9kN and udl
of 5kN/m over the left half portion.
(OR)
b) List the types of loads to which a beam can be subjected and show with a neat sketch.
PART-C
Answer two questions. Each question carries five marks 2x5 = 10Marks
7) a) A string 2m long is tied to the ends of a uniform rod that weighs 60N and is 1.6m long. The
string passes over a nail, so that the rod hangs horizontally. Calculate the tension in the string.
(OR)
b) Determine the resultant, both in magnitude and direction, of the four forces acting on the
body as shown in the fig. given below
266
8) a) A cantilever 1.75m length is subjected to two point loads of 2kN and 3kN at 0.75m and 1.5m
from the free end. It also carries a udl of 3kN/m over a length of 1 m from free end. Draw a
neat sketch of the beam and Calculate Support reactions of the beam.
(OR)
b) Draw the neat sketch and Determine the support reactions of a beam of 9m length simply
supported at the right end and at 6m from the right end. It carries a udl of 5kN/m over a length
of 6m from right end and a concentrated load of 10kN at 1m from left end.
267
DCE III Semester
Mid Semester-II Examination
Course Code: 18C-302C Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: Engineering Mechanics Max.Marks: 20 Marks
PART-A
Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark. 4x1 = 4 Marks
1) Locate the centroid of T-section as shown in fig. below.
80mm
10mm
150mm
2) Give the position of centroid of a semi-circular section

3) Define Moment of Inertia
4) State perpendicular axis theorem.
PART-B
Answer two questions. Each question carries three marks 2x 3 = 6 Marks
5) a) Find the Centroid of an inverted T-section with flange 60mm x 10mm and web 50mm x
10mm.
(OR)
b) Differentiate between the Centroid and Centre of gravity
6) a) The moment of inertia of rectangular section beam about x-x and y-y axes passing through
the centroid are250 x 106 mm4 and 40 x106 mm4 respectively. Calculate the size of the section.
(OR)
b) Find the radius of gyration of hollow circular plate of 60mm inner diameter and 100 mm
outer diameter.
PART-C
268
7) a) A uniform lamina is shown in fig. Determinethe centroid of the lamina. All dimensions are in
mm.
(OR)
b) A semi- circular area is removed from a trapezium as shown in fig. Determine the centroid of
the remaining area
8(a) A section is built- up of two 225mm x 85mm channels placed back to back at a distance of x mm
apart as shown in Fig. which are connected by battens. Determine the value of x so that I xxof
built up section is equal to Iyy of built –up section. Given the properties of each channel section
as below: A= 3301 mm2 ; Cyy=23mm; Ixx=2694.6 x 104 mm4; Iyy= 187.2 x 104 mm4
269
8
(OR)
b) Find the moment of inertia of the section about AB as shown in Fig. Take diameter of the
hole as 30 mm.
270
DCE III Semester
Course Code: 18C-302C Duration: 2 Hours

Course Name: Engineering Mechanics Maximum .Marks: 40 Marks
PART-A
Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark. 8x1 = 8 Marks
1) State the classification of Engineering Mechanics

2) Define “Radius of gyration”
3) State “Hooke’s law”
4) State “Lami’s Theorem”.
5) Define “Stress”
6) Define “Strain Energy”
7) List the Elastic Constants.
8) Define the term “Fatigue”
PART-B
Answer four questions. Each question carries three marks. 4x3= 12 Marks
9)
a) State any three characteristics of couple.
(OR)
b) A steel bar 5 meters long and 25mm in diameter is stretched by 2.0mm by a load of 80kN in
pulling it axially. Determine the modulus of elasticity of the bar.
10)
a) The M.I of a triangle about its base is 1526.5 x 10 4 mm4, width of base is 120mm. Find the
height of the triangle
(OR)
b) Define i) Ductility ii) Brittleness
11)
a) Define the terms
i. Linear strain
ii. Lateral strain
(OR)
b) A material has Young’s modulus of 1.25 x 10 5 N/mm2 and Poisson’s ratio of 0.25. Calculate
the modulus of rigidity and bulk modulus
12)
a) Define i) Toughness ii) Malleability
(OR)
b) Define i) Ductility ii) Brittleness
271
PART-C
Answer four questions. Each question carries five marks 4x 5=20 Marks
13)
a) Calculate the tensile force in the cables AB and BC as shown in fig. The pulleys are
frictionless.
(OR)
b) A tensile test is carried out on a steel bar of 10 mm diameter over a gauge length of 50mm.
The bar yields at a load 22 kN, reaches a maximum load of 43 kN and breaks at 27 kN. The
diameter of ruptured neck is 7.5mm and final gauge length is 64mm. Determine
(a) Yield strength
(b) Ultimate strength
( c) Percentage reduction in area and
(d) percentage elongation.
14)
a) A mild steel R.S. Joist 200mm x 140mm with one 200mm x 10 mm plate symmetrically
riveted to each flange is used as a stanchion. Find I xx, Iyy and least radius of gyration for the
compound section. Properties of R.S. Joist are,
Area of section = 3670 mm2; Ixx= 2624.5 x 104 mm4; Iyy=329 x 104 mm4
272
(OR)
b) An R.C. C column has square cross-section 400mm x 400mm. If it is reinforced with six steel
bars each of 20 mm diameter. The column carries an axial compressive load of 630 kN.
Determine stress in each material. Modular ratio is 15.
15)
a) A cylindrical bar is 25mm dia of 1.2m long. During a tensile test it is found that the linear
strain is 4 times the lateral strain. Calculate the shear and bulk modulus if the bar is
elongated 0.06mm under axial tensile load of 50kN.
(OR)
b) A steel bar 1.6 long is acted upon by forces as shown in fig. below. Find the elongation of the
bar. Given E=200GPa.
90kN 40kN 60kN 30mm 110kN

30mm 
35mm
500mm 600 mm 500 mm
16)
a) Following are the details of a composite member formed by enclosing a copper rod in a steel
tube:
Dia. of copper rod = 36mm

Internal dia. of steel tube = 40mm
External dia. of steel tube = 50mm
E for steel = 200 GPa, E for copper = 110 GPa, for steel 12 x 10-6 per 0C; for copper =16 x
10-6 Per 0C. Calculate the stress developed in each material if the combination is heated
through 30°C.
(OR)
273
b) A copper rod 80mm in diameter is co-axially enclosed in a copper tube of internal dia. 90mm
and external dia. 110mm, both of same length 480mm. The combination carries total axial
thrust F. If the stress in the copper rod is 12 MPa compressive, find
(a) The stress in the tube (b) The value of F
274

Course Title: Building Materials & Construction Course Code : 18C-303C
Practice
Semester: III Semester Course Group : Core
Methodology : Lecture+Assignments Total Contact Periods : 60 Periods
Course Outcomes
This subject requires the basic knowledge of basic sciences
Course Outcomes
CO1 Explain the origin, types and uses of various building materials (Stones, bricks tiles and sand) and
methods of testing of building materials as per standard procedures
CO2 State and explain method of using different types of cement, cement mortar and cement concrete
after testing their quality by standard procedures
CO3 Comprehend timber and surface protective finishes and propose different market forms for
appropriate field application
CO4 Classify Buildings as per NBC, select suitable type of foundation and method of constructing
masonry as per standards
CO5 Propose a suitable Door, window, lintel, for a particular opening, identify suitable scaffolding for
doing a particular work and select a suitable staircase
CO6 Select a suitable roof and flooring, explain their method of construction and provide suitable
protective and decorative finishes

No
R U A
1 Stones, Bricks, tiles and
sand
10
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
2 Cement, Cement mortar
and concrete
10
3 Timber and Surface
8
protective materials
Q4 Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
4 Classification of buildings,
foundations and masonry
12
5 Doors, windows, lintels, Q9(b), Q13(b),
10 Q5,Q6
,scaffolding and staircases Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
6 Roofs, floorings, Protective Q10(b), Q14(b),
and decorative finishes
10 Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8
Course Contents
275
UNIT-1: Stones, Bricks, tiles and sand Duration:10Periods(L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
a) Classification of rocks, physical classification.
b) Characteristics of good building stone.
c) Common varieties of stones-granite, marble, Kadapa slab, Shahabad stones.
d) Dressing of stones – purpose.
e) Manufacture of bricks-Steps only
f) ISI specification for bricks IS-1077-1971(sizes).
g) Characteristics of good bricks.
h) Testing of bricks as per IS-3495-1966 – tests on water absorption and compressive
strength of bricks.
i) Tiles –Types of tiles- roofing tiles (Mangalore tiles), floor tiles, Ceramic tiles, Vitrified
tiles, Morbonite.
j) Characteristics of good tiles.
k) Characteristics of good sand,
l) Functions of sand.
m) Bulking of sand
UNIT-2: Cement, Cement mortar and Concrete Duration: 10Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
a) Chemical composition of cement.
b) Method of manufacture of cement – Dry process(Flow chart only).
c) Classification of cement – ordinary Portland cement, quick setting cement, white
cement –Rapid hardening cement, Low heat cement, High alumina cement, Blast
furnace slag cement and Pozzolana cement – uses of different types of cement.
d) Tests for cement as per ISI – fineness, consistency, setting time, soundness tests.
e) Define Fine aggregate and course aggregate
f) Mortar – List Classification of mortar –Cement mortar, Surkhi Mortar, Blended mortar.
g) Different proportions of mortars for various works.
h) Preparation of cement mortar.
i) Ingredients of plain concrete.
j) Proportioning – usual proportions for different items of work-C.C.bed, Footings,
Columns, Slabs & Beams for ordinary buildings.
k) Plain concrete and reinforced concrete.
l) Water cement ratio – factors effecting water cement ratio.
m) Workability – Slump test on fresh concrete, hardened concrete – compressive strength
test on hardened concrete.
276
n) Admixtures –only definition – types – 1) Chemical admixtures – Plasticizers (water
reducers), super plasticizers, air entraining agents, accelerators and retarders 2)
Mineral admixtures – Pozzolanas -fly ash, blast furnace slag, silica fume and rice husk.
o) Method of preparation of concrete – Hand and machine mixing.
p) Procedure of mixing, conveyance, placing, compaction and curing of concrete.
q) Curing – methods – suitability
r) Introduction to ready mix concrete – Advantages and disadvantages.
s) Use of fly ash, robo sand.
UNIT 3: Timber and Surface Protective Materials Duration:8 Periods(L:6 – T:2)
a) Characteristics of good timber.

b) Seasoning of timber – Importance.
c) Common varieties of timber used for different items of work – Doors and windows,
form work, centring with particular references of Telangana.
d) Composition of Paints, enamels, varnishes.
e) Types and uses of surface protective materials like Paints, Enamels, Varnishes,
Distempers, Emulsion, French polish and Wax Polish.
UNIT 4: Classification of Buildings, foundations and types of masonry

Duration:12Periods(L: 9 – T:3)
a) Component parts of a building –Their functions.
b) Classification of buildings according to National building code.
c) Site investigation for foundation as per N.B.C, Trial pit, auger boring.
d) Bearing capacity of soils –safe and ultimate bearing capacity.
e) Spread footing for columns and walls
f) Raft foundation.
g) Pile foundation and uses.
h) Different loads to be considered for the design of foundation as per IS 875 – 1987.
i) Spread foundation – Depth of foundation by Rankine’s formula– width of foundation –
Thickness of concrete bed.
j) Construction of foundation – spread footing only.
k) Causes, effects and prevention of dampness at basement level.
l) Classification of stone masonry –Random rubble and Coursed Rubble Masonry –
general principles to be observed while constructing stone masonry
m) Brick Masonry – Bonds in brick masonry – (English bond only) for one brick thick
wall – General principles to be observed in construction of brick masonry.
277
UNIT 5: Doors, Windows, Lintels, scaffolding and staircases
a) Doors and windows – parts of door window – positioning.

b) Common types of doors-panelled, Glazed and Flush doors.
c) Special types of doors – Flush doors with modern construction materials, revolving
doors, collapsible doors, rolling shutters, sliding doors
d) Windows – Panelled and Glazed.
e) Ventilators – fixed, swinging type and louvered.
f) Lintels – Functions
g) Scaffolding – Purpose and types – tubular scaffolding only.
h) Location of stairs.
i) Types of stairs – straight, Quarter turn, half turn, Dog legged, open well, bifurcated,
spiral, helical stair cases(only line diagrams)
UNIT 6: Roofs ,Floorings ,protective and decorative finishes

Duration:10 Periods(L:7.5 – T:2.5)
a) Roof – functions of roofs.

b) Classification of roofs – flat roofs – pitched roofs.
c) Different types of trusses – classification based on material and shape-King post truss,
Queen post truss.
d) Weather proof course on R.C.C. roof-importance.
e) Types of flooring -Requirements of a good floor.
f) Methods of constructing flooring – Cement Concrete flooring, Cement Plaster flooring,
Tiled flooring.
g) Plastering – purpose – Types of plastering – procedure for plastering, external
finishing – sand faced, pebble dash, acoustic plastering and marble chips.
h) Pointing – purpose –Types of pointing
i) Painting – objects – method of painting new and old wall surfaces
j) White washing – colour washing – Distempering – internal and external walls.
Reference Books
1. Engineering Materials by S C Rangwala
2. Building materials by Kulakarni
3. Construction materials by N.Sreenivasulu
278
4. Building Materials by Duggal S. K.
5. Building Material & Construction by S.P. Arora& S. P. Bindra
6. Construction Technology by Sarkar Oxford University Press
7. Building materials & components by CBRI
8. National Building code by N.B.C
9. Building Construction by Sushil Kumar
10. Building Construction by S.C.Rangawala
11. SP20 Explanatory handbook on Masonry code
2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nMIl3krK-GI
3. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6OAHO9zgeXM
4. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=j1bL_1NBvIc
5. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cQGDP8kWEMM
6. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rh1Z-i14-h0
7. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=veF4uSUtrEY
8. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=USat6LdENzU
9. https://www.nicee.org/EQTips.php

After completion of the course, the student shall be able to
1.1 State the classification of rocks – Physical classification only.

1.2 State the characteristics of good building stone.
1.3 State the common varieties of stone used in different items of construction and their
suitability for construction works – Granite, marble, Kadapa slabs, Shahabad stones.
1.4 Explain the purpose of dressing stones.
1.5 List the steps involved in the manufacture of bricks.
1.6 Common sizes of bricks – IS specifications.
1.7 State the characteristics of good bricks.
1.8 State the standard tests for bricks
1.9 Explain water absorption test and compressive strength test on bricks.
1.10 State the common variety of tiles used for different purposes.
1.11 State the characteristics of good tiles.
1.12 State the characteristics of good sand.
1.13 State the functions of building sand.
1.14 Explain the importance of bulking of sand..
279
2.1 State the chemical composition of cement.
2.2 State the steps in the manufacture of cement by dry process using flowchart.
2.3 State the classification of cements and their uses.
2.4 State and explain tests on cement for fineness, consistency, setting times and
soundness of cement.
2.5 State grades of cement and their compressive strengths.
2.6 Understand the terms fine aggregate and coarse aggregate.
2.7 State the types of mortars.
2.8 State the different proportions of mortars for various works.
2.9 Explain the method of preparation of cement mortar
2.10 State the ingredients of plain and reinforced concrete.
2.11 State the usual proportions of plain and reinforced concrete for different items of
work.
2.12 Define and explain the importance of Hydration of cement and water cement ratio
2.13 State the steps involved in the procedure of mixing, conveyance, placing, compaction
and curing of concrete.
2.14 State the need of curing and list the methods of curing suitable for different purposes
2.15 Define workability and explain the method of conducting Slump test and
Compressive strength test
2.16 State the definition and types of admixtures in concrete.
2.17 Explain ready mix concrete and state the advantages and disadvantages.
2.18 State the uses of Fly ash and Robo sand
3.1 State the characteristics of good timber.
3.2 State the importance of seasoning of timber.
3.3 Name the common varieties of timber used in Telangana for various Civil
Engineering works.
3.4 State various types of wood products used in construction work.
3.5 State the composition of Paints, enamels, varnishes.
3.6 Explain the types and uses of surface protective materials like Paints, Enamels,
Varnishes, Distempers, Emulsion, French polish and Wax Polish.
4.1 State the components of a building and their functions.

4.2 State the classification of buildings according to National Building Code(NBC) with
examples.
4.3 Explain the investigations required for foundation as per N.B.C.
4.4 Explain the terms Bearing capacity of soil, Safe bearing capacity of soil and Ultimate
bearing capacity of soil.
280
4.5 Describe with sketches – spread footings, raft and pile foundation.
4.6 State the loads to be considered in design of foundation.
4.7 State the rules for minimum depth, width of foundation and thickness of concrete bed
for spread footing.
4.8 Explain the method of constructing spread footing
4.9 List the causes and effects of dampness at basement level and state the measures for
prevention of dampness at basement level.
4.10 List different types of stone masonry.
4.11 Explain different types of stone masonry.
4.12 State the general principles to be observed in stone masonry construction
4.13 Explain the terms Bond, Course, Header and Stretcher related to brick masonry.
4.14 State the general principles to be observed in brick masonry construction.
4.15 Explain with sketches English bond of brick masonry for one brick thick wall.
5.1 State the principles of locating doors, windows and ventilators in buildings.
5.2 Explain with sketches common and special types of doors, windows and ventilators.
5.3 List the uses of different types of doors, windows and ventilators.
5.4 Explain the functions of lintels.
5.5 State the purpose of scaffolding.
5.6 Define scaffolding and mention the types.
5.7 List the component parts of tubular scaffolding.
5.8 Sketch and explain about tubular scaffolding.
5.9 State the principles of locating stairs.
5.10 Explain terms: rise, tread, landing, flight, going, hand rail, newel post, baluster and
balustrade.
5.11 Draw the line diagrams of different stairs.
6.1 State the functions of roofs.

6.2 State the classification of roofs.
6.3 State the classification of trusses based on material and shape.
6.4 Explain with sketches king post truss and queen post truss.
6.5 State the importance of providing a weather proof course on R.C.C roof
6.6 State the types and functions of flooring.
6.7 State the requirements of good floor.
6.8 Explain method of construction of C.C flooring, cement plaster and tiled flooring
6.9 State the objects of plastering.
6.10 State the methods of plastering.
281
6.11 State the steps in providing cement plastering on masonry walls.
6.12 State the objects and types of pointing.
6.13 State the objects of painting.
6.14 Explain the method of painting new and old wall surfaces.
6.15 Explain briefly the method of white washing, colour washing, distempering the brick
masonry wall.
1. Identify different types of construction materials available in market and study their properties
2. Collect and study different photographs of various foundations and prepare a report.
3. Collect and study different photographs of stairs.
4. Collect and study the different types of Damp Proofing materials and prepare a report.
5. Prepare models of various types of foundations.
6. Prepare models of different types of roof trusses.
7. Visit any nearby material testing laboratory and prepare a report on various tests conducted on
building materials.
8. Prepare a report on prefabricated construction.
9. Prepare a report on the use of modern construction equipment in construction.
12. Quiz
13. Group discussion
14. Surprise Test

Lifelong learning
Engineering Tools
Ethics
Basic knowledge
Communication
Linked PO

282
CO1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2,3,4,6,8,9,10
CO2 1 2 2 1 1 2 2.3,5,8,9,10
CO3 1 2 2 1 2,5,6,10
CO4 2 2 2 2 1 2 2,3,4,5,7,10
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 2,3,4,5,8,10
CO6 3 2 2 1 2 2,3,4,6,10
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks

Assignments 5
Seminars 5
Total 60
283

question
MID SEM-I EXAM
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)

question

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
284
DCE III semester Mid Semester-I Examination

Course Name: Building Materials and Construction Practice Max.Marks:20 Marks
PART-A
1) State physical classification of rocks and also give an example for each
2) State the standard sizes for common building bricks as per Indian Standards.
3) Mention standard values for any three properties of Ordinary Portland Cement.
4) Define 'Admixture'.
PART-B
5(a) State any three properties of granite stone

(or)
5(b) Define "Bulking of Sand”. State the effects of bulking of sand on proportioning of
concrete.
6(a) State the usual proportions of cement mortar for the following:
(a) Internal Plastering
(b)Top finishing of cement concrete flooring
(c) Stone masonry for ordinary buildings
(or)
6(b) What is water cement ratio? Explain its significance in strength and workability of
concrete.
PART-C
Answer two questions. Each question carries five marks 2x 5 = 10 Marks
7(a) State ten important characteristics of good building stones.
(or)
7(b) Explain the test to be conducted for testing compressive strength of bricks
8(a) Explain tests to be conducted on cement to determine its normal consistency

(or)
8(b) Explain the procedures involved in Hand mixing and machine mixing of cement
concrete.
285
DCE III semester Mid Semester-II Examination

Course Name: Building Materials & Construction Practice Max.Marks:20 Marks
PART-A
Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark 4x1= 4 Marks
1. State ingredients of paint.
2. Define 'seasoning of timber'.
3. Define bearing capacity of soil
4. State the different types of stone masonry
PART-B
5(a) Mention any three characteristics of good paint.

(or)
5(b) List any five varieties of timber used in Telangana for different civil engineering works
and give one use of each
6(a) Explain the causes and effect of dampness at basement level

(or)
6(b) State the general principles to be observed in stone masonry construction
PART-C
7(a) State three characteristics of good timber and mention two common defects in timber.
(or)
7(b) State five important characteristics of a good varnish
8(a) State classification of buildings with examples

(or)
8(b) Explain brick masonry with sketch in English bond of one brick wall and one and half
brick wall
286
DCE III Semester

Course Name: Building Materials & Construction Practice Max.Marks:40 Marks
PART-A
Answer all questions 8x1 =8 Marks
1) Define 'dressing of stones'.
2) State components of building
3) List any two types of windows
4) What is meant by hydration of cement.
5) State the different types of stairs based on geometry
6) State the purpose of scaffolding.
7) State the classification of roofs
8) State different types of pointing?
PART-B
Answer four questions. Each question carries three marks. 4 x 3 = 12 Marks
9(a) Define "Bulking of Sand”. State the effects of bulking of sand on proportioning of
concrete.
(or)
9(b) State advantages of tubular scaffolding
10(a) State any six characteristics of good timber.

(or)
10(b) State three objects of plastering a wall
11(a) Explain the terms:

i) Rise ii) tread iii) landing
(or)
11(b) State the principles of locating doors in buildings
12(a) Draw a neat sketch of king post truss and name the parts
(or)
12(b) Define prime coat in painting? State its necessity
287
PART-C
Answer four questions. Each question carries five marks 4 x 5 = 20 Marks
13(a) What is meant by water-cement ratio? Explain the ill effects of increased and decreased
water-cement ratio on workability and strength of concrete
(or)
13(b) Explain paneled doors and their uses with neat sketches
14(a) State the general principles to be observed in brick masonry construction

(or)
14(b) Explain briefly the method of construction of cement concrete floor
15(a) Explain about open well stair with neat sketch.

(or)
15(b) List different types of ventilators with their uses
16(a) List the requirements of good floor.

(or)
16(b) Describe the method of application of oil bound distemper on a masonry wall
288
Course Title: Advanced Surveying Course Code : 18C-304C

Methodology: Lecture+Assignments Total Contact Periods : 60 Periods
Pre requisites
Knowledge of Chain, Compass surveying and Levelling
Course outcomes
CO1 Explain the basic concepts and principles of Theodolite in any civilengineering projects
before planning and during execution.
CO2 Explain the working principles and use of Tachometricsurvey in rough terrain
CO3 Interpret data from Theodolite and Total Station insetting out curves.
CO4 Distinguish basic concepts andprinciples of GPS and GIS in Surveying
CO5 Apply the knowledge of Total Station in different field activities.
289
No
R U A
1 Theodolite Surveying 12 Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
2 Trigonometric Levelling 08
3 Tacheometric Surveying 12 Q2
Q4 Q10(a) Q14(a)
4 Elements of Simple 8
Curves
5 Curve Setting 10 Q9(b),Q11(a),

Q5,Q6 Q13(b),Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3 Q11(b)
6 Advanced surveying 10 Q10(b),Q12(a),
instruments Q7,Q8 Q12(b) Q14(b),Q16(a), Q16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8
Course Contents
UNIT 1: Theodolite Surveying Duration: 12 Periods(L:9 – T:3)

Principles of Theodolite surveying - Component parts of Theodolite –Technical terms used in
Theodolite surveying - Fundamental lines and relationship between fundamental lines - Temporary
adjustments- Measurement of horizontal angles by repetition and reiteration method -Measurement of
vertical angles - Measurement of magnetic bearings, deflection angles, direct angles and Prolonging a
straight line - Errors in Theodolite surveying - Theodolite traversing by included angle method and
deflection angle method - Checks for closed and open traverse - Traverse computations, Latitude,
Departure, closing error, balancing a closed traverse by Bowditch and Transit rules only, problems on
Omitted measurements (Length/Bearing/ Length and Bearing of a line are omitted) - Area of closed
traverse (Independent Co-ordinates method only).
UNIT 2: Trigonometric levelling Duration:8 Periods (L:6– T:2)

Trigonometric Levelling-Principle - Necessity -Elevations and distance of objects whose base is
accessible and whose base is inaccessible with instrument stations in same vertical plane and different
vertical planes.
UNIT 3: Tacheometric Surveying Duration: 12 Periods(L: 9.0 – T:3.0)

Principle of tacheometry - Methods of tacheometry - Uses of tacheometry compared to a theodolite -
Stadia Tacheometry with staff held vertical and line of collimation horizontal or inclined - Elevations
and distances of staff stations - Determination of Tacheometric constants - Tangential Tachometry:
Finding elevations- Problems.
290
UNIT 4:Elements of Simple Curves Duration: 8 Periods (L: 6.0 – T:2.0)
Types of curves- Advantages and application -Designation of curve-Relationship between radius and
degree of curve - Simple circular curve- elements of simple curve.
UNIT 5: Curve setting Duration: 10 Periods (L:7.5 – T:2.5)

Preparation of curve table and setting out curves by chain and tape by using different types of
applications - single and double theodolite methods (Rankine method) - problems.
UNIT 6: Advanced Surveying Instruments Duration: 10 Periods (L:7.5 – T:2.5)
Principle and uses of EDM, Electronic Theodolite - Geographical-Information-System(GIS):
-components-Spatial and Attribute data - application of GIS in Civil Engineering - Introduction to
Photogrammetric surveying- types and basic principles of Photogrammetry, - Total Station:
Introduction-Application - Component parts -Accessories used - Features - Total station
characteristics - Electronic display and data reading - Instrument Preparation, Setting and
measurement (Distance, angle, Bearing etc.) - field procedure for coordinate measurement - Global
Positioning System: Introduction - Maps - Types of maps – Various satellites used by GPS -
Differential GPS – Fundamental of GPS - G.P.S receivers - Functions - Field procedure -
Observation and processing -G.P.S applications in Civil Engineering.
Reference Books
1. Surveying I& II by B.C.Punmia

1. Surveying by S.K. Husain
1. Surveying and levelling I& II by T.P.Kanetkar
2. Surveying by S.K.Duggal
3. Surveying by R.Agor(Khanna Publishers)
4. Surveying (McGrawhill) by N.N. Basak
1. Higher Surveying by A.M.Chandra (New Age Int.)
2. Remote sensing and GIS - Basudeb Bhatta ( Oxford Publications)
3. Advanced Surveying by R Agor (Khanna Publications)

2. E- Lessons prepared by sbtet,TS
291
1.1 Identify the parts and functions of a Theodolite
1.2 List the fundamental lines of a Theodolite and their relationships.
1.3 List the steps involved in carrying out temporary adjustments for taking
observations
1.4 Explain measuring of horizontal and vertical Angles.
1.5 Explain the method of conducting traverse survey
1.6 Compute the latitude, departure of lines and error of closure.
1.7 Types of omitted measurements
i) Length and bearing one side. ii) Length of one side and bearing of adjacent side.
iii) Length of two adjacent sides. iv) Bearing of two adjacent sides.
1.8 Closing error and balancing the same by Bowditch and transit rules.
1.9 Calculate the area of a closed traverse by Independent co-ordinates.
2.1 Calculate the height of an object when the base of the object is accessible.
2.2 Calculate the elevation of the object when the base of the object is inaccessible and
instrument stations are in same vertical plane and in different vertical planes.
1. Explain the methods and advantages of Tacheometry.

2. Explain the principle of Tacheometry.
3. Determination of Tacheometric constants by field measurements.
4. Find vertical and horizontal distance of stations by Stadia observations.
5. Explain the principle of Tangential Tacheometry
6. Simple problems in Tangential Tacheometry
4.1 State the definition and notation of a simple curve.
4.2 Compute the elements of simple curve
4.3 Difference between types of curves
4.4 Relation between degree and radius of curves
292
5.1 Explain the procedure for setting out a simple curve by linear methods using Chain and
Tape.
5.2 Explain the procedure for setting out a simple curve by Angular Methods- Single and
Double Theodolite.
53 Solve problems on setting out a simple curve by linear and angular methods
6.1 Understand the principles and uses of Electronic Distance Meter (EDM) and Electronic
Theodolite.
6.2 Understand Concept, application and uses of GIS in Civil Engineering
6.3 Brief introduction to Photogrammetric surveying
6.4 Understand principle, uses, application, features and field procedures of Total station
6.5 Understand principle, uses, application, fundamentals and field procedures of G.P.S.
1. Setting out sewer grades.
2. Compare Horizontal angles determined by repetition and reiteration methods
between same points.
3. Calculate the height of a building by vertical angle method and verify by
measuring the height with a tape taking BM as Plinth.
4. Determine RL’s and heights of objects like chimneys and towers and compare the
results by single plane and Double plane methods.
5. Demarcate the boundary of the given land using Total station.
6. Conduct a Closed Traverse survey and find out the area enclosed.
7. Plot the Curves executed on site and compare the parameters from plotted
drawings and site execution.
8. Determine the height of the elevated objects by trigonometrical levelling.
9. Transfer the centre line alignment from Ground to inside of Tunnel using
Total Station and Theodolite.
10. Indicate your college name and its specifications in google maps.
11. Conduct GIS enabled study of artificial recharge structures in a given
locality and submit a report.
12. Prepare a base map for water and sewage network for your town using
Remote sensing and Geographic Information System
NOTE:
Students should select any one of the above or other topics relevant to the subject
approved by the concerned faculty, individually or in a group of 3 to 5.
293
Engineering Tools
Ethics
Basic knowledge
Communication
Lifelong learning
Linked PO
CO1 2 1 2 3 2 2 1 1 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
CO2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1,2,3,4,7,8,9
CO3 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1,2,3,4,7,8,9
CO4 3 1 2 1 2 2 2,3,4,7,8,9
CO5 3 1 2 1 2 2 2,3,4,7,8,10
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks

Assignments 5
Seminars 5
Total 60
294

question
MID SEM-I EXAM

1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM

1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed ¼ of
a page,1 page and 2 pages respectively

question

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
295
DCE III semester

Course Name: Advanced Surveying Max.Marks:20
PART-A
1) Define the terms Telescope normal and Telescope inverted.

2) What are the fundamental lines of a theodolite.
3) Define trigonometric leveling.
4) Mention the three cases that occur in trignometric leveling.
PART-B
Answer two questions. Each question carries Three marks 2x3 = 6 Marks
5(a) What are the possible sources of errors while using a theodolite.
(OR)
5(b) Write the procedure to find the deflection angles.
6(a) How can the height of a tower be determined, when its base is inaccessible?
(OR)
6(b) State three differences between ordinary leveling and trigonometric leveling?
PART-C
7(a) The following readings were obtained in a traverse survey, where the length and bearing of the
last line were not recorded.
Line Length(m) Bearing
AB 75.50 30º 24’
BC 180.50 110º 36’
CD 60.25 210º 30’
DA ? ?
Compute the length and bearing of line DA.
(OR)
296
7(b)Find the area of the closed traverse having the following data, by co-ordinate method.
Side Latitude Departure
AB +225.50 +120.50
BC -245.00 +210.00
CD -150.50 -110.50
DA +170.00 -220.00
8(a) In order to ascertain the elevation of the top (Q) of the signal on a hill, observations were made
from two instrument stations P and R at a horizontal distance of 100m. apart, the stations P
and R being in line with Q. The angles of elevation of Q at P and R were 28º 42’ and 18º 6’
respectively. The staff readings upon the benchmark of elevation 287.28m were respectively
2.870 and 3.750 when the instrument was a P and at R, the telescope being horizontal.
Determine the elevation of the foot of the signal if the height of the signal above its base is
3m.
(OR)
8(b) A theodolite was set up at A and the angle of elevation to the top of tree was 8°-36’. The
horizontal distance between the vertical axis of theodolite and projected position of the top
of the tree was 200m. Determine the RL of the top of the tree if the RL of the instrument
axis was 1609.89
297
DCE III semester

Course Name: Advanced Surveying Max.Marks:20 Marks
PART-A
Answer all questions, Each Question carries onemark 4x1 = 4 Marks
1) Write the principle of tacheometry.

2) What is the difference between Theodolite and Tacheometer.
3) List the different types of curves.
4) What is a relation between the radius and degree of curve?
PART-B
Answer two questions. Each question carries Threemarks2x3 = 6 Marks
5(a) Describe the method of determining the constants of a Tacheometer from field measurements
(OR)
5(b) What are the sources of errors in Tacheometry. What are the permissible errors.
6(a) Draw a neat sketch of simple circular curve and indicate its all notations.
(OR)
6(b) Define i) forward tangent ii) point of tangency.

PART-C
Answer two questions. Each question carries five marks2x5 = 10Marks
7(a) The following readings were observed on a staff vertically held.
Instrument Staff Vertical Hair readings Remarks
Station Station Angle (m)
C BM -5º 20’ 1.500, 1.800, 2.450 RL of BM is

750.50m
C D +8º 12’ 0.750, 1.500, 2.250
Calculate the horizontal distance CD and RL of D, when the constants of instruments are
100 and 0.15.
(or)
7(b) The following readings were observed with a Transit Theodolite
298
Instrument Staff Target Vertical Staff Remarks
Station Station Angle Reading
O A Lower +4º 30’ 0.950 RL of the instrument

axis is 255.50m
Upper +6º 30’ 3.250
Calculate the horizontal distance between the instrument station and staff, and also the RL of
staff station A.
8)a) Derive a relationship between a radius and degree of a curve.
(or)
b) What are different types of curves and write its suitable areas of application
299
DCE III semester

Course Name: Advanced Surveying Max.Marks:40 Marks
PART-A
Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark 8x1 = 8 Marks
1) Mention any six fundamental lines of transit theodolite.

2) List any two advantages of tangential tacheomertry.
3) Mention any two methods of setting out circular curve by chain and tape.
4) What is balancing?
5) Define Deflection angle?
6) Define Point of Commencement?
7) State the principle of EDM.
8) Define photogrammetry?
PART-B
9(a) Explain clearly the procedure of measurement of horizontal angles by repetition method?
(OR)
9(b) Two straights intersect at a chainage 1060 m and the angle of intersection is 120 0.Calculate (a)
Length of long chord(b) Tangent length (c) versed sine of the curve (d) Degree of the curve.
10(a)Explain how the additive and multiplying constants of a tacheometer determined in the field.
(or)
10(b) Write the uses of GPS in Civil Engineering.
11(a) Write the formulas for (i)apex distance (ii)tangent length (iii) length of the curve (iv)mid
ordinate distance (v) degree of curve (vi)angle of intersection
300
(or)
11(b) Explain how a simple curve can be set out using chain and tape (any method)
12(a) Write the uses of GPS in Civil Engineering.
(OR)
12(b)Mention three advantages and three disadvantages of total station.
PART-C
Answer four questions. Each question carries five marks 4x 5 = 20 Marks
13(a) The record of a closed traverse given below with one bearing and distance missing
Line Length(m) Bearing

AB 100 ?
BC 80.5 140°30’
CD 60 220°30,
DA ? 310°15’
Calculate the length of DA and bearing of AB
(OR)
13(b) Two tangents intersect at point B of chainage 380.00m, the deflection angle being
360.Calculate all the data necessary for setting out a simple circular curve with a radius of
300m by Rankine’s method of deflection angles. Take peg interval 30m.
14(a)A Tacheometer fitted with an analytic lens was set up at a station A and the following readings
were obtained on a vertically held staff.
Station Staff Vertical Station Angle Hair Readings
A B.M -2⁰18' 1.500,1.800,2.4500
A B +8⁰36' 0.750,1.500,2.250
R.L of BM was 100.00 Calculate the horizontal distance AB and the R.L of B.
(OR)
14(b) Explain briefly five components of GIS
301
15(a) Two tangents intersect at point B of chainage 380.00m, the deflection angle being
360.Calculate all the data necessary for setting out a simple circular curve with a radius of 300m
by Rankine’s method of deflection angles. Take peg interval 30m.
(OR)
15(b) Calculate the perpendicular offsetsat 20m intervalalong the tangents to set out first five pegs of
simple circular curve of 250m radius.
16(a) Explain briefly five components of GIS?
(OR)
16(b) What are the four basic functions of the EDM instrument?
302

Course Title: Transportation Engineering Course Code : 18C-305C
Methodology : Lecture+ Assignments Total Contact Periods : 60 Periods
Pre-requisites
This course requires the knowledge of Surveying and Construction materials.
Course outcomes
CO1 Classify roads as per Indian Road Congress and describe the principles of highway alignment.
C02 Identify the highway geometric elements.
CO3 Examine the functions of components of highway and permanent way of Railways.
CO4 Realize the significance of road safety by incorporating the concepts of traffic engineering.
CO5 Differentiate between types of pavements, their construction and design principles.

No
R U A
1 Introduction to Transportation Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
Engineering, Highway Alignment 10
and Surveys
2
Highway Geometrics 10
Q4
3 Q2
Traffic Engineering 10
Q10(a) Q14(a)
4 Highway construction and
10
maintenance
5
Q9(b),Q11(a), Q13(b),Q15(a),
Principles of Pavement Design 10 Q3 Q5,Q6
Q11(b) Q15(b)
6 Introduction to permanent way in
Railways Q10(b),Q12(a), Q14(b),Q16(a),
10 Q7,Q8
Q12(b) Q16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8
Course Contents
UNIT 1: Introduction to Transportation Engineering, Highway Alignment and Surveys:

Duration 10 Periods(L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
303
a) Importance of transportation engineering –Different modes of transportation –
Characteristics of Road Transport.
b) Highway development in India: Jayakar committee Recommendations – Functions of
I.R.C. – Classification of roads as per I.R.C - Twenty year Road plans, their targets
and achievements.
c) Alignment – Factors influencing alignment of road in plain and hilly areas – Highway
surveys – Reconnaissance, preliminary and final location surveys.
UNIT 2: Highway Geometrics Duration 10 Periods (L:7.5 – T:2.5)

a) Highway cross-section in embankment and cutting - Width of pavement, shoulder,
formation width, right of way, road boundaries – road widths for different
classification of roads, traffic lane widths-camber – recommended I.R.C values of
camber for different roads.
b) Gradients – Ruling gradient, limiting and exceptional gradients – Recommended
I.R.C values of gradients.
c) Super elevation – Necessity – Curves – necessity of curves in roads –transition curves
– details of alignment for horizontal and vertical curves.
d) Sight distance – Stopping sight distance –Overtaking sight distance – formula for
calculation of Stopping sight distance - simple problems.
UNIT 3: Traffic Engineering Duration 10 Periods (L:7.5 – T:2.5)

a) Traffic studies and its importance.
b) Road intersections – grade intersections-Types–Traffic islands –Channelizing islands –
Round about – Interchange – Fly over – Diamond Intersections – Clover Leaf junction.
c) Pavement marking and Kerb markings.
d) Traffic signs – Informatory signs – Mandatory signs – Cautionary signs
UNIT 4: Highway construction and Maintenance Duration 10 Periods (L:7.5 – T:2.5)

a) Purpose of road drainage – Surface and sub-surface drainage – Typical cross section of
highway in cutting and embankment.
b) Water bound macadam roads – Materials used – Machinery used in the construction –
Construction procedure – Maintenance of W.B.M road.
c) Bitumen roads-Different types – Surface dressing –interface treatments-seal coat, tack
coat, prime coat, premix – Full grout and semi-grout – methods – Construction
procedure.
d) Cement concrete roads-Longitudinal joints–Transverse joints –Construction joints –
Construction of cement concrete roads – Machinery used for construction.
304
UNIT 5: Principles of Pavement Design: Duration 10 Periods (L:7.5 – T:2.5)
a) Pavement – Types of pavement –Functions of different components of pavements -
White topping roads and its Merits.
b) Methods for design of flexible and rigid pavements – CBR test
c) Design principles of flexible pavement by CBR method.
UNIT 6: Introduction to permanent way in Railways Duration 10 Periods (L:7.5 – T:2.5)

a) Importance of Railways – Gauge – Types of gauges.
b) Structure of permanent way-Different types of rails- requirements of a good rail.
c) Rail joints – Types of joints – Requirements of good rail joint – Fixtures and fastenings
of rails – coning of wheels.
d) Sleepers – Functions –-Types of sleepers–characteristics of a good sleeper – Spacing of
sleepers – Sleeper density.
e) Ballast – Definition – Function – Characteristics of good ballast.
f) General description and sketches for turnout – General layout of a simple left hand and
right hand turnout and different crossings.
Reference Books
1. Highway Engineering – S.K.Khanna&C.E.G.Justo
2. Principles of Transportation Engineering – Chakraborty
3. Principles & practices of Highway Engineering – L.R.Kadiyali
4. Introduction to Transportation Engineering – J.H.Banks
5. Text book of Highway & Traffic Engineering – Subhash C Saxena
6. Railway Engineering - Satish Chandra and M.M Agarwal

1.1. State the importance and characteristics of transportation engineering.

1.2. List the different modes of transportation.
305
1.3. State the Jayakar committee Recommendation for Road development in India.
1.4. State the importance and functions of I.R.C
1.5. State the classification of roads as per I.R.C
1.6. State the highlights of first, second and third twenty-year Road development plans.
1.7. Define the term alignment of road.
1.8. State the factors influencing selection of alignment for a road in plain and hilly areas.
1.9. Explain various engineering surveys conducted to fix the alignment of a road.
2.1 Sketch the Highway cross-section in embankment and cutting and label its elements.
2.2 Define the terms: width of pavement, shoulder, formation width, right of way, camber,
gradient, super elevation, sight distance, stopping sight distance and over taking sight
distance.
2.3 Calculate the Stopping sight distance (calculation of sight distances at slopes not required)
2.4 State the different types of gradients and their recommended values.
2.5 State the necessity of providing super elevation and write the formula.
2.6 Solve simple problems on super elevation.
2.7 State the necessity of curves in highways.
2.8 State the different types of horizontal and vertical curves adopted in road
3.1. List the various traffic surveys.

3.2. State the importance of each traffic survey.
3.3. Explain with neat sketches traffic islands and Interchanges.
3.4. State the functions and types of pavement markings with sketches.
3.5. State the types of traffic signs and their purpose and give sketches.
4.1 State the necessity of road drainage.

4.2 Explain the methods of providing surface and sub-surface drainage.
4.3 State the materials used in construction of different types of roads
4.4 State the equipment/machinery used in construction of different roads.
4.5 Explain the methods of construction of different types of roads.
4.6 Explain the maintenance of WBM roads.
4.7 Explain the different types of joints used in C.C roads with sketches.
4.8 State the need for joints in C.C roads.
5.1. State the types of pavement.

5.2. Distinguish between flexible pavement and rigid pavement.
5.3. State the advantages of White topping roads over Black toping roads (Bituminous roads).
306
5.4. Sketch the Cross section of a pavement structure.
5.5. State the functions of components of a pavement.
5.6. State the factors affecting pavement design.
5.7. List the methods for design of flexible pavements and rigid pavements.
5.10 Explain the California Bearing Ratio (CBR) test.
5.11 Explain the design principle of flexible pavement by California Bearing Ratio (CBR)
method.
6.1 State the advantages of Railways.

6.2 Define gauge and state the classification of gauges.
6.3 State the component parts of a permanent way and functions of each component.
6.4 State the requirements of good rail, rail joint, sleeper and ballast.
6.5 State the different types of rails, joints, rail fittings, sleepers, ballast, used in Indian
Railways with sketches.
6.6 Describe the coning of wheels.
6.7 Describe different types of turnouts and crossings with sketches.
1. Prepare a comparative chart showing various types of roads such as

WBM,Bituminous roads, Concrete roads.
2. Visit a highway construction site, identify various types of soils, the test
procedures as per relevant IS codes and inference based on the test results.
3. Draw the cross-sectional details of Village roads, MDR, SH, NH using AUTO
CAD and prepare achart.
4. Collect the parameters of road intersection in the locality and prepare a model.
5. Prepare a model showing the cross-sectional details of various types of roads such
as bituminous and concrete roads.
6. Prepare a chart showing the various road signs used by collecting the information
from nearby RTO and prepare a report.
7. Collect information regarding various types of railway gauges used in India and
other countries, prepare a chart and present it.
8. Collect videos showing the various forces acting on a railway track and present in
the class.
9. Collect photographs and videos of crossings and prepare a presentation on it.
10. Collect videos related to track laying procedure and give seminar in the class.
11. Give a presentation on production of railway sleepers.
12. Collect different IRC codes pertaining to highway geometric design and prepare a
chart.
13. Prepare a model of a typical railway track.
14. Collect the information regarding various railway divisions in India and their
functions.
307
NOTE
Students should select any one of the above or other topics relevant to the subject
approved by the concerned faculty, individually or in a group.
Engineering Tools
Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge
Ethics
Communication
Linked PO
CO1 1 1 2 1 2,5,6,10
CO2 1 2 2 1,2,10
CO3 2 2 2 1 2 2,4,5,7,10
CO4 3 2 2 2 2,5,6,10
CO5 2 3 2 2 2 3 1,2,3,5,6,10
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks

Assignments 5
Seminars 5
Total 60
question
MID SEM-I EXAM
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
308
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)

question

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
309

DCE III semester Mid Semester-I Examination
Course Code: 18C-305C Duration:1 hour

Course Name: Transportation Engineering Max.Marks:20 Marks
PART-A
1) List any two recommendation of jayakar committee for road development in India.
2) Define term alignment of road.
3) Define a) gradient b) shoulders
4) Define over taking sight distance
PART-B
5(a) Compare targets and achievements of the road development plans in India.
OR
5(b) State the classification of roads as per I.R.C
6(a) State the necessity of curves in highways.
OR
6(b) Calculate the value of stopping sight distance for a highway with a design speed
of65 kmph. Assume suitably all the data required.
PART-C

7(a) Explain briefly engineering surveys conducted to fix the alignment of highway.
OR
7(b) List any five factors that are influencing selection of alignment of road in hilly areas.
8(a) State the necessity of providing transition curve in highways.
OR
8(b) The radius of horizontal circular curve is 100m. The design speed is 50 kmph and
the design coefficient of lateral friction is 0.15.
i) Calculate the super elevation required if full friction is assumed to develop.
ii) Calculate the coefficient of friction needed if no super elevation is provided.
310
DCE III semester Mid Semester-II Examination

PART-A
1) List any four traffic studies.

2) List any four types of pavement markings.
3) State the materials used for construction of W.B.M roads.
4) List any four machineries required for construction of roads.
PART-B
5(a) State the purposes of traffic signs.
OR
5(b) State any three functions of pavement markings.
6(a) State the necessity of road drainage.
OR
6(b) State the need for providing joints C.C roads.
PART-C
7(a) Explain briefly about round about.
OR
7(b) Explain briefly about clover leaf intersection with sketch.
8(a) Explain the construction procedure for bituminous surface dressing.
OR
8(b) Enumerate the steps in the construction of cement concrete pavements
DCE III semester End Examination
Course Code: 18C-305C Duration: 2 hours

PART-A
1. What are the different modes of transportation?

2. List the different types of horizontals curves used in road construction.
3. List any two advantages of white topping roads.
4. List any four traffic surveys.
311
5. State any two functions of sub-grade in road structure.
6. List any two types of pavements.
7. List any four advantages of railways.
8. Define term gauge in railways.
PART-B
Answer four questions, Each Question carries three marks 4 x 3 = 12 Marks
9 (a) State the importance of Transportation engineering.
OR
9 (b) State any three factors which are affecting the pavement design.
10(a) State the importance of any three traffic surveys.

OR
10 (b)State any three characteristics of good ballast.
11(a) State any three merits of white topping roads over black toping roads.
OR
11(b) Sketch the cross section of a pavement structure and label each layer.
12(a) Sketch the cross section of a permanent way and label the components.
OR
12(b) Write a short notes on coning of wheel.
PART-C
Answer four questions, Each Question carries five marks 4 x 5 = 20 Marks

13(a) State any five factors that are influencing alignment of a roads in plain area.
OR
13(b) State the design principles of flexible pavement by CBR method.
14(a) Explain the procedure for construction of W.B.M roads.

OR
14(b) Describe the diamond crossing with neat sketch.
15(a) Explain the California Bearing Ratio (CBR) test.

OR
15(b) Compare flexible pavement and rigid pavements in any five aspects.
16(a) Explain about different types of rail joints with sketch.

OR
16(b) Describe right hand turnout with the help of a neat sketch
312

Course Title: Building Drawing Course Code : 18C-306P
Semester: III Semester Course Group : Practical
Methodology : Lecture+ Practical Total Contact Periods : 45Periods
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of Engineering drawing
Course Outcomes
On completion of the course, the student should be able to;
CO1 Draw the conventional signs and component parts of the residential building
CO2 Draw plan, cross section and elevation of Residential buildings of load bearing walls
CO3 Draw plan, cross section and elevation of Residential buildings of framed structures
CO4 Draw line diagrams of Public buildings.

No R U A
1 Introduction to building drawing 15 1 3
2 Residential Buildings 15 1
3 Public Buildings 15 1
Total 45 1 3 2
Course Contents
UNIT 1: Introduction to building drawing Duration: 15 Periods(L:5-P:10)

a) Sketch the Conventional signs for materials like bricks, stone, concrete, wood, glass,
earth, steel - water supply and sanitary fixtures like tap, wash basin, sink, W.C pan
(Indian and European type), shower, flush tank.
b) Cross section of a load bearing wall showing all the componentsbelow and above the
ground level.
c) Plan and cross section of column footing.
d) Plan of one brick wall meeting at a corner showing odd and even courses in English
bond.
e) Elevation of a fully panelled door and label the parts
f) Elevation of fully panelled window and glazed window and label the parts
g) Elevation of King post truss and label the parts with the given data.(details of the joints
not required)
313
h) Plan and elevation of Dog legged stair case
UNIT 2: Residential Buildings Duration: 15 Periods(L:5-P:10)
a) Plan, section and elevation of single storied load bearing type residential building from
the given line diagram and set of specifications.
(i) One room (ii) One bedroom house (iii) Two bedroom house
b) Plan, section and elevation of single storied (framed structure) residential building
c) Plan, section and elevation of Two-storied residential building (framed structure type)
UNIT 3: Public buildings Duration: 15 Periods(L:5-P:10)

a) Plan of a Sanitary block of a large building showing internal water supply and sanitary
fittings
b) Plan of Primary school building for 250 students(line diagram only) showing the
functional requirements
c) Plan of Hostel building for 100 students(line diagram only) showing the functional
requirements
d) Plan of Rural hospital buildingfor 10 beds capacity(line diagram only) showing the
functional requirements.
Recommended Books
1. Civil Engineering Drawing-I by Chakraborthy
2. Civil Engineering Drawing-I by N.Srinivasulu.
3. .S.C.Rangwala ,”Civil Engineering Drawing


1.1. Sketch the conventional signs of various Civil Engineering materials and plumbing
1.2 Draw the cross section of load bearing wall and name all components below and above ground
level.
1.3 Draw the plan and cross section of column footing below and above ground level
1.4 Draw the plan of one brick wall (English bond)
1.5. Draw the elevation of fully panelled door and label the parts
1.6 Draw the elevation of fully panelled window and glazed window and label the parts
1.7. Draw elevation of King post truss and label the parts with the given data.
1.8 Draw plan and section of a dog legged staircase with given specifications.
314
2.1. Draw the plan, section and elevation of single storied load bearing type residential building
from the given line diagram and set of specifications. A) one room B) one bedroom house C)
two bedroom house
2.2. Draw the plan, section and elevation of single storied residential building (framed structure)
from the given line diagram and set of specifications.
2.3 Draw the plan, section and elevation of two storied residential building (framed structure)from
the given line diagram and set of specifications
3.1 Draw the plan and cross section of sanitary block showing internal water supply and sanitary
fittings.
3.2 Draw the line diagram of Primary school building for 250 students .
3.3 Draw the line diagram of a Hostel building for 100 students.
3.4 Draw the line diagram of a Rural hospital building for 10 beds capacity.

2. Surprise Test
3. Group discussion
4. Prepare a case study of nearby small public buildings verify and draw the various
views and judge the prevailing bye-laws.
5. Prepare a plan, elevation and section of your college main block.
6. Prepare a plan of temporary construction shed and draw various views.
7. Prepare a plan of vehicle parking shed and draw various views.
8. Study the difference between framed structure and a load bearing structure and
present it.
9. Incorporate the concepts of Green building technology in your institute building.
10. Draw the plan elevation and sectional views of a pitched roof residential
building.

Engineering Tools
Lifelong learning
Ethics
Basic knowledge
Communication
Linked PO
CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO
10
315
CO1 1 2 3 1 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,5,8,9
CO2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,5,8,9
CO3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10
CO4 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10

question
and
Understanding(U)
02 Part-B Application(A) 2 12 1 12 Marks

question
and
Understanding(U)
316
DCE III semester
Course Code:18C-306P Duration:1 hour
Course Name: Building Drawing Max.Marks:20
PART-A
Answer all questions. Each question carries four marks2 x 4= 8 Marks

1. Sketch the conventional signs for the following .
a) Bricks
b) Wood cross section
c) Stone Masonry
d) W.C pan (Indian type)
2. Sketch the plans of odd course and even course of one Brick wall of English Bond
meeting at corner and name the components.
PART-B
Answer any one question. Each question carries twelve marks 1 x 12 = 12 Marks
1. Draw the cross section of load bearing wall and Name any 8 components below and
above the ground level.(assume suitable dimensions)
2. Draw the elevation of fully panelled door of size 1200mm X 2100mm (not to scale)
and labels the parts.
317
DCE III semester Examination

PART-A
Answer all questions. Each question carries four marks 2 x 4= 8 Marks
1. Draw the plan of a single room of size 4 m x 3 m. Take wall thickness as 300mm
2. Draw the cross section of load bearing wall with foundation. Wall thickness is 300 mm.
Assume suitable dimensions
PART-A
Answer any one question. Each question carries twelve marks 1x12 = 12 Marks
1. The line sketch of a small residential building is shown in Fig. Draw to scale of 1:100
the following views :
i. Dimensioned Plan 10 marks
Specifications:-
a) All the dimensions in line sketch are internal measurements.

b) Foundation : 1200mm below the ground level and 1000mm wide
c) C.C Bed : 1000mm wide and 300mm deep
d) Footings : 2 Nos. With suitable offsets using RR Masonry in CM (1:6)
e) Basement : 450mm height with suitable width of Stone masonry in CM (1:6)
f) Super structure : walls 300mm thick Height from top of the floor to bottom of
the roof slab is 3000mm. All walls are of BW in CM(1:6)
g) RCC roof slab 120mm thick.
h) Doors , Windows, Ventilators and Lintels may be suitably provided.
i) Parapet : 150mm thick, Height 750mm.
j) Sunshades for all external doors and windows are to be suitably provided.
318
2. The line sketch given below shows the plan of a residential building. The dimensions
given in the sketch are internal dimensions of the rooms. Draw the Cross section along
ABCD of the given line sketch to a scale of 1:100
Specifications
i. Foundations :- The depth of foundation shall be 1000mm below ground level.

Plain cement concrete (1:4:8) bed in the foundation will be 800mm wide and
200mm deep. Width of first and second footings will be 500mm and 400mm
respectively. Whereas the depth of both the footings will be 400mm each
using stone masonry in C.M (1:8).
ii. Basement:- The height of the basement is 600mm. Damp proof course of
walls in the basement is 150mm thick.
iii. Super structure: - All the walls except the partition wall between the toilets
are 200mm thick. The partition wall is 100mm thick.
iv. A square brick pillar 200mm X 200mm is provided at left corner in front
veranda.
v. Lintels and Sunshades :- Lintels with RCC (1:2:4) are provided on all
openings and depth of 150mm with a bearing of 150mm on either side.
Sunshades 100mm thick at the wall face and 75mm thick at the free end are
provided projecting 600mm from lintels over all exterior openings. A
continuous sunshade is provided both sides of front veranda.
vi. Veranda: In front veranda RCC beam 200mm X 250mm is laid over the brick
pillar, the bottom of the beam being at 2100mm from the floor level.
319
vii. Height of super structure : The walls in the super structure are taken to a
height of 3300mm.
viii. Roofing : Roofing consists of RCC (1:2:4) slab 110mm thick and weather
proof course 50mm thick.
ix. Flooring : Flooring shall be of Shahabad stone 25mm thick over 80mm thick
CC bed of (1:3:6) over a sand filling in the basement.
x. Parapet : Parapet is 100mm thick and 700mm height.
xi. Assume suitable sizes for steps, doors, windows and ventilators.
320
DCE III semester

PART-A
Answer all questions each question carries four marks . 4x4=16 Marks
1. Sketch the conventional signs for the following materials,
a).Stone masonry
b) Wood longitudinal section
c) Wash basin
d) Glass
e) Concrete
2. Draw the cross section of load bearing wall and Name any 6 components below
And above the ground level.
3. Draw the elevation of king post truss and labels the parts
4. Draw the elevation of fully panelled window of size 1000mm x 1400 mm (not to
scale)and label the parts
PART- B
Answer any one question. Each question carries twenty four marks 1x24=24 Marks
5. The line sketch given below shows the plan of a Single storied two bedroom
load bearing residential building. The dimensions given in the sketch are
internal dimensions of the rooms. Draw to a scale of 1:100
a) Plan
Specifications:
i. Foundation :- 1.0m wide and 1.0m deep
ii. Levelling course :- 1.0m wide and 0.2m height in CC 1:4:8
iii. First footing :- 0.75m wide and 0.4m height in stone masonry in C.M (1:8)
iv. second footing :- 0.60m wide and 0.4m height in stone masonry in C.M (1:8)
v. Basement :- 0.45m wide and 0.6m height in stone masonry in C.M (1:8)
vi. Flooring :- 20mm thick Marble flooring set in 20mm thick C.M (1:4) over a bed
of C.C (1:5:10) and 150mm thick sand cushion.
vii. Super structure :- 300mm thick brick masonry in C.M (1:6), Height 3000mm
viii. Parapet wall :- 150mm thick and 0.75m height in brick masonry in C.M (1:6)
ix. Lintels :- 150mm thick in R.C.C (1:2:4)
x. Sunshades :- 75mm thick flat, projecting 0.60m from face of wall.
xi. Roofing :- R.C.C slab 120mm thick all over with full bearing.
xii. Doors :- MD= D=1.0m X 2.0m; D1=0.9m X 2.0m
321
xiii. Windows :- W= 1.0m X 1.22m;
xiv. Ventilators :- V 0.45m X 0.75m
6.a) Draw a line diagram for a proposed Rural hospital of 10 beds capacity. ( to a
suitable scale) showing the functional requirements 20
322

Course Title: Material Testing Lab Practice Course Code : 18C-307P
Course outcomes
This course requires the knowledge of Construction Materials
Course Outcomes
CO1 Select suitable sample of material for testing based on BIS

CO2 Test Bricks to check their suitability for construction works as per IS specification
CO3 Check suitability of Ordinary Portland cement for a particular work as per standards
CO4 Select suitable sample of aggregate based on tests for use in mortar and concrete
Course Content
Unit
Unit Name Periods
No
1 Tests on Bricks 15
2 Tests on Cement 15
3 Tests on Aggregates 15
Total 45
Course Contents
UNIT 1: Tests on Bricks Duration: 15Periods(L:5-P:10)
a) Dimension Test
b) Water absorption,
c) Crushing strength
d) Efflorescence.
UNIT 2: Tests on Cement Duration: 15 Periods(L:5-P:10)
a) Fineness test
b) Normal consistency test
c) Initial and final setting times of cement.
d) Compressive strength of cement.
UNIT 3: Tests on Aggregates Duration:15Periods(L:5-P:10)
323
a) Water absorption of Sand,
b) Bulking of Sand,
c) Percentage of voids in Coarse and fine aggregates,
d) Sieve analysis of course and fine aggregates
e) Fine Silt in aggregate
KEY Competencies to be achieved by the student
S.
Experiment Title Key Competencies
No
1 Dimension Test on Bricks Taking dimensions
2 Water Absorption on bricks Taking weight of dry bricks and wet bricks
3 Crushing strength test on bricks 1.Preparation of 1:1 cement mortar and

application of cement mortar over top and
bottom faces of brick
2.Application of load gradually at the rate 14
N/mm2 per minute till failure occurs
3.Recording the load at FAILURE
4 Efflorescence test on bricks 1.Examining the bricks for traces of
efflorescence
Fineness test on cement 1.Taking weight of cement sample and its
5 residue
6 Normal consistency test on 1.Measurement of required percentage of water
cement to cement accurately
2.Preparation of sample in the mould
3.Noting down the plunger penetration on
vicat’s scale
7 Setting times of cement 1.Measurement of required percentage of water
to cement accurately
2.Preparation of sample.
3.Noting down the needle penetration on
Vicat’s scale
4.Recording time at required needle penetration
8 Compressive strength test on 1.Taking weights of different grades of
cement standard sand and cement accurately
2.Addition of required percentage of water to
cement accurately
3.Application of load at required rate and
recording of load at failure accurately
9 Water absorption of sand
Accurate weighing of dry sand and wet sand
10 Bulking of sand
1.Measuring the volume of sand and water
324
accurately
2.Addition of water to sand in accurate
increments
3.Measuring the increase in volume of sand
11 Percentage of voids in coarse and 1.Taking the weight of cylindrical measure
fine aggregates accurately
2.Calculating the bulk density of coarse/ fine
aggregates both in loose and compacted states
3.Taking the weight of coarse/ fine aggregate
and containers
12 Sieve analysis of coarse and fine 1.Correct arrangement of sieves used for the
aggregate sieve analysis of fine or coarse aggregate
2.Weighing the residue in each sieve accurately
13 Fine Silt in Aggregate 1.Observation of silt layer above the sand layer
and taking its thickness
Reference Books
1. Laboratory manual on Testing of Engineering Materials by Hemant Sood, New Age

International Publishers, New Delhi
2. Building and Construction materials Testing and Quality Control by M.L.Gambhir and Neha
Jamwal,Mcgraw Hill,India
3. Material Testing Laboratory manual by C.B.Kukreja, Kishore.K and Ravi Chawla,Standard
Publishers Distributors
4. https://docslide.us/documents/som-bmt-lab-manual-final.html
1.1 State the significance of Dimension test on bricks

1.2 State the standards on Dimensions of bricks used for various construction works
1.3 Explain the procedure for conducting dimension test on bricks
1.4 Conduct dimension test on bricks
1.5 State the significance of water absorption test on bricks
1.6 State the standards on water absorption of bricks used for various construction
works
325
1.7 Explain the procedure for conducting water absorption test on bricks
1.8 Perform water absorption test on bricks
1.9 State the significance of crushing strength test on bricks
1.10 State the standards on crushing strength of bricks used for various construction
works
1.11 Explain the procedure for conducting crushing strength test on bricks
1.12 Determine crushing strength of bricks by testing
1.13 Compare observations of crushing tests conducted on different types of bricks
like clay bricks, fly ash bricks, concrete blocks
1.14 State the importance of efflorescence test on bricks
1.15 State the standards on efflorescence of bricks used for various construction works
1.16 Explain the procedure for conducting efflorescence test on bricks
1.17 Determine the percentage of efflorescence by conducting efflorescence test on
bricks
1.18 Compare observations of efflorescence tests conducted on different types of
bricks like clay bricks, fly ash bricks, concrete blocks
2.1 State the significance of workability and Compression tests in field.

2.2 State the method of preparing sample and the number of samples required for given
work
2.3 Use apparatus required for conducting fineness test on cement
2.4 State the standards on fineness of cement
2.5 Explain the procedure for conducting the fineness test on cement
2.6 Conduct the fineness test on cement and record the observation
2.7 State the significance of normal consistency of cement
2.8 Use apparatus required for conducting normal consistency test on cement sample
2.9 Explain the procedure for conducting normal consistency test on cement sample
2.10 Find the normal consistency ofgiven cement sample
2.11 Draw the inference from the observations of normal consistency of fresh cement
and old cement samples of same and different grades
2.12 State the significance of setting times on construction activity
2.13 State the standards on initial and final settings times of various types of cement
2.14 Use apparatus required for conducting initial and final setting times of given cement
sample
2.15 Explain the procedure for conducting initial and final setting times of given cement
sample
326
2.16 Find the initial setting time of given cement sample
2.17 Draw the inference from the observations of initial setting times of fresh and old
cement samples of same and different grades
2.18 State the significance of compressive strength of cement used for various civil
engineering works
2.19 State various grades of cement available in the market based on compressive
strength of the cement
2.20 State the standards on compressive strengths of different types of cements used
in construction
2.21 Use apparatus required for conducting compressive strength test on given cement
sample
2.22 Explain the procedure for conducting compressive strength test on given cement
sample
2.23 Find the compressive strength of given cement sample
2.24 Draw the inference by comparing the observations of compressive strength test
on fresh and old cement samples
3.1 State the significance of water absorption of sand used for construction
3.2 State standards on water absorption of sand
3.3 Use apparatus required for conducting water absorption test on given sand
sample
3.4 Explain the procedure for conducting water absorption test on given sand sample
3.5 Find water absorption test on given sand sample
3.6 Explain the effect of bulking of sand on quantities of material and quality mortar
and concrete
3.7 State the significance of bulking of sand on strength and durability properties of
mortar and concrete
3.8 Use apparatus required for conducting bulking of sand test on given sand sample
3.9 Explain the procedure for conducting bulking of sand test on given sand sample
3.10 Draw the inferences from the observations of bulking of sand tests conducted on
fine, medium and coarse sands
3.11 Explain the field method of adjustment for bulking of fine aggregate
3.12 Use apparatus required for conducting test to determine bulk density of coarse
and fine aggregate
3.13 Find the bulk density of given sample of coarse and fine aggregate
3.14 Explain the effect of voids in coarse and fine aggregates on strength and
durability properties of mortar and concrete
327
3.15 Use apparatus required for conducting tests to find percentage of voids present in
aggregate
3.16 Find the percentage of voids present in given sample of aggregate
3.17 State the significance sieve analysis of fine and coarse aggregates on properties
of concrete
3.18 State the grading limits of fine aggregate as per IS: 383-1970
3.19 Use apparatus required for conducting sieve analysis of fine aggregate
3.20 Calculate the fineness modulus of given sample of aggregate
3.21 State the effect of silt in aggregate on properties of cement mortar and concrete
3.22 Use apparatus required for determining the silt content in aggregate
3.23 Explain the field method to determine quantity of silt content in aggregate
3.24 Find the content of fine silt in aggregate

1. Collect the information with proper justification for the fine aggregates used for different
constructional activities such as foundation, plastering, concreting etc mentioning zonal
classification.
2. Collecting different samples of materials from market and testing in lab
3. Collecting Specifications of various materials and correlate with standards.
4. Collecting and study of various IS codes regarding testing of materials
5. Field tests on various building materials such as cement, sand, brick etc as per codes.
8. Quiz
9. Group discussion
10. Surprise Test

Lifelong learning
Engineering Tools
Ethics
Basic knowledge
Communication

Linked PO
CO1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2,3,4,7,8,10
328
CO2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 2,3,4,7,8,9,10
CO3 2 3 3 1 2 2 1 2,3.4,7,8,9,10
CO4 2 3 3 1 2 2 1 2,3.4,7,8,9,10
329
DCE III semester
Course Name: Material Testing Lab Practice Max.Marks:20 Marks
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Instructions to the Candidate: 1 x 20 =20 Marks
(i)Pick and Answer any One of the following Questions from the given list.
(ii) Check the suitability of the given construction material by drawing suitable inference
5) Check the suitable of given sample of bricks by conducting dimension test
6) Calculate the water absorption of given sample of bricks
7) Calculate the crushing strength of given sample of bricks
8) Determine the effect of efflorescence on given sample of bricks

DCE III semester
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(i)Pick and Answer any One of the following Questions from the given list.
1) Calculate the fineness of given sample of cement
2) Determine the Standard consistency of given sample of cement
3) Determine the initial setting time of cement
4) Calculate the compressing strength of given cement mortar cubes
330
DCE III Semester
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(i)Pick and Answer any One of the following Questions from the given list
1) Check the suitable of given sample of bricks by conducting dimension test
2) Calculate the water absorption of given sample of bricks
3) Calculate the crushing strength of given sample of bricks
4) Determine the effect of efflorescence on given sample of bricks
5) Calculate the fineness of given sample of cement
6) Determine the Standard consistency of given sample of cement
7) Determine the initial setting time of cement
8) Calculate the compressing strength of given cement mortar cubes
9) Calculate the water absorption of given sample of sand
10) Determine the percentage of bulking in given sample of sand by field method
11) Calculate the percentage of voids in given sample of aggregate
12) Calculate the fineness modulus of given sample of aggregate
13) Calculate the percentage of fine silt in given sample of aggregate
331

Course Title: Advanced Surveying Lab Practice Course Code : 18C-308P
Teaching Scheme in Period(L:T:P): 15:0:30 Credits : 1.5
Pre requisites
Basics of chain surveying, compass surveying and levelling
Course Outcomes
CO1 Use and operate Theodolite in the field

CO2 Apply the knowledge of Theodolite in different operations of civil engineering
projects
CO3 Apply the knowledge of principles and purpose of tacheometry in finding out the
constants
CO4 Formulate the setting out of curve by linear and angular methods
Course Content
Unit
No Unit Name Periods
1 Theodolite Surveying and Trigonometric Levelling 15
2 Tacheometric Surveying 15
3 Curve Setting 15
Total 45
Course Contents
UNIT 1
a) Theodolite surveying Duration: 9Periods(L:3.0-P:6.0)
Study of transit Theodolite- Temporary adjustments of Theodolite - Measurement horizontal
angles by reiteration and repetition method - Measurement of vertical angles - Determination of
inaccessible horizontal distance involving two Instrument stations.
b) Trigonometric levelling Duration: 6 Periods(L:2.0-P:4.0)
Determination of height and reduced level of the top and bottom of accessible object - Determination
of distance and elevation of an inaccessible object involving two instrument stations
UNIT 2
a) Tacheometry Duration: 15Periods(L:5.0-
P:10.0)
Determination of constants of Tacheometry - Determination of horizontal distance and elevation by
Stadia Tacheometry
332
Unit 3
Curve setting: Duration: 15Periods(L:5.0-P:10.0)
Setting out a simple curve by chain and tape method - Setting out a simple curve by one Theodolite
and two Theodolite methods.
S.
Experiment Title Key Competency
No
Holding the instrument and fixing on tripod
1 Study of transit Theodolite Identifying parts and their functions
Conducting operations like swinging and transiting
Spreading the tripod on ground properly for easy levelling and
stability
Centering the instrument exactly over station using plumb bob
2 Temporary adjustments and by moving legs
Operating foot screws to level
Eyepiece adjustment
Focusing the object glass
Measurement of horizontal angle by Operating lower and upper clamps and their tangent screws
Repetition method reading the Vernier accurately
3
Reiteration method and Recording the observations at their appropriate positions on
Measurement of bearing page of theodolite field book
Operating vertical circle clamp and its tangent screw
4 Measurement of Vertical angles Recording the observations at their appropriate positions on
page of theodolite field book
Determination of inaccessible
Measuring the horizontal angles accurately and calculating the
5 horizontal distance involving two
distance
instrument stations
1.Determination of height and reduced level of the top and
bottom of accessible object.
5 Trigonometric Levelling - 2.Determination of distance and elevation of an inaccessible
object involving two instrument stations.
8 Field Exercises using Tacheometer  Calculates constants K &C

 Finds the height and reduced level of an object whose
base is accessible
 Finds the height and reduced level of an object whose
base is inaccessible
9 Setting out curves
 Sets out a given simple curve using chain and tape
by
333
(i)Offsets from long chord
(ii) Offsets from successive bisection of chords,
(iii) radial and perpendicular offsets from tangent
and
(iv) Offsets from chord produced
 Sets out a given simple curve using one Theodolite
 Sets out a given simple curve using Two Theodolite
Reference Books
1. Surveying I& II by B.C.Punmia
2. Surveying by S.K. Husain
3. Surveying and levelling I& II by T .PKanetkar
4. Surveying by S.K.Dugal
5. Surveying by R.Agor(Khanna Publisher)
6. Surveying (McGrawhill) by N.N. Basak
7. Higher Surveying by A.M.Chandra (New Age Int)

After the completion of course, the student should be able to
1.1 Know the parts of Theodolite

1.2 Perform temporary adjustment.
1.3 Measurement of horizontal and vertical angles
1.4 Record the observations in the field book.
1.5 Computation of included angles, latitudes and departures from field notes
2.1 Determine constants of a given Tachometer in the field
2.2 Take Tacheometric observations.
2.3 Compute heights and distances from field observations.
2.4 Determine horizontal and vertical distances of accessible objects by using a
Theodolite.
2.5 Determine horizontal and vertical distances of inaccessible objects by using two
Theodolite stations.
334
3.1 Compute the elements of curve.
3.2 Sets out simple curve by chain and tape
3.3 Setting out simple circular curve by one Theodolite and two Theodolite methods.
1. Road survey (at least for 150m) by total station.
2. Conduct a traverse survey of a given plot and find out the area.
3. Prepare the contour maps of the given area in your locality.
4. Set out a centre line of a given building using theodolite.
5. Find out the parameters of a curve for an existing road in your locality
7. Detailed study report on telescope used in surveying instrument.
8. To set out two parallel lines along both the sides of an obstacle by using theodolite
9. To find the distance between two inaccessible points by using trignometric levelling.
10. Make a presentation on refraction error, curvature error caused by telescope
11. Prepare a report on any one of the following. Arial survey, photogrammetric
survey, hydrographic survey, military survey and mine survey.
335
CO
CO4
CO3
CO2
CO1
3
2
2
1
Basic knowledge
PO 1
3
3
2
2
PO 2
3
3
3
3
PO 3
3
3
3
3
PO 4 Engineering Tools

PO 5
336
PO 6
Ethics
PO 7
2
3
2
2

PO 8
3
2
2
1
Communication
PO 9
Lifelong learning
PO 10
Linked PO
1,2,3,4,8,9
1,2,3,4,8,9
1,2,3,4,8,9
1,2,3,4,8,9
MID SEMESTER –I Model Question paper
DCE III Semester
Course Code: 18C-308P Duration:1 hour
Course Name: Advanced Surveying Lab Practice Max.Marks:20 Marks
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pick and Answer any One of the following Questions from given list.
1. Measurement of horizontal angle by Reiteration method
2. Measurement of horizontal angle by repetition method

3. Measure vertical angle by using theodolite.
4. Perform the temporary adjustments of a theodolite in field.
5. Find the RL of the top of a electric pole using a transit theodolite.
337
MID SEMESTER-II Model Question paper
DCE III Semester
Course Name: Advanced Surveying Lab Practice Max.Marks:20 Marks
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pick and Answer any One of the following Questions from given list
1. Determination of Stadia constants.
2. Determination of horizontal distance by Horizontal sight.
3. Determination of Horizontal distance and elevation for inclined sight with staff held
vertical by Stadia hair method.
4. Determination of height of an object whose base is accessible
5. Determination of height of an object whose base is inaccessible
338
DCE III Semester
Course Code:18C-308 P Duration:2 hours
Course Name: Advanced Surveying Lab Practice Max.Marks:40

Marks
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Measurement of horizontal angle by Reiteration method

2. Measurement of horizontal angle by repetition method
3. Measure vertical angle by using theodolite.
4.Determination of height of an object whose base is accessible
5. Determination of Stadia constants.
6. Determination of horizontal distance by Horizontal sight.
7. Determination of Horizontal distance and elevation for inclined sight with staff held vertical by
Stadia hair method.
8. Setting out simple curve by Offsets from Long chord method
9. Setting out simple curve by Rankine’s method using Theodolite.

10. Setting out Compound curves given two Radii by Deflection angle method
339

Course Title: Civil Engineering CAD Lab Course Code : 18C-309P
Practice
Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P): 15:0:30 Credits : 1.5
Pre requisites
Knowledge of basic CAD and advanced CAD ( CAD 2D & 3D) and knowledge of
Building drawing and Building services.
Course Outcomes

CO1 Develop 2D drawings for civil engineering building drawings using CAD
CO2 Apply the concept of layers to show various building services
CO3 Create 2D drawings for various building services using CAD
CO4 Develop 3D drawings and models for civil engineering drawings using CAD
Course Content
Unit
Unit Name Periods
No
1 2-D drawings using CAD Software 15
2 Service drawings using CAD Software 15
3 3-D drawings using CAD Software 15
Total 45
Course Contents
UNIT 1:2-D Drawings using CAD Software Duration: 15 Periods(L: 5 – P: 10)
Draw conventional signs &symbols used in civil engineering drawing –Elevation of fully
panelled door, partly glazed and partly panelled door/window shutter –Section of a load
bearing wall, isolated column footing–Plan and sectional elevation of a dog-legged stair case
–Building Drawings 2BHK building with site plan –Plan of Primary school building –Plan of
Rural Hospital building –Typical floor plan of Apartment consisting G+5 floors
UNIT 2: Service drawings using CAD Software Duration: 15 Periods(L: 5 – P: 10)

Introduction to layers, – Preparation of a simple water supply and sanitary layout –
Preparation of Fire fighting layout for college building –Preparation of foundation plan for a
340
residential building and framed structure –Preparation of Plan and Section of a Manhole and
Septic tank with soak pit –Shallow well Rain water harvesting &Solar water heater for terrace
UNIT 3: 3-D Drawings using CAD Software Duration: 15 Periods(L: 5 – P: 10)

Draw the Isolated Column footing in 3D – load bearing wall foundation in 3D– Single bed
roomed building in 3D– double bed roomed building in 3D.
Reference Books
1) Learn AUTOCAD in a easy way by Sunil K. Pandey,Unitech books
2) Mastering AUTOCAD by George Omura and Brain C.Benton
3) Online manuals and tutorials-AUTODESK

2. www.sketchup.com
3. www.autodesk.in/products/3ds-max/overview

1.1 Draw conventional signs used in civil engineering using CAD
1.2 Draw cross section of Load bearing wall using CAD
1.3 Draw isolated column footing showing different components using CAD
1.4 Draw Plan and section elevation of a dog-legged staircase using CAD
1.5 Prepare drawing Plan, Elevation, section and site plan of 2BHK building using
CAD
1.6 Draw a plan of a primary school using CAD
1.7 Create drawing Plan of Rural Hospital using CAD
1.8 Practice drawing typical floor Plan of Apartment consisting G+5 floors using
CAD
2.1 Create various layers with different properties in CAD

2.2 Create a layer of a simple water supply and sanitary layoutof a building using
CAD
341
2.3 Create a layer showing fire fighting arrangements in a buildingusing CAD
2.4 Create a layer showing the foundation plan for a residential buildingusing
CAD
2.5 Draw plan and section of a manhole and septic tank with a soak pitusing CAD
2.6 Draw shallow well rain water harvesting structureusing CAD
2.7 Draw solar water heater using CAD
3.1 Create 3D model of isolated column footing using CAD

3.2 Develop3D drawing of load bearing wall foundation using CAD
3.3 Prepare the3Ddrawing of a single bed roomed building using CAD
3.4 Prepare the 3D drawing of a double bed roomed building in using CAD
1. Collect information regarding various CAD software available and give a

presentation on them.
2. Visit an Engineering consultancy which deals with building design and drafting
and prepare a report based on the observations made.
3. Collect videos showing 3D models of various buildings.
4. Visit a construction site of a building and match drawings with the execution of
work and give a seminar based on the observations made.
7. Quiz
8. Group discussion
9. Surprise test

Ethics
Basic knowledge
Communication
Lifelong learning
Engineering Tools
Linked PO
342
10
CO1 3 3 3 1 2 2 2,3,4,7,9,10
CO2 3 3 3 1 2 1 2,3,4,7,9,10
CO3 3 3 3 1 2 1 2,3,4,7,9,10
CO4 3 3 3 1 2 2 2,3,4,7,8,10
343
MID SEM-I Examination
DCE III Semester
Course Code:18C-309P Duration:1

Hour
Course Name: Civil Engineering CAD Lab Practice Max.Marks:20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(i)Pick and Answer any One of the following Questions from given lot. 1x20=20M
1) Prepare a drawing showing the section and elevation of a doglegged staircase in CAD
2) Prepare drawing Plan, Elevation, section and site plan of 2BHK building in CAD
3) Create drawing Plan of Rural Hospital in CAD
4) Draw a typical floor plan of Primary School in CAD
5) Draw the typical floor Plan of Apartment (consisting of 4flats for G+5 floors)in CAD
344
MID SEM-II Examination
DCE III Semester
Course Code:18C-309P Duration:1Hour
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Draw Plan, Elevation, section and site plan of given 2BHK building in CAD
2) Create a layer showing the water supply and sanitary layout for the given plan of a
building in CAD
3) Create a layer showing the Firefighting layout for college building in CAD
4) Prepare the foundation plan for the given framed structure in another layer in CAD
5) Using layer show the Plan and Section of a Manhole and Septic tank with soak pit for the
given building in CAD
6) Create another layer showing Shallow well rain water harvesting &Solar water heater on
terrace for the given building in CAD
345
DCE III Semester
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Prepare a drawing showing the section and elevation of a doglegged staircase in CAD
2) Prepare drawing Plan, Elevation, section and site plan of 2BHK building in CAD
3) Create drawing Plan of Rural Hospital in CAD
4) Draw a typical floor plan of Primary School in CAD
5) Draw the typical floor Plan of Apartment (consisting of 4flats for G+5 floors)in CAD
6) Draw Plan, Elevation, section and site plan of given 2BHK building in CAD
7) Create a layer showing the water supply and sanitary layout for the given plan of a
building in CAD
8) Create a layer showing the Firefighting layout for college building in CAD
9) Prepare the foundation plan for the given framed structure in another layer in CAD
10) Using layer show the Plan and Section of a Manhole and Septic tank with soak pit for the
given building in CAD
11) Create another layer showing Shallow well rain water harvesting &Solar water heater on
terrace for the given building in CAD
12) Create drawing of isolated column footing in 3D with given dimensions in CAD
13) Develop drawing of load bearing wall foundation in 3D with given dimensions in CAD
346
Communication Skills and Life Skills
Course Title Communication Skills and Life Skills Lab Course Code 18 C-310 P
Practice
Semester III Course Group Foundation
Teaching 15:0:30 Credits 1.5

Scheme in
Periods- L: T:P
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact 45 Periods
Periods (3 Periods per Week)
Rationale:
This course is designed to impart communication skills and life skills to the students of diploma
which will help them a great deal in personal and professional fronts.
Prerequisites:
This course requires the basic knowledge of vocabulary, grammar, and four language learning skills,
viz. Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course the students will have the ability
to:
Identify the main or the central idea.
Listening Skills Listen for specific details.
Learn the pronunciation.
Learn relevant vocabulary to make introductions.
Communication Skills – I Learn to introduce oneself in formal and informal
situations.
Learn vocabulary and expressions useful for describing
objects
Describe objects
Learn vocabulary to talk about the past

Describe the incidents that happened in the past
Learn the techniques of organising the matter/content for
one-minute speech.
Communication Skills – II Speak fluently and accurately using appropriate body
language.
Think positively.
Develop positive attitude.
Overcome negative attitude.
Life Skills – I
Know the importance of setting goals.
Set goals using SMART features.
347
Know the reasons for a problem.
Learn to overcome problems.
Learn the various techniques to solve the problems.
Learn to make proper decisions on time.
Life Skills – II Think ‘out of the box’.
Learn to be creative.
Think innovatively.
Think critically.
Know how to be a leader.
Learn the qualities of a good leader.
Life Skills – III Learn the qualities of a good team.
Learn the advantages and disadvantages of a team.
Manage time effectively.
Learn various time management techniques.
Learn the importance of prioritisation.
CO-PO Matrix
Course Outcome Linked PO
CO 1 Listening for main idea and specific details R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,7,8,
9,10
CO 2 Introduce oneself and Describe Objects R/U/A 1,2,3,8,9,10
CO 3 Talk about the past and speak fluently for R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8.9,10
one minute
CO 4 Develop positive attitude and set short term R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9,10
and long term goals
CO 5 Learn to solve a problem, make decisions R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9,10
and think innovatively
CO6 Learn to become a good team member and R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9,10
leader
Course Contents:
I. Listening Skills Duration: 9
1. Listening – I
 Digital Camera
 A Dialogue
 Wild Animal / Human conflict
2. Listening – II
 A Recipe
 A Telephone conversation
 An Interview
II. Communication Skills – I Duration:6
3. Introducing Oneself
4. Describing Objects
III. Communication Skills – II Duration:6
5. Talking About the Past
6. Just AMinute
348
IV. Life Skills – I Duration:6
7. Attitude
8. Goal Setting
V. Life Skills – II Duration:9
9. Problem Solving and Decision-Making Skills
10.Critical Thinking & Creativity
VI. Life Skills – III Duration:9
11.Leadership and Teamwork
12.Time Management
 Listening Comprehension
 Seminars
 Paper Presentations
 Lineups for introducing oneself
 Describing persons/places/things
 Picture description
 Role Plays
 Dumb charades
 What is in the bag? (Identifythe objects)
 Games using Online Dictionaries
 Sharing the information using emails, chats and groups
 Just AMinute
 Writing diary events
 Find a solution to the problem
 Making innovative things through recycling
 Creating advertisements
 Five-minute activities on Life Skills
 Watching videos on life skills and making presentations
 Case studies
Evaluation Pattern:
I. Continuous Internal Examination: 60 Marks
a. MidSem- I 20 marks
Syllabus:
i. Listening Skills
ii. Communication Skills - I
b. Mid Sem – II 20 Marks

Syllabus:
i. Communication Skills - II
ii. Life Skills - I
349
c. Internalassessment: 20 marks
i. Seminars: 10 marks
ii. Assignments: 5 marks
iii. Lab record submission: 5 marks
II. Semester End Examination : 40 Marks

a. Listening: 10 Marks
b. JAMor Role plays: 15 Marks
c. Viva Voceon any life skills topic : 15 Marks
References:
 Flint, Chrisand Jamie FlockhartListening: A2 (Collins English for Life: Skills)Collins.

2013
 Brown, Stephen E. English in Everyday Life. McGraw-Hill Education.2008
 Mohanraj, Jayashree. Let Us Hear Them Speak: Developing Speaking-Listening Skills
in English.Sage. 2015
 Susan Earle – Carlin. Q Skills for Success: Listening and Speaking 5: Student Book
with Online Practice. Oxford University Press. 2013
 Kumar, Sanjay and Pushpa Latha. Communication Skills: A Work Book.Oxford
University Press. 2018
 Carnegie, Dale.The Leader in You. Simon & Schuster: 1995
 Carnegie, Dale.The Art of Public Speaking. Prabhat Prakashan. NewDelhi.2013
 Kaye, Martin. Goal Setting (Workbook Included): Goals & Motivation: Introduction
To A Complete & Proven Step-By-Step Blueprint For Reaching Your Goals (Goal
Setting Master Plan 1). Kindle Edition. MK Coaching.2016.
 West, Steven. Critical Thinking Skills: Practical Strategies for Better Decision
making, Problem-Solving and Goal Setting. Kindle Edition.2018
 Tracy, Brain. Goals. Berret-Koehler PublishersInc. San Francisco. 2017
 Tracy, Brain. Master your Time Master your Life. Penguin Random House Inc. New
York. 2017
 Sean Covey .The 7 Habits of Highly Effective Teens. Simon and Schuster,2011
E-Learning Resources:
 http://www.bbc.co.uk/worldservice/learningenglish/youmeus/learnit/learnitv39.shtml
 https://www.examenglish.com/leveltest/listening_level_test.htm
 https://www.oxfordonlineenglish.com/listening?utm_referrer=https%3A%2F
%2Fwww.google.co.in%2F
350
 https://takeielts.britishcouncil.org/prepare-test/free-ielts-practice-tests/listening-
practice-test-1
 https://learnenglish.britishcouncil.org/en/listening
 https://www.cambridgeenglish.org/learning-english/activities-for-learners/?
skill=listening
 https://www.businessenglishsite.com/business-english-listening.html

THIRD SEMESTER18 COMMON-310P
COMMUNICATION SKILLS AND LIFE SKILLS LAB PRACTICE
MID SEM - I
351
Part – A 10 marks
1. Listening Comprehension: 5 X 2 = 10
(Teacher should give the questions before reading the passage given below)
Florence Nightingale was an English social reformer and a statistician, and the
founder of modern nursing. She was born in Florence, Italy, on May 12, 1820.Part of a
wealthy family, Nightingale defied the expectations of the time and pursued what she saw as
her God-given calling of nursing during the Crimean War. She and a team of nurses
improved the unsanitary conditions at a British base hospital, greatly reducing the death
count. Her writings sparked worldwide health care reform, and in 1860 she established St.
Thomas' Hospital and the Nightingale Training School for Nurses. A revered hero of her
time, she died on August 13, 1910, in London. Nightingale came to prominence while serving
as a manager and trainer of nurses during the Crimean War, in which she organized care for
wounded soldiers.She gave nursing a favourable reputation and became an icon of Victorian
culture, especially in the persona of "The Lady with the Lamp" making rounds of wounded
soldiers at night.
Questions:
1. Who was Florence Nightingale?
2. When and where was she born?
3. What does the passage convey?
4. When did she pass away?
5. Where did she establish nursing school?
PART- B 10 Marks
Instruction: Answer any one of the questions in 150 words.How do you introduce yourself
formally in an interview?
3. Describe your polytechnic.
352

COMMUNICATION SKILLS AND LIFE SKILLS LAB PRACTICE
MID SEM - II
Part – A 10 marks
Instruction: Answer any one of the following questions in 150 words.
1. Describe how you have spent your summer vacation.
2. What are the features of good JAM presentation? What precautions do you take before
speaking for one minute on the given topic?
Part – B 10 marks
Instruction: Answer any one of the following questions in 150 words.
3. What is positive attitude? Give examples of positive attitude from your life.
4. Mention your long term goal with SMART features. How do you achieve it?
353
COMMUNICATION SKILLS AND LIFE SKILLS Lab PRACTICE
SEMESTER END EXAM
Part – A 10 marks
1. Listen to the following passage and answer the questions give below it. 5 X 2 = 10
(Teacher should give the questions before reading the passage)
Answer the following questions after teacher reads the following paragraph.
Prof. Jayashankar was born to Mahalaxmi and Laxmi Kantha Rao on 6th August 1934
in Akkampet village, Warangal District. He was a Doctorate in Economics. He worked as
a Vice-Chancellor of Kakatiya University. He worked in many capacities. He was
popularly known as “Pedda Sir.” He inspired many a people to fight for the cause of
Telangana Statehood.
At the age of twelve, Jayashankar refused to sing songs in praise of the Nizam and
insisted on singing VandeMataram instead. As an intermediate student, in 1952, he
protested against State Reorganization Committee plan to merge with the Andhra Rashtra.
He took an active part in the agitations of “Non – Mulki go back“ and “ Idli Sambar go
back.” He took an active part in Telangana separate statehood agitation in 1969 too. In
1999, Prof. Jayashankar started the Telangana Development Forum in the USA which
helped to propagate the injustice, discrimination and exploitation meted out to Telangana
region and people in the aspects of employment, funds and water resources. He
relentlessly put his efforts to end the struggle of Telangana people. He passed away on
June 21, 2011. He was 76 years old at the time of his death.
Questions:
1. Where was Prof. Jayashankar born?
2. Why didn’t he sing songs in praise of the Nizam?
3. Why did Jayashankar start the Telangana Development Forum in USA?
4. What are the two agitations in which he took an active part?
5. What is the meaning of ‘relentlessly’?
Part – B 15 marks
2. JAM / Role Plays
Part – C 15 marks
3. Viva Voce on Life Skills topics
354
IV SEMESTER
355
O Code dits
Instruction Tot Continuous Internal Semester End Examination
L T P peri Mid Mid Inter Max Min Total Min
ods Sem Sem nal Mark Mar Mark Marks
/se 1 2 Evalu s ks s for
mes ation passing
ter including
internal
Advanced
18C-
1 Engineering 3 1 - 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
401F
Mathematics
18C- Strength of
2 Materials 3 1 - 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
402C
18C Hydraulics 3 1
3 - 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
403C
18C- Quantity
4 Surveying 3 1 - 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
404C
Irrigation
18C- Engineering
5 3 1 - 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
405C
18C- Civil Engineering

6 Drawing 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
406P
18C-
7 Hydraulics Lab 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
407P
18C- Modern Surveying
8 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
408P Lab
18C- Civil Engineering
9 Workshop 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
409P
Advanced
18C-
10 Communications 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
410P
and Life Skills
Skill Up gradation
0 0 7 105 2.5 0 0 Rubrics -- - 0
Activities
20 5 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 170 1000 425
356
ADVANCED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
Course Title :Advanced Engineering Mathematics Course Code :18C-401F

SEMESTER : IV Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme ( L : T : P ) : 45 :15: 00 ( in Credits : 3 Credits
periods) )
Pre requisites:
This course requires the knowledge of Engineering Mathematics at Diploma first year level
and Applied Engineering Mathematics at Diploma 3rd Semester level.
Course Outcomes:
CO 1 Solve simple Homogeneous Linear Differential Equations
CO 2 Solve simple Non-Homogeneous Linear Differential Equations
CO 3 Express f(x) as a Fourier series in the given interval
CO 4 Express f(x) as a Fourier Half-Range Cosine series and Sine series
CO 5 Find Laplace transforms of simple functions
CO 6 Find Inverse Laplace transforms of simple functions and solve Linear Differential
Equations using Laplace Transformations.
Course Contents:
Unit – I Duration: 05 Periods (L:3.75 –

T:1.25)
Homogeneous Linear Differential equations with constant coefficients
Homogenous linear differential equations with constant coefficients of order two and
higher with emphasis on second order.
Unit – II Duration: 15 Periods (L:11.25 – T:3.75)
Non-Homogeneous Linear Differential equations with constant coefficients

Non-homogenous linear differential equations with constant coefficients of the form
f(D)y = X, where X is in the form k(a constant ) ,e ax, sin ax, cos ax, xn, (n= 1,2,3)
Complimentary Function (CF), Particular Integral (PI) and General Solution (GS).
357
Unit-III Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)
Fourier series
Orthogonality of trigonometric functions, Representation of a function in Fourier series over

the interval
c , c  2 
, Euler’s formulae, sufficient conditions for existence of Fourier
series for a function. Even, Odd functions and Fourier series over the Interval (0,2 π) and (-
π , π)
Unit – IV Duration: 05 Periods (L:3.75 –

T:1.25)
Fourier Half-range series
Representation of a function as Fourier Half-range Sine series and Cosine series over the
interval (0, π)
Unit – V Duration: 10Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
Laplace Transformations:
Definition, sufficient conditions for existence of Laplace Transform, Laplace Transform of

elementary functions, linearity property, Change of scale property, First shifting theorem ,
multiplication by tn, division by t, Laplace Transform of derivatives and integrals, unit
step function, Laplace Transform of second shifting theorem
Unit – VI Duration: 15 Periods (L:11.25 –

T:3.75)
Inverse Laplace transforms:
Inverse Laplace transforms- shifting theorems and change of scale property,

multiplication by sn and division by s –Inverse Laplace Transform using partial fractions
– convolution theorem (no proof) – application of Laplace Transformations to solve
ordinary differential equations of second order with initial conditions.
Recommended Books:
1. Higher Engineering Mathematics, B.S.Grewal .
2. Laplace Transforms - Murray R. Spigel .
3. Ordinary Differential Equations – R. S. Aggarwal.
4. Fourier Series – A.R. Vasishtha and Gupta.
Suggested E-Learning references:
358
2. E-books:www.mathebook.net
Unit-I
1.0 Solve Homogeneous linear differential equations with constant coefficients in

engineering situations
1.1 Solve Differential equations of the type (aD 2 +bD + c)y = 0 when the roots of the auxiliary
equation are real and different, real and repeated, complex.
1.2 Solve the higher order homogeneous Lineardifferential equations with constant coefficients.
Unit-II
2.0 Solve Non Homogeneous linear differential equations with constant coefficients in
engineering situations
2.1 Explain the concept of complementary function, particular Integral and general solution
of a differential equation.
2.2 Solve nth order differential equation of the type f(D) y = X where f(D) is a polynomial of
secondorder and X is a function of the form k, eax ,Sinax, Cosax, xn.
2.3 Solve simple problems on the above types of 2.2
Unit-III
3.0 Understand the Fourier series expansion of functions
3.1 Define the orthogonality of functions in an interval.
3.2 Define Fourier series of a function in the interval (C, C+2 π ¿ and write the Euler’s
formulae for determining the Fourier coefficients.
3.3 Write sufficient conditions for the existence of Fourier series for a function.
3.4 Write Fourier series of simple functions in the range (0, 2 π ¿ and (- π , π ¿.
3.5 Write Fourier series for even and odd functions in the interval (- π , π ¿
3.6 Solve simple problems on even and odd functions in the interval. (0,2 π ¿∧¿ (- π , π ¿
Unit- IV
4.0 Understand the Half – Range Fourier series expansion of functions
4.1 Write Half – Range Cosine series of a function in the range (0 , π) .
4.2 Write Half – Range Sine series of a function in the range (0 , π) .
4.3 Solve simple problems on Half – Range Cosine and Sine series over the interval (0 , π)
359
Unit-V
5.0 Understand Laplace transforms
5.1 Write the definition of Laplace Transform and Laplace transform of standard functions.
5.2 Explain the sufficient conditions of existence of Laplace Transform.
5.3 Write the properties of Laplace Transform – Linearity property, First shifting theorem,
Change of Scale property.
5.4 Solve simple problems using the above properties.

t
n f (t ) n
5.5 Write formulae for Laplace transform oft f (t) , , f ( t ) ,∫ f ( u ) du
t 0
in terms of Laplace transform of. f (t)
5.6 Solve simple problems using the above formulae.
5.7 Define unit step function and write the Laplace Transform of unit step function.
5.8 Write Second shifting theorem.
Unit-VI
6.0 Use Laplace transforms and Inverse Laplace transforms to solve differential
equation in engineering problems
6.1 Define inverse Laplace Transform and write inverse Laplace Transforms of standard
functions.
6.2 Solve simple problems on Inverse Laplace Transforms.
6.2 Write Shifting theorems and Change of scale property of inverse Laplace Transform.
6.3 Solve simple problems on 6.2
6.4 Write inverse Laplace Transforms corresponding to Laplace Transform of the functions
t
f (t ) n
t n f (t), , f ( t ) ,∫ f ( u ) du
t 0
6.5 Solve simple problems on 6.4
6.6 Define convolution of two functions and state convolution theorem.
6.7 Solve simple problems on Convolution theorem.
360
6.8 Use Laplace and inverse Laplace Transforms to solve simple differential equations of
Second order.
2.Quiz
3. Group discussion
4. Surprise tests
5. Seminars
6. Home Assignments.
Communication
Ethics
Linked PO
Team work Individual and
learning Lifelong
knowledge Basic
and practice Experiments
sustainability Environment &

Tools Engineering
society Engineer and

Knowledge Discipline
10
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
361
Internal Evaluation
Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks

Questions each question
Test Units Marks
Assignments - 5
Seminars - 5
Total 60
MID SEM-I EXAM
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
362
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed ¼ of a
page,1page and 2 pages respectively
Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks

Questions each question

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q5,Q Q9(b), Q13(b),

V
6 Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q7,Q Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI
8 Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Code: 18Common-401F
MID SEM –I, MODEL PAPER, IV SEMESTER
363
PART-A
1. Write the General solution of (aD2+bD+c)y = 0, whose roots of auxiliary equation are real and
distinct.
2. Find the roots of auxiliary equation of the differential equation ( D 2 +2 D+ 1¿ y=0
3. Find the Particular Integral of( D 2−4 D+1 ) y=e3 x

4. Find the P.I of ( D 2−16 ) y=sin 4 x
PART-B
5 a) Solve (D2 + 3D – 54)y = 0
Or
5 b) Solve(D2 +16)y = 0
6 a) Solve( D 2 +4 D+ 4) y =e 2 x
Or
6 b) Find P.I of ( D 3 + D) y = sin2x
PART C
7 a) Solve (D3 – 2D2 – 4D + 8) y = 0
Or
7 b) Solve (D3 – D2 – D +1)y = 0
8 a) Solve ( D 2 +36) y =sin2 x
Or
8 b) Solve :( D 2+3 D+2) y = x 2
Code: 18 Common-401F
364
MID SEM –II, MODEL PAPER, IV SEMESTER
TIME: 1: 00 Hours Max.
Marks: 20 PART-A
1. Define periodic function and give one example
2. Define Fourier series of the function f(x) in the interval (0, 2 π )
3. Write Half-range sine series of f(x) in the interval (0, π ¿
4. Find a 0for f(x) =e x in 0¿ x <π
PART-B

5 a) If f(x) = x 2 in (0, 2 π ¿, then find the value of an in Fourier series of f(x)
Or
5 b) If f(x) =|x| in (- π , π ¿, then find the value of a1 in Fourier series of f(x)
6 a).Find the value of an in half-range Cosine series for the function f(x) = ex in (0, π ¿
Or
6 b) Obtain the Fourier Half – Range Sine series for f(x) =( π−x ¿ ∫ h einterval(0 , π)
PART C

7 a) Obtain the Fourier series for f(x) = x in the interval 0 ¿ x <2 π
Or
7 b) Find the Fourier series for f(x) =( x−x 2 ¿ in the interval (- π , π ¿. Hence show that
1 1 1 1 π2
- + - + ……….+ =
1 2 22 3 2 4 2 12
8 a) Express f(x) = πx – x2 as a half-range Sine series in (0, π ¿
Or
8 b) Find the half –range cosine series for the function f(x) = x 2 in the interval (0, π ¿
365
18 Common-401F

SEMESTER END EXAM MODEL PAPER
IV SEMESTER EXAMINATION
PART-A

1. Find the roots of auxiliary equation of the differential equation ( D 2 + 4 D ) y=0 .
2. Define Fourier Series for the function f(x) in the interval ( c, c+2 π ¿
3. Find the Particular Integral of( D 2−4 D+1 ) y=e x
4. Find L ( e 2t + cos 3 t )
5. Find L ( t+5 cos h t )
6. State the First Shifting theorem of Laplace Transforms.
7. Find L
−1
( s−31 + s +s 4 )
2
8. Find L
−1
( 2 s+1 5 )
PART-B

9a) Solve(D +D + 1) y = 4e3x
2
Or
9 b) Find L ( tCos 3 t )
10 a) Find Half Range Sine Series of f(x) = x in ( 0 , π )

Or
10 b) Find L
−1
( s +6s +1s−7 )
2
20−4 s
11 a) If L{f(t)} = 2 , find L{f(3t)}
s −4 s +20
Or
∞
11 b) Find ∫ t . e−2 t sin 3 tdt using Laplace Transform Technique
0
366
1−cos at
12 a) Show that L−1 ¿ =
a2
or
s
12 b) Find L
−1
( (s+ 2)2 +4 )
PART C
13 a) Solve:(D2 + D -2) y = x + sinx
Or
13 b) Find L[ t et sin 3 t ]
2
as a Fourier series in the interval (−π , π )
14 a) Expand f(x) = x
Or
s
14 b) Find L
−1
( ( s +1 ) (s 2 +1)
2
)
15 a) Find L ( sin 3 tt.Cost )
Or
15 b) Evaluate
L
{∫ }
0
sin t
t
dt
1
16 a) Find L
−1
( ( s +1 ) ( s+2) )
using Convolution theorem .
Or
16 b) Solve the differential equation y’’– 2y’– 8y = Sint , when y (0) = 3, y’ (0) = 6 by
Laplace Transform method
367
Course Title: Strength of Materials Course Code 18C-402C
Semester IV Semester Course Group Core
Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P) 45:15:0 Credits 3
Methodology Lecture+Assignments Total Contact Periods 60 Periods
Pre requisites
Knowledge of Engineering Mechanics
Course Outcomes
CO1 Develop Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams for different types of beams
Apply Euler’s formula and Rankine’s formula for columns to arrive at critical load over the
CO2
column
Apply geometrical properties of beam to calculate strength parameters like flexural stress and
CO3
shear stress in beams for different loading conditions.
CO4 Calculate the capacity of circular shafts in generating Power according to sectional properties.
CO5 Calculate the deformation (Slope &deflection) of Beams by Double Integration Method
Analyse the beams to calculate slope and deflection using Macaulay’s method and Moment area
CO6
method.

Unit
No Unit Name Periods Questions to be set for SEE
R U A
Shear force and Bending
I 12 Q9(a) Q13(a)
Moment Q1
II Columns and Struts 08
Theory of simple
III 10
bending Q10(a) Q14(a)
Q2
A) Shear stress in beams 05
IV
B) Torsion 05 Q4
Q9(b),Q11(a), Q13(b),Q15(a),
Deflection of beams-I 08 Q5,Q6 Q11(b) Q15(b)
V
Q3 Q10(b),Q12(a),
Q14(b),Q16(a),
Deflection of beams-II 12 Q7,Q8 Q12(b)
Q16(b)
VI
8
Total 60 8 8
Course Contents
368
UNIT - 1: Shear Force and Bending Moment Duration: 12 Periods (L: 9.0 – T:3.0)
Concepts of S.F. and B.M.-Sign Convention - Relation between Rate of Loading, S.F. and
B.M -S.F. and B.M.diagrams for Cantilevers, Simply Supported beams, Overhanging beams
subjected to point loads and uniformly distributed loads - Maximum B.M and maximum
S.F in beams for various loads- position and significance of points of contra flexure
UNIT - 2: Columns and struts Duration: 08 Periods(L: 6.0 – T:2.0)

Importance and Calculation of Least Moment of Inertia, radius of gyration and
slenderness ratio for Solid circular, Hollow circular, Rectangular, I sections and Built up
sections – Compression Members-Types and Classification - Short and Long columns,
failures - Different end conditions - Effective length - calculation of safe load on columns
with axial load only by Euler’s and Rankine’s formula - Limitation of Euler’s formula
UNIT - 3: Theory of Simple Bending Duration: 10 Periods(L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
Bending stress in beams :Introduction –Simple Bending Bending Stress in beams –

Bending Equation (Derivation not required) – Neutral Axis - Section Modulus, Flexural
Rigidity, Modulus of Section, Radius of curvature, Moment of Resistance – Calculation of
bending stresses in Symmetrical and Unsymmetrical sections-practical applications.
UNIT – 4(A):Shear stress in beams Duration: 5 Periods (L:4 – T:1)

Shear Stress distribution diagrams for various symmetrical beam sections such as
rectangular, solid circular and I & T sections - Calculation of shear stress in different layers
of a beam for rectangular and I section (Derivation of formula not required) – Calculation
of Maximum shear stress in rectangular, circular and I sections -problems
UNIT- 4(B): Torsion Duration: 05 Periods (L:4 – T:1)
Introduction – Theory of torsion – Assumptions – Torsion formula (Derivation not
required) – Solid and hollow circular shafts subjected to pure torsion – Simple problems
– Shear stress distribution in shafts - Power transmitted by circular shafts – Problems
UNIT - 5: Deflection of Beams -I Duration: 08 Periods(L: 6.0 – T:2.0)
369
Introduction – Deflected profiles of beams with different support conditions – Strength
and stiffness of beams – Relation between curvature, slope and deflection - Slope and
deflection for simply supported beams under symmetrical loading – Slope and deflection
in cantilever beams under point load and udl- Double integration method – Derivation of
standard cases – Problems.
UNIT - 6: Deflection of Beams –II Duration: 12 Periods(L: 9.0 – T:3.0)
a) Macaulay‟s method for slope and deflection–Simply supported beams under

concentrated and uniformly distributed loads – Problems.
b) Mohr‟s theorems for slope and deflection – Cantilevers and simply supported
beams with symmetrical loading – Problems.
Reference Books
1. Strength of Materials by S. Ramamurtham.
2. S.M and T.S by B.C. Punmia.
3. S.M and T.S by N. Srinivasulu.
4. Introduction to Strength of Materials by D.S. Prakash Rao.
5. Strength of Materials (A practical approach) Vol–I by D.S. PrakashRao.
6. Strength of Materials by R.K. Bansal
7. S.M. and T.S. by Y. Ram Mohan Rao
8. Strength of Materials by L.S. Negi
9. Mechanics of Solids by E P Popov
10. Elements of strength of materials by Timoshenko
1.1 Explain terms: a) Shear Force b) Bending Moment

1.2 Explain the sign conventions used to calculate Shear Force and Bending Moment
Reference Books Suggested E-learning references Suggested Learning Outcomes
370
1.3 Explain the relationship between the rate of loading, shear force and bending moment
1.4 Determine Shear Force and Bending Moment on Cantilevers, Simply Supported Beams and
Overhanging beams for simple cases of loading (Point Load, Uniformly distributed load)
analytically Determine maximum SF and maximum BM for various loading conditions in
beams.
1.5 Describe the procedures for sketching the Shear Force Diagrams (SFD) and Bending
Moment Diagrams (BMD)
1.6 Sketch Shear Force Diagrams (SFD) and Bending Moment Diagrams (BMD) for Cantilever
and Simply Supported Beams
1.7 Determine point of contraflexure and explain its significance
2.1 List different types of compression members
2.2 Define :
i) Buckling/Critical/Crippling Load
ii) Actual length
iii) Slenderness ratio
iv) Least radius of gyration
v) Safe load
vi) Factor of safety
2.3 State the classification of columns based on slenderness ratio OR length and lateral
dimensions
2.4 Calculate least radius of gyration for solid circular, hollow circular, square, rectangular
sections, I-sections and built up sections
2.5 List different end conditions for a column
2.6 Find the effective lengths of columns for different end conditions
2.7 Calculate the slenderness ratio for a given column
2.8 State Euler’s formula for crippling load of a column (derivation not required)
2.9 Solve problems on limitations of Euler’s formula
2.10 Calculate crippling and safe loads on a column with simple and built up sections using
Euler‟s formula
2.11 Explain the validity of Rankine‟s formula for short and long columns using basic Rankine‟s
empirical formula
2.12 Calculate crippling or safe loads on a column with simple and built up section using
Rankine‟s formula
371
2.13 Calculate the ratio of strengths of hollow and solid circular columns loaded under same
conditions
2.14 Design a hollow circular cross section of a column for the given data
2.15 Calculate the ratio of strengths of a section using Euler‟s and Rankine‟sformulae under
same conditions
3.1 Explain simple / pure bending
3.2 Define terms a) Neutral layer b) Neutral axis c) Radius of curvature d) Moment of
Resistance e) Modulus of section f) Flexural rigidity
3.3 State the assumptions made in the theory of simple bending.
3.4 Sketch and explain bending stress distribution across the depth of the beam for any cross
section
3.5 Obtain the formula for section modulus of (solid and hollow sections): a) Square Section
b) Rectangular Section c) Circular Section
3.6 Calculate section modulus based on above formulae
3.7 Solve problems on theory of simple bending for symmetrical and unsymmetrical sections
to calculate Moment of Resistance, Design of cross section.
4.1 State formula for calculation of Shear Stress in any layer of a cross section
4.2 Draw shear distribution diagram across:
i) Rectangular section
ii) Solid circular section
iii) Symmetrical I – section
iv) T – section
4.3 Determine shear stress at any layer and draw shear stress distribution diagram across
: i) Rectangular section
ii) Symmetrical I - section
4.4 Determine the maximum shear stress in circular, rectangular and square and I sections
4.5 State pure Torsion
4.6 State the assumptions made in the pure Torsion
4.7 State the formula for pure Torsion of a circular shaft
4.8 Solve the problems on Torsion applying Torsion formula
4.9 Explain terms: i) Polar modulus ii) Torsional rigidity
4.10 State the formula for power transmitted by the circular shaft
4.11 Solve the problems on power transmitted by the solid and hollow circular shafts
4.12 Computes the dimensions of a solid / hollow circular shaft based on strength
372
5.1 Draw the deflected shapes of different beams
5.2 Define:
i. Elastic curve
ii. Slope
iii. Deflection
5.3 Distinguish between strength and stiffness of a beam.
5.4 Derive relation between slope, deflection and radius of curvature
5.5 Derive the equations for maximum slope and deflection by double integration method
for:
(i) Cantilever beams with point loads and uniformly distributed loads (standard cases).
(ii) Simply supported beams with central point load, uniformly distributed load
throughout and their combination.
(iii)Calculate the maximum slope and deflection in simply supported and cantilever
beams using the above formulae
6.1 Explain Macaulay’s method (for Simply supported beams) to find the slope and deflections
6.2 Compute the maximum slope and deflection for Simply supported beam carrying point
loads and uniformly distributed loads by Macaulay‟s method
6.3 Define:
i) Mohr’s theorem-I
ii) Mohr’s theorem-II
6.4 Derive formulae for maximum slope and deflection in standard cases (simply supported
and cantilever beams) by moment area method using Mohr‟s theorems
6.5 Compute the maximum slope and deflections for Cantilever and Simply Supported Beams
by Mohr‟s theorem-I and Mohr‟s theorem-II (moment area method)
1. Visit the Institute’s Library / internet center and list the books/journals/ e-books and any other
resources available on the topics suggested by the teacher.
2. Prepare references consisting name ofthe author, title of the book/paper, publication and place
of publication, volume No.s, pagenumbers and year of publication on the following
topics
i)Beam column joints.
ii) Mohr’s theorem
iii) Bending Test on Wood and Mild steel.
373
Engineering Tools
Ethics
Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge
Communication
Linked PO
CO1 1 3 2 2 2 1,2,4,8,9
CO2 2 1 2 1 1,2,3,9,10
CO3 1 3 1 2 2 1,2,3,9,10
CO4 2 2 2 2 2,3,4,10
CO5 2 2 2 1 1,2,3,10
CO6 2 3 2 1 2 2 1,2,3,4,8,10
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks

Assignment 5
s
Seminars 5
Total 60
QUESTION PAPER
PATTERN FOR MID SEMESTER EXAMS

question
374
MID SEM-I EXAM
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)

question

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
375
DCE IV semester

Course Name: STRENGTH OF MATERIALS Max.Marks:20 Marks
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PART-A
Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark4x1 = 4 Marks
1. Show the SFD and BMD for a cantilever beam of span ‘l’ with a point load of ‘W’ at the end
indicating Maximum values.
2. Show the SFD and BMD for a simply supported beam of span ‘l’ with a UDL of ‘w kN/m’
through out the span indicating Maximum values.
3. State any three assumptions made in Euler’s theory of columns.
4. State different end conditions of columns.
PART-B
Answer TWO questions. Each question carries THREE marks2x 3 = 6 Marks
5(a). A simply supported beam of span 6m is carrying a point load of 30kN at a distance of 4m
from LHS and a UDL of12kN/m over entire span. Calculate maximum Bending moment and
draw BMD.
(OR)
5(b). A cantilever of span 6m carries two point loads of 10kN and 20kN at a distance of 1m and 4m
from fixed support. Draw BMD
6(a). A rectangular column of cross section 200mm x 300mm, 5m long is fixed at one end and
hinged at the other. Determine the Euler’s critical load on the column if E = 200 kN/mm 2.
(OR)
6(b). A solid circular section of diameter 150mm is used as a column of length 4m. It is fixed on
both ends. Determine the Rankine’s buckling load. Given fc = 500 N/mm 2 and a = 1/1600
PART-C
Answer TWO questions. Each question carries FIVE marks 2x 5 = 10 Marks
7(a). A cantilever beam of span 6m is subjected to 2 point loads 10kN, 15kN at a distance of 2m,
6m from fixed end. In addition to them it carries a udl of 5kN/m throughout the span. Draw
SFD and BMD.
(OR)
376
7(b). A 7m span beam is simply supported between 5m and is overhanged for a length of 2m on
right side. It carries 2 point loads 25kN and and 18kN acting at 3m and 7m from LHS. Draw
SFD and BMD.
8(a). A solid circular cast iron column whose diameter is 200mm is 4m long. It is fixed at both
ends. Calculate the ratio of Euler’s and Rankine’s critical load. fc = 500N/mm 2 and a =
1/1600
(OR)
8(b) A straight bar 3m long is used as a strut with both ends fixed. When an axial load of 8 kN is
applied the bar is found to buckle. What should be the diameter of rod. Take fc = 330 N/mm 2
and a = 1/1750
377
DCE IV semester

Course Name: STRENGTH OF MATERIALS Max.Marks:20 Marks
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PART-A
Answer ALL questions, Each Question carries ONE mark 4x1 = 4 Marks
1. Define Neutral axis of the section and state where it lies for any section.
2. Define Section Modulus and state its units.
3. Define pure torsion and write the units for twisting moment.
4. Define torsion and write any three practical examples of application of torsion.
PART-B
Answer TWO questions. Each question carries THREE marks 2x 3 = 6 Marks
5(a). A steel rod 100mm diameter is to be bent to a circular shape. Find the minimum radius of
curvature to which it should be bent so that stress in the steel may not exceed 120 N/mm 2.
Take E = 2 x 105 N/mm2.
(OR)
5(b). A steel flat of size 120mm wide and 25mm thick is bent into a circular arc of radius 5m. Find
the maximum stress induced and the bending moment which can produce this stress. Take E =
2 x 105 N/mm2.
6(a). A steel shaft having a modulus of rigidity as 80 kN/mm 2 is twisted by 1 degree 30 minutes in
a length of 2m. The shaft is solid circular with diameter 80mm. Determine the Torque
required.
(OR)
6(b). A hollow steel shaft has 120mm outer diameter and 15mm thickness. When transmitting
power at 150 r.p.m the angle of twist per metre length was one degree. Find the power
transmitted by the shaft. Take G = 80 kN/mm2.
PART-C
7(a). A rectangular beam 300mm deep is simply supported over a span of 3m. What “udl” the
beam can carry, if the bending stress is not to exceed 120 MPa? Take I = 80 x 10 6 mm4.
(OR)
378
7(b). A cast iron beam of symmetrical I-section with top flange 150mm x 10mm, bottom flange
150mm x 10mm and web 280mm x 10mm is simply supported over a span of 6m. If the
permissible bending stress is 110 N/mm 2, what uniformly distributed load can be safely
applied on the beam?
8(a). A solid steel shaft is to transmit a torque of 1x10 8 N.mm. If the shearing stress does not
exceed 45 N/mm2, Find the minimum diameter of the shaft.
(OR)
8(b). A hollow circular shaft 120mm external diameter has to transmit 120 kW power at 200 r.p.m.
The angle of twist on a length of 3m was observed to be 0.85 degree. Find the thickness of the
shaft. Take G = 80 kN/mm2
379
DCE IV semester
IV Semester End Examination
Course Name: STRENGTH OF MATERIALS Max.Marks: 40 Marks
PART-A
Answer all questions. Each Question carries one mark 8x1 = 8 Marks
1. What are the sign conventions to calculate Shear Force and Bending Moment in beams.
2. Define Section Modulus and state its units.
3. Write the equations for max. Slope and max. Deflection of a simply supported beam
subjected to a total u.d.l of W over its whole span.
4. Differentiate between Short column and Long column.
5. Define slope and deflection.
6. Define Elastic curve of a beam and show the deflected shapes of
(i) Simply supported and

(ii) Cantilever beams.
7. State the relation between curvature, slope and deflection of a loaded beam and explain the
terms.
8. Differentiate between strength and stiffness of a beam.
PART-B
Answer FOUR questions.Each question carries three marks. 4 x 3 = 12 Marks
9(a). A cantilever beam of span 6m is subjected to 2 point loads 20kN and 30kN at a distance of
3m and 6m from fixed end. Draw SFD and BMD for the beam and summarize maximum
values.
(OR)
9(b). A cantilever beam of span 5m carries a u.d.l at the rate of w/m. The section of the beam is
100mm x 200mm and the value of E of the beam material is 2 x 10 4 mm4. Determine the
value of ‘w’ if the maximum deflection is 8mm.
10(a). A simply supported beam of symmetrical section 300mm deep and I = 120 x 10 6 mm4 carries
a UDL of 15 kN/m throughout the span. Calculate maximum span of the beam if the
maximum bending stress is not to exceed 160 N/mm2
(OR)
380
10(b). A cantilever beam of span 3m carries a point load of 30kN at its free end. Calculate the slope
and deflection at the free ends using Mohr’s theorems. Take EI = 4000 kN-m 2.
11(a). A simply supported beam is 6m long, 200mm wide and 350mm deep. Calculate the maximum
central point load the beam can carry so that the maximum deflection does not exceed 10mm.
(OR)
11(b). A cantilever of span 3m carries a UDL of 10kN/m over a length of 2m from fixed support.
Calculate the deflection at the free end.
12(a). A simply supported beam of span ‘L’ carries a point load of ‘W’ at the centre of beam. Derive
a formula to calculate the maximum slope in the beam. Use Moment Area method.
(OR)
12(b). Write the boundary conditions to attain maximum slope and maximum deflection for the
following cases.
a) Simply supported beam with a UDL of ‘w’ kN/m acting throughout the span ‘L’.
b) Cantilever beam of span ‘L’with a point load ‘W’ at the free end.
PART-C
Answer FOUR questions. Each Question carries five marks 4 x 5 = 20 Marks
13(a) A simply supported beam of span 5m is carrying a point load of 40kN at a distance of 2m
from LHS and a UDL of 10 kN/m over entire span. Calculate maximum Bending moment
and draw BMD.
(OR)
13(b) Derive a formula to calculate maximum slope for a simply supported beam with concentrated
load at the centre, using Double integration method.
14(a) A symmetrical I-section with flange dimensions 180mm x 10mm and web 12 x 250mm is
used as a beam having overall depth 270mm, to resist a Shear Force of 60kN. Find the
maximum Shear stress developed in the beam.
(OR)
14(b) A RSJ is freely supported over a span of 5m carrying central concentrated load of 20 kN. Find
the position and magnitude of maximum deflection. Use Maculay’s method. E = 200
kN/mm2, I = 73.3 x 106 mm4.
15(a) Derive a formula to calculate maximum slope for a simply supported beam with a udl of ‘w’
kN/m throughout the span, using Double integration method.
(OR)
15(b) Derive a formula to calculate maximum slope and maximum deflection for a cantilever beam
with a point load ‘W’ at the free end, using Double integration method.
381
16(a) A cantilever of span 6m carries a UDL of 10kN/m for a length of 4m from fixed end and a
point load of 12 kN at the free end. Determine maximum slope and deflection at the free end
by Moment area method. Given E = 200 kN/mm2, Ixx = 32 x 106 mm4.
(OR)
16(b) A I-section is used as a simply supported beam of span 5m to carry two point loads of
20kN each at a distance of 1.5m from both the supports. Find the position and magnitude of
maximum deflection. Take E= 2 x 105 N/mm2, I=73.33 x 106 mm4. Use Maculay’s method
382
Course Title: Hydraulics Course Code : 18C-403C
Semester: IV Semester Course Group : Core
Teaching Scheme in Periods(L:T:P): 45 :15 :0 Credits : 3
Pre requisites
Course Outcomes
CO1 Calculate fluid pressure using pressure measuring devices and compute the forces on immersed
plane surfaces.
CO2 Apply the general principles of flow of liquids and Bernoulli's theorem and its applications in
solving problems on discharge and pressure measurements using flow measuring devices.
CO3 Determine the discharge and coefficients of discharge for Orifices and Mouthpieces, Notches and
Weirs
CO4 Compute the major loss and various minor losses of head in flow through pipes.
CO5 Calculate the flow parameters and design the most economical channel sections.
CO6 Explain the working principles of pump, Turbines and layout of a typical Hydro-electric power
station.

No
R U A
1 Properties of fluids and
Measurement of fluid 10
pressure Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
2 Flow of fluids 10
3 Flow through orifices,

mouthpieces, notches and 10
weirs Q4 Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
4 Flow through pipes 10
5 Open channel flow

10 Q9(b), Q13(b),
Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
6 Pumps, turbines and
10 Q10(b), Q14(b),
hydroelectric power plants Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8
Course Contents
UNIT 1: Properties of fluids and Measurement of fluid pressure:
Duration: 10Periods (L:7.5 – T:2.5)
a) Scope and importance of hydraulics in Civil Engineering
383
b) Fluids - classification - Properties – Formulae- units
c) Pressure- types – relationship - Pressure measuring Instruments
d) Total pressure and Centre of pressure on plane surface immersed in liquid -
Numerical problems
e) Practical Applications- lock gates (Description only)
UNIT 2 : Flow of fluids Duration:10Periods(L:7.5 – T:2.5)

a) Types of Flow - Rate of flow or discharge-continuity equation- Numerical problems
b) Total energy of liquid in motion – Bernoulli's theorem (without proof) - Numerical
Problems.
c) Applications of Bernoulli’s theorem – Numerical problems
UNIT 3: Flow through Orifices, Mouth Pieces, Notches and weirs

a) Orifice-types of Orifices- Large Rectangular Orifice- - Numerical Problems.
b) Mouth piece-Types of Mouth pieces
c) Notch - types of notches - rectangular, triangular and trapezoidal notches-Numerical
problems
d) Weirs - types of weirs - Numerical problems - (Derivation of formulae not required)
UNIT4: Flow thorough pipes Duration :10Periods(L:7.5 – T:2.5)

a) Frictional loss in pipes - Chezy’s formula and Darcy's formula (without proof) –
Numerical problems.
b) Types of Minor Losses
c) Hydraulic gradient and total energy line.
d) Discharge through parallel pipes and compound pipes (series) connected to a reservoir.
(simple problems)
UNIT5:Open Channel Flow Duration: 10Periods(L:7.5 – T:2.5)

a) Open channel flow - Discharge through open channel - Chezy's and Manning’s formula
(derivation not necessary). - Numerical problems
b) Geometric properties of open channel
c) Empirical formulae for value of C.
d) Most economical section of a channel-rectangular and trapezoidal sections - (Simple
numerical Problems)
UNIT 6: Pumps, Turbines and Hydro-electric Power plants
384
Duration: 10 Periods (L:7.5 – T:2.5)
a) Pumps - types - reciprocating pumps and centrifugal pumps.
b) Classification of turbines-impulse and reaction turbines.
Reference Books
c) Sketch a typical layout of a hydroelectric power plant – components parts – Functions of
surge tank
1. Reya&Rao, Hydraulics
2. Modi&Seth, Hydraulics & Fluid Mechanics
3. Bansal, Fluid Mechanics &Hydraulics

2.You tube vedios on working of pumps and turbines.
3. Profile of a company manufacturing pumps and turbines on internet.
4. Wikipedia search on the different terms used in hydraulics
Upon completion of course, the students shall be able to

1.1 Explain the scope and importance of hydraulics in Civil Engineering.
1.2 Define fluid and List examples of fluids
1.3 Differentiate between ideal and real fluids.
1.4 Define - Mass density, Specific weight, Specific gravity, Adhesion, Cohesion,
Surface tension, Capillarity, Compressibility, Dynamic Viscosity, Kinematic
viscosity and Vapour pressure - State the units and formulae
1.5 Define 1. Atmospheric pressure, 2. Gauge pressure and 3. Absolute pressure.
1.6 Describe the following pressure measuring instruments and Compute the pressure of
a flowing fluid
a) Piezometers, manometers,
b) U- tube Differential manometers.
c) Mechanical pressure gauge-Bourdon’s pressure gauge
1.7 Define 1. Total Pressure and 2. Centre of Pressure.
1.8 Calculate total pressure and Centre of pressure on the following surfaces immersed in
a liquid at rest:
a) Horizontal plane,
b) Vertical plane and
385
c) Inclined plane
1.9 Practical applications-Lock gates(description only)
2.1 State the different types of flow of liquids

2.2 Define Uniform flow, Non-uniform flow, Steady flow, Unsteady flow, Laminar flow
and Turbulent flow.
2.3 State one dimensional continuity equation.
2.4 State the equation for Bernoulli's theorem of total energy of liquids in motion.
2.5 Compute the pressure and velocity at a section of flowing liquid in a pipe for the
given conditions using Bernoulli's equation.
2.6 Describe the working principle and Compute the actual discharge of flowing liquid
through
i. Venturimeter,
ii. Orifice meter and
iii. Pitot tube.
3.1 Define orifice and list different types of orifices

3.2 Distinguish between small and large orifices
3.3 Define vena- contracta, Cc, Cv, and Cd (Hydraulic coefficients). .
3.4 State the formulae for actual, theoretical discharges through small orifice
3.5 Calculate the discharge, Cc, Cv ,Cd for given conditions-Numerical Problems
3.6 Derive formula for discharge through Large Rectangular Orifice and Calculate
discharge through Large Rectangular Orifice for given conditions-Numerical
Problems.
3.7 Define mouth piece - Classify mouth pieces.
3.8 Calculate discharge through a mouth piece for given data- Numerical Problems.
3.9 Define a notch and list different types of notches.
3.10 Calculate the discharge over following notches: Rectangular, Triangular and
Trapezoidal
3.11 Define weir and list the different types of weirs.
3.12 Determine the discharge over sharp crested and broad crested weirs under given
conditions - Numerical Problems.
3.13 Determine the discharge over rectangular weir using Francis, and Bazin's empirical
formulae
386
4.1 List the various losses that occur when water flow through pipes.
4.2 Differentiate Major loss and Minor losses.
4.3 Compute loss of head due to friction using Chezy’s , and Darcy’s equations
4.4 Compute the various minor losses of head for given data –Numerical problems.
4.5 Define Hydraulic gradient line and Total energy line.
4.6 Calculate discharge through Parallel and Compound (series) Pipes connected to
reservoir for given data- Numerical Problems.
5.1 Define open channel flow.

5.2 Differentiate open channel flow and pipe flow.
5.3 Define Wetted perimeter and Hydraulic mean depth/radius.
5.4 State Chezy's formula and Manning's formula for uniform flow through open
channels.
5.5 List the Values of ‘C’ for different surfaces
5.6 State the following formulae to evaluate 'C'
a) Kutter's, formula,
b) Manning's formula and
c) Bazin's formula .
5.7 Calculate Velocity and Discharge in a channel using Chezy' s and Manning's formulae
for given conditions-Numerical problems.
5.8 Define most economical section of a channel.
5.9 List the conditions for most economical section for Rectangular channel and
Trapezoidal channel.
5.10 Design the most economical rectangular and trapezoidal channel sections for the
given conditions.
6.1 Define Pump and list different types of Pumps

6.2 Describe the parts of Reciprocating Pump with a sketch.
6.3 Describe the working principle of Single acting and Double acting reciprocating
pumps.
6.4 List the functions of air vessels for reciprocating pumps.
6.5 Describes the different parts of centrifugal pumps and explain the working principle
of centrifugal pump.
6.6 Define priming and explain the necessity of priming.
6.7 Explain the use of foot valve and strainer in a centrifugal pump.
6.8 Define Turbine and list types of turbines.
6.9 Differentiate between Impulse and Reaction turbines.
387
6.10 Explain the working principle of Pelton wheel turbine.
6.11 Describe the Parts of Francis Turbine.
6.12 Explain the purpose of draft tube and list types of draft tubes.
6.13 Sketch a typical layout and List different components of hydro-electric power plant
installation.
6.14 Define surge tank and list the functions of surge tank

1. To visit a nearby petrol bunk and bike repairing centre and submit a report on
pressure measuring devices
2. To carryout market survey for pipes of different sizes and materials available.
3. To assess conditions of water supply mains of your locality and quantify the pressure
drop and measuring the actual discharges through various outlets.
4. To visit & submit a report on nearby hydel power plant to know the setup of various
components.
5. Student is encouraged to participate in Tech fest/Srujana fest to evolve any novel
method of water supply systems
6. Prepare/Download a dynamic animation to illustrate the working principle of
hydraulic pumps.
8. Quiz
9. Group discussion
10. Surprise Test/Slip test

Engineering Tools
Ethics
Basic knowledge
Communication
Lifelong learning

Linked PO
CO1 3 1 2 2 1,2,4,8,
388
CO2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2,3,5,6,7,8
CO3 2 2 1 2 2 1,2,3,8,9
CO4 2 2 1 2 2 1,2,3,5,6,
CO5 1 3 1 2 2 1,2,3,5,6
CO6 1 3 1 2 2 2 1,2,3,5,6,10
Internal Evaluation Units Marks

Test
Assignments 5
Seminars 5
Total 60

question
MID SEM-I EXAM
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM

1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
389

question

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
390

DCE IV semester

Course Name: HYDRAULICS Max.Marks:20 Marks
PART-A
1) Define the term ‘specific gravity’

2) Define ‘absolute pressure’.
3) List out any two types of fluid flow.
4) Write the mathematical form of Bernoulli’s theorem
PART-B
Answer two Questions. Each question carries three marks 2x 3 = 6 Marks
5(a) what is weight density of a fluid giving the values for water and mercury.
(OR)
5(b) Compare the center of pressure and total pressure.
6(a) Draw a neat sketch of venturimeter showing it silent features

(OR)
6(b) State three assumptions of Bernoulli’s theorem
PART-C
7(a) Convert the following vacuum pressures into absolute pressures
(a) 26cm of mercury

(b) 11.14 kN/m2
(c) 0.05 N/mm2
(d) 0.34 Kgf/cm2
(OR)
7(b) A triangular body of base 2m and height 2.4m is immersed vertically such that the base is
parallel to and at a depth of 1.6m from free surface of liquid. Find total pressure and centre
of pressure.
391
8(a)Water is flowing through a tapered pipe of length 100m having diameter 600mm at the
upper end and 300mm at the lower end at the rate of 50lit/s. The pipe has a slope of
1in30. Find the pressure at the lower end if the pressure at higher end is 0.1962 N/mm2..
(OR)
8(b)A venturimeter is to be fitted to a 15 cm diameter pipe which is horizontal where the

pressure head is 10m of water. The maximum flow is 9000 litres per minute. Find the
diameter of the throat so that the pressure does not become negative. Assume the co-
efficient of venturimeter as 0.98
392

DCE IV semester

PART-A
1) Write the relation between Cd , Cc and Cv .

2) List any two classification of Mouthpiece based on discharge condition.
3) Define Hydraulic Gradient Line
4) Write the formula to calculate the head loss due to pipe friction by Darcy’s equation
PART-B
Answer any two questions. Each question carries three marks 2x 3 = 6 Marks
5(a) State three advantages of V-notch

(OR)
5(b)Water flows over a rectangular notch 1.25m wide with a head of 0.10m. The same
discharge passes through a right angled V notch. Find the head of water in the v-
notch.
6(a) It was observed that the difference of head between the two ends of a pipe 250m long
and 300mm diameter is 1.5m. Taking Darcy coefficient as 0.01 and neglecting minor
losses, calculate the discharge flowing through the pipe.
(OR)
6(b) A pipe of diameter 90mm is suddenly enlarged to a diameter of 150mm. Find the loss
of head due to the enlargement when the quantity of water flowing is 0.072m3/sec
PART-C
Answer any two questions. Each question carries five marks 2x 5 = 10 Marks
7(a) A jet of water issues from an orifice 1250mm 2 in area under a constant head of
1.125m. It falls vertically 1m before striking the ground at a distance of 2m measured
393
horizontally from vena-contracta. Calculate hydraulic Co - efficients (Cc, Cd&Cv),if
the jet is discharging 3.65 lit/sec.
(OR)
7(b) The catchment area of a tank is 5 x 10 6Sq.m. The max rainfall in the catchment is 5 cm
per hour. Out of this 80% will reach the tank. Find the length of waste weir if the depth
of the water is not to exceed 1 m. The waste weir has to carry piers 1 m wide and 5 m
clear span for supporting super structure.
8(a) Water is discharged through a pipe 1220m long which is 40mm in diameter for 610m,
and250m for the rest of its length. Calculate the flow, taking only friction into account,
end of the pipe is 30.5m below the reservoir level. Take f = 0.004 for 400mm pipe f =
0.006 for the 250mm pipe.
(OR)
8(b) A 2 km long water main has to carry a discharge of 0.54 m 3/sec. If the maximum
allowable loss of head due to friction is 26m, find the diameter of the pipe required.
Assume f=0.008. Use Darcy’s equation neglecting minor losses.
394
DCE IV semester
Course Code: 18C-403C Duration:2 hours

PART-A
Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark. 8x1 = 8 Marks
1) Define Adhesion.
2) List the classification of orifice based on size
3)Name the parts of a reciprocating pump?
4) State Bernoulli’s theorem
5) Define steady flow in open channels
6) Define the term hydraulic mean depth
7) What is the difference between single – stage and multi –stage pumps?
8) What is draft tube?
PART-B
Answer four questions. Each Question carries three marks 4 x 3 = 12 Marks
9(a) Calculate the pressure at point A in the figure given below
(OR)
395
9(b)A rectangular channel of having most economical 6.0 m wide.Find the discharge if bed
slope is 1 in 1200. Assume C as 50
10(a)A rectangular channel of 1.5m width is used to carry 0.2 m 3 of water. The rate of flow is
measured by placing a 900 V- notch weir.If the maximum depth of water is not to
exceed 1.2m. Find the position of the apex of the notch from the bed of the channel.
(OR)
10(b) List the components of a Hydroelectric power plant
11(a) Find the discharge through a rectangular channel 4 m wide, having depth of water 3 m
and bed slope 1 in 1500 Take N=0.03 in Kutter’s formula.
(OR)
11(b) A trapezoidal channel 5m wide at the bottom and 1.5m deep discharges 1500 l/sec. The
side slopes are 2H : 1V. Given N for the channel surface as 0.03, find the longitudinal
slope.
12(a)List the component part of centrifugal pump

(OR)
12(b) Draw a sketch of reciprocating pump
PART-C
Answer four questions. Each Question carries five marks 4 x 5 = 20 Marks
13(a) A circular plane of 2m diameter is immersed in water so that its plane makes an angle
of 300and the height point or plane is 1.6 m below the surface. Find the total pressure
and centre of pressure.
(OR)
13(b) Determine the section of a trapezoidal channel discharging at 30m3/sec, bed slope 1
in2000 and side slopes ad 1.5H : 1V, Chezys constant is 50.
14(a) A reservoir has been built 4km away from a college campus having 5000 inhabitants.
Water is to be supplied from the reservoir to the campus. It is estimated that each
inhabitant will consume 200 liters of water per day and that half of the daily supply is
pumped within 10hrs. Calculate the size of the supply main, if the loss of head due to
friction in pipeline is 20m. Assume ‘f’ for pipe as 0.008.
(OR)
14(b) Explain the functions of surge tank.
396
15(a) Find the value of Manning’s ‘n’ in terms of ‘C’ Chezy’s constant
(OR)
15(b) What do you mean by most economical section, write the conditions for trapezoidal
section
16(a) Explain the working of reciprocating pump

(OR)
16(b) Brief the important types of draft tube
397

Course Title: Quantity Surveying Course Code : 18C-404C
Methodology : Lecture+Tutorials Total Contact Periods : 60 Periods
Pre requisites
Knowledge of basic Mathematics, Materials of Construction, Constructionpractice, reading drawings
and plans.
Course Outcomes
Up on completion of the Course, the student will be able to
CO1 Identify different items of works and their units and specifications.
CO2 Prepare approximate and detailed estimates, estimate of quantities of different items of works.
CO3 Prepare data sheets for different items of works and abstract estimate.
CO4 Prepare leads statement, and determine the quantity of earth work by various methods.
CO5 Prepare detailed estimates of Roads and Culverts.
CO6 Prepare detailed estimate for irrigation works.

No
R U A
1 Introduction, Units of
measurements and 8 Q9(a) Q13(a)
Specifications Q1
2 Estimates of buildings 12
3 Analysis of Rates and
12
Abstract Estimates Q10(a) Q14(a)
Q2
4 Earth work calculations 8 Q4
5 Q9(b),Q11(a), Q13(b),Q15(a),
Detailed estimates of 10
Q5,Q6 Q11(b) Q15(b)
Roads and Culverts
6 Detailed estimates of Q3 Q10(b),Q12(a),
Q14(b),Q16(a),
Q12(b)
Public Health 10 Q7,Q8 Q16(b)
Engineering works.
TOTAL 8
8 8
Course Contents
UNIT 1: Introduction, Unit of measurements and Specifications
398
Duration: 8Periods(L:6 – T:2)
a) Quantity surveying – Definition of estimate – Need for estimation – Types of estimates –
Approximate estimate – Detailed estimate – Abstract estimate – Duties of Quantity
Surveyor – Elements of a structure – Item of Work – Materials of construction – Line
diagram for preparation of abstract estimate
b) Units of measurements for various items of civil engineering works as per IS :1200
c) Degree of accuracy in measurement – Deductions for openings in masonry, RCC and
Plastering – Painting coefficients
d) Specifications – Necessity – Types of specifications – General specifications of:
i. Earth works
ii. Brick / Stone Masonry with C.M
iii. Reinforced Cement Concrete
iv. Plastering with C.M
v. Floor finishes with ceramic tiles and marbles
vi. White washing / Colour washing
f) Types of estimates – Preliminary or Approximate Estimate – Detailed Estimate–

Abstract Estimate – Definitions – Formats for detailed and abstract estimates.
g) Preliminary or Approximate Estimate – Plinth area method – Cubic rate method – Service
Unit method
h) Problems in Preliminary estimate
UNIT 2: Estimates of Buildings Duration: 12Periods(L:9 – T:3)
Different Methods of taking out quantities – Centre Line Method – Long and Short Wall Method-
Quantities of items in different components of buildings- Preparation of detailed estimates for
buildings with load bearing walls and framed structure.
a) Single Room Building
b) Single Room with Verandah
c) Single storied Residential building with two bed rooms (2 BHK)
d) Two storied residential building
e) Buildings with Sloped roofs like pitched roof, lean to roof, hipped & valley roof
UNIT 3: Analysis of Rates and Abstract Estimates Duration: 12Periods(L:9 – T:3)

a) Analysis of Rates-Definition and Purpose
b) Standard Data Book, SSR, Standard data sheet
c) Cost of materials at source and at site
d) Standard Schedule of Rates of different materials in buildings works
399
e) Types of labour – Wages as per S S R
f) Lead and Lift – Preparation of Lead Statement
g) Data Sheets – Standard data for materials and labour components for different items of
work
h) Preparation of unit rates for finished items of works using Standard data and S S R
i) Methods of calculating quantities of ingredients of various proportions ofcement
concrete.
j) Provisions for different building services and other overhead charges
k) Prepare abstract estimate for:
i. Single bedroom building (1 BHK)
ii. Two bedroom building with veranda (2 BHK)
UNIT 4: Earth Work Calculations Duration: 8Periods(L:6 – T:2)

a) Lead and Lift – Initial and subsequent values
b) Mid- Ordinate Method – Mean Sectional Area Method – Trapezoidal Rule – Prismoidal
Rule for computing volumes in level sections for roads and Canals and their limitations
c) Taking out quantities from Longitudinal Section and Cross Section in cutting and
embankment of level sections-Calculation of Areas
d) Capacity of Reservoir from the table of areas and contours
UNIT 5: Detailed Estimates of Roads and Culverts Duration: 10Periods(L:7.5 – T:2.5)
a) Gravel Road
b) Water bound macadam road
c) Cement concrete road
d) Pipe culvert
e) R C C slab culvert with i) straight returns
UNIT 6: Detailed Estimates of Public Health Engineering works
Duration: 10Periods(L:7.5 – T:2.5)
a) Open well with masonry staining
b) R C Over head water tank
c) Septic tank and soak pit
Reference Books
2. Estimating and Costing - B.N. Dutta
400
3. Estimating and Costing - S. C. Rangawala

2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1JdAPaDHueM
3. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=F4KQoqlDLaY
4. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ndgThVc6vMs

1.1 Define:
a) Quantity Surveying
b) Estimate
1.2 State the need for quantity surveying
1.3 Identify different types of estimates
1.4 Explain the need for different estimates
1.5 Distinguish among element of structure, item of a work & materials of Construction
1.6 List the duties of Quantity Surveyor
1.7 State the units of measurements, data and payment for different items of work and
materials using IS : 1200
1.8 State the types of taking out measurement.
1.9 Explain the process of taking measurements for different works and tolerances
1.10 Define specifications
1.11 State the need for specifications
1.12 State different types of specifications
1.13 Give the general specifications for important items of work
1.15 State different types of estimates
1.16 Explain:
a) Approximate or preliminary estimate
b) Detailed estimate
c) Abstract estimate
1.17 State the methods of preparing approximate estimates
1.18 Explain:
a) Plinth area method
b) Cubic content method
c) Service unit method or unit cost method
401
1.19 Prepare approximate estimates for residential and non-residential buildings with given
data of size / capacity and rates considering Cost of building services and other
over heads
2.1 Differentiate between detailed estimate and abstract estimate
2.2 Write formats of detailed estimate and abstract estimate
2.3 State the information required for preparation of detailed estimates of a building
2.4 State and explain different methods of taking out quantities
2.5 Explain Centre Line method-Long and short wall method
2.5 Prepare the detailed estimates for various buildings (load bearing and framed) from the
given Drawings, specifications and site conditions:
a) Single Room Building
b) Single Room with Verandah
c) Single storied Residential building with two bed rooms (2 BHK)
d) Two storied residential building
e) Buildings with Sloped roofs like pitched roof, lean to roof, hipped & valley
roof
3.1 Define analysis of rates

3.2 Explain the purpose of analysis of rates
3.3 Explain the following in rate analysis:
a)Standard data book
b) Standard schedule of rates
c) Standard data sheet
3.4 Explain cost of material at source
3.5 Explain cost of material at site
3.6 Explain the following terms:
a) Blasting charges
b) Seinorage charges
c) Cess charges
d) Stacking charges
e) Water charges
f) Crushing charges
g) Lead charges
3.7 Compute rate of an item of work
3.8 Explain different types of labor wages as per latest SSR
3.9 Define lead statement
3.10 Prepare the format for Lead Statement
3.11 Prepare Lead Statement and data for different items of work
3.12 Prepare the unit rates for finished items of works using standard data and SSR
402
3.13 Tabulate the material requirement of mortars and concrete of different proportions
3.14 Prepare abstract estimate for the following buildings:
a) Single bedroom building (1 BHK)
b) Two bedroom building with veranda (2 BHK)
4.1Explain terms: embankment, cutting

4.2Define: lead and lift
4.3State the standard values of .Lead and Lift
4.4 Calculate the lead and lift for a given section
4.5 List different methods of computing the areas and volumes
4.6 Explain:
a) Mean sectional area method
b) Mid sectional area method
c) Trapezoidal rule
d) Prismoidal rule
4.7 State the limitations of prismoidal rule
4.8 Determine the areas of an embankment for a given data
4.9 Determine the areas of a cutting for a given data
4.10 Prepare detailed estimates for earth work for roads, canals and earthen bunds
4.11 Compute gross and effective capacity of a reservoir from the areas of different
contours
5.1 Prepare a detailed estimate for different types of roads and culverts.
a) Gravel road
b) Water bound macadam road
c) Cement concrete road
d) Pipe culvert
e) Slab culvert.
5.2 State the items involved in the abstract estimates of roads and culverts.
6.1 Prepare a detailed estimate for the following items:

a) Open well
b) R.C.C. overhead tank
c) Septic tank with soak pit / dispersion trench.
6.2 State the items to be included in the abstract estimates of above structures
403
1) The topic should be related to the course in order to enhance his knowledge, practical
skill & and lifelong learning, communication, modern tool usage.
2) Prepare Check list for different items of following type of Civil Engineering works.
a. Load Bearing Building Structure.
b. Framed structure type of building
c. W.B.M.Road
d. Septic Tank
e. Community well
3) Writing the rules of deduction of openings for below mentioned items of work as per
IS1200.
a. Brick / Stone masonry
b. Plastering / Pointing
4) Preparing detailed estimate of a RCC single & two storied existing residential
building for all items of work.
5) Prepare the lead statement for earth work excavation for a Road.
6) Prepare the lead and lift statement for a building.
7) Collect the market data for cost of construction materials and implement in rate
analysis and compare it with the SR book.
8) Rate analysis to be done for construction activities by using alternate materials like
M-sand for River sand and analyze the difference of rates.
9) Rate analysis for works under Lump sum (LS) head to be studied in detail and
compared with present SR.
10) Reconciliation of materials for a particular item need to done for an ongoing project.
11) Detailed estimate for any two or more residential buildings to be compared and rate
per unit area to be find out which will help in present market survey.

nCommunicatio
Environment &
Ethics
learningLifelong
KnowledgeDiscipline
societyEngineer and
knowledgeBasic
ToolsEngineering

sustainability
Linked PO
10
CO1 3 1 1 1 2 1,2,3,5,7
CO2 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,5,7,10
CO3 3 2 1 2 2 1,2,4,5,7
CO4 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,5,7,10
CO5 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,10
CO6 1 3 3 1 3 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,10
Internal Evaluation
404
Test Units Marks
Assignments 5
Seminars 5
Total 60

question
MID SEM-I EXAM
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
question
405
Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
406
DCE IV semester

Course Name: Quantity Surveying Max.Marks:20 Marks
PART-A
Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark.4x1 = 4 Marks
1. What is estimation?
2. write the units for the quantities of a) brick masonry.b) plastering.
3. Write the methods of taking out quantities for buildings.
4. Write the table form for detailed estimate.
PART- B
Answer two questions .Each question carries three marks 2x3=6 marks
5.(a). Write the duties of a quantity surveyor.
(OR)
5.(b) Write different types of estimates.
6(a). A single roomed building is having 3.6m x 6.0 m internal dimensions with 300mm thick
wall and height of the room is 2.3 m. Calculate quantity of brick work without
deductions.
(OR)
6(b)A compound wall of 1m height and 300mm thick has a foundation of 50mm projection on
both sides and 150mm thick. Find the quantity of foundation material for 1m length.
PART-C
Answer two questions .Each question carries five marks 2x5=10 Marks
7(a) Prepare a plinth area estimate of a building with a total plinth area of 240m2.from the
following data
i) Plinth are rate Rs 9000/m2.

ii) Electrical installations = 14% of the building cost
iii) water supply and sanitary installations =5%
iv) contingencies = 3%
407
(OR)
7(b). Explain different methods of approximate estimate.
8(a) Prepare the detailed estimate the following items of works for the fig.
a) Earth work excavation

b) CC bed for the foundation
(OR)
8(b). Prepare the detailed estimate for the following items of works for above fig
a) brick masonry for the basement
b) brick masonry for super structure with deductions
408
DCE IV semester

PART-A
Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark4x1 = 4 Marks
1. Write the format for lead statement.
2. What is cost of material at source and cost of material at site.
3. Define the terms lead and lift .
4. State any two methods of calculation of volume of earth work.
PART- B
Answer two questions .Each question carries three marks 2x3=6 Marks
5.(a) Calculate the cement quantity in concrete 1:1.5:3 for 10 m3.
(OR)
5.(b). Find the cost of material at site for the following.
sn materials Rate at source lead Conveyance charges

o
1 40 mm HBG metal Rs 300/m3 10 km 15/ km/m3

2 sand Rs 75/m3 20 km 10/km/m3
3 Rough stone Rs 250/m3 8 km 12/km/m3
6.(a)Find the area of embankment, if the top width of the road is 6m and depth is 3m. The
side slopes are 2:1.
(OR)
409
6(b).Calculate the quantity of earth work for 1km length for a portion of the road in a uniform
ground the heights of banks at the two ends being 1m and 1.5m. the formation width is
10m and side slopes are 2H:1V.
PART-C
7(a). Calculate the quantity of materials required to prepare the following items of works
i. 12 m3 of cc 1:3:6.
ii. 20m3 of brick masonry CM 1:6.
(OR)
7.(b).
8(a). Calculate the quantity of earthwork for 8 chains length (30M) for a portion of a road
embankment on a level ground having 10.5m formation width and 2:1 side slopes .The
level difference between formation and ground level is0.9m,0.7m,1.20m,3.4m,2.90m,
3.10m, 3.40m, 2.60m, 2.40m respectively. Use Trapezoidal method.
410
(OR)
8.b) .For the above problem find the quantity of earthwork in Prismoidal method.

DCE IV Semester

PART-A
Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark8x1 = 8 Marks
1. Write the units for the following items a) plain CC in foundation) b) plastering
2. Write the purpose of rate analysis.
3. Write the formula for finding the quantity of RCC for Trapezoidal portion of a column
foundation.
4. A room internal dimensions are 4mx3m the wall thickness in super structure is
300mm.calculate the centre line length.
5. Cement concrete pavement 100mm thick and 7.5m wide is laid over a base course 75 mm
for a length of 5m.find the quantity of CC required for pavement.
6. Write the units for the measurement of a) Dry stone pitching b) plastering for abutment
wall.
7. How do you calculate the quantity of earthwork refilling in open well.
8. What are the deductions that you will make while calculating quantity for plastering in a
septic tank.
411
PART-B
Answer four questions. Each question carries three marks 4x3=12 marks
9.a).
(OR)
9.b). Calculate the following quantities for an abutment wall shown in fig. take the length of
wall as 5m.
a) CC bed under abutment
b) Masonry used in abutment.
10(a). Write the formulas for trapezoidal rule and prismoidal rule for finding earth work
quantities.
412
(OR)
10(b). The cross section of a circular well is shown in the fig. Calculate the quantity of earth
work excavation.
11(a).Find the area of embankment, if the top width of the road is 6m and depth is 3m. The
side slopes are 2:1.
(OR)
11(b)write the items of works and their units in the estimation of a WBM road.
12(a). The cross section of a dispersion trench is 1.6m dia is shown in fig. Calculate the
quantity of brick masonry for the side walls.
(OR)
12(b)The size of a over head tank is 4.5mx 4.5m with side walls 200mm thick. Calculate the quantity
of RCC for a base slab if the thickness is 100mm.
413
PART-C
Answer any 4 questions. Each question carries five marks 4x5=20 marks
13.a).
(OR)
13(b) For an embankment 60m long of uniform gradient when the height of bank is 3m at one end
and 1.8m at the other .The width of embankment at top is 6m and its side slopes are 1.5:1 .
Estimate the quantity of earth work by
a) Mid sectional area method b) Prismoidal method.
14.(a). Calculate the quantity of cement required in bags for following items of works:
a) CRS masonry in CM 1:6 using granite stone for 15 m 3 of work if 0.32 m3 CM is required
for 1 m3.
b) Plastering with CM 1:4 12mm thick for 100 m 2 of work if 0.15 m3 of CM is required for
10m2 of plastering.
(OR)
414
14.b).
415
15.a).
(OR)
15.b).
416
417
16.a).
418
(OR)
16.b)
419
.
420
421

Course Title: Irrigation Engineering Course Code : 18C-405C
Type of Course : Lecture+Assignments Total Contact periods : 60
The student should know the basic knowledge about hydraulics and mechanics
Pre requisites
.
Course Outcomes
On completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1 Solve simple problems of irrigation by applying basic principles and methods.
CO2 Estimate rainfall over a catchment by various methods.
CO3 Explain different parts of head works and weirs and their functions.
CO4 Explain the structural details and construction and maintenance of gravity and earth dams.
CO5 Summarize the data of canals and maintenance of canals, and cross drainage works.
CO6 Develop the concept of water shed and its objectives and maintenance, explain about
water conservation .

No
R U A
1 Basics of Irrigation 12
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
2 Basics of Hydrology 08
3 Head works and weirs 08
4 Gravity dams and Earth Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
12 Q4
dams
5 Distribution works Q9(b), Q13(b),
10 Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
6 Watershed Management Q10(b), Q14(b),
10 Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8
Course Contents
UNIT – 1: Basics of Irrigation Duration:12 Periods(L:9 – T:3)
a) Introduction-Definitions-necessity and scope of irrigation-advantages and

disadvantages- perennial and inundation irrigation-flow and lift irrigation-direct and
storage irrigation- Methods of irrigation- Border Strip, Furrow, Check basin,
Sprinkler & Drip irrigation
b) Principal crop seasons-kharif and Rabi crops.
422
c) Definition of duty, delta, base period, crop period, kor period -different methods of
expressing duty-relationship between duty and delta and base period-factors affecting
duty –-duty figures for principal crops-simple problems.
UNIT - 2: Basics of hydrology Duration:8 Periods(L:6 – T:2)
a) Introduction-Definition of Precipitation, Runoff. Runoff classification-Rainfall-

Catchment and its types-Factors affecting run off.
b) Types of rain gauges-Simon’s rain gauge-float type automatic recording gauge-
Precautions in setting and maintenance-rainfall records Hydrological cycle-average
annual rainfall of an area – Theissen’s polygon method.
c) River gauging-objects –selection of site-list the methods to measure the velocity.
UNIT - 3: Head Works and Weirs Duration: 8 Periods(L:6 – T:2)

a) Introduction-Classification of head works-storage and diversion, head works- their
suitability under different conditions-suitable site for diversion works-general layout of
diversion works-brief description of component parts of diversion works,
b) Barrages and Weirs - Brief description of component parts of a weir-percolation-uplift-
creep-scour-effect of percolation-list the protective works for a river weir.
UNIT – 4: Gravity dams and Earth dams Duration: 12Periods (L:9 – T:3)
a) Introduction-Reservoirs and its types-Dams and its functions-types -Factors
influencing selection of site for reservoirs and dams.
b) gravity dams- Definition of various terms such as FRL, MWL, TBL, free board,
Dead Storage, Live Storage, Gravity Dam, Spillway-profile of a dam-forces acting -
Causes of Failures and remedial measures -Elementary profile -low dam and high
dam - free board and top width –sketch the practical profile.
c) Uplift pressure - drainage gallery-spillway-types of spillways and their suitability.
d) Earth dams – locations suitable for Earth Dams, types of earth dams- saturation
gradient and phreatic line-Causes of failure of earth dams and remedial measures.
UNIT 5: Distribution works Duration: 10Periods(L:7.5– T:2.5)
a) Introduction-Canals-importance of Irrigation canals- classification-different methods
of canal alignment-typical cross section of canal in cutting embankment, partial
cutting and embankment – berms – standard dimensions - balancing depth of cutting-
functions of head regulator and cross regulator -canal lining-necessity- types –
advantages and disadvantages-maintenance of canals.
b) Cross drainage works-necessity and suitability –general description of aqueducts –
super passage -siphon-level crossing.
423
UNIT – 6: Watershed Management Duration: 10 Periods (L:7.5 – T:2.5)
a) Introduction, concept of watershed development, objectives of watershed
Management, need for watershed development in India-Characteristics of Watershed:
size, shape, physiography, slope, climate, drainage, land use, vegetation, geology and
soils, hydrology and hydrogeology, socio-economic characteristics- factors affecting
watershed management - causes of watershed deterioration and their result-watershed
management practices
b) Water Harvesting: Rainwater harvesting, soil moisture conservation, check dams,
artificial recharge, and percolation tanks.
Reference Books
a) Soil erosion-Types and causes of erosion, factors affecting erosion, measures to
control erosion,-ploughing-trenching-bunding-terracing-check dams-rock fill dams.
1. Irrigation Engineering by B.R.Gupta.

2. Irrigation Engineering by B.CPunmia
3. Irrigation Engineering and water power engineering by Birdie.
4. Irrigation Engineering by S.K.Garg
5. Watershed Management by JVS Murthy, - New Age International
6. Land and Water Management by VVN Murthy, -Kalyani Publications

1.1 Define Irrigation
1.2 State the necessity of irrigation.
1.3 List advantages and disadvantages of irrigation.
1.4 Distinguish between
i) Perennial and inundation irrigation.
ii) Flow and Lift irrigation.
iii) Storage and direct irrigation.
1.5 Briefly describe various methods of Irrigation
1.6 State Principal crops in India and their seasons.
1.7 State different methods of expressing duty.
1.8 State the relationship between duty and delta.
1.9 State the factors affecting duty.
2.1 Define terms Catchment, intercepted catchment, free catchment, runoff, max flood
discharge.
424
2.2 State the methods of measuring rainfall with Simon’s rain gauge.
2.3 State the characteristics of good, average and bad catchments.
2.4 State the factors affecting run-off.
2.5 State the objectives for river gauging.
2.6 List the factors for selecting suitable site for a gauging station
3.1 State the classification of head works and their suitability under different conditions.
3.2 List the factors suitable for selection of site of Diversion works.
3.3 Describe with sketch the component parts of Diversion works.
3.4 Distinguish between barrages and Weirs
3.5 Describes with sketch the component parts of a weir and their functions.
3.6 Explain the terms percolation, uplift, creep and scour.
4.1 State the classification of Dams.
4.2 State factors influencing selection of site for reservoirs and dams.
4.3 Define the terms: Full reservoir level. Maximum water level, top bund level, dead
storage, live storage, free board, gravity dam, spillway.
4.4 Briefly explain the causes of failure of gravity dams and their remedies.
4.5 Distinguish between low and high dams.
4.6 Draw the elementary profile of a gravity dam for a given height
4.7 Draw the practical profile of a low dam.
4.8 State need of drainage galleries
4.9 State the different types of spillways and their suitability and draw sketches
4.10 State the situations in which earth dams are suitable.
4.11 Define saturation gradient, phreatic line.
4.12 State the three types of earth dams with sketches of typical cross sections.
4.13 Briefly explain the causes of failure of earth dams and states the remedial measures.
5.1 Explain the importance of Irrigation canals.
5.2 State classifications of canals.
5.3 State the different methods of canal alignment and the situations in which each is
suitable.
5.4 Sketch typical cross sections of canals in cutting, embankment and partial cutting.
5.5 Define terms: balancing depth of cutting.
5.6 State the functions of Head Regulator and cross regulator.
5.7 State the need and draws the sketches of different cross drainage structures.
5.8 State the necessity and types of canal linings, advantages and disadvantages of canal
linings.
5.9 State the maintenance required for canals.
6.1 Define terms: watershed, watershed management.
425
6.2 State the necessity of watershed management.
6.3 List the objectives of watershed management
6.4 List the characteristics of watershed
6.5 List the factors affecting water shed management.
6.6 State the causes of watershed deterioration and their result.
6.7 Explain Watershed management practices
6.8 Explain rain water harvesting.
6.9 Explain soil moisture conservation methods
6.10 Explain various techniques to control soil erosion.

3. Quiz
4. Group discussion
5. Field visit to nearby irrigation structures and prepare notes.
6. Observe watershed management system in your village and prepare presentation.
Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge
Engineering Tools
Ethics
Communication

Linked PO
CO1 1 2 2 2 1 2 1,2,3,5,6,10
CO2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1,2,3,4,5,7,10
CO3 2 2 1 2 2,5,10
CO4 2 3 1 3 3 1 3 1,2,5,6,7,10
CO5 3 1 3 3 2 3 1,2,5,6,7,10
CO6 2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 1,4,5.6,7,10
Internal Evaluation
426
Test Units Marks
Assignments 5
Seminars 5
Total 60

question
MID SEM-I EXAM
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)

question

Unit No
R U A
427
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
428

DCE IV semester

Course Name: IRRIGATION ENGINEERING Max.Marks:20
PART-A
Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark.4x1 = 4 Marks
1. Define irrigation.
2. Differentiate between flow irrigation and lift irrigation
3 .List the important components of Hydrological cycle.
4. Define the terms 1) catchment 2) intercepted catchment
PART –B
Answer two questions .Each question carries Three marks 2x3=6 Marks
5(a). Write the necessity of irrigation.

(OR)
5(b) The base period of a crop is 140 days. The total depth of water required is 800 mm. Find the
Duty.
6(a)What are the points to be considered for setting up of Rain gauge station at a place.
(OR)
6(b)What is runoff and write its types
PART-C
Answer two questions. Each question carries five marks 2x5=10Marks
7(a)What are the advantages of Irrigation

(OR)
7(b)What are the factors that will affect the Duty of water.
8(a)With a neat sketch explain Hydrological cycle.

(OR)
8(b)With a neat sketch explain the working of Simon’s Rain gauge.
429
DCE IV semester

Course Name: IRRIGATION ENGINEERING Max.Marks:20 Marks
PART-A
1. Define head works?
2. What is creep length.
3. Define full reservoir level and maximum water level
4. Define live storage and Dead storage.
PART –B
Answer two questions .Each question carries three marks 2x3=6 Marks
5(a).Differentiate between barrage and a weir

(OR)
5(b). List the component parts of a weir.
6(a).Differentiate between low and high dam

(OR)
6(b). Draw the practical profile of a low dam.
PART-C
7(a)Draw the layout of a Diversion headwork and list various parts.

(OR)
7(b) Draw the cross section of a weir and name various parts.
8(a)What are the points to be considered for selection of site for a dam
(OR)
8(b)What is Elementary Profile of a gravity dam. Find the minimum base width of elementary
profile for reservoir full condition.
430
DCE IV semester
Course Code: 18C-405C Duration:2 hours

Course Name: IRRIGATION ENGINEERING Max.Marks:40 Marks
PART-A
1. Define Base period, Crop period.

2. What is a Diversion Headworks and Storage Headworks
3. Define the terms watershed and watershed management.
4. List different methods of estimating Average rain fall over an area.
5. Write the classification of canals based on carrying capacity of canal.
6. Define balancing depth of cutting.
7. What is rain water harvesting.
8. Define soil erosion.
PART-B
Answer four questions. Each question carries three marks 4x3=12 marks
9(a). Define Duty, Delta, and Base period.

(OR)
9(b). Write the methods of canal alignment.
10(a) Write the purpose of diversion head works.

(OR)
10(b) Write any three methods of controlling soil erosion.
11(a). Draw the cross section of a canal in cutting.

(OR)
11(b). Write any three functions of a head regulator.
12(a). What is check dam and write its functions.

(OR)
12(b). What is water harvesting and write any 4 methods to improve ground water level.
PART-C
Answer four questions. Each Question carries five marks 4x5=20 marks
13(a) Explain Theissen’s Polygon method for the estimation of average rainfall over an area.
(OR)
13(b)What is the necessity of canal lining List different types of canal linings
14(a)Draw the cross section of a weir state the functions of the component parts
431
(OR)
14(b)What are the objectives of watershed management.
15(a)Briefly explain about the maintenance works of a canal

(OR)
15(b) Draw a neat sketch of Siphon spillway and explain its working.
16(a) Explain about different soil conservation methods.

(OR)
16(b)Write the characteristics of watershed.
432

Course Title: Civil Engineering Drawing Course Code : 18C-406P
Semester: IV Semester Course Group : Practical
Pre requisites
Basic knowledge of Engineering Drawing, ability to visualise 2D and 3D views
Course Outcomes
On completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1 Draw and illustrate the plan, elevation and section of culverts and drawings
CO2 Draw and illustrate the plan, elevation and section of Bridge drawings
CO3 Draw and demonstrate the plan, elevation and section of irrigation drawings
CO4 Draw and illustrate the plan, elevation and section of public health drawings

Unit
Unit Name Hours/Periods
No R U A
1 Culverts and Bridges 15 1 1

1
2. Irrigation drawings 15 2
3. Public health Engineering drawings 15 1
Total 45 1 3 2
Course Contents
UNIT 1: Simple Culverts and Bridges Duration: 15 Periods(L:5 – P:10)

a) Pipe culvert (Single Pipe)
b) R.C.C slab culvert with square return walls
c) Two-Span R.C.C T-beam Bridge with square return walls.
d) Two-Span R.C.C Bridge with splayed wing walls and Return walls.
UNIT 2: Irrigation engineering drawings Duration: 15 Periods(L:5 – P:10)
a) Earthen bunds – Two types.
(i) Homogeneous type (ii) Non Homogeneous type.
433
b) Tank surplus weir with splayed wing walls.
c) Tank sluice with tower head.
d) Canal drop (notch type)
e) Canal regulator
UNIT 3: Public health engineering drawings Duration: 15 Periods(L:5 – P:10)
a) Plan and cross section of a sanitary block showing internal water supply and sanitary
fittings
b) Septic tank and soak pit with details of connections
c) R.C.C overhead square tank. (four columns with all accessories ).
d) Draw plan and cross section of a rain water harvesting pit for a residential building.
Recommended Books
1. Civil Engineering Drawing-II byN.Srinivasulu.
2. Civil Engineering Drawing-II by Chakravarthy
2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1JdAPaDHueM
After completion of the subject, the student will be able to

1.1. Draw the plan, cross sectional elevation and longitudinal sectional elevation of Pipe culvert
and identify the component parts from the given set of specifications
1.2. Draw the plan, cross sectional elevation and longitudinal sectional elevation R.C.C –slab
culvert and identify the component parts from the given set of specifications.
1.3. Draw the plan, sectional elevation and cross section of Two span R.C.C T-beam bridge with
square return walls from the set of given specifications.
1.4. Draw the sectional elevation, plan and cross section of Two span R.C.C bridge with splayed
wing walls and return walls from the set of given specifications.
2.1. Draw the cross section view of Earthen bunds – Two types
(i) Homogeneous type (ii) Non-Homogeneous type.
2.2. Draw the plan, cross sectional elevation and longitudinal sectional elevation of Tank surplus
weir with splayed wing walls.
2.3. Draw the plan, cross sectional elevation and longitudinal sectional elevation of Tank sluice
with tower head.
434
2.4. Draw the plan, cross sectional elevation and longitudinal sectional elevation of Canal drop
(notch type)
2.5. Draw the plan, cross sectional elevation and longitudinal sectional elevation of Canal
regulator
3.1. Draw plan and cross section of a sanitary block showing internal water supply and sanitary
fittings
3.2. Draw the plan, cross-section elevation of Septic tank and soak pit with details of connections
3.3. Draw the plan, elevation of R.C.C overhead square tank. (four columns with accessories).
3.4. Draw plan and cross section of a rain water harvesting pit for a residential building.

3. Quiz
4. Group discussion
5. Surprise Test
6. Roof rainwater harvesting - a case study
7. Visit to a nearby canal, take the field data and draw the c/s of canal.
8. Identify and take the details of existing tank weir/tank sluice in the vicinity of your area and
draw all the views.
9. Identify and take the details of existing culvert/highway bridge/railway bridgenearby and
draw all the views.
10. For the given data prepare a model of any one of the following.
a. Tank sluice
b. Tank weir
c. Culvert
d) Railway/Highway bridge
11. Prepare a 3D model of Irrigation structure in CAD software

Engineering Tools
Basic knowledge
Ethics
Lifelong learning
Communication

Linked PO
435
CO1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1,2,3,5,8,9
CO2 2 2 3 3 2 2 1,2,3,5,8,9
CO3 1 3 2 2 3 3 1,2,3,5,8,9
CO4 2 3 2 3 3 2 1,2,3,5,8,9

question
and
Understanding(U)

question
and
Understanding(U)
436
DCE IV semester

Course Name: CIVIL ENGINEERING DRAWING Max.Marks:20 Marks
PART-A
Answer all questions. Each question carries fourmarks2x 4 = 8 Marks
1. Draw the cross section of pipe culvert for following particulars.

Internal dia of pipe = 1000mm
External dia of pipe = 1200mm
Width of bedding = 1600mm
Thickness of bedding = 300mm
Thickness of benching = 250mm
2. Draw the cross section of an abutment of slab culvert for the following data:
Bottom level of CC bed = +45.20m
Top level of CC bed = +45.80m
Width of CC bed = 2.2m
Bed level = +47.00m
Masonry footings of abutments = Consists of two below B.L.
Footings of equal depth and offsets on rear side only
Width of first footing = 1.8m,
Width of second footing = 1.6m
Top level of abutment = + 48.50m,
Thickness of bed block flushing
With of top abutment = 0.3 m
Top width of abutment = 0.9 m having batter on rear face
Thickness of slab = 200 mm,
Thickness of wearing course = 60mm
PART-B
Answer any one question. Each question carries twelve marks 1x12=12 Marks
3. Draw the plan and the longitudinal section of a pipe culvert to scale 1:100 to the given Particulars:
i) Drain particulars
Bed level : +50.350
Bed width near the pipe culvert: 1200mm
Side slopes of drain : 1:1
General G.L. near the drain : +51.550
Bed pitching and side slope revetment on both U/S and D/S = 200mm, rough
Stone bed pitching to a length of 1200 mm shall be provided both on U/S and D/S. A toe of same width
(200mm) shall be taken to a level of +50.00 at the end of bed pitching.
437
Sides slope revetment shall be with 200mm size rough stone along the slopes to a length of 1200mm both
on US/ and D/S from both B.L to general G.L.
ii) Pipes Details:
Internal diameter of C.C. pipe : 1000mm
External diameter of C.C. pipe : 1200mm
Bedding for the Pipe : 250mm CC
Benching for the pipe : 300mm CC
Width of both bedding and pitching : 1800 mm
Bottom level of C.C. bedding : +50.00m
No. of pipes : One
iii) Head walls:
At the end of pipe, two head walls are provided with brick masonry with the
Following details:
Length of head wall : 7200mm
Bottom level of head wall : +49.10
Top level C.C. bed provided under head walls : +49.10
Bottom level of C.C. bed provided under head walls: +48.80
Width of C.C. Bed : 1800mm
Bottom width of head wall : 1200mm
Profile of head wall = outer surface vertical and earth fill face having a batter so that the top width =
450mm.
Top level of head wall : +52.00
iv) Earth fill and Embankment:
Formation width : 10,000 mm
Side slopes : 2 horizontal to 1 vertical
Formation level : +54.00
Height of earth fills : top level of formation – top level of pipe = 54.00 - 51.450 =
2.550m
v) Guide stones on both the sides of formation:
450mm x 450mm square guide stones are provided at distance of 450mm from extreme edges of
formation. These stones are taken t o a depth of 600mm below formation level and extended to a height of
700mm above formation level at 3000mm C.C.
4.Draw the following view of a small T-beam and deck slab bridge of two spans across a canal to a scale of 1:
50 from the given specifications. The type of structure is box type
i) Half cross-section & half elevation along the road.
Specifications:
i). General
No. of spans =2
Clear width of each span =3.5m
Bed level of canal =+50.00
F.S.L =+52.00
Free board =1.0m
Road formation level =+53.58
Side slopes of canal =1:1
Road width between parapets =4.40m
Road width between kerbs =4.10m
Kerb one either side =150mmx150mm
438
Wing walls =Return type
ii). Foundation:
The depth of foundation is same for abutments, wing walls and pier and is taken to level of + 49.30.
Depth of C.C bed below abutments, wing walls and pier is same and equal to 400mm; i.e. top level of C.C
bed =+49.70 and bottom level of C.C bed =+49.30.
Width of CC bed:
a. For abutments =1700mm
b. for wing walls =1400mm
c. For pier =1000mm
Bottom width of stone masonry abutment at +49.70 level = 1300mm: length = 5.9m. Bottom width of
stone masonry wing walls at + 49.70 level = 1000mm Length
(as measured on outer side ) = 3.9m
iii). Pier:
Width of stone masonry for pier is 600 mm and is same throughout its height
(up to bed block ). Cut water sharp to 60⁰ and ease water semi-circular shape are provided.
iv). Top width of abutments and wing walls:
The water face is vertical and rear side (earth retaining side) has a batter both for
abutments and wing walls.
Top width of abutment = 700mm
Top width of wing wall =500mm
v). T-beams:
Three no. of T-beams are provided one at the centre and one on either side at 2m c/c, having equal
overhang of deck slab on both sides.
Width of rib =250 mm
Depth of rib =500 mm
Bearing for T-beams over abutments =500mm
vi). C.C bed blocks:

T-beams are laid over C.C bed blocks provided over the abutments and wing walls.
Size of bed block is 600mmx600mmx150mm and is laid below the ribs of T-beam.
vii). R.C.C. deck slab:
200mm thick R.C.C (1:2:4) slab is provide with 20mm thick wearing course
(C.C 1: 1 ½:3) with 8mm size stone chips. Width of R.C.C deck slab = 4.9m.
viii). Parapet:
Brick masonry parapet 300mm square pillars with 50mm projecting copings on either
Side at top are provided, one at middle and one each at the ends. R.C.C posts at 1m
Clear spacing of size 100x 100 x 750mm with 25mm dia. Pipe, hand rails comprises the Parapet.
ix.) Side revetment:
Canal sides which are at 1:1 slope are provided with rough stone revetment 300mm thick over a gravel
bed of 150mm thick for sufficient length. The toe wall for revetment is taken to a level of +49.40 with its
bottom width equal to 450mm.
Note: Any other data required may be assumed suitably.

439
DCE IV semester
Mid Semester-IIExamination

Course Name: CIVIL ENGINEERING DRAWING Max.Marks:20 Marks
PART-A
Answer all questions. Each question carries four marks 2x4 = 8 Marks
1. Sketch the central section along the tank bund of the well of a tower head sluice from the
following :
Internal dia = 1· m
Height of well = 4·2 m
Thickness of well staining = 0·45 m from top to a depth of2·0 m and 0·60 m for the
remaining
CC foundation = 0·5 m thick with 0·3 m offset
Thickness of slab = 150 mm thick
Wooden shutter = 0·70 m wide × 1·2 m deep
Provide suitable rod and gearing rearrangement for the wooden shutter.
2. Draw the longitudinal section of a canal drop and name the component parts.
PART-B
Answer any one question 1x12=12 Marks
3. Draw the cross-section of a homogenous earthen bund with the following specifications to a scale
of 1 : 100.
Top width of bund = 1·5 m
TBL = +57·00
General ground level = +50·00
Stripped ground level = +49·70
Side slopes = 1½ : 1 on U/S and 2 : 1 on D/S
Key trenches = 1·2 m wide and 0·6 m deep at 4·0 m C/C
Protection of upstream face of the bund :
The upstream face of the bund is provided with 300 mm thick rough stone revetment over
15 mm thick gravel backing.
This revetment is founded on rough stone wall 1·0 m wide1·0 m deep
Protection of a downstream toe of the bund :
A rock toe with 300 m rough stone boulders is provided with900 mm top width and top
level being at +51·20.
Side slopes of rock toe = 1 : 1
Sand filter = 200 mm thick on rear side and at the bottom of the rock toe
Toe drain = A longitudinal drain is provided with bottom width1·0 m and side slopes 1 : 1.
This is in line with the outer surface of rock toe and taken to a level of +49·00
Rough stones of 300 mm thick are used for side revetment and bed pitching of toe drain
4. Draw the longitudinal section of a tank sluice with tower head to a scale of 1: 50.
(a) Tank bund :
Top width = 1·8 m
TBL = +163·500 m
440
MWL = +162·000
FTL = +161·300
Bed level = +159·100
Side slopes = 1½ : 1 on U/s and 2 : 1 on D/s
(b)Tower head :
Internal diameter = 1·2 m
Top of RCC slab over well = +162·50
Thickness of well staining = 450 mm from top to a depth of 2 m and 600 mm for the
remaining height
Opening = 600 mm dia opening is provided in the CC diaphragm 75 mm thick for
allowing water into the barrel.
Shutter = Wooden shutter 750 mm wide, 1500 mm depth and 50 mm thick is provided for
regulating water
Foundation for well = 3·0 m dia and 600 mm thick
(c) Sluice barrel :
Internal dimensions = 750 mm wide × 1·0 m height
Roof for barrel = RCC roof slab 150 mm thick
Side walls of the barrel = 450 mm thick at top and600 mm thick at bottom with water face
vertical
CC foundation = 450 mm thick and 2550 mm wide islaid under barrel
(d) Lead chamber :
Length of wing walls = 1·8 m (horizontal distance)Distance between wing walls inside to
inside at the receiving end = 2·0 m
Thickness of walls = 450 mm at top and 600 mm at bottom with water face vertical
Profile of wing walls = Wing walls start from +160·25
(top of barrel slab) at the entrance of the barrel and slopes down to the bed level +159·10.
The slope from GL to bed level is 1½ : 1.
(e) Stilling cistern :
Internal dimensions : 3·0 m × 3·0 m
Side walls = All the side walls including the outer wall having an opening of 600 mm for
discharging water into field channel are 600 mm thick at bottom and450 mm thick at top,
having batter on rear side. These walls are taken to canal bund level +160·75
(f) Canal particulars :
Bed width = 600 mm
Side slopes = 1:1 on water side and 1½:1 on rear side up to GL
Width of canal bund = 900 mm
Canal bund level = +160·750
(g) Rough stone revetment :
(i) 450 mm rough stone revetment is provided on U/s over150 mm thick gravel backing
from bed level to TBL
(ii) Sides of canal are provided with 300 mm thick rough stone revetment over 150 mm
thick gravel backing for a length of 1·5 m. Bed pitching is also provided in the canal to a
length of 1·20 m with 300 mm size roughstone and a toe is provided at its end and taken to
a depth of 600 mm below bed level of canal. Width of toe = 300 mm
(h) General ground level at the site = +159·50
441
DCE IV semesterEnd Examination

Course Name: CIVIL ENGINEERING DRAWING Max.Marks:40
Marks
PART-A
Answer all questions. Each question carries four marks 4x4=16Marks
1. Sketch the section at support of an RCC slab bridge showing bed block and abutment cross-section
and name the parts.
2. Draw the longitudinal section of the body wall of a canal drop with the following data :
Length of body wall = 9·0 m
Top of notch pier = + 45·00 m
Top of body wall = + 44·00 m
Top of CC foundation = + 42·80 m
Bottom of CC foundation = + 42·20 m
Offset of CC foundation = 0·3 m on either side
Notch = Trapezoidal shape with bottom width 0·6 m and side slopes = 1 : 1
3. Draw the sectional plan of RCC overhead tank from the data given below :
Size of water tank = 4500 mm × 4500 mm
Thickness of sidewalls = 200 mm
Columns’ size = 400 mm × 400 mm
Size of column footings = 1500 mm × 1500 mm
Size of brace beams = 300 mm × 300 mm
4. Draw the cross section of a water harvesting pit
PART-B
Answer any one question. Each question carries twenty four marks. 1x24=24 Marks
5. Draw the longitudinal section of a tank sluice with tower head to a scale of 1: 50.
(a) Tank bund :
Top width = 1·8 m
TBL = +163·500 m
MWL = +162·000
FTL = +161·300
Side slopes = 1½ : 1 on U/s and 2 : 1 on D/s
(b) Tower head :
Internal diameter = 1·2 m
Top of RCC slab over well = +162·50
Thickness of well staining = 450 mm from top to a depth of 2 m and 600 mm for the
remaining height
Opening = 600 mm dia opening is provided in the CC diaphragm 75 mm thick for
allowing water into the barrel.
Shutter = Wooden shutter 750 mm wide, 1500 mm depth and 50 mm thick is
provided for regulating water
442
Foundation for well = 3·0 m dia and 600 mm thick
(c) Sluice barrel :
Internal dimensions = 750 mm wide × 1·0 m height
Roof for barrel = RCC roof slab 150 mm thick
Side walls of the barrel = 450 mm thick at top and600 mm thick at bottom with water
face vertical
CC foundation = 450 mm thick and 2550 mm wide is laid under barrel
(d) Lead chamber :
Length of wing walls = 1·8 m (horizontal distance)
Distance between wing walls inside to inside at the receiving end = 2·0 m
Thickness of walls = 450 mm at top and 600 mm at bottom with water face vertical
Profile of wing walls = Wing walls start from +160·25
(top of barrel slab) at the entrance of the barrel and slopes down to the bed level
+159·10. The slope from GL to bed level is 1½ : 1.
(e) Stilling cistern :
Internal dimensions : 3·0 m × 3·0 m
Side walls = All the side walls including the outer wall having an opening of 600 mm
for discharging water into field channel are 600 mm thick at bottom and450 mm thick
at top, having batter on rear side. These walls are taken to canal bund level +160·75
(f) Canal particulars :
Bed width = 600 mm
Side slopes = 1:1 on water side and 1½:1 on rear side up to GL
Width of canal bund = 900 mm
Canal bund level = +160·750
(g) Rough stone revetment :
(i) 450 mm rough stone revetment is provided on U/s over150 mm thick gravel
backing from bed level to TBL
(ii) Sides of canal are provided with 300 mm thick rough stone revetment over 150
mm thick gravel backing for a length of 1·5 m. Bed pitching is also provided in the
canal to a length of 1·20 m with 300 mm size rough stone and a toe is provided at its
end and taken to a depth of 600 mm below bed level of canal.
Width of toe = 300 mm
(h) General ground level at the site = +159·50
6. Draw the sectional elevation and plan of a square RCC overhead tank with the following data to a
scale of 1: 50 :
Height of the tank (from GL to bottom of the tank, i.e., top
of floor slab or base slab) = 9·0 m
Size of tank = 5·0 m×5·0 m×1·75 m
Thickness of RCC side walls = 200 mm
Thickness of RCC base/floor slab = 200 mm
Thickness of RCC roof slab = 110 mm
Size of RCC column = 400 mm×400 mm
No. of RCC column = 4 no. (one at each corner)
Size of RCC brace beams = 400 mm×350 mm
Spacing of brace beams = 3·0 m c/c
Depth of RCC footing below ground level = 2·0 m
Size of footing at base = 1·6 m×1·6 m
Thickness of footing at column face = 500 mm
Thickness of footing at the end = 200 mm
Thickness of levelling course below the footing = 200 mm,(1: 4 : 8) plain concrete
Size of ring beam below base slab = 400 mm×450 mm
443
Dia. of inflow pipe = 100 mm
Dia. of outflow pipe = 75 mm
Size of manhole cover = 600 mm×450 mm
Show the pipe connections; ladder, water level indicator, ventilating arrangements
etc. Assume any other data suitably if needed.
444
Course Title: Hydraulics Lab Course Code : 18C-407P
Pre requisites
Basic Knowledge of Hydraulics
Course outcomes
Upon completion of the course the learner shall be able to
CO1 Calculate the flow parameters like discharge, velocity etc of flow measuring devices
CO2 Determine flow rates, pressure variations, various losses for flow through pipes
CO3 Calculate the constants in open channel flow
CO4 Identify the component parts of Pumps & Turbines

Unit Unit Name Periods
No
1 Orifices, Mouthpieces and Notches 15
Verification of Bernoulli’s theorem and study of Pipe flow parameters 15

2
3 Open channel flow and Study of Fluid machines 15

Total
45
Course Contents
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
I.Orifices, Mouthpieces, Notches and weirs Duration: 15 Periods(L:5 – P:10)
1. Determination of coefficient of discharge of a small orifice by constant head method
2. Determination of Cc of an orifice by finding Cv and Cd.
3. Determination of coefficient of discharge of a mouthpiece by constant head method
4. Determination of coefficient of discharge of a Rectangular and triangular notch.
5. Determination of coefficient of discharge of a trapezoidal notch
II .Verification of Bernoulli’s theorem and study of Pipe flow parameters

Duration: 15 Periods(L:5 – P:10)
6. Verification of Bernoulli's theorem.
445
7. Determination of coefficient of a discharge of a venture meter.
8. Determination of friction factor in pipe flow.
III.Open channel flow and Study of Fluid machines Duration: 15 Periods(L:5 – P:10)
9.Determination of Chezy’s constant in open channel flow.
10. Study of reciprocating pump
11. Study of centrifugal pump.
12. Study of turbines – Pelton Wheel
13. Study of turbines – Francis Turbine
14. Study of turbines – Kaplan Turbine
S.No Experiment Title Key Competency

1 Coefficient of discharge of small Regulate the flow
Orifice by constant head. Operate stop clock accurately
1/2
Draw graph between Q vsH
3 Hydraulic coefficients of an orifice. Regulate flow.

Note co-ordinate values and measure volume
Operate stop clock accurately.
State the relation.
4 Coefficient of discharge of mouth Regulate the flow.
piece by constant head. Operate stop clock accurately
1/2
graph between Q vs H
5 Coefficient of discharge of rectangular Note readings of head
notch. Operate stop clock accurately
3/2
Draw graph between Q vsH
6 Coefficient of discharge of triangular Note readings of head Operate stop clock
notch 5/2
accurately. Draw graph between Q vsH
7 Coefficient of discharge of trapezoidal Note readings of head Operate stop clock
notch accurately.
Compare the results of rectangular and
triangular notch.
8 Verify Bernoulli’s theorem Note readings of head at various locations
Plot hydraulic gradient line and total energy line
9 Coefficient of discharge of Venturimeter. Note readings of head Operate stop clock
accurately.
1/2
Draw graph between Q vs.H
10 Friction factor in pipe flow. Note readings of head
Observe the significance of friction factor of
446
pipe flow.
11 Chezy’s constant Note readings of head.
Observe the significance in design of section of
open channel
Recommended Books
1. Hydraulics Lab Manual by S.K.Likhi,NewAge International Pvt Ld

2. Laboratory Manual of Hydraulic and Hydraulic Machines by R.V.Raiker,Prentice
Hall India learning Pvt Ltd

Upon completion of the course the learner shall be able to
1.1 State the principle / law / apparatus / equipment required for testing for determination of Cd of
Orifices by constant head method
1.2 Perform test and record observations.
1.3 Draw inferences on the relationship between parameters.
1.4 Draw a graph between Q vs H1/2.
Mouthpieces
1.8 Draw a graph between Q vs H1/2
Rectangular Notches
Triangular Notches
447
Trapezoidal Notches
1.14 Perform test and record observations
1.15 Draw inferences comparing the result s with rectangular notch and triangular notch.
on the relationship between parameters.
2.1States the principle/law /apparatus/equipment required for verification of Bernouli’s Theorem
2.3 State Inference and application.
2.4 Plot Hydraulic gradient line and Total energy line.
2.5 State the Aim /apparatus/equipment required to determine the Cd for flow through Venturimter
2.7 State Practical application.
2.8 Draw a graph between Q vs. H1/2
2.9 State the Aim /apparatus/equipment required to determine the friction factor in pipe flow.
2.11 State Importance of friction factor in pipe design.
3.1 State the Aim / apparatus / equipment required to determine the chezy’s coefficient in Open
channel flow.
3.3 State Importance in design of section of open channel.
3.4 Identify the component parts of a Reciprocating pump
3.5 State the functions of each component of Reciprocating pump
3.6 State field applications for Reciprocating pump
3.7 Identify the component parts of a centrifugal pump
3.8 State the functions of each component of centrifugal pump
3.9 State field applications for centrifugal pump
3.10 State field applications and compare with Reciprocating pump.
3.11 Identify the component parts of Pelton wheel, Francis or Kaplan turbines.
3.12 State function of each component
3.13 State field applications of Turbines
1. To carryout market survey for pipes of different sizes and materials available.
2. To visit & submit a report on nearby canal/irrigation structures/dam site to know the usage of
notches and weirs.
3. To visit & submit a report on nearby hydel power plant to know the type of turbine
installed and its setup.
448
4. Student is encouraged to attend the Tech fest/Srujana
6. Quiz
7. Group discussion
8. Surprise Test
Engineering Tools
Ethics
Basic knowledge
Communication
Lifelong learning
Linked PO
CO1 2 2 2 1 2 2,3,4,6,8
CO2 3 1 2 2 1 2,3,4,6,8
CO3 3 2 2 2 3 2 2,3,4,5,6,8
CO4 2 2 3 2 2 1 2,3,4,5,6,8
449

DCE IV semester

Course Name: HYDRAULICS LAB Max.Marks:20 Marks
Pick any one experiment from the given list 1x20=20Marks

4. Determination of coefficient of discharge of a Rectangular notch.
5. Determination of coefficient of discharge of a triangular notch
450
DCE IV semester

Pick any one experiment from the given list 1x20=20M

451
DCE IV semester

Pick any one experiment from the given lot1x40=40M

4. Determination of coefficient of discharge of a Rectangular and triangular notch.
5. Determination of coefficient of discharge of a triangular notch
10. Determination of Chezy’s constant in open channel flow.
452

Course Title: Modern Surveying Lab Course Code : 18C-408P
Pre requisites
Basic knowledge of Theodolite surveying, Tacheometric surveying, working principles of Electronic
Theodolite, EDM, Total station and GPS.
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
CO1 Use Electronic Theodolite in the fields of Civil engineering survey

CO2 Use total station in the field of Civil engineering land survey.
CO3 Use GPS in the fields of civil engineering
CO4 Describe the Digitization the maps
Course Content

No
1 Electronic Theodolite and Electronic Distance meter 15

2 Total Station 15
3 Global Positioning System and digitization of maps 15
Total 45
Course Contents
UNIT 1:
Electronic Theodolite and Electronic Distance meter Duration:15Periods(L:5.0-P:10.0)
453
Demonstration of Electronic Theodolite- parts and functions-instrument preparation and setting-
horizontal angle between two stations-vertical angle between two stations.- traversing with Electronic
theodolite.
Demonstration of Electronic Distance measurement instrument-parts and functions-instrument
preparation and setting-horizontal distance of a point from the instrument station by EDM
UNIT 2:
Total Station Duration:15Periods(L:5.0-P:10.0)
Demonstration of Total Station–parts and functions- adjustments of total station for taking
observations- measurement of Horizontal distance, slope distance, difference in Height between two
points-Elevation of a point- horizontal angle and distance between two stations- setting out right
angles at different points on a base line- setting out plan of a building on the ground- prolonging a
straight line Calculation of area-earth work calculations
UNIT 3: Global Positioning System and digitization ofmapsDuration:15Periods(L:5.0-P:10.0)
Study of hand held G.P.S. – measurement of coordinates (latitude, longitude and Altitude) of given
point on the earth- selection and marking of routings (Way points) -navigation to any fixed point on
the earth- calculation of area-linking GPS data with total station
Demonstration of the following-AutoCAD map- raster to vector conversion-scanning- Digitization-
digitization of contour map from scanned picture- digitization of town map- showing the different
layers like roads, railways, water supply line, drainage line etc.
S.NO. Experiment Title Key Competency
1. Exercises on Electronic Theodolite  Identify the parts of Electronic

Theodolite
 Place Electronic theodolite on tripod,
checks batteries and switches
 Set initial settings in Electronic
theodolite
 Centering of Electronic Theodolite
 Measure horizontal angle/vertical
angle
 Conduct traverse survey
2 Exercises on Electronic distance
meter  Identify the parts of Electronic distance
meter
 Places EDM on tripod, checks batteries
and switches on EDM
 Set initial values in EDM
454
 Centering of EDM over a given point
and sighting reflecting prism to
measure distance
3 Field Exercises using Total  Places total station on tripod, checks

Station batteries and switches on total station
 Centering of total station over a given
point and sighting reflecting prism to
measure distance
 Measure area of given field
 Conduct traversing survey (closed
Traverse) and gets plotting
 Finds Height and width of an elevated
object
 Finds the elevation of Instrument point
by making observation to point with
known elevation
 Knows station setup on a known point
by making observations to one or
more back sight points
 Establish the position of an occupied
point relative to a base line or a
boundary line
 Establish points, Lines and Arcs on
the ground
 Locates Centre line of a building on
the ground
 Collects data for L.S and C.S of
proposed road/canal/pipe line on the
ground
 Calculate the quantity of earth work
4 Global Positioning System  Determine the Co-ordinates (latitude,
longitude and Altitude) of various
points on the ground
 Navigate to any fixed point on the
earth using G.P.S
 Selection and marking of route( Way
points) using G.P.S
 Calculate the area of a given land
using G.P.S
 Link the G.P.S data with Total Station
5 Demonstration of Digitization of
Maps  Understands software
 Demonstrate Digitization of any

given contour map.
 Demonstrate digitization of given

Town map and creating different
layers for roads, railways, water
supply lines and drainage lines etc.,
455
Reference Books
8. Course material on G.I.S.,G.P.S. by NITTTR, Chennai.
9. Computer applications in Civil Engineering by NITTTR, Chennai.
10. Course material on Modern surveying instruments by NITTTR, Chennai.
11. Alfred Leick, "GPS satellite surveying", John Wiley & Sons Inc.,
3rdEdition, 2004.
12. GuochengXu, "GPSTheory,AlgorithmsandApplications", Springer
Berlin, 2003.
13. SatheeshGopi, R. SathishKumar, N. Madhu, “AdvancedSurveying,
Total Station, GPS and Remote Sensing" Pearson education , 2007

After the completion of the course, the student should be able to
1.1 Demonstrate Electronic Theodolite, list component parts of Electronic Theodolite and
their functions
1.2 Prepare and do the temporary settings for taking observations to Electronic Theodolite
1.3 Determine the horizontal angle between two stations
1.4 Determine the vertical angle between two stations
1.5 Traverse with Electronic theodolite.
1.6 Demonstrate of Electronic Distance meter
1.7 List component parts of Electronic Distance meter and their functions
1.8 Prepare and do the temporary settings for taking observations to EDM
1.9 Determine the horizontal distance of a point from the instrument station by EDM
2.1 Demonstrate of Total Station, list the component parts of Total Station and functions
2.2 Prepare and do the temporary settings for taking observations to Total Station
2.3 Determine the Horizontal distance from instrument station to any point using Total
Station
2.4 Determine the slope distance from instrument station to any point using Total Station
2.5 Determine the difference in Height between two points using Total Station
2.6 Determine the Elevation of a point using Total Station
2.7 Determine the horizontal angle and distance between two stations using Total Station
2.8 Set out right angles at different points on a base line using Total Station
2.9 Give Marking plan of a building on the ground using Total Station
456
2.10 Prolong a straight line using Total Station
2.11 Calculate of area of a given land using Total Station
2.12 Calculate the volume of earth work using Total Station
3.1 Identifies the parts and the functions of GPS
3.2 Determines the Co-ordinates (latitude, longitude and Altitude) of various points on
the ground
3.3 Navigate to any fixed point on the earth using G.P.S
3.4 Select and mark of routings( Way points) using G.P.S
3.5 Calculate the area of a given land using G.P.S
3.6 Link the G.P.S data with Total Station
3.7 Study the concept of digitization
3.8 Demonstrate digitization of any given contour map
3.9 Demonstrate digitization of given town map and create different layers for roads,
railways, water supply lines and drainage lines
1. Locate a permanent structure using GPS in your locality and prepare a map.
2. Prepare a topographical map by using total station.
3. To set out two parallel lines along both the sides of an obstacle by using total
station.
4. To find the distance between two inaccessible points by using total station.
5. Prepare a report on any one of the following; Arial survey, photogrammetric
survey, hydrographic survey, military survey and mine survey.
457
CO
CO4
CO3
CO2
CO1
1
1
Basic knowledge
PO 1
2
3
3
2
PO 2
2
3
3
3
PO 3
2
3
3
3
Engineering Tools
PO 4

PO 5
458
PO 6
Ethics
PO 7
2
3
3
3

PO 8
Communication
PO 9
Lifelong learning
PO 10
Linked PO
2,3,4,8
1,2,3,4,8
2,3,4,8,10
1,2,3,4,8,9
MID SEMESTER-I Model Question paper
DCE IV Semester Examination
Course Name: Modern Surveying Lab Max.Marks:20 Marks
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Each question carries 20 Marks.
1. Determine the horizontal angle between two stations using electronic theodolite.
2. Determine the vertical angle between two stations using electronic theodolite.
3. Conduct traverse with Electronic theodolite.
4. Perform the temporary settings for taking observations to EDM
5. Determine the horizontal distance of a point from the instrument station by EDM
459
MID SEMESTER-IIModel Question paper
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Each question carries 20 Marks

1. Determine the Horizontal distance from Instrument station to any point using Total Station
2. Determine the slope distance from Instrument station to any point using Total Station
3. Determine the difference in Height between two points using Total Station
4. Determine the Elevation of a point using Total Station
5. Determine the horizontal angle and distance between two stations using Total Station
6. Set out right angles at different points on a base line using Total Station
7. Give Marking plan of a building on the ground using Total Station
8. Prolong a straight line using Total Station
9. Calculate of area of a given land using Total Station
10. Calculate the volume of earth work using Total Station
460
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Perform Traversing with Electronic theodolite for the given stations.

2. Determine the horizontal distance of a point from the instrument station by EDM
3. Calculate of area of a given land using Total Station
4. Give Marking plan of a building on the ground using Total Station
5. Calculate the volume of earth work using Total Station
6. Determine the Co-ordinates (latitude, longitude and Altitude) for various points on the
ground using G.P.S.
7. Navigate to given fixed point on the earth using G.P.S
8. Calculate the area of a given land using G.P.S
9. Perform the Digitization of any given contour map
10. Perform the Digitization of given town map and creating different layers for roads, railways,
water supply lines and drainage lines
461

Course Title: Civil Engineering Workshop Course Code : 18C-409P
Periods(L:T:P):
Basic knowledge on tools required for carpentry, bar bending, plastering, plumbing electrical exercises
Pre-requisites
Course outcomes
CO1 Ability to explain about positioning of shuttering and fixing of form work in the field
CO2 Prepare the bar bending schedule for different conditions
CO3 Ability to explain plastering, distempering and plumbing process
CO4 Identify various electrical accessories, earthing method and wiring connections
Unit
Unit Name Hours/Periods
No
.
1 Scaffolding and Formwork 6

Bar Bending of steel reinforcement 9
Plastering 3
2 Distempering 3
Plumbing exercises 9
3 Electrical Exercises 15
Total 45
Course Contents
UNIT 1:
462
a) Scaffolding and Formwork Duration:6 Periods(L:2-
P:4)
Erection of Scaffolding Material - Position of Shuttering - Fixing of form work.

b) Bar Bending of steel reinforcement Duration:9 Periods(L:3-
P:6)
Preparation of bar bending schedule - Bar bending with bar bending schedule - Method of bar bending
for Earthquake resistant structures - Field visit to automated bar bending
UNIT 2:
a) Plastering Duration:3Periods(L:1-P:2)
Preparation of plastering mix proportions - Plastering to walls
b) Distempering Duration:3 Periods(L:1-
P:2)
Preparation of distempering - Application of Distempering
c) Plumbing exercises Duration:9 Periods(L:3-P:6)
Thread cutting on GI/PVC pipes - Assembling of pipe lines for toilet with two taps, shower and wash
basin - Fixing of floor traps, gully traps, water closet, drain pipes - Laying stoneware/PVC pipes and
construction of inspection chambers
UNIT 3:
Electrical Exercises Duration: 15 Periods(L:5 – P:10)
Identity various electrical accessories - Identify line, neutral and earth terminals in power sockets and
power plugs - Measure the AC voltage between line and neutral using DMM - Study of earthing and
earth pit - Connecting a fuse in the main circuit - Controlling the lamp using a switch - Controlling the
fan with a switch and regulator - Connect a i) 2-pin socket ii) 2-pin socket with switch control -
Control one lamp with 2 switches (Staircase wiring).

S. No Experiment Title Key Competency
 Measuring lengths of props accurately
 Fixing braces at required locations correctly to support
Fixing of
various other scaffolding members
scaffolding
 Choosing suitable size of members to support load
1
coming over the scaffolding
 Adjusting the lengths of props correctly to support the
Positioning of form
weight of RCC elements
work
 Fixing up of various elements of form work firmly to
support the weight of RCC elements
463
 Cutting of rods to the suitable lengths correctly
Bar Bending of steel  Maintaining the angle of cranking correctly
2
reinforcement  Maintaining required spacing of rods as per the design and
drawings provided
Plastering  Using appropriate Materials and tools
3
 Selection of suitable Mix proportions
Distempering  Using appropriate Materials and tools
4
 Application of distempering
 Using appropriate tools
Plumbing Exercises
5  Selection of suitable pipe specials
 Making connections to various sanitary installations
 Adopting suitable type of electrical fixtures for intended
usage
6 Electrical Exercises
 Using suitable material in required quantities for making
earthling for an electrical installation
Reference Books
1. Electrical estimation and costing

2. Basic Plumbing with illustrations by Howard C Massey Craftsman Book Co
3. Workshop Technology by B.S.Raghuwansh, Dhanpat Rai and sons,New Delhi
Suggested E- Learnings
http://nptel.ac.in
1.1 State various components of scaffolding

1.2 State precautions to be taken while erecting scaffolding
1.3 Explain the method of fixing various elements of scaffolding
1.4 State precautions to be taken to fix the various elements of scaffolding at required
position.
1.5 Connect various elements of scaffolding.
1.6 Study various aspects of form work to be considered while fixing various elements
464
1.7 Explain the method of fixing of form work at required position for various elements
of building construction
1.8 Connect various elements of formwork.
1.9 Identify various tools used for bending of reinforcing bars.
1.10 Read the data required from bar bending schedule for bending of bars.
1.11 Mark the salient points of location of bending on the bars as per the bar bending schedule.
1.12 Bend the bars using the specified tools to the exact shape as per bar bending schedule as
specified in IS-2502(Code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for concrete
reinforcement)
1.13 Prepare the grills as per the drawings of the structural elements using binders, stirrups, links
etc., appropriate to the element.
2.1 Understanding materials and tools involved in plastering
2.2 Different types of plastering and their applications
2.3 Preparation of plastering mix proportions
2.4 Understanding materials and tools involved in distempering
2.5 Different types of distempering and their applications
2.6 Preparation and application of distempering to wall, doors and windows etc.
2.7 Identify the different pipe specials and state their functions
2.8 Practice thread cutting on PVC/GI pipes
2.9 Assemble the pipe line for toilet block with taps, showers and wash basins using specific
pipe specials.
2.10 Fix the floor trap, gully trap and water closet of a house to the drainage pipes.
3.1 Identity various electrical accessories, Wires and cables

i) Mains switch
ii) MCB
iii) Fuse
iv) Switches (SPST SPDT)
v) Rotary switch
vi) Push Button Switches
vii) pin Sockets
viii) 3pin /Power sockets
3.2 Identify line, neutral and earth terminals in power sockets and power plugs by physical
observation and using Tester. Use of test lamp
3.3 Identify different wires and cables
3.4 Know the wire gauge
3.5 Specifications of electrical wires
465
i) VIR, PVC, TRS wires
ii) Flexible wires and cables
iii) Power cords.
3.6 Study of earthing and earth pit
3.7 Connect a fuse in the main circuit
3.8 Know the metals suitable for fuse wire
3.9 Selecting a correct fuse wire rating for a given electrical load
3.10 Connect a low current (3A) MCB in the circuit and testing
3.11 Control the lamp using a switch
3.12 Control the fan with a switch and regulator
3.13 Connect a i) 2-pin socket ii) 2-pin socket with switch control
3.14 Control one lamp with 2 switches (Staircase wiring)
3.15 Know Power consumption of various Appliances like
i) Tungsten Lamp
ii) CFL Lamp
iii) Fan.
iv) Fluorescent lamps (Tube Lights).
3.16 Estimate the total connected load
3.17 Electrical estimation and costing
1. Prepare a report on tools required, process of plastering and mortar mix prepartion
for
Plastering.
2. Prepare a report on bar bending schedule for any residential building from structural
Drawing.
3. Make a presentation on tool required and function of each tool in bar bending process.
4. Visit local construction site and prepare a report on types and process of scaffolding
used.
5. Prepere a report on plumbing tools and their functions in plumbing process
6. Prepare a report on fixing of floor trap, gully trap and water closet of a house at near by
construction site.
7. Prepare a report on electrical accessories, Wires and cables.
8. Prepare a report on how the lights are controlled in nearby godown
9. Prepare a report on house wiring of your house.
466
CO
CO4
CO3
CO2
CO1
1
2
3
3
Basic knowledge
PO 1
3
3
2
2
PO 2
3
3
3
3
PO 3
3
3
3
2
Engineering Tools
PO 4
PO 5
467
PO 6
Ethics
PO 7
3
3
2
1

PO 8
1
1
2
2
Communication
PO 9
Lifelong learning
PO 10
Linked PO
1,2,3,4,8,9
1,2,3,4,8,9
1,2,3,4,8,9
1,2,3,4,8,9,10
DCE IVSemester
Course Name: Civil Engineering Workshop Max.Marks:20 Marks
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pick and Answer any One of the following Questions from given lot.
1. Explain the method of fixing of form work at various elements of scaffolding.

2. Identity the various tools used for bending of reinforcing bars.
3. Bend the bars using specified tools to the exact shape as per the bending schedule.
4. Mark the salient points location of bending on the bars as per the bar bending
schedule.

DCEIV Semester
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pick and Answer any One of the following Questions from given lot
1. Explain the preparation and application of distempering to wall, doors and windows.
2. Explain the preparation of plastering mix proportions.
3. Prepare the stirrups of the structural element with an approximate dimension.
4. Explain the various tools and materials with proportions involved in plastering.
5. Explain the various tools and materials involved in distempering.
6. Explain different types of distempers and their application
468
DCE IV Semester End Examination
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----
Pick and Answer any One of the following Questions from given lot.
1. Explain the method of fixing of form work at various elements of scaffolding.

2. Bend the bars using specified tools to the exact shape as per the bending schedule.
3. Mark the salient points location of bending on the bars as per the bar bending
schedule.
4. Explain the preparation and application of distempering to wall, doors and windows.
5. Explain the preparation of plastering mix proportions.
6. Prepare the stirrups of the structural element with an approximate dimension.
7. Explain the various tools and materials with proportions involved in plastering.
8. Explain the various tools and materials involved in distempering.
9. Explain different types of distempers and their application
469
Advanced Communication Skills and Life Skills
Course Title Advanced Communication Skills and Life Course Code 18 C- 410 P
Skills
Semester IV Course Group Practical
Teaching Scheme 15:0:30 Credits 1.5

in Periods- L:T:P
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact 45 Periods

Hours (3 Periods per
Week)
Rationale:
This course is designed to impart writing skills and employability skills to the students
of diploma which will help them in obtaining and maintaining the employment.
Prerequisites:
This course requires the basic knowledge of vocabulary, grammar and four language
learning skills, viz. Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing.
Course Outcomes:
Modules At the end of the course the students will have the ability
to:
Prepare a presentation.
Use presentation aids effectively.
Presentation Skills Develop public speaking skills.
Learn to make PowerPoint Presentations effectively.
Present a Paper using appropriate body language.
Learn kinds of reports.

Learn the format of a report.
Writing Reports Organise ideas.
Develop essential vocabulary useful to write scientific and
technical reports.
Learn the techniques to face an interview.

Learn the etiquette to communicate with employers.
Interview Skills Learn the dos and don’ts of an interview.
470
Learn the frequently asked questions in interviews.
Use appropriate body language.
Learn to face interviews telephonically.
Gain the confidence to face an interview by attending
mock interview.
Learn the dos and don’ts of a Group Discussion.

Participate in a Group Discussion in a healthy manner.
Group Discussion Use effective non-verbal communication.
Use appropriate phrases and expressions useful in agroup
discussion.
Learn workplace etiquette.

Identify the knowledge, skills and attributes useful at
workplace.
Workplace Awareness Build strong workplace relationships.
Learn professional ethics.
Understand gender equality at the workplace
Develop a sense of responsibility towards thesociety.
Learn various writing formats useful at workplace.

Develop an ability to apply technical information in
documentation.
Revise and edit written documents effectively.
Develop corresponding skills - learn the kinds of business
Writing Skills Useful at Workplace letters - the format of a business letter.
Learn effective e-mail writing skills.
Learn Business Memos.
Learn Notes and Narratives.
Learn Forms and Applications.
Prepare templates for different purposes.
Prepare an agenda of a meeting.
Prepare the minutes of a meeting.
471
Prepare Notices / Circulars for various purposes.
Prepare Press release.
CO-PO Matrix
Course Outcome Linked PO

CO 1 Making effective presentations R/U/A 1, 2, 3,4, 5,6,7,8,9,10
CO 2 Writing scientific and technical reports R/U/A 1,2,3,4, 5,6,7,8,9,10
CO 3 Learn to face oral and telephonic R/U/A 1,2,3,4, 7,9,
interviews
CO 4 Learn to face group discussion R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9
CO 5 Learn to write various formats useful R/U/A 1,2,3,5,7,8,9,10
at workplace
CO6 Learn workplace etiquette and ethics R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9,10
Course Contents:
VII. Presentation Skills

Duration: 6 periods
VIII. Writing Reports
Duration: 9 periods
IX. Interview Skills Duration:9 periods
X. Group Discussion Duration: 6 periods
XI. Workplace Awareness Duration: 6 periods
XII. Writing Skills Useful at Workplace Duration: 9 periods
 Paper Presentations
 Seminars
 Mock Interviews
 Telephonic Interviews
 Group Discussions
 Role Plays
 Creating advertisements
 Five-minute activities
472
 Creating a model of workplace
Evaluation Pattern:
III.Continuous Internal Examination: 60 Marks
d. Mid Sem - I 20 marks

Syllabus:
i. Presentation Skills
ii. Writing Reports
e. Mid Sem – II: 20 Marks

Syllabus:
i. Interview Skills
ii. Group Discussion
f. Internal assessment: 20 marks
iv. Seminars: 10 marks

v. Assignments: 5 marks
vi. Lab record submission: 5 marks
IV. Semester End Examination : 40 Marks
a. Write an essay on a given topic or participate in an activity: 15 Marks

b. Interview or Group Discussion: 15 Marks
c. Viva Voce 10 marks
References:
Adair, John. Effective Communication. London: Pan Macmillan Ltd., 2003.
Ajmani, J. C. Good English: Getting it Right. New Delhi: Rupa Publications,
2012.
Amos, Julie-Ann. Handling Tough Job Interviews. Mumbai: Jaico Publishing,
2004.
Collins, Patrick. Speak with Power and Confidence. New York: Sterling, 2009.
Fensterheim, Herbert and Jean Baer. Don't Say Yes When You Want To Say No.
New York: D
Raman, Meenakshi & Sangeeta Sharma. Technical Communication: Principles
and Practice. Second Edition. New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2011
473
E-Learning Resources:
http://www.dailywritingtips.com/
http://www.englishdaily626.com/c-errors.php
http://www.owlnet.rice.edu/~cainproj/
http://www.thehumorsource.com/
http://www.indiabix.com/group-discussion/topics-with-answers/
http://networketiquette.net/
https://public.wsu.edu/~brians/errors
http://www.bbc.co.uk/worldservice/learningenglish/radio/specials/15
474
FOURTH SEMESTER COMMON-410P
ADVANCED COMMUNICATION SKILLS AND LIFE SKILLS
MID SEM - I
Part – A 10 marks
Instruction: Answer any one of the following questions.
1. Write the guidelines for preparing a PowerPoint presentation.

2. How do you prepare yourself for presenting a technical paper?
3. Mention a few presentation aids and how do you use them effectively?
Part – B 10 marks
4. Write the format of a report and describe it.

5. Write a report on the accident you have seen recently.
6. Give the outline of a project report and describe it.

FOURTH SEMESTERCOMMON-410P
MID SEM - II
Part – A 10 marks
1. What are the dos and don’ts for a formal interview?

2. What at least ten frequently asked questions in a formal interview?
3. How do you prepare for a telephonic interview?
Part – B 10 marks
4. What are the dos and don’ts of a group discussion?

5. Mention some phrases and expressions commonly used in a group
discussion.
475
6. Write a short paragraph on the steps you take while participating in a
group discussion.

FOURTH SEMESTER18 COMMON-410P
SEMESTER END EXAM
Part – A 10 marks
Instruction: Pick any one question from the given lot.

1. Prepare the outline of a project report and describe it.
2. Write the guidelines for preparing the slides of a PowerPoint presentation.
3. Write the minutes of the meeting conducted at the Principal’s chamber to
conduct the annual day celebrations. Prepare the agenda of the annual day
celebrations.
4. Describe the workplace etiquette.
5. Prepare a press note for the ‘Job Mela’ which is going to be conducted at
your institute.
Part – B 15 marks
6. Interview / Group Discussion

Part – C 15 marks
7. Viva Voce
476
Course Title: Skill Upgradation Course Code : ---
1. Visit nearby New layout under construction and collect details of

sewerage system and give presentation outlining the measures for
improvement.
2. Calculate theMaximum Bending moment in the beams and loads
transferred to each column of the famed structure in your class room and
write a report.
3. Make a visit to the construction site and study the requirement of labor for
a particular item of work and compare it with the SSR by doing Rate
analysis.
4. Prepare a detailed estimate for ongoing construction of hospital building
to be compared during execution and after completion of project.
5. Visit and submit a report on the usage of notches and weirs in a nearby
canal/irrigation structure/dam site.
6. Visit to nearby lakes or irrigation tanks, study its present status, suggest
restoration measures and prepare a report.
7. Visit nearby agricultural field where micro irrigation techniques are
implemented and prepare a report on water requirements of various crops
and increase in water use efficiency.
8. Visit a nearby power hydroelectric project and prepare a report on the
types of turbines used
9. Notice the pumps used in your college and hospital for various purposes
and prepare a report
10.Prepare a 3D model of various Irrigation structures such as Canal drop,
Surplus Weir in CAD software
477
11.Develop an action plan for construction of rain water harvesting structures
for ground water recharge in your institution.
12.Prepare a topographical map of the given area using Total Station and
give presentation.
13.Prepare a report on any one of the following.
1. Arial survey
2. Photogrammetric survey
3. Hydrographic survey,
4. Military survey
5. Mine survey.
14.Visit local construction site and prepare a detailed report on fixing of form
work to various elements of the building.
15.List out the methods to find complimentary function and explain to solve
a homogeneous Linear Differential equation.
16.List out the methods to find Particular integrals and explain the solution of
Non-homogeneous Linear Differential equations.
17.Write short notes on expansion of simple functions as a Fourier series.
18.Prepare a presentation on Laplace Transforms of simple functions.
19.Prepare a presentation on Inverse Laplace Transforms of simple functions.
20.List out different applications of Laplace Transforms.
21.Solve the Differential equation by applying Laplace Transformations.
Rubrics for Activity assessment (Mathematics)
CATEGORY 4 3 2 1
Mathematical Explanation shows Explanation shows Explanation shows Explanation shows
Concepts complete substantial some understanding very limited
understanding of the understanding of the of the mathematical understanding of the
mathematical mathematical concepts needed to underlying concepts
concepts used to concepts used to solve the problem(s). needed to solve the
solve the problem(s). solve the problem(s). problem(s) OR is not
written.
Procedures Typically, uses an Typically, uses an Sometimes uses an Rarely uses an
efficient and effective effective procedure effective procedure effective procedure to
procedure to solve to solve the to solve problems, solve problems.
the problem(s). problem(s). but does not do it
consistently.
478
Explanation Explanation is Explanation is clear. Explanation is a little Explanation is difficult
detailed and clear. difficult to to understand and is
understand, but missing several
includes critical components OR was
components. not included.
Working with Student was an Student was an Student cooperated Student did not work
Others engaged partner, engaged partner but with others, but effectively with
listening to had trouble listening needed prompting to others.
suggestions of others to others and/or stay on-task.
and working working
cooperatively cooperatively.
throughout lesson.
Mathematical 90-100% of the steps Almost all (85-89%) Most (75-84%) of the More than 75% of the
Errors and solutions have of the steps and steps and solutions steps and solutions
no mathematical solutions have no have no have mathematical
errors. mathematical errors. mathematical errors. errors.
Note:

Needs
improvement
relevance
Presentation
of data
meaningful manner
Performs all
duties of
assigned
team roles
Shares Rarely does Usually does Normally Always does
479
the assigned the assigned the assigned
does the
assigned
work
with sometimes
mates much
to speak others
and unclear clear
Some depth of
improvement
Content is
accurate and
information is
presented in a
logical order
1. Carrying self
2. Punctuality
4. Moral values

3 Reliable
4 Helping nature
480

identified project
4. Reliable

against your sides.
8 Speak more clearly
481
V SEMESTER
482
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEDULE
V SEMESTER

O Code Instruction Tot dits Continuous Internal Semester End Examination
peri
ods
/se
mes
ter
L T P Mid Mid Inte Max Min Total Min
Sem Sem rnal Mark Mar Mark Marks for
1 2 Eval s ks s passing
uati including
on internal
Reinforced
18C-
1 Concrete 3 1 - 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
501C
Structures
Construction
18C- Management &
2 3 1 - 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
502C Entrepreneurshi
p
Water Supply
18C
3 and Sanitary 3 1 - 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
503C
Engineering
Elective-
1Ground
Improvement
18C- Techniques
4 3 1 - 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
504E Steel structures
Integrated
Waste
Management
Elective-2
Soil Mechanics
18C- Theory of
5 3 1 - 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
505E Structure
Air Pollution
Management
Structural
18C-
6 Engineering 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
506P
Drawing
18C- Construction
7 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
507P Technology Lab
Civil
Engineering
18C-
8 Computer 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
508P
Applications
Lab
18C- Programming in
9 CLab Practice 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
509P
18C-
10 Project Work - - 3 45 1.5 - - - - - 100 50
510P
483
Skill
0 0 7 105 2.5 0 0 Rubrics -- - 0
Upgradation
19 5 18 630 25 200 200 200 400 170 1000 425

Course Title: Reinforced Concrete Structures Course Code : 18C-501C
Semester: V Semester Course Group : Core
This course is common for DAA
Pre requisites
This course requires the knowledge of Building materials and Construction practice, Engineering
Mechanics and Strength of Materials
Course Outcomes
CO1 Illustrate the basic concepts of RCC design by limit state, identify grades of concrete and steel and
calculate the loads acting on the structure
CO2 Analyse and Design a rectangular beam
CO3 Design a slab considering boundary conditions
CO4 Calculate strength of a flanged section as per code
CO5 Calculate the design moments and forces in continuous beams and slabs as per codal provisions
and show the reinforcement details as per SP-34
CO6 Design a short column and footing according to codal provisions

No
R U A
1 Introduction to R.C.C and
Philosophy of Limit State 08
design Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
2 Analysis and Design of 12
Rectangular Beams
3 Design of Slabs 12
Q4 Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
4 Analysis of T-beams 8
5 Principles of design of
8 Q9(b), Q13(b),
Continuous beams, Slabs Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
and stairs Q3
6 Design of columns and 12 Q10(b), Q14(b),
Q7,Q8
footings Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8
484
Course Contents
UNIT 1: Introduction to R.C.C and Philosophy of Limit State design

Duration: 08Periods(L: 6– T:2).
a) Introduction to R.C.C
b) Codes of practice of R.C.C design
c) Nominal Mix – Design Mix – differences.
d) Loads to be adopted in R.C.C. design.
e) Properties of Concrete
f) Methods of designing R.CElements
g) Strength and serviceability limit states, characteristic strength of materials and
characteristic loads and partial safety factors.
h) Design strength of materials and design loads.
i) Assumptions made in the limit state design.
j) Stress-strain diagram of singly reinforced RCC beam.
UNIT 2: Analysis and design of Rectangular beams Duration: 12 Periods(L:9 – T:3)

a) Depth of neutral axis, lever arm.
b) Moment of resistance of singly reinforced rectangular section
c) Critical percentage of steel.
d) Calculation of moment of resistance of the given section and design of singly
reinforced rectangular beam for the given load as per IS 456-2000.
e) Doubly reinforced sections - necessity, use.
f) Calculation of neutral axis and moment of resistance for the given section and grades
of concrete and steel.
g) Shear in singly reinforced beams
h) Methods of providing shear reinforcement-vertical stirrups, combination of vertical
stirrups and bent up bars.
i) Code provisions for spacing of stirrups and minimum shear reinforcement (no
derivation of equations).
j) Development of bond stress in reinforcing bars.
k) Design bond stress - development length – bond and anchorage concepts and their
importance.
l) Curtailment of tension reinforcement-codal provisions.
m) Simple problems on development length.
n) Design of simply supported singly reinforced rectangular beam for flexure including
shear and check for deflection using stiffness criteria - Use of design aids (SP-16).
485
UNIT 3: Design of slabs Duration: 12 Periods(L:9.0 – T:3.0)
a) Slabs as structural and functional members
b) One way and two way slabs
c) Minimum reinforcement and maximum spacing of reinforcement – concrete cover
-stiffness criterion- stiffness ratios for simply supported, cantilever and continuous
slabs.
d) One way and two way slabs with various end conditions as per I.S:456 code.
e) Design of one-way slab for flexure and shear for the given grades of concrete, steel,
span and loading.
f) Check for deflection using simplified approach of stiffness criteria.
g) Design of two-way slabs with different end conditions,
h) Design of torsion reinforcement for the restrained slabs – Deflection check using
stiffness criteria - Use of design aids (SP-16).
UNIT 4: Analysis of T-beams Duration: 08 Periods(L:6.0 – T:2.0)
a) Conditions needed for design of a beam as T-Section–advantages, Code provisions
for effective flange width - three cases of T beams.
b) Neutral axis, lever arm and moment of resistance for under reinforced, balanced
sections using the equations given in the code (no derivations).
c) Calculation of the moment of resistance of T- section using the equations given in the
code – Use of design aids(SP16).
UNIT 5:Principles of design of Continuous beams, Slabs and stairs

Duration: 08Periods(L:6.0– T:2.0)
a) Behavior of continuous members and advantages of continuous beams and slabs.
b) Determination of B.M and S.F of continuous beams and slabs of minimum three
spans using BM & SF coefficients given in the code-Use of design aids(SP-16).
c) Detailing of reinforcement in a continuous beam of three spans.
d) Classify the stairs based on the structural behavior or support condition.
e) Detailing of reinforcement in stairs spanning longitudinally.
UNIT 6: Design of columns and footings Duration: 12Periods(L:9.0 – T:3.0)

a) Definition of column – Difference between Column and Pedestal.
b) Types of columns (Long and Short) - effective length for different end conditions.
c) Code provisions for design of columns- square, rectangular and circular columns with
lateral ties and helical reinforcement
d) Determination of Load carrying capacity of short column- square, rectangular,
circular, helically reinforced column subjected to axial load only.
486
e) Design of short square, rectangular columns
f) Design of circular columns using helical reinforcement and lateral ties
g) Footings - Need for footings
h) Footings under isolated columns – loads on footings
i) Code provisions for design of footings - size of footings for given bearing capacity
j) Procedure of checking the footing for one-way shear, two-way shear, bearing stress
and for development length.
k) Design of an isolated square footing of uniform thickness under a
square/rectangular/circular column for flexure only.
Recommended Books
1. I.S:456- 2000
2. I.S:875-1987
3. “Concrete Technology” by A.R.Santhakumar, Oxford university press
4. “Properties of Concrete” by A.M. Neville, Pearson Education
5. “CONCRETE TECHNOLOGY Theory and practice” by M.S Shetty S. Chand & Co.
Ltd., New Delhi
6. “Reinforced Concrete Design” by S Unnikrishna Pillai& Devdas Menon Tata McGraw-
Hill Publishing Co. Ltd. New Delhi
7. “REINFORCED CONCRETE Mechanics and Design” by James G. MacGregor and
James K. Wight, Pearson Prentice hall
8. “Design of Concrete Structures” by Arthur H. Nilson, David Brown and Charles W.
Dolan, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co. Ltd. New Delhi
9. “Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete” by P.C. Varghese Prentice-Hall of India
Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi
10. Limit State Design of R.C.C Structures by Ashok K. Jain Nemchand brothers, Roorkee.
11. Structural Engineering(RCC) by Ramamrutham.
12. Structural Engineering (RCC) by Vazirani and Ratwani.
13. Reinforced Concrete Structures by I.C.Syal and A.K.Goyal
14. Structural Design & Drawing by N. Krishna Raju, Universities press
15. Reinforced Concrete Design by S.N. Sinha-Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co. Ltd. New
Delhi
16. SP:34 - Handbook on concrete reinforcement and detailing
487
2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Grv09rIAPQM
3. https://freevideolectures.com/Course/2686/Design-of-Reinforced-Concrete-Structures
1.1 Differentiate Plain Cement Concrete and Reinforced Cement Concrete.

1.2 State the necessity of reinforcement in plain concrete
1.3 State the advantages and disadvantages of R.C.C.
1.4 Identify the material used in R.C.C. and their function in R.C.C.
1.5 State the different codes used in design of R.C.elements
1.6 List the Loads to be considered in the design of R.C. elements.
1.7 State the different methods of designing R.C. elements.
1.8 State the different grades of concrete
1.9 Differentiate the nominal mix concrete and design mix concrete.
1.10 State the equations of tensile strength and modulus of elasticity of concrete as per IS
456 – 2000.
1.11 Calculate the properties of concrete: Poisson’s ratio, creep, shrinkage, workability
and unit weight, Compressive Strength/Grade of Concrete, Tensile Strength
1.12 State the different types of steel as per IS 456 – 2000.
1.13 State the modulus of elasticity and unit weight of steel.
1.14 Define Limit State and State different limit states.
1.15 Distinguish ‘strength’ and ‘serviceability’ limit states
1.16 State the different IS: 456 – 2000 code provisions for Limit state method of design.
1.17 Define the ‘characteristic strength’ of materials and ‘characteristic loads’
1.18 Explain the role of partial safety factors in limit state design.
1.19 Define ‘Design strength of materials’ and ‘Design loads’
1.20 State the assumptions made in the limit state design.
1.21 Draw the Stress and strain diagrams for a singly reinforced rectangular beam
indicating appropriate stress and strain values in compression zone and tension zone
of the beam.
1.22 Calculate the depth of rectangular and parabolic stress blocks.
2.1 Calculate the total compressive force and total tensile force resisted by the singly
reinforced rectangular beam.
2.2 Calculate the depth of neutral axis from the equilibrium condition
488
2.3 Define lever arm and write the equation for lever arm for a singly reinforced
rectangular beam.
2.4 Define critical or balanced section, under reinforced section and over reinforced
section.
2.5 Explain - why the over reinforced sections are not recommended?
2.6 Calculate the maximum depth of neutral axis, limiting value of moment of resistance
with respect to concrete and steel and limiting percentage of steel.
2.7 State the general design requirements for beams in limit state design as per IS 456 –
2000(Effective span, limiting stiffness, minimum tension reinforcement, maximum
tension reinforcement, maximum compression reinforcement, spacing of main bars,
Cover to reinforcement, side face reinforcement.)
2.8 Calculate the depth of neutral axis for a given section and decides the section is
balanced or under reinforced or over reinforced and accordingly calculates the
moment of resistance for the respective case.
2.9 Calculate the area of steel for a given beam with given cross section and loading.
2.10 Explain the effect of shear on beam.
2.11 Explain the shear stress distribution across a homogeneous section and reinforced
concrete section with sketches.
2.12 Calculate the design shear strength and maximum shear stress in different grades of
concrete as per IS 456 – 2000.
2.13 State the necessity of shear reinforcement and different forms of shear reinforcement
provided in beams
2.14 Show the critical section for shear.
2.15 Calculate the shear strength of concrete, shear resistance of vertical stirrups, shear
resistance of bent up bars as per IS 456 – 2000.
2.16 Calculate the minimum shear reinforcement and maximum spacing of shear
reinforcement as per IS 456 – 2000.
2.17 Calculate the nominal shear stress, shear resisted by bent up bars and spacing of
vertical stirrups.
2.18 Design the shear reinforcement for beams.
2.19 State the situations which require doubly reinforced beams.
2.20 Determine the moment of resistance for a given doubly reinforced section (given d’/d
– fsc values)
2.21 Calculate the allowable working load on singly reinforced and doubly reinforced
beam for the given span.
2.22 Calculate the development length of bars in compression and tension.
489
2.23 Sketch the detailing of reinforcement as per SP-34 showing the curtailment position
for main tension bars. State the importance of anchorage values of reinforcement.
2.24 Design a singly reinforced simply supported rectangular beam for the given grades of
materials, span and loadingfor flexure including shear design with the curtailment of
reinforcements and check for the deflection using simplified approach of the code.
3.1 Distinguish oneway slabs and twoway slabs.

3.2 List the types of slabs based on support condition.
3.3 State the general design requirements of slabs as per IS 456 – 2000.
3.4 State the functions of distribution steel in slabs.
3.5 Sketch the general reinforcement details for a a) oneway slab simply supported on
two parallel sides b) oneway slab simply supported on four sides c) two way simply
supported slab d) one-way continuous slab e) cantilever slab continuous over a
support and f) slab cantilevering from the top of a beam.
3.6 Mark the edge strip and middle strip of a twoway slab.
3.7 Sketch the general reinforcement details for a continuous two way slab for its edge
strip and middle strip using straight bars and bent up bars.
3.8 Design one-way slab for given grades of materials, loads and span for flexure and
including shear check, check for deflection using stiffness criteria.
3.9 Sketchload distribution in two-way slabs. Design two-way slab with different end
conditions for flexure including shear using B.M and S.F coefficients. Provide
torsional reinforcement in the restrained slabs. Check the deflection using simplified
approach of stiffness criteria.
4.1 Distinguish a T- beam and L- beam.

4.2 List the advantages of a T- beam.
4.3 State the formula for effective width of flange of a T- beam and L- beam as per IS
456 – 2000.
4.4 Calculate the effective width of flange of an isolated T- beam as per IS 456 – 2000.
4.5 Describe the three cases of determining neutral axis of T-beams with sketches and
notations.
4.6 Calculate the depth of neutral axis and moment of resistance of the given T section
using the expressions given in the code.
4.7 Calculate the minimum and maximum reinforcement in T- beams as per 456 – 2000.
5.1 Explain the behavior of continuous slabs and beams subjected to loading.
5.2 List the advantages of continuous beams or slabs.
490
5.3 Draw the line diagram of a continuous slab or beam and indicate the bending moment
and shear force values at salient points as per IS 456 – 2000.
5.4 Show the position of sagging (+ve) and hogging (-ve) bending moments along the
continuous beam or slab.
5.5 Sketch the general reinforcement details for a continuous beam or slab.
5.6 Calculates the B.M and S.F of continuous beams and slabs (Minimum of three spans)
at critical sections using B.M and S.F coefficients given in the code.
5.7 Classify the stairs based on the structural behavior or support condition.
5.8 Sketch the detailing of reinforcement in stairs spanning longitudinally (Dog legged
staircase).
6.1 Define a column/ compression member

6.2 Differentiate column, strut, pedestal, post
6.3 State the necessity of providing reinforcement in column.
6.4 Explain the behavior of column under loading
6.5 Define and calculate the effective length of column for different end conditions as per
theory and as per code.
6.6 Classify the columns based on type of reinforcement, loading and slenderness ratio.
6.7 Calculate the slenderness limits for column to avoid buckling of column.
6.8 Calculate minimum eccentricity of column.
6.9 Calculate the load carrying capacity of a short column with lateral ties and with
helical reinforcement as per IS 456 – 2000.
6.10 Differentiate between short and long columns and understand their failure behavior.
6.11 State the design requirements of columns as per IS 456 – 2000.
6.12 Designs a Short Square, rectangular, circular column with lateral ties and helical
reinforcement (subjected to axial load only).
6.13 Define Footing and States different types of Footings (Square/ Rectangular Isolated
footings of Uniform/Tapered sections).
6.14 Calculate the minimum depth of foundation using Rankine’s formula.
6.15 State the code provisions for the design of R.C.C footings.
6.16 Explain the procedure of checking the footing for one-way shear, two-way shear,
bearing stress and for development length.
6.17 Design of an isolated square footing of uniform thickness under a
rectangular/square/circular column for flexure only.
Note: Students may be encouraged to use design aids SP-16, SP-34 and SP-23 for design of
slabs, beams for general practice. I.S.456 – 2000 is allowed in the Examination
491
15. Visit to nearby multi-storeyed building/Apartment and collect the structural details.
16. Design the structural elements-Beams, slabs and columns for residential building (One and
Two storey building).
17. Prepare a case study of failure of structures due to wrong design, use of poor quality of
materials and faulty construction methods.
18. Understand the concept of formwork for different types of buildings and collect information
about stripping times for forms for different conditions.
19. Collect the IS codes related to Design of RCC structures, make a report and present it
22. Quiz
24. Surprise Test

Ethics
Basic knowledge
Communication
Engineering Tools
Lifelong learning

Linked PO
CO1 1 3 3 2 1 2 1,2,4,7,10
CO2 2 2 2 1 3 3 1,2,5,7,9,10
CO3 1 3 2 1 2 2 1,2,5,7,9,10
CO4 3 1 2 2,7,10
CO5 3 2 1 3 2,4,7,10
CO6 1 3 2 3 1 3 3 1,2,4,5,7,9,10
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks

Slip Test 1 1 and 2
492 5
Assignments 5
Seminars 5
Total 60
493

question
MID SEM-I EXAM
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)

question

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
494
DCE V semester Mid Semester-I Examination
Course Code:18C-501C Duration:1 Hour

Course Name: Reinforced Concrete Structures Max.Marks:20 Marks
PART-A
1. Define design strength of material and deign load.

2. Find modulus of elasticity of concrete as per IS 456-2000 for M30 concrete.
3. List various forms of shear reinforcement in beams.
4. Define development length.
PART-B
5(a) Explain how the maximum strength of concrete in outermost fibre of compression istaken as
0.446fck.
(OR)
5(b) Explain limit state of collapse and serviceability conditions.
6(a)Find the limiting moment of resistance of a singly reinforced beam of size 200 x400mm, use M20
grade concrete and Fe415 steel, effective cover toreinforcement is 25mm.
(OR)
6(b)Calculate the spacing of two legged 8mm stirrups as per min. shear reinforcement for a beam
350mm wide and 500mm overall depth of Fe415 steel.
PART-C
7(a) Explain the stress bock diagram for RC beam indicating values.
(OR)
7(b) Draw the stress- strain diagram for concrete,mild steel bars and cold deformed bars.
8(a) A Singly reinforced RC beam simply supported over an effective span of 4m, carries a udl of
10kN/m over entire span. Design the beam using M20 grade concrete and Fe415 steel.
(OR)
8(b)Singly reinforced rectangular beam 300 X 600 mm effective depth carries a uniformly distributed
load of 40kN/m including its self-weight over simply supported span of 6 mand is reinforced
with 6 bars of 20 mm diameter of which 2 bars are curtailed near thesupport. Design the shear
reinforcement. Use M20 grade concrete and Fe415 steel.
495
DCE V semester Mid Semester-II Examination
Course Code:18C-501C Duration:1 Hour

PART-A
Answer all questions. Each Question carries one mark4x1 = 4 Marks
1) Distinguish between one way and two way slabs.
2) Write the codal provisions for maximum spacing of bars in slabs.
3) List any two advantages of T beams.
4) State the conditions needed to design a beam as a T-Beam.
PART-B
5(a) How do you check for shear and deflection in design of slabs?
(OR)
5(b) Draw the cross section of a cantilever slab (sunshade) and show the reinforcement details.
6(a) What are the advantages of T-beams? Give the equations for the effective flangewidth of isolated
T and L beams.
(OR)
6(b)Find effective flange width of a T beam with the following details. Effective span =5.5m, centre
to centre distance of adjacent panels = 4m, Breadth of web = 300mm,thickness of slab =
120mm.
PART-C
7(a) Design a simply supported RCC slab for a verandah of clear dimensions 3 X 9 m.
widthofsupports is 230mm. Superimposed load is 3 kN/Sq.m and weight of finishes is
1.0kN/Sq.m. Use M 25 concrete and HYSD bars of Fe 415 grade.
(OR)
7(b)Design a simply supported RC slab for a room of clear size 4 X 3.5 m. Superimposed load is
2kN/Sq.m and weight of finishes is 1.0 kN/Sq.m. The corners of slab are notheld down. Width of
supports is 230mm. Use M25 grade concrete and Fe 415 steel.
8(a) A T beam of effective flange width 750 mm, thickness of slab 120mm, width of rib250mm, and
effective depth 450mm is reinforced with 3500 Sq.mm of tension steel. Calculate the moment
of resistance of the section. M20 grade concrete are Fe415 bars are used.
(OR)
8(b)A T beam of effective flange width 800 mm, thickness of slab 90 mm, width of rib230mm, and
effective depth 400mm is reinforced with 5 numbers of 20mm diameterbars. Calculate the
moment of resistance of the section. M20 grade concrete are Fe250bars are used.
496
DCE V Semester
Course Code: 18C-501C Duration:2 Hours

PART-A
Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark. 8 x 1= 8 Marks
1) Define characteristic compressive strength of concrete.
2) Write the code provisions for maximum spacing of bars in slabs.
3) How do you calculate minimum eccentricity in design of columns?
4) Define development length.
5) State the formula to calculate effective span in case of a continuous beam.
6) State the advantages of a continuous beam.
7) What are the specifications for lateral ties in a column?
8) State the formula for calculating minimum depth of foundation using Rankine’s formula
PART – B
Answer four questions. Each question carries three marks 4x 3 M = 12M

9(a)Calculate the limiting percentage of tension reinforcement if M20 concrete and Fe 415 steel
are used.
(OR)
9(b) Draw the line diagram of a continuous beam and indicate salient points with bending
moment equations as per code at those locations.
10(a) Draw the cross section and stress diagrams for three cases of a T beam.
(OR)
10(b) List any six codal provisions for longitudinal reinforcement in design of columns.
11(a) Find effective flange width of a T beam with the following details. Effective span =
5.5m,centre to centre distance of adjacent panels = 4m, Breadth of web = 300mm, thickness
ofslab = 120mm.
(OR)
11(b) A continuous RCC rectangular beam of size 250 X 500mm overall is supported on300 X
300mm masonry columns at clear intervals of 3 m. Calculate the effective spans.
12(a) A short axially loaded column of size 300 X 350 mm is reinforced with 8 bars of 20mm
diameter Fe 415 grade steel. Concrete is M 30 grade. Calculate the load carrying capacityof
column.
(OR)
12(b) List and explain the steps for design of isolated square footing.
497
PART – C
Answer four questions. Each question carries five marks 4x 5 M = 20 M

13 (a) A singly reinforced rectangular section of size 230 X 450mm effective is reinforced with4
numbers of 16mm diameter bars in tension. Factored shear force at the section is 120 kN.State
whether shear reinforcement is required or not. Concrete is M20 grade.
(OR)
13 (b) Calculate the maximum bending moment at support next to end support for a continuousbeam
as per IS 456-2000. Size of beam is 300X500mm overall, effective span = 4m, imposedload
(not fixed) = 10kN/m, , imposed load (fixed) = 15kN/m excluding self weight, effective cover
= 40mm.
14 (a) A T beam of effective flange width 800 mm, thickness of slab 90 mm, width of rib 230mm
andeffective depth 400mm is reinforced with 5 numbers of 20mm diameter bars. Calculate the
moment of resistance of the section. M20 grade concrete are Fe250 bars are used.
(OR)
14 (b) Design a short Reinforced Concrete rectangular column with one side as 300mm to carry an
axial load of 2000 kN. Use M25 concrete and Fe 415 steel.
15 (a) Draw the detailing of reinforcement for a continuous slab with cranking of main bars.
(OR)
15 (b) Calculate the maximum shear force at end support for a continuous beam as per IS 456-
2000.Size of beam is 300X600mm overall, effective span = 4m, imposed load (not fixed) =
10kN/m,imposed load (fixed) = 12kN/m excluding self weight, effective cover = 40mm.
16 (a) Design a circular column of diameter 400 mm with lateral ties. Unsupported length ofcolumnis
3m, and is subjected to a working load if 1200 kN. The column is effectively held inpositionat
both ends but not restrained against rotation Use M25 concrete and Fe 415 steel.
(OR)
16 (b) A RC Column of size 300mm X 300mm carries a load of 750 kN. The safe bearing capacity of
soil is 200 kN/m2. Design an isolated square column footing of uniform thickness. Use M25 grade
concrete and Fe 415 grade steel. Check forshear, development length and bearing pressure are not
required.
498
Course Title: Construction Management and Course Code : 18C-502C

Enterprenureship
Pre requisites
This
course requires the knowledge of Building materials and construction practice and Quantity surveying
Course Outcomes
CO1 Realize the purpose of Management in construction organization and relate the Organization
structure of any engineering department/public sector, duties of different officers
CO2 Adapt scheduling technique for construction project for effective utilisation of resources
CO3 Acquire Knowledge about the Contracts, Tenders and able to select the suitable Contractor
from a tender
CO4 Management of Resources in Construction Industry
CO5 Develop insight to discover and create entrepreneurial opportunities and the expertise to
successfully launch, manage, and grow their own venture.
CO6 Manage the Human relations, interpersonal relationship for effective work culture and
performance in organization,

No R U A
1 Introduction and
Organizational Aspects
10
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
2 Management Tools 10
3 Contracts, Tenders&
10
Arbitration
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
4 Management of Resources Q4
in construction industry 10
5 Stores and Financial Q9(b), Q13(b),
10 Q5,Q6
Management Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
6 Entrepreneurship and Q10(b), Q14(b),
Professional Ethics
10 Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8
Course Contents
UNIT-1:Introduction and Organizational Aspects Duration: 10Periods(L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
499
a) Stages of construction project, Importance of construction and construction industry,
Indian construction industry need of construction management, Definition and concept
of management.
b) Organizational structure of a state government engineering department. – duties of
various officers – Preliminary estimates – detailed estimate – budget provision –
administrative approval and technical sanction – powers of sanction.
c) Public sector organizations: Organizational structure of a construction company –
Duties of Chief Engineer.
UNIT- 2: Management Tools Duration:10Periods(L: 7.5 – T:2.5)

a) Different Management Tools – Gantt Bar chart, modified Gantt bar chart – Limitations
of bar charts – Introduction to CPM and PERT – advantages of CPM and PERT – terms
used in CPM – formation of network – Basic rules – Problems on determination of
critical path – limitations of CPM – comparison of CPM and PERT.
UNIT- 3:Contracts, Tenders and Arbitration Duration: 10 Periods(L: 7.5 – T:2.5)

a) Contracts – Legality of contracts – contract document – types of contracts – piece work
contracts – item rate contracts – Lump sum contracts – percentage contracts –
negotiated rates – departmental execution of works – merits and limitations of each
contract system – conditions of contract for civil engineering works.
b) Tenders – Necessity of tenders – Sealed tenders – tender notice – tender documents –
Earnest Money and Security Deposits – Opening of tenders – comparative statement –
acceptance of tenders – work order – contract agreement – Measurement book-rules
for recording measurements-pre measurement and check measurement-preparation of
bills-modes of payment-hand receipts-recoveries to be made from bills.
c) Arbitration-Need for arbitration
UNIT- 4:Management of Resources in construction industry

Duration:10Periods(L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
a) Plant and Equipment – Need for mechanization – Optimum utilization of plant and
equipment – Preventive maintenance –Overhauling and replacement
b) Accidents in Construction industry- Causes and effects of accidents- preventive
measures- Personal protective equipments(PPE)
c) MIS-Management information system-Design of MIS-Role of MIS-Human Resources
accountancy-advantages-Social Audit
UNIT- 5:Stores and Financial Management Duration:10 Periods(L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
500
a) Stores: Classification of stores-general stock items, consumables and non-
consumables-receipts-issues-transfer order entry-MAS account-indent-invoice-stock
register-verification of stores-accounting for shortages and surplus-write off
b) Financial Management-Finance as resource-purpose of cost control-stages of cost
control-pre contract stage and post contract stage-financial control at head office level
and site level
UNIT - 6:Entrepreneurship and Professional Ethics Duration: 10Periods(L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
a) Entrepreneur – concept, definition, role, expectation – characteristics of entrepreneur –
risks and rewards of an entrepreneur-government policies introduced to finance
entrepreneur
b) Human relations and performance in organization – Understand self and others for
effective behaviour – Interpersonal relationship for effective work culture – Need for
professional ethics.
Reference Books
1) Management in construction Industry – P.Dharwadker. Oxford & IBH Publishing
Co. Pvt., Ltd.,
2) Construction Management And Accounts –V.N.Vazirani &S.P.Chandola. Khanna
Publishers.
3) Construction Planning and Management. U.K. Shrivastava Galgotia Publications Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi.
4) Construction Management and Planning - B. Sengupta& H. Guna Tata Mc. Graw
Hill Publishing Company Ltd.
5) Construction Management and Accounts. Harpal Singh. Tata Mc. Graw Hill
Publishing Company Ltd.
6) Construction project management: Theory and Practice, 2nd edition, 2016, Kumar
NirajJha, Pearson Education Publishers.
7) Project management for engineering and Construction, By Garold D Oberlender, 2nd
edition McGraw Hill Education (India), Pvt. Ltd.

1.1. Describe a Construction Project.

1.2. List the phases of Construction Project.
1.3. State the importance of Construction and Construction Industry
1.4. Define Management.
501
1.5. State the functions of Management.
1.4 Give the organizational structure of any Engineering department (Government).
1.5 List the duties of different officers of an Engineering department.
1.6 Define preliminary estimate, detailed estimate, administrative approval and technical
sanction.
1.7 State the limit of powers of sanction by various officers in an Engineering
Department (Government).
1.8 Give the Organizational structure of a public sector construction company.
1.9 List the duties of Chief Engineer in a construction company.
2.1 Define CPM and PERT.
2.2 State the advantages of CPM and PERT.
2.3 Explain the use of bar chart and its limitations
2.4 Define: Network, activity, event, duration, dummy activity, EST, EFT, LST, LFT,
total float, free float, critical path.
2.5 Prepare network diagram using basic rules of network formation.
2.6 Calculate time on CPM network identifying critical activities, critical path, free float
and total float.
2.7 State the limitations of CPM.
2.8 Distinguish between CPM and PERT.

2.9 List the software tools available in project management
3.1 Define contract

3.2 State the contents of a contract document.
3.3 Explain different contract systems available for construction works.
3.4 List the merits and limitations of each of the contract systems.
3.5 List the general conditions of contract for a civil engineering project.
3.6 Define tender and explain the need for calling of tenders.
3.7 List the steps involved in fixing up agency through tender system.
3.8 Draft a tender notice for a work
3.9 Prepare tender documents.
3.10 Explain the need of earnest money deposit and security deposit.
3.11 Prepare a comparative statement.
3.12 Explain the method of selecting a contractor from the tenders.
3.13 List out the conditions of contract agreements.
3.14 State the importance of measurement book and rules to be followed
3.15 State the need for pre measurement and check measurement
3.16 Identify the types of payments and bills/payments to the contractor
502
3.17 List the recoveries to be made from the bills
3.18 Arbitration and need for Arbitration
4.1 Explain the scope of materials management

4.2 Explain the need for mechanization.
4.3 Explain the need for optimum utilization of plant and equipment.
4.4 Explain about the preventive maintenance of plant and equipment.
4.5 Explain causes and effects of accidents in construction industry and preventive
measures.
4.6 Explain about Management information system(MIS)
4.7 State the factors involved in design of MIS
4.8 Explain the role of MIS
4.9 Explain the importance of Human Resources accountancy and its advantages
4.10 Explain the importance of Social Audit
5.1 Identify the different types of stores materials
5.2 State the classification of items held in general stock
5.3 Explain Transfer entry order
5.4 State the need for materials at site account.
5.5 Explain the terms indent and invoice.
5.6 Explain the importance of periodical inspection of stores.
5.7 Explain the method of accounting for shortages and surplus in stores
5.8 Explain the procedure for write off of equipment
5.9 State the importance of finance as a resource.
5.10 State the purpose of cost control.
5.11 Explain the different stages at which cost control can be achieved.
5.12 Explain the financial control at head office level and site level.
6.1 Define the words entrepreneur and entrepreneurship.
6.2 Outline the concepts of entrepreneurship.
6.3 State the role of entrepreneur in economic development.
6.4 List the characteristics of an entrepreneur.
6.5 Evaluate the risks and rewards of an entrepreneur.
6.6 List Government policies introduced to motivate entrepreneurship or to provide
financial help
6.7 State the role of Human relations and performance in organization.
6.8 State the role of Interpersonal relationship for effective work culture.
503
1. Visit any construction contracting firm and interact about the present tendering process (e-
tendering) and awarding of contract
2. Visit any nearby construction site & interact with the construction team regarding type of
structure & its organization structure
3. Collection of tender notices published in newspapers for various items of civil engineering
works (at least 5) write salient features of them.
4. Prepare a planning schedule for the nearby ongoing construction activity with the help of
available open source project management software.
5. Visit any nearby PWD/ R & B/ Irrigation dept. office or any construction company, collect
thedocuments (BOQ, M B, Tender, SR, lead statement) related to the project and prepare
reporton it and also organizational setup at divisional office
6. Collect quality management standards pertaining to ISO 9001, ISO 14001 & OHSAS 18001
& prepare a report.
7. Drafting a tender notice for construction of a civil engineering work (W. B. M. Road,
residential is building).
8. Preparation of tender document for the building. (detailed estimate prepared for R.C.C.
building in estimating and costing shall be used)
9. Collection of various account forms from PWD & Prepare a report on it.
10. Prepare detailed specifications for the following: a) Building construction system. b)
Irrigationengineering system. C) Transportation engineering system. D) Environment
engineeringsystem.
11. Study the application of CPM & PERT technique in planning software.
12. Prepare a report on women entrepreneurship, rural entrepreneurship, Agri-entrepreneurship.
13. Collect the various entrepreneurship development programs.
14. Collect the details required for getting a contract license from corporation and prepare a
reporton it.
504
Linked PO
Engineering Tools
Basic knowledge
Knowledge
Communication
Lifelong learning
Ethics
Experiments and
Environment &
Engineer and
Individual and
Discipline
sustainability
Team work
society
practice
CO1 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 2,3,5,7,8,9,10
CO2 2 2 2 1 2 2,3,4
CO3 1 2 1 1 1 2,3,4,5,7,10
CO4 2 2 2,8
CO5 3 2 3 3 2 3 1,5,7,8,9,10
CO6 3 3 3 3 3 5,7,8,9,10
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks

Assignments 5
Seminars 5
Total 60
question
MID SEM-I EXAM
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
505
MID SEM-II EXAM
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
question

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
506
DCE V SEMESTER

Course Name: Construction Management & Entrepreneurship Max.Marks:20
PART-A
1) List the phases of construction project
2) Define Management
3) Define (i) Event (ii) Activity
4) State any two limitations of CPM
PART-B
5(A) State the need of construction management

(OR)
5(B) Write in brief about Preliminary estimates and detailed estimates
6(A) Write a short note on Bar chart and its limitations

(OR)
6(B)Define i) Critical Path ii) EFT iii) LFT
PART-C
7(A) Give the Organizational structure of a public sector construction company

(OR)
7(B) List the duties of Deputy executive engineer
8(A) Distinguish between CPM and PERT

(OR)
8(B) A project has eleven activities , the expected time of each activity is given below
Activity 1-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 3-6 5-6 5-7 4-7 6-8 7-8 8-9
Duration 4 3 5 6 4 7 8 8 5 7 9
Draw the project network and identify the critical path, tabulate the values of
EST,LST,EFT,LFT and Float
507
DCE V SEMESTER

PART-A
1) Define Contract
2) What do you mean by sealed tender and when is it preferred
3) What is social audit
4) State the need for mechanization
PART-B
5(A) Write short notes on arbitration and need for it
(OR)
5(B) Write briefly about check measurement
6(A) Outline five points stating the need for optimum utilization of plant and equipment
(OR)
6(B) What are the salient features of MIS?
PART-C
7(A) Explain the method of selecting a contractor from the tenders

(OR)
7(B) Write any five rules while recording measurements in measurement books
8(A) Explain about preventive maintenance of plant and equipment

(OR)
8(B) Explain the role of MIS in human resource accountancy
508
DCE V SEMESTER
PART-A
1) Define construction management
2) What do you mean by contract document and arbitration
3) State the necessity of Tender
4) What do you understand by Activity and EST
5) What is bin card and details to be entered in bin cards
6) Define indent and invoice
7) What are Ethics
8) Define Enterpreneur
PART-B
Answer four questions Each question carries three marks 4 x 3 = 12 Marks
9(a) Draw the Organizational structure of any government engineering department

(OR)
9(b) Give the classification of stores
10(a) What is tender, sealed tender and list any three tender documents to be submitted
(OR)
10(b) State the need for professional Ethics
11(a) Write briefly about Transfer order entry in stores

(OR)
11(b) What is the purpose of cost control in financial management
12(a) Brief entrepreneurship and expectations of entrepreneurship

(OR)
12(b) Illustrate the ethical principles to be followed by an organization
PART-C
13(a) A project has eleven activities , the expected time of each activity is given below
Activity 1-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 3-6 5-6 5-7 4-7 6-8 7-8 8-9
Duration 4 3 5 6 4 7 8 8 5 7 9
Draw the project network and identify the critical path, tabulate the values of
EST,LST,EFT,LFT and Float
(OR)
13(b) Write briefly about verification of stores
14(a)List any four contract systems and explain any two contract systems in brief
509
(OR)
14(b) Brief the role of entrepreneur in economic development and any five characteristics of
entrepreneur
15(a) Explain about financial control at pre-contract and post contract stage
(OR)
15(b) Explain the procedure of write-off
16(a) Discuss any four risks of an entrepreneur

(OR)
16(b) Elaborate the role of financial institutions in entrepreneurial development
510

Course Title: Water Supply and Course Code : 18C-503C
Sanitary Engineering
Methodology: Lecture+Assignments Total Contact Periods : 60
Pre requisites
This subject requires the basic knowledge of the course Engineering Chemistry and Environmental
Studies is needed.
Course Outcomes

CO1 Estimate water requirement for public water supply scheme and Illustrate the different
sources and various methods of conveyance of water
CO2 Ascertain the quality of water and study the various stages of purification of water to
select the appropriate treatment method.
CO3 Identify the suitable distribution system for a locality and their related appurtenances and
plan the arrangement of water supply in a building.
CO4 Categorize the types of sewage, sewerage system, surface drain and estimate the quantity
of sewage.
CO5 Summarize the cross section of sewers, sewer appurtenances and categorize the sewage
characteristics, methods involved in sewage treatment

No R U A
1 Water Supply Scheme, Quantity of
water. Sources and Conveyance of 08
Water. Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
2 Quality and Purification of Water 12
3 Distribution System and Water
12
supply arrangements in buildings
4 Introduction to Wastewater Q4 Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
Engineering and Quantity of 08
Sewage
5 Sewers and Sewer appurtenances Q9(b), Q13(b),
08 Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
6 Sewage Characteristics, and Q10(b), Q14(b),
treatment
12 Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8
Course Contents
511
UNIT - 1: Water Supply Scheme, Quantity of Water,Sources and Conveyance of Water
Duration: 08Periods(L: 6.0 – T:2.0)
a) Need for protected water supply – objectives of a protected water supply scheme – Flow chart
of a typical water supply scheme.
b) Total quantity of water for a town, per capita demand and factors affecting demand –
Variation in demand– seasonal, daily and hourly variation.
c) Forecasting population by arithmetical, geometrical and incremental increase methods –
Problems on above methods.
d) Surface sources – Lakes, streams, rivers and impounded reservoirs.
e) Underground sources – Springs, wells, infiltration wells and galleries.
f) Types of intakes – Reservoir, River, Canal and Lake intakes.
g) Pipe Materials available – C.I. Pipes, Concrete Pipes, G.I. Pipes and Plastic Pipes (PVC
&HDPE)
UNIT - 2: Quality and Purification of Water Duration: 12Periods(L: 9.0 – T:3.0)
a) Impurities of water – need for laboratory tests – sampling.

b) Tests on water – physical, chemical and bacteriological tests.
c) Flow diagram of different treatment units.
d) Objectives – aeration, sedimentation, filtration and disinfection
e) Process of sedimentation with coagulation.
f) Filtration – Construction and operation of rapid sand and pressure filters.
g) Disinfection of water Methods – necessity and methods of chlorination – pre, post,
super, double and break point chlorination.
NOTE: No design of treatment units
UNIT - 3: Distribution system and water supply arrangements in a Building

a) Requirements of Distribution system –Systems of distribution – gravity system,
combined system, direct pumping.
b) Methods of supply - Intermittent and continuous.
c) Types of layouts– grid, radial and ring system, their merits &demerits and their
suitability.
d) Location and functioning of:
i. Sluice valves.
ii. Check valves or reflux valves.
iii. Air valves.
512
iv. Drain valves or blow-off valves.
v. Scour valves.
vi. Fire Hydrants
vii. Water meters
f) Definition of terms: water main, service pipe, communication pipe, supply pipe,
distribution pipe, back flow and air gap.
g) General layout of water supply arrangement for single and multi-storeyed buildings
as per I.S Code of practice.
UNIT - 4: Introduction to Wastewater Engineering and Quantity of Sewage

Duration: 08Periods(L:6.0 – T:2.0)
a) Define the terms: Sullage, sewage, sewer, sewerage, refuse, garbage ,Strength of
sewage
b) Objectives of providing sewerage works.
c) System of sewage collection and disposal –water carriage systems.
d) Types of sewerage systems and their suitability – separate, combined and partially
separate systems.
e) Surface drains– requirements, shapes and their merits, demerits &construction.
f) Simple problems on design of sewers (running half full only), using Manning’s and
Hazen Williams formulae.
UNIT -5: Sewers and Sewer Appurtenances Duration: 08Periods(L:6.0 – T:2.0)

a) Different shapes of cross section for sewers – circular and non-circular – figures,
merits and demerits.
b) List Types of sewers based on material – stoneware, cast iron, cement concrete
sewers and A.C Pipes
c) Brief description, location, function and construction of
i) Manholes
ii) Drop manhole
iii) Street inlets
iv) Catch basins
v) Flushing tanks
vi) Regulators
vii) Inverted siphon
UNIT -6: Sewage Characteristics and treatment

a) Strength of sewage, sampling of sewage, characteristics of sewage – physical,
chemical and biological.
513
b) Analysis of sewage – significance of the following tests for (No test details)
(i) Solids (ii) C.O.D (iii) B.O.D
H
.(iv) P Value v) Chlorides
c) Preliminary treatment - Functions of following units.
i) Screens (ii) Skimming tanks (iii) Grit chambers
d) Primary treatment - Brief description of Plain sedimentation
e) Secondary treatment - Brief description of
i) Trickling filters ii) Activated sludge process
f) Miscellaneous treatments – septic tank with soak pit.
NOTE: No design of treatment units
Reference Books
1) Environmental Engineering – G.S. Birdie

2) Elements of Public Health engineering – K.N. Duggal
3) Environmental Engineering – Baljeet Kapoor
4) Public Health Engineering – S.K. Hussain
5) Water supply and sanitary Engineering – V.N. Vazirani.
6) Environmental Engineering – N.N. Basak /TMH
7) Water Supply Engineering – S.K. Garg
8) Environmental Engineering – N. Srinivasulu
9) Environmental Engineering – S.R. Laxmi Prasad
1.1 State the need of protected water supply.

1.2 List the objectives of a protected water supply scheme.
1.3 Draw the flow chart of a typical water supply scheme of a town.
1.4 List the factors affecting per capita demand of a town / city.
1.5 Explain the variation in demand for water supply.
1.6 Estimate the quantity of water required by a town.
514
1.7 State the necessity of forecasting population in the design of water supply scheme.
1.8 State different methods of forecasting population
1.9 Work out simple problems on forecasting population by different methods
1.10 State different types of surface and subsurface sources of water.
1.11 Explain with sketches:
a) Infiltration galleries.
b) Infiltration wells.
1.12 Describe with sketches the intakes for collection of water(reservoir, river, canal and lake
intakes)
1.13 Lists different types of pipes used for conveyance of water.
2.1 State the different types of impurities present in water.
2.2 State the need for laboratory tests for testing water.
2.3 Explain the method of obtaining samples for testing.
2.4 List the different tests for analyzing quality of water.
2.5 Define: E-coli index, most probable number (MPN).
2.6 State the various water borne diseases in India.
2.7 State the objectives of treatment of water.
2.8 Sketch the overall layout of a water treatment plant indicating the different stages.
2.9 State the objects of aeration, plain sedimentation, sedimentation with coagulation, filtration
and disinfection.
2.10 Explain the process of sedimentation with coagulation.
2.11 Describe the construction and operation of rapid sand and pressure filters.
2.12 List various methods of disinfection of water.
2.13 Explain the different forms of Chlorination (Pre, post, super, double and break-point
chlorination).
*NOTE: No design of treatment units
3.1 State the requirements of good distribution system.

3.2 Explain with sketches the different systems of distribution.
3.3 Explain different methods of water supply system with their merits and demerits.
3.4 Explain with sketches the different layouts (Grid, radial and ring) in distribution system.
3.5 List the merits and demerits of layouts (Grid, radial and ring) with their suitability for a
given locality.
3.6 List various appurtenances used in a distribution system of water supply system to a
town.
3.7 Explain with sketches the location and functioning of various appurtenances used in a
distribution system of water supply.
515
3.8 Define terminology used while designing and construction of water supply arrangements
in buildings.
3.9 Explain the general layout of water supply connections of buildings with mains
3.10 Layout of water supply arrangement for single and multi-storeyed buildings as per I.S
Code.
4.1 Define the terms: Sullage, sewage, sewer, sewerage, refuse, garbage.
4.2 List the objectives of sewerage works.
4.3 State the various methods of sewage collection works and explain about water carriage
system
4.4 Explain different sewerage systems and their suitability.
4.5 Compare the three systems of sewerage.
4.6 List the requirements of good surface drains.
4.7 Describe different types of surface drains with their merits and demerits.
4.8 Work out simple problems on design of sewers running half full only.
5.1 State the various shapes of sewers.
5.2 List the circular and noncircular sewers with sketches.
5.3 List any two merits and demerits of each shape.
5.4 Mention the different materials used for sewers.
5.5 List the various sewer appurtenances on a sewer line.
5.6 Explain the construction, function and location of the different sewer appurtenances.
6.1 Define strength of sewage.
6.2 Describe the method of sampling sewage.
6.3 State the physical, chemical and biological characteristics of sewage.
6.4 Define C.O.D and B.O.D.
6.5 State the significance of the following tests to Analyse sewage.
i) Solids ii) C.O.D. iii) B.O.D. iv) PH -Value v)
Chlorides.
6.6 State the objects of sewage treatment.
6.7 Draw the conventional sewage treatment plant of a town and indicate the main function
of each unit.
6.8 State the function of screens, skimming tanks and grit chambers.
6.9 Explain briefly the working of screens, grit chambers, skimming tanks.
6.10 Describe with sketch the following treatment works.
a) Trickling filters.
b) Activated sludge process.
6.11 Explain with sketch the treatment of sewage by septic tank and soak pit.
516
1. Estimate the total quantity of water required for a town/locality/Institute.

2. Visit nearby Intake works of water of your place and collect details.
3. Charts are prepared for BIS and WHO quality standards for drinking water.
4. Visit Water Treatment Plant and collect details of unit operations and processes involved in it.
5. Study the distribution system of water supply of your locality.
6. To visit a newly constructed building for plumbing works.
7. Estimate total quantities of sewage generated from a locality and design the sewage
discharge. Prepare a report on effects due to untreated disposal of municipal sewage
8. Prepare a report on performance of the existing sewage treatment plant at any hospital
9. Visit Sewage Treatment Plant and collect details each unit operations for treatment of
sewage and prepare the charts.
10. Prepare a mini project report for Sewerage System for a locality.
11. To conduct market survey of sanitary ware.
12. Treatment and reuse of automobile service station wastewater for vegetation
13. Impact of industrial solid wastes on soil and sub-surface water
14. Effects due to untreated disposal of municipal sewage
15. Quality study of sewage in your district
16. Soil-industrial effluent interaction and their engineering behaviour
19. Quiz
21. Surprise Test

Ethics
onCommunicati
Linked PO
and Team Individual
societyEngineer and
& Environment
knowledgeBasic
ToolsEngineering
learningLifelong
KnowledgeDiscipline
CO1 1 3 2 2 1,2,5,6
CO2 2 1 3 2 2,3,5,6
CO3 2 3 2 3 2 1,2,5,6,8
CO4 3 3 3 2 2,5,6,8
CO5 2 3 3 2 2,5,6,10
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks

517
Assignments 5
Seminars 5
Total 60
518
Sl. Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total

No Questions each Marks
question
MID SEM-I EXAM
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
question

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
519
DCE V semester

Course Name: Water supply and Sanitary Engineering Max.Marks:20 Marks
___________________________________________________________________________
PART-A
Answer ALL questions and each question carries one Mark 4 x 1 = 4 Marks
1. State any two needs of protected water supply

2. List out the variations in demand for water supply
3. Write any two objectives of treatment of water
4. Define aeration
PART-B
Answer two questions and each question carries three Marks 2 x 3 = 6 Marks
5(a). State different types of surface and sub-surface sources of water.
(OR)
5(b). Draw a flow chart of typical water supply scheme of a town
6(a). What is the process sedimentation with coagulation? Give two examples of coagulants
used.
(OR)
6 (b). State the objective of filtration and disinfection in water treatment
PART-C
Answer two questions and each question carries five Marks 2 x 5 = 10 Marks
7(a). Explain with a neat sketch canal intake.
(OR)
7(b).Estimate the population for the year 2021 from the following census data of a
town by arithmetic methods.
year 1981 1991 2001 2011

population 86400 98800 115700 130500
8(a). Draw layout of water treatment plant indicating the different stages.
(OR)
8(b). Write about Pre, Post and Super Chlorination.
520
DCE V semester
Corse Code:18C-503C Duration:1 hour

Course Name: Water supply and Sanitary Engineering Max.Marks:20
___________________________________________________________________________
PART-A
Answer ALL questions and each question carries one Mark 4 x 1 = 4 Marks
1. List any four appurtenances used in water supply distribution system

2. State the function of water main while making water supply arrangements in buildings
3.Mention any two shapes of surface drains.
4. Name the methods of sewage collection and disposal
PART-B
Answer two questions and each question carries three Marks 2 x 3 = 6 Marks
5(a). State any four requirements of good distribution system.

(OR)
5(b).Write two merits and two demerits of radial layout of distribution system
6(a). Write four requirements of good surface drains.
(OR)
6(b).Define i) Sewage ii) Sewer iii) Garbage
PART-C
Answer two questions and each question carries five Marks 2 x 5 = 10 Marks
7(a). Sketch reflux value and state the function of it.
(OR)
7(b).Draw layout of water supply arrangements for single storey building
8(a).Find the velocity flow in a sewer, which runs half full. Assume the value of coefficient
of Rugosity as 0.013 and bed slope of 1 in 100
(OR)
8(b). Write about partially separate sewerage system.
521
DCE V semester
Corse Code:18C-503C Duration:2 hours
Course Name: Water supply and Sanitary Engineering Max.Marks:40
PART-A
1) State any two objectives of protected water supply scheme

2) Define Communication pipe
3) What is strength of sewage
4) List any two methods of disinfection of water
5) Mention any two shapes of non-circular sewers
6) State the function of catch basins
7) What do you mean by COD in sewage analysis
8) List any two chemical characteristics of sewage
PART-B
Answer four questions and each question carries three Marks 4 x 3 = 12 Marks
9(a) What is disinfection of water and state its necessity in water treatment.
(OR)
9(b)State the different types of materials used for sewers
10(a)Write Manning’s formula for velocity and significance of terms used in it

(OR)
H
10(b)Brief the significance of P value in sewage analysis
11(a) What is the function of sewer appurtenances

i) Regulator ii) Flushing tank
(OR)
11(b) State the conditions where Circular sewer and Double egg sewer are commonly used
12(a) Write about BOD and its significance in sewage treatment

(OR)
12(b) What is activated sludge process.
PART C
Answer four questions and each question carries five Marks 4 x 5 = 20 Marks
13 (a) Explain the working of rapid sand filter

(OR)
13 (b) Sketch a drop manhole and label the parts
522
14(a) Distinguish between intermittent and continuous water supply
(OR)
14(b) Write briefly about working and use of trickling filters
15(a) Explain the construction of ordinary manhole

(OR)
15 (b) Write any two merits and demerits of any two sewers based on shape
16(a) Draw a Septic tank with soak pit and label it

(OR)
16(b) Brief about any two physical and chemical characteristics of sewage. Also mention the
related tests.
************
523

Course Title: Ground Improvement Techniques Course Code : 18C-504(A)
Semester: V Semester Course Group : Elective
Pre requisites
Basic Knowledge on Soil mechanics
Course Outcomes
CO1 Identify difficult ground conditions in engineering practice.
CO2 Identify different ground improvement techniques.
CO3 Recommendation of Site specific method of improvement and its design.
CO4 Propose wider use of techno – economical modification techniques such as

modifications by admixtures, Reinforced soil structures, Gabion walls,

No
R U A
1 Introduction to ground
8
modification
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
2 Methods of Ground
12
modification
3 Mechanical modification 10
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
4 Hydraulic modification 10 Q4
5 Cementing and chemical Q9(b), Q13(b),
12 Q5,Q6
modification Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
6 Modification by Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
inclusion and 8 Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
confinement
Total 60 8 8 8
524
Course Content
UNIT — I:Introduction to Ground Modification Duration: 08Periods(L:6 – T:2)
Need and objectives of ground improvement, classification of soil types in India- unfavorable ground
conditions- favorable ground conditions.
UNIT —II: Methods of Ground Modification Duration: 12Periods(L:9 – T:3)

Methods of Ground Modification: Classification of ground modification techniques -Mechanical,
Hydraulic, cementing and chemical methods, Geo synthetics- different types of geo synthetics-
applications of geo synthetics- suitability and feasibility.
UNIT — III: Mechanical Modification Duration: 10 Periods(L:7.5 – T:2.5)

Methods of shallow compaction -Tampers, rollers-methods of Deep Compaction Techniques-
Blasting, Vibrofloatation, Dynamic compaction and Compaction piles and their suitability.
UNIT — IV: Hydraulic Modification Duration: 10 Periods(L:7.5 – T:2.5)

Methods of dewatering open sumps and ditches, Well point systems, Electro osmosis, Vacuum
dewatering wells, drains –Horizontal and vertical drains- uses of drains in ground improvement
UNIT — V:Cementing and Chemical Modification Duration: 12 Periods(L:9.0 – T:3.0)
Modification by admixtures like cement, lime, fly ash, bitumen and calcium chloride- Grouting
Technology-grout materials-grout characteristics-grouting techniques- applications
UNIT — VI: Modification by Inclusions and Confinement
Duration: 8 Periods(L:6 – T:2)
Modification by Inclusions and Confinement – Concept of Soil reinforcement, reinforcing

materials, applications of soil reinforcement, stone columns, Concept of confinement, Gabion walls
Reference Books
1. Robert M. Koerner “Construction and Geotechnical methods in Foundation Engineering”,

Mc.Graw-Hill Pub. Co., New York, 1985.
2. Manfred R. Haussmann, “Engineering principles of ground modification”, Pearson Education
Inc. New Delhi, 2008.
3. F. G., Bell, “Engineering Treatment of Soils”, E& FN Spon, New York, 2006.
4. P. PurushothamaRaju, “ Ground Improvement Techniques” Laxmi Publications (P)
Limited, 2006.
5. Jie Han et. al., “Advances in ground Improvement” Allied Pub., 2009.
525
1. https://nptel.ac.in
2. https://swayam .gov .in

After completion of course, the student shall be able to
1.1 Appreciate the Need and objectives of ground improvement
1.2 Classify different soil types in India
1.3 Identify favorable and unfavorable ground conditions
2.1 Classify different methods of Ground modification
2.2 Explain Mechanical method of Ground modification and it’s suitability
2.3 Explain Hydraulic method of Ground modification and it’s suitability
2.4 Explain Physico-chemical method of Ground modification and it’s suitability
2.5 What is geo synthetics
2.6 Classify different types of geo synthetics
2.7 List the applications of geo synthetics
3.1 Define compaction
3.2 List various methods of compaction
3.3 Explain shallow compaction methods of Tampers and Rollers
3.4 Explain Deep Compaction methods of Blasting, Vibro floatation, Dynamic
compaction and Compaction piles
4.1 List various methods Dewatering
4.2 Explain open sumps and ditches method of dewatering
4.3 Explain Well point systems of dewatering
4.4 Explain Electro osmosis and Vacuum method of dewatering
4.5 Explain Electro osmosis and Vacuum method of dewatering
4.6 Explain briefly about Horizontal and vertical drains,
5.1 Define Cementing
5.2 Explain Modification by admixtures like cement, lime,
5.3 Explain Modification by fly ash and bitumen
5.4 Define grouting
5.5 List various grout materials and their suitability
5.6 Explain various grouting techniques
5.7 List applications of grouting
6.1 Define concept of soil reinforcement
6.2 List various reinforcing materials
526
6.3 Explain ground anchors and rock bolting
6.4 Explain about Concept of confinement
6.5 Explain about Gabion walls
10. Tech fest/Srujana for incubating the innovative ground improvement techniques.
11. Visit a site and study the nature of soils and it’s favorability for construction
12. Visit an unfavorable ground condition for pavement and suggest site specific ground
improvement technique
13. Visit an unfavorable ground condition for foundation of a building and suggest site
specific ground improvement technique
14. Poster presentation of unfavorable ground condition for pavement before and after
ground improvement
15. Poster presentation of unfavorable ground condition foundation of a building before
and after ground improvement
Engineering Tools
Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge
Ethics
Communication

Linked PO
CO1 3 2 2 2 2 1 2,3,4,6,9,10
CO2 2 2 2 2 2 2,3,4,5,6
CO3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2,4,5,6,7,10
CO4 3 2 2 2 2,5,7,9
Internal Evaluation
527
Test Units Marks
Assignments 5
Seminars 5
Total 60

question
MID SEM-I EXAM
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)

question
528

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
529
DCE V semester
Course Code: 18C-504E (A) Duration:1 hour

Course Name: Ground Improvement Techniques Max.Marks:20 Marks
PART-A
1) Define Ground improvement.

2) List out any two soil types in India.
3) State any two methods of Ground modification.
4) What is Hydraulic modification?
PART-B
5(a) State any three objectives of ground improvement.

(OR)
5(b) Write a brief note on Unfavorable ground conditions
6(a) Write about the Classification of ground modification techniques

(OR)
6(b) Write a brief note on Hydraulic modification
PART-C
7(a) Explain favorable ground conditions for construction

(OR)
7(b) Explain unfavorable ground conditions for construction
8(a) Explain the factors to be considered while selection of appropriate Ground Improvement
technique
(OR)
8(b) Explain geo synthetics and write different types of geo synthetics.
530

DCE V semester
Course Code: 18C-504E (A) Duration:1 hour

Course Name: Ground Improvement Techniques Max.Marks:20 Marks
PART-A
1) Define compaction
2) List any two methods of Deep compaction
3) List any two methods of Hydraulic modifications
4) Write any two uses of drains in ground improvement
PART-B
5(a) Write about shallow compaction methods of Tampers and Rollers

(OR)
5(b) Write about Vibro floatation method of compaction
6(a) Write open sumps and ditches method of dewatering.
(OR)
6(b) Write a Note on horizontal Drains.
PART-C
7(a) Write the suitability criteria of various methods of compaction.

(OR)
7(b) Explain Compaction piles and their suitability.
8 (a) Explain Dewatering by Electro osmosis.
(OR)
8(b) Explain Well point systems of dewatering.
531
DCE V semester
V Semester End Examination
Course Code: 18C-504E (A) Duration:2 hours

Course Name: Ground Improvement Techniques Max.Marks:40
Marks
PART-A
Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark. 8x1 = 8

Marks
1) State any two objectives of ground improvement

2) What are geo synthetics
3) What is pozzolonic reaction of lime with soil
4) Define hydraulic modification
5) Define cementing method of ground improvement
6) Define grouting
7) Define confinement
8) What is gabion wall
PART-B
Answer four questions. Each question carries three marks 4 x3 = 12 Marks
9(a)Write any two types of geo synthetics

(OR)
9(b) Write a short note on Modification of soil with a fly ash
10(a) Write a note on Dynamic compaction.

(OR)
10(b) Write a short note on Soil reinforcement.
11(a) What are the Characteristics of Grout materials

(OR)
11(b) Write a short note on the modification of soil with cement.
12(a)Write a note on the characteristics of soil reinforcement materials.

(OR)
12(b) Write a short note on the uses of Gabion walls
PART-C
13(a)Write any five applications of geo synthetics.

(OR)
13(b) Explain modification of soil with bitumen and calcium chloride.
532
14(a) Explain any two deep compaction methods.
(OR)
14(b) Explain various methods of soil confinement.
15(a) Explain the modification of soil with lime.

(OR)
15(b) Explain various grouting techniques
16(a) Explain Soil reinforcement.

(OR)
16(b) Explain stone column method of soil stabilization
533

Course Title: Steel Structures Course Code : 18C-504E(B)
Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P): 45:15:0 Credits : 3
Pre requisites
This course requires the knowledge of Engineering Mechanics, Strength of Materials and Strength of
Material lab
Course Outcomes
CO1 Illustrate the basic concepts of limit state design and suitability of different types of standard rolled
steel sections
CO2 Design suitable compression member and a slab base for the given conditions as per code
CO3 Analyse and Design a suitable connection based upon the conditions according to standards
CO4 Design the tension members considering the various failure patterns as per codal provisions.
CO5 Design a suitable laterally restrained beam as per standard code
CO6 Plan a suitable roof truss for the given span as per standards and Calculate the loads acting on the
truss using relevant Indian Standards

No
R U A
1 Introduction and
Fundamentals of Limit
State Design of Steel
08
structures Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
2 Design of Compression 12
members
3 Design of Bolted and
Welded Connections 10 Q4
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
4 Design of Tension
members 10
5 Design of Beams 10 Q9(b), Q13(b),
Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
6 Design of Roof trusses 10 Q10(b), Q14(b),
Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8
Course Contents
UNIT-1: Introduction and fundamentals of limit state design of steel structures

Duration: 8 Periods (L: 6 – T: 2)
534
a) Merits and demerits of steel structures.
b) Loads considered in the design of steel structures as per I.S:875 -1987.
c) Introduction to I.S. 800-2007 - Mechanical properties of structural steel
d) Standard structural sections as per SP-6
e) Classification of cross sections – class 1(plastic) class2(compact) class3(semi compact)
and class4(slender), Types of Elements-Internal, outside and Tapered
f) Concept of Limit State Design – limit state of strength – limit state of serviceability –
classification of actions – strength – partial safety factors for loads and materials.
UNIT-2: Design of Compression Members

Duration: 12Periods (L: 9 – T: 3)
a) Introduction to compression members - different forms of compression members.
b) Behavior of compression members
c) Effective lengths to be used for different end conditions – table 11 of I.S:800.
d) Buckling class of cross section – imperfection factor and stress reduction factor for
different buckling classes
e) Maximum values of effective slenderness ratios as per code – design compressive
stress for different column buckling classes.
f) Calculation of design strength of compression members – problems (no built-up
sections).
g) Design procedure of compression members – problems on simple I sections only (no
built-up sections).
h) Design details - effective sectional area – codal provisions for angle struts – single
angle struts.
i) Codal provisions of single / double lacing and battening for built-up columns (no
problems).
j) Design of slab base along with a cement concrete pedestal – problems.
UNIT-3: Design of Bolted and Welded Connections Duration: 10Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
a) Different types of joints
b) Different types of Connections
c) Differentiation of bolted joints and welded joints.
d) Advantages and disadvantages of bolted connections,
e) Difference between unfinished bolts and High strength friction grip bolts (HSFG).
f) Behavior of bolted joints, failure of bolted joints,
g) Strength of lap joint only with chain and staggered patterns for bearing type bolts only
h) Efficiency of the joint.
i) Advantages and disadvantages of welding
535
j) Different forms of welded joints
k) Fillet welded joint – detailed sketch showing the component parts.
l) Stresses in welds as per I.S.800-2007 – Codal requirements of welds and welding.
m) Problems on calculation of strength of a fillet welded joint.
n) Design of fillet welded joint for a plate of given load, thickness of a plate and
permissible stress as per code.
o) Design of fillet welded joint for single angle carrying axial loads.
UNIT-4: Design of Tension Members Duration: 10Periods (L:7.5 – T:2.5)

a) Introduction to tension members and different forms of tension members.
b) Behavior of tension members.
c) Different modes of failures – gross section yielding, net Section rupture and block
shear failure.
d) Maximum values of effective slenderness ratios as per code.
e) Calculation of net effective sectional area of single angle with welded and bolted
connection.
f) Calculation of the design strength due to yielding of gross section, rupture of critical
section and block shear – problems on plate and single angle section with welded and
bolted connection
g) Design procedure of tension members.
h) Problems on design of tension members using plates and single angle with welded
connection only
UNIT-5: Design of Steel Beams

a) Concept of limit state design of beams – shape factor and plastic properties of beams
– Problems on Calculation of shape factor for symmetrical sections.
b) Classification of beams based upon lateral restraint of compression flange
c) Design strength of Laterally supported beam(simply supported and cantilever)in
bending (flexure) and in shear.
d) Design of laterally supported beam(simply supported under symmetrical point loads
and udl throughout the span, cantilever under point load at free end and udl
throughout the span) considering all codal requirements and check for flexure, shear
and deflection
e) Web Buckling and Web crippling-description only(no problems)
f) Component parts of plate girders with sketches – brief description of different types
of stiffeners.
536
UNIT-6: Design of Roof Trusses Duration: 10 Periods (L:7.5 – T:2.5)
a) Types of trusses – plane trusses, space trusses.
b) Sketches of different roof trusses with their suitability for a given span.
c) Cross sections of truss members.
d) Loads on roof trusses as per I.S – 875.
e) Determination of loads at nodal points of a given roof truss due to dead load, live
load and wind load, given the coefficients K1, K2, K3,design wind speed, design
wind pressure, external and Internal pressure coefficients. – problems.
Reference Books
1. Steel Structures Design& Practice by N.Subramanian, oxford University Press

2. Code of practice: IS 800-2007
3. Limit state Design of Steel Structures by S.K. Duggal/TMH
4. Structural steel design by M.L.Gambhir/TMH
5. Design of Steel Structures by S.S.Bhavikatti
6. Structural Engineering by A.P.ArulManickam
7. Teaching Resource Material :http://www.steel-insdag.org
8. Teaching Resource Material :http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/105106112/
2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=EFBTSKPW5Ek
3. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=C4Mm3mvN1P0

1.1 List the common types of steel structures.
1.2 State the merits and demerits of Steel Structures.
1.3 List the loads considered in the design of steel structures as perI.S:875-1987.
1.4 State the importance of code of practice I.S. 800-2007
1.5 State the physical and mechanical properties of structural steel. – yield stress (fy),
ultimate tensile stress (fu) and maximum percent elongation for standard steel and
fusion welding steel (table -1 of IS:800-2007)
1.6 List different types of rolled steel sections as per SP-6.
1.7 Explain the classification of cross sections and types of elements
1.8 Explain the Concept of Limit State Design.
1.9 State the various types of limit states.
1.10 Define the terms: design action and design strength.
537
1.11 State the partial safety factor values for loads in limit state of strength and
serviceability.
1.12 State the partial safety factor values for materials in limit state.
2.1 State the different types of compression members like column, strut, etc.
2.2 Sketch different forms of compression members.
2.3 Explain the behavior of compression members - classification of cross sections.
2.4 Explain the terms: actual length and effective length.
2.5 Define the terms a) least radius of gyration b)slenderness ratio.
2.6 State effective lengths to be used for different end conditions.
2.7 Explain buckling class of cross section – imperfection factor and stress reduction
factor.
2.8 State the maximum values of effective slenderness ratios as per code
2.9 Determine the design strength of compression members (No built up sections).
2.10 Explain design procedure of compression members.
2.11 Design columns with I sections.
2.12 Explain design details - effective sectional area – codal provisions for angle struts.
2.13 Design single angle struts.
2.14 Explain codal provisions of single / double lacing and battening for built-up columns.
2.15 Design a slab base along with a cement concrete pedestal
3.1 State the different types of joints
3.2 State the different types of Connections.
3.3 Differentiate between Bolted joints and Welded joints.
3.4 State the advantages and disadvantages of bolted connections.
3.5 Specifications of bolted joints.
3.6 State the difference between bearing type bolts and high strength friction grip bolts
3.7 Explain the behavior of bolted joints and reasons for failure of bolted joints
3.8 Calculate the strength of lap joint only with chain and staggered patterns for bearing
type bolts only
3.9 Calculate the efficiency of a bolted joint.
3.10 List the features of a fillet welded joint.
3.11 State different stresses in welds as per I.S.800-2007.
3.12 Specifications of welded joints.
3.13 State the formula for design strength of a fillet welded joint.
3.14 Calculate the design strength of a fillet welded joint.
3.15 Design a fillet welded joint for a given load, thickness of a plate and permissible
stress as per code.
538
3.16 Design a fillet welded joint for a single angle connected to the gusset plate by fillet
welds along the sides and at ends carrying axial loads.
4.1 Define the term ‘Tie’.
4.2 State the applications of tension members.
4.3 Sketch different forms of tension members.
4.4 Explain the behavior of tension members.
4.5 State the different modes of failures of tension members
4.6 Describe briefly with sketches the different modes of failures of tension members.
4.7 State the maximum values of effective slenderness ratio as per code reversal of
stresses
4.8 Determine the net effective area of flat and a single angle connected to gusset plate
by bolts and welds.
4.9 Determine the design strength due to yielding of gross section, rupture of critical
section and block shear failure of a flat and a single angle connected by bolts and
welds.
4.10 Explain design procedure of tension members.
4.11 Design a flat and a single angle tension member connected by welds only.
5.1 Illustrate the concept of limit state design of beams.
5.2 Explain the behavior of steel beams.
5.3 Define the terms: elastic moment of resistance, plastic moment of resistance, elastic
section modulus, plastic section modulus, shape factor.
5.4 Determine the shape factor values for Symmetrical sections
5.5 State the classification of cross sections class 1 to 4
5.6 State the classification of beams based on lateral restraint of compression flange.
5.7 Determine the design strength in bending(flexure) and in shear.
5.8 Describe briefly web buckling and web crippling (no problems),
5.9 Design laterally supported simply supported(under symmetrical point loads and udl)
and cantilever beam(under point load at free end and udl throughout the span)
considering all codal requirements and check for flexure, shear and deflection
5.10 State component parts of plate girders with sketches – describe different types of
Stiffeners with their suitability.
6.1 State types of trusses – plane trusses, space trusses.

6.2 Explain the situations where roof trusses are used.
6.3 Sketch different types of roof trusses with their suitability for a given span.
6.4 Sketch a roof truss and name the component parts.
6.5 State configuration of trusses – pitched roof, parallel chord trapezoidal trusses.
539
6.6 State cross sections of truss members.
6.7 Estimate the type of loads on roof trusses as per I.S – 875.
6.8 Describe briefly how the wind load is calculated on roof trusses.
6.8 Determine loads at nodal points of a given roof truss due to dead load, live load and
wind load, given the coefficients K1, K2, K3, design wind speed, design wind
pressure, external and internal pressure coefficients.
1. Visit a nearby construction site and identify the various types of connections used in steel
structures and prepare a report.
2. Collect & Prepare a list of Indian Standard codes referred for structural steel design with the
purpose of each code.
3. Collect the catalogues of various types of structural steel sections
4. Collect the map showing Basic wind speed throughout the country and analyse those maps.
5. Prepare 2D & 3D models of various structural steel sections using CADD.
6. Prepare the structural detailing of designed sections as per SP 6-1 (1964): ISI Handbook for
Structural Engineers -Part- 1
9. Quiz
11. Surprise Test
540
Ethics
Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge
Communication
Engineering Tools

Linked PO
CO1 1 2 1 1 2 2 1,2,6,7,9,10
CO2 2 1 2 2 2,7,9,10
CO3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3 2,4,6,7,8,9,10
CO4 2 1 2 2 2,7,9,10
CO5 3 1 2 2 2,7,9,10
CO6 1 3 2 3 1 2 3 1,2,4,6,7,9,10
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks

Assignment 5
s
Seminars 5
Total 60
541

question
MID SEM-I EXAM
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)

question

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
542
DCE V semester Mid Semester-I Examination
Course Code:18C-504E(B) Duration:1 Hour

Course Name: Steel Structures Max.Marks:20 Marks
PART – A Marks: 4 X 1M = 4 M
NOTE: 1) Answer all questions and each question carries one mark.
1. Define limit state. State various types of limit states to be considered in limit state.
2. State any four physical properties of steel.
3. Define a compression member.
4. Sketch the two different forms of compression members.
PART – B Marks : 2 X 3M= 6 M
Answer two questions and each question carries three marks

5(a)State the loads that are to be considered in the design of steel structures.
(OR)
5(b)Explain actions and their classifications.
6(a) Write any six codal provisions for single laced system.
(OR)
6(b)Define slab base. Draw a neat sketch of a slab base showing the components.
PART – C
Answer two questions and each question carries five marks. Marks : 2 X 5 M = 10 M
7(a) Explain with sketches the different types of rolled steel beam Channel and angle
sections
(OR)
7(b) Write any five advantages and disadvantages of steel structures.
8(a) Design a steel column using a single rolled I- section to carry an axial load of 800
kN. Both ends of the column are restrained against rotation and translation. The
actual length of the column between the intersections is 8m.The yield stress of steel
is250MPa.
(OR)
8(b) Determine the design compressive strength of a single-angle discontinuous strut ISA
80 mm × 50 mm × 8 mm of effective length 1·5 m, when connected to gusset plate
through longer leg by fillet welds at each end yield stress of steel used is 340 MPa.
Modulus of elasticity of steel is 2 x105 MPa. The gusset fixity may be taken as
hinged.
543
Course Code:18C-504E(B) Duration:1 Hour
Course Name: Steel Structures Max.Marks:20 Marks
PART – A Marks: 4 X 1 M = 4 M
NOTE: 1) Answer all questions and each question carries one mark.
1. State any two advantages and two disadvantages of welded joints?
2. Define nominal diameter and gross diameter of bolt.
3. Define a tension member and state the applications of tension member.
4. State three different types of failures of tension members.
PART – B Marks : 2 X 3 M= 6 M
NOTE: 1) Answer two questions and each question carries three marks
5 (a)A tie member in a truss is 200 x 10 mm in size it is welded to a 10 mm thick gusset plate
fillet weld. The overlap of the member is 300 mm and the weld size is 6 mm.
Determine the design strength of the joint if the welding is done on all the three sides
(OR)
5 (b) Calculate the design strength of the welded joint if the size of the weld is 5mm and its
length is 212mm.The ultimate shear stress in the weld is 410N/mm 2.Assume the
connections are made in the workshop.
6(a) Write the design procedure of tension members.

(OR)
6(b) Sketch the figures of angles connected to i)the same side of gusset plate ii) both sides of
the gusset plate showing welds in appropriate places.
PART – C
Answer two questions and each question carries five marks Marks: 2 X 5 M= 10 M
7(a) The longer leg of ISA 150 mm×115 mm×10 mm is connected to a gusset plate of 12mm
thick by a lap joint using side welds only, at site. The member carries an axial design
tensile force of 500 kN acting through centre of gravity of the angle. Design the joint
taking ultimate shear stress in the filled weld as 410 MPa.
(OR)
7(b) The plates of 6 mm thick tank are connected by a single bolted lap joint with 20 mm
diameter bolts at 60 mm pitch, calculate the efficiency of the joint. Take fu of plate
as 410 MPa and assume 4.6 grade of bolts
8(a) Determine the design tensile strength of single ISA 100 x 65x 10 mm when its longer leg
is connected to 10 mm thick gusset plate by 6 mm size fillet welds. The length of
weld is 150 mm. Take fy = 250 MPa, fu = 410MPa
(OR)
8(b) Design a single angle tension member to carry a tensile force of 225KN.The angle is
to be connected to a gusset plate by one of its leg by fillet welds. f y=250N/mm2 and
fu=410N/mm2.
544

DCE V Semester
Course Code:18C-504E(B) Duration:2 Hours

Course Name: Steel Structures Max. Marks: 40Marks
PART – A Marks: 8 X 1 M = 8M
NOTE : 1)Answer all questions and each question carries one mark.
1. State the different types of loads acting on the steel structures?

2. Explain the terms i) Gross area ii) Net area.
3. What is beam? State any one classification.
4. State the differences between unfinished and HSFG bolts
5. Distinguish between laterally restrained beam and unrestrained beam
6. Define Shape factor
7. State the relation between design wind speed and design wind pressure.
8. Define slope and pitch of a roof truss
PART – B
Answer four questions . Each question carries three marks 4x 3 M = 12M

9(a)What are the different types of column bases. Explain any one of them.
(OR)
9(b) Draw the cross section of plate girder and label the component parts.
10(a) Write three different types of failures of a tension member?
(OR)
10(b) Draw the line sketches of i)fan truss ii)fink truss iii)pratt truss
11(a) Derive an expression for calculating the shape factor of a circular section of diameter
‘d’
(OR)
11(b) Name any three types of web stiffeners in a plate girder and what are their functions?
12(a) Draw a neat sketch of a roof truss and name the component parts.
(OR)
12(b) What is a purlin? Determine the live load on a truss if the angle of slope of roof is 250.
545
PART – C
Answer four questions. Each question carries five marks

4x 5 M = 20 M
13 (a) Design a column 3.5 m long in a building subjected to a factored load of 600 kN. Both
the ends of the column are effectively restrained in direction and position. Use steel of
grade Fe 410.
(OR)
13 (b) A simply supported beam ISLB 300@370N/m has an effective span of 5 m. Find
i) Design bending strength of beam ii) Design shear strength of beam. Assume Fe250
grade steel and assume that the beam is laterally supported.
14 (a) Design a tension member considering a single-angle section to carry a tensile force of
250 kN. Adopt length of welded connection as 150 mm and use Fe 410 steel
(OR)
14 (b)Sketch different types of roof trusses with their suitability for a given span.
15 (a) A simply supported beam ISMB 400 @ 616 N/m is subjected to a BM of 100 kN and
SF of 80 kN. Check the safety of the beam is bending and shear if beam is laterally
restrained. Consider fy=250 MPa and fu=410 MPa
(OR)
15 (b) An ISLB 350@495N/m is used as a simply supported beam over a span of 6 m and
carries a udl of 25kN/m including self weight. The compression flange of the beam is
adequately restrained. Check for shear and maximum deflection if fy= 250 N/mm2 and
E=210 kN/mm2
16(a) A roof truss shed is to be built in Lucknow for an industry. The size of shed is 24 m x
40m. The height of building is 12 m at the eves. Determine the basic wind pressure
(OR)
16 (b) A Pratt truss of span 12 m span with each panel of length 2m and pitch 25º carries AC
sheet roofing. The truss are 3 m apart. The design wind pressure may be assumed as
1200 N/m2.
Assume
(i) self-weight of AC sheet = 200 N/m2 of slope area
(ii) weight of purlin = 100 N/m2 of plan area.
Determine (a) live load and (b) dead load at various nodal points of the truss.
546
Course Title: Integrated Waste Course Code : 18C-504E(C)
Management
Methodology : Lecture+Assignments Total Contact Periods : 60
Pre requisites
This subject requires basic knowledge of Sanitary Engineering
Course Outcomes
CO1 Identify the principles of safe disposal of solid waste
CO2 Explain the quality and recycling of municipal solid waste.
CO3 Analyze the components of integrated MSW handling system
CO4 Explain the laws on Management of biomedical solid waste.
CO5 Evaluate the importance and recycling of C& D waste
CO6 Illustrate the impacts of e-waste.
No
R U A
1 Introduction to Solid
08
Waste Management-
2 Municipal Solid Waste - Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
Characteristics and 12
Quantities
3 Disposal of Municipal
10
Solid Waste
Q4 Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
4 Biochemical process and
10
Composting
5 Construction and
Q9(b), Q13(b),
Demolition (C&D) of 10 Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Waste Management Q3
6 Electronic Waste Q10(b), Q14(b),
10 Q7,Q8
Management Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8
Upon completion of course, the student shall be able to
Course Contents
UNIT 1: Introduction to Solid Waste Management Duration: 8 Periods(L:6 – T:2)

f) Definition of Solid waste
g) Classification of solid waste
h) Necessity of Solid waste disposal
547
i) Safe disposal of solid waste.
UNIT 2:Municipal Solid Waste Characteristics and Quantities
Duration:12Periods(L:9 – T:3)
a) Composition of MSW.
b) Quantity of generated MSW
c) Collection and Transportation of Municipal solid waste.
d) Separation for recycling and reuse of plastics, paper and glass from the MSW.
UNIT 3: Disposal of Municipal Solid Waste Duration: 10 Periods(L:7.5 – T:2.5)
d) Disposal of MSW.
e) Disposal of MSW by Sanitary Land filling method.
f) Land sealants for the control of gas and Leachate movement.
g) Disposal of MSW by Shredding and Pulverisation.
h) Disposal of MSW by Composting.
i) Disposal of MSW by barging it out into Sea.
UNIT 4: Biochemical process and Composting Duration: 10 Periods(L:7.5 – T:2.5)
e) Biomedical wastes and their impacts on Health and Environment.
f) Legislative laws on Management of Biomedical wastes in India.
g) Collection, transportation and treatment of Biomedical wastes.
h) Disposal of Biomedical waste.
i) Human Resources issues on biomedical wastes
UNIT 5: Construction and Demolition (C&D)Waste Management

a) C&D Definition, applicability and waste generating activities.
b) Estimation of C&D waste generation for India.
c) Initiatives to promote recycling of C & D waste in India
d) Importance of recycling C & D Wastes.
e) C&D Waste processing
f) The rules promote C&D Waste utilization.
UNIT 6: Electronic Waste (E-Waste) Management Duration: 10 Periods(L:7.5 – T:2.5)
a) Definition of E- Waste.
b) Classification of E- Waste.
c) Adverse health and environmental impacts of E-Waste on its improper disposal.
d) Environmental and Occupational Hazards posed by disposal of certain categories of E-
Waste.
e) Menace of E- Waste in India
548
Reference Books
4. Sewage Disposal by S.K. Garg.
5. Municipal Solid waste management by P Jayarami Reddy
6. C&D Waste Management Rules 2016.
7. NPTEL

1.7 Define Solid Waste Management
1.8 Classify Solid Waste Management
1.9 State the necessity of SWM(Solid Waste Management).
1.10 Explain the importance of safe Disposal.
1.9 Define composition of MSW(Municipal Solid Waste).
1.10 Characteristics of MSW
1.11 Estimate generated quantity of MSW.
1.12 Describe collection and transportation of MSW.
1.13 Explain separation for recycling.
1.14 Explain reuse of Plastics, Paper and Glass from MSW.
3.1 Define disposal of MSW.
3.2 Explain the methods of disposal
b. By Sanitary Land filling method
c. By Shredding and Pulverization.
3.3 Explain land sealants for the control of gas and Leachate movement
3.4 Explain Disposal of MSW by Composting.
3.5 Explain MSW by Barging it out into Sea.
3.1 Define Biomedical Waste
3.2 Explain the Biomedical waste impacts on Health and Environment.
3.3 State the Legislative laws on Management of Biomedical wastes in India
3.4 Explain the procedure to collection and transportation of Biomedical wastes
3.5 Explain the Treatment of Biomedical waste.
3.6 Explain the Disposal of Bio medical waste.
3.7 Human Resources issues on biomedical wastes.
4.1 Define C &D.
4.2 Estimate C & D quantities..
4.3 State the importance of recycling C&D waste.
4.4 Explain effective utilization of C&D waste.
4.5 List the Rules to promote C& D waste utilization.
549
6.1 Define E- Waste.
6.2 State the Classification of E-Waste
6.3 Explain Adverse Health and Environmental Impacts of E-Waste on its Improper
Disposal
6.4 State the Environmental and Occupational Hazards posed by Disposal of certain
categories of E- Waste.
6.5 State Menace of E- Waste India

1) To submit a report to implement a plan to reduce solid waste at your house/ college.
2) To submit a report on the life cycle of a CD/mobile /Calculator etc and prepare a fact sheet
on findings in class in the form of Paper/Poster presentation.
3) Field trip to nearest MSW handling facility
4) Visit to any NGO/Public Health Department dealing with the environmental health program
5) Team work for analyzing the need for recycling
6) Prepare an excel sheet on sources of solid waste in a village/ town in teams.
7) Group discussion
8) Surprise Test
Ethics
nCommunicatio
learningLifelong
societyEngineer and

knowledgeBasic
ToolsEngineering
KnowledgeDiscipline
CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 Linked PO
CO1 2 3 3 2 2 2,5,6,7,8
CO2 2 3 3 2 2 2 2,5,6,7,8,9
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2,5,6,7,8,9
CO4 3 3 2 3 2,7,8,10
CO5 3 3 3 2 2 2 2,5,6,7,8,9
CO6 3 3 2 2 2 1 2,5,6,7,8,9
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks

Assignment 550 5
s
Seminars 5
Total 60

question
MID SEM-I EXAM
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
551

question

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
552
DCE V semester
Course Code: 18C-504E(C) Duration:1 hour

Course Name: INTEGRATED WASTE MANAGEMENT Max.Marks:20 Marks
PART-A
5) Define Solid waste management.

6) Give the classification of Solid waste management
7) State the necessity of Solid waste management
8) Define composition of Municipal Solid Waste
PART-B
Answer two questions, Each Question carries three marks 2x3 = 06 Marks
5(a) Explain the Importance of safe Disposal

(OR)
5(b)Write about the transportation of Municipal Solid Waste.
6(a) How do you Estimate generated quantity of Municipal Solid Waste .
(OR)
6(b) List out any four methods of collection of Municipal Solid waste.
PART-C
7(a)Explain the Importance of safe Disposal.

(OR)
7(b) Explain separation for recycling
8(a)Explain reuse of Plastics, Paper and Glass from MSW

(OR)
8(b) Draw the flow diagram of Collection to transportation of MSW
553
DCE V semester
Course Code: 18C-504E(C) Duration:1 hour

PART-A
1. List the methods of disposal of Municipal Solid waste management.

2. Define biomedical waste.
3. State any two legislative laws on Management of Biomedical wastes in India.
4. What are the land sealants for the control of gas.
PART-B
Answer two questions, Each Question carries three marks 2x3 = 06 Marks
5(a) Explain consequent effects of Leachate movement.

(OR)
5(b) Explain the procedure to Collection of Biomedical wastes.
6(a) What the impacts of biomedical waste on environment

(OR)
6(b) Write about any one human resource issue on biomedical waste
PART-C
7(a)Explain the methods of disposal by Sanitary Land filling method

(OR)
7(b) Explain Disposal of Municipal Solid Waste by barging it out into Sea.
8(a) Explain the treatment of biomedical waste

(OR)
8(b) Explain the procedure of transportation of biomedical waste
554
DCE V semester
Course Code: 18C-504E(C) Duration: 2hours

PART-A
1. Define Composition of Municipal solid waste.

2. List out the characteristics of Municipal solid waste.
3. State the importance of recycling Construction and Demolition waste
4. What are the land sealants for the control of leacheate movement?
5. State the methods of C& D processing.
6. List any two Rules to promote Construction and Demolition waste utilization
7. State the Environmental Hazards posed by Disposal of certain categories of E- Waste.
8. State Menace of E- Waste in India
PART-B
Answer four questions. Each Question carries three marks 4 x 3 = 12 Marks
9(a). Explain the necessity of safe disposal of solid waste.

(OR)
9(b) Explain the procedure for estimation of Construction and Demolition waste quantities
10(a) How do you Estimate generated quantity of Municipal Solid Waste.

(OR)
10(b) What are the environmental and occupational Hazards posed by Disposal of E- Waste.
11(a).Explain the procedure to collection and transportation of Biomedical wastes .

(OR)
11(b) State the importance of recycling C& D waste
12(a).Brief the adverse Health Impacts of E-Waste on its improper Disposal.

(OR)
12(b) State Environmental Impacts of E-Waste on its improper Disposal
555
PART- C
Answer four questions. Each Question carries five marks 4 x 5 = 20 Marks
13.(a) Explain the procedure of separation for recycling and reuse of plastics, paper and glass from
the Municipal solid waste.
(OR)
13(b) Explain effective utilization of C&D waste.
14(a) Explain the methods of disposal by Shredding and Pulverization

(OR)
14(b) Give the classification of E-Waste
15(a).Explain the procedure to collection and transportation of E-Waste.

(OR)
15(b) Explain the processing of C& D waste
16(a). Write the occupational hazards of E-Waste during disposal.

(OR)
16(b) Explain the environmental hazards of E-Waste.
556

Course Title: Soil Mechanics Course Code : 18C-505E(A)
Periods(L:T:P):
Pre requisites
Basic Knowledge of Mathematics and Engineering Mechanics
Course Outcomes
CO1 Characterise and classify soils.

CO2 Develop volumetric relationships between different soil parameters.
CO3 Explain the significance of the physical and mechanical properties of the soils and the
experimental methods to measure them.
CO4 Discuss bearing capacity of soils in foundation design along with presumptive bearing
capacity values using IS code equation for computing bearing capacity.
CO5 Analyse the principles of consolidation and compaction.

No
R U A
1 General characteristics of
10
soils
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
2 Basic definitions and
10
simple tests on soils
3 Classifications of soils 08
4 Hydraulic and Q4 Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
Mechanical properties of 12
soils
5 Q9(b), Q13(b),
Bearing capacity of soils 10 Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
6 Consolidation and Q10(b), Q14(b),
10 Q7,Q8
Compaction of soils Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8
Course Contents
UNIT 1: General characteristics of Soils Duration: 10Periods(L:7.5– T:2.5)
557
a) Soil mechanics – Importance of soil mechanics – Origin of soil – Formation of soil -
types of soils – Residual soil, Transported soil, sand, silt, clay, peat, loess, muram,
caliche, clay, bentonite –Major soil deposits in India
b) Mechanical analysis of soils – Hydrometer and sieve analysis of soil particles – semi
logarithmic grain size curve.
c) Physical properties of soils – plasticity, cohesion, consolidation.
UNIT 2: Basic Definitions and Simple Tests on soils Duration: 10Periods(L:7.5– T:2.5)
a) Three phase diagram of soil – Basic definitions: Void ratio, Porosity, Degree of
saturation, Percentage air voids, Air content, Bulk density, Dry mass density, Saturation
mass density, submerged mass density, Bulk unit weight, Dry unit weight, Saturation unit
weight, submerged unit weight, Density index.
b) Water content - Soil moisture content methods – Tests for determination of soil moisture
content-oven drying method – specific gravity - Specific gravity methods - Tests for
determination of specific gravity of soil by Pycnometer method.
c) Atterberg’s Limits - Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, Shrinkage Limit – tests for determination
of Atterberg’s Limits – plasticity index.
d) Relationships of volume of voids, moisture content, density of soil mass, dry density ,
saturated density, submerged density, specific gravity, void ratio, porosity, degree of
saturation, percentage of air voids, air content, density index, - simple problems using the
above relationships.
UNIT 3: Classifications of Soils Duration: 8 Periods(L: 6.0– T:2.0)

Classification of soils –different systems of classification of soils – Textural classification
of soils – I.S. classification of soils -Field identification of soil.
UNIT 4: Hydraulic and Mechanical Properties of Soils

Duration: 12 Periods(L: 9.0 – T: 3.0)
a) Permeability of soil –Essentiality of permeability –Darcy’s law – Tests on determination

of coefficient of permeability – laboratory methods.
b) Compressibility of soils – Shearing resistance of soils- Liquefaction of sand – shear
strength experiment with direct shear apparatus (Explanation of testing procedure with
the help of figures only).
UNIT 5: Bearing Capacity of Soils: Duration: 10Periods(L:7.5 – T:2.5)
558
Bearing capacity – Basic definitions: Ultimate bearing capacity, Net ultimate bearing
capacity, Net safe bearing capacity, Gross safe bearing capacity – Importance of bearing
capacity in foundation design – Bearing capacity of shallow footings – presumptive bearing
capacity values – IS code equation for computing bearing capacity (No derivation) – Types of
shear failures - Field plate load test.
UNIT 6: Consolidation and Compaction of soils Duration: 10Periods(L:7.5 – T:2.5)

a) Consolidation of Soils
Consolidation –Terzaghi’s model analogy of compression springs showing the process of
consolidation – field implications.
b) Compaction of Soils
Theory of compaction – compaction and its objectives – factors affecting compaction -
Laboratory compaction tests – Proctor’s compaction test – Modified Proctor’s compaction
test – Methods of compaction used in field - field measurement of dry density by core cutter
method and sand replacement method.
Recommended Books
1. Soil mechanics and foundation Engineering by Dr.B.C.Punmia
2. Modern Geo technical Engineering by Alam Singh.
3. Soil Mechanics (SI Version) by T. W.Lambe and Robert V. Whitman
4. Geo technical Engineering by Dr. C. Venkatramaiah.
5. Soil Mechanics by Lambe and Whiteman.
6. Soil Mechanics in Engineering Practice by Terzaghi, R.B.PeckandG.Mesri
7. Geotechnical Engineering by ManojDatta and S.Gulhat.
8. Fundamentals of Soil Behaviour by Mitchell and Soga.
9. Soil mechanics and foundation Engineering by Dr. K.R Arora
10. Geo technical Engineering by Prof.T.N.Ramamurthy , Prof.T.G.S

http://nptel.ac.in
559
1.1 State the importance of soil mechanics.
1.2 State the origin of soil
1.3 State the formation of soil
1.4 List the types of soils
1.5 Describe the hydrometer analysis and sieve analysis of soil particles
1.6 Describe the semi-logarithmic grain size curve.
1.7 Define the physical properties of soils like plasticity, cohesion and consolidation.
2.1. Explain the three phase diagram of soil.

2.2. Define the terms: Void ratio, Porosity, Degree of saturation, Percentage air voids, Air
content, Bulk density, Dry mass density, Saturation mass density, submerged mass
density, Bulk unit weight, Dry unit weight, Saturation unit weight, submerged unit
weight, Density index.
2.3. List methods for determination of water content of soil.
2.4. Describe the test procedure for determination of moisture content of soil by oven dry
method.
2.5. List the methods for determination of specific gravity of soil
2.6. Describe the test procedure for determination of specific gravity of soil by
pycnometer method.
2.7. Define the Atterberg’s limits/ Consistency limits.
2.8. Describe the test procedures for determination of liquid limit, plastic limit and
shrinkage limit of soil.
2.9. Express relationships between volume of voids, moisture content, density of soil
mass, dry density, saturated density, submerged density, specific gravity, void ratio
and porosity, degree of saturation, percentage of air voids, air content and density
index.
2.10. Work out simple problems using the relationships between various soil parameters.
3.1. Define soil classification

3.2. State different systems of classification of soils.
3.3. Explain the textural classification of soils with a neat sketch.
3.4. Explain I.S. classification of soils.
3.5. Explain methods for field identification of soils.
4.1 Define permeability of soil.

4.2 State the essentiality of permeability in soil engineering.
4.3 Explain Darcy’s law.
560
4.4 State the factors affecting permeability of soil.
4.5 Explain the compressibility of confined layers of soil.
4.6 Explain the shear resistance concept of soils.
4.7 Define the liquefaction of sand.
4.8 Describe the direct shear test experiment.
5.1 Define bearing capacity of soil.

5.2 Define Ultimate bearing capacity, Net ultimate bearing capacity, Net safe bearing
capacity, Gross safe bearing capacity of soil.
5.3 Importance of bearing capacity in the design of foundations.
5.4 Justify the importance of ‘factor of safety’ and ‘safe bearing capacity’ values in
foundation design.
5.5 Methods for determining bearing capacity of soil.
5.6 State the presumptive bearing capacity values and the IS code equation for the
calculation of bearing capacity.
5.7 Explain types of shear failures.
5.8 Explain the ‘field plate load test’ for determining the ultimate bearing capacity of
soils.
6.1 Define the principle of ‘consolidation’.

6.2 Explain in detail the Terzaghi’s model analogy of compression springs, showing the
process of consolidation.
6.3 Explain the basic principles of compaction and its objectives.
6.4 State the factors affecting compaction.
6.5 Describe the Proctor’s compaction test and Modified proctor’s compaction test.
6.6 State the methods of compaction used in field.
6.7 Explain measurement of field density by core cutter method and sand replacement
method.
Students activity
1. Visit any construction site and collect soil samples and identify the type of soil by
Visual inspection and prepare a report.
2. Prepare a chart of types soils available in different states of India and show them on Indian
map with different colour coding.
3. Classify the locally available soil with basic knowledge.

561
4.Conductthe field tests on soil samples from your college and prepare a report on the tests.
5.Prepare a report on collection of samples of soil.
NOTE Students should select any one of the above or other topics relevant to the subject
approved by the concerned faculty, individually or in a group.
Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge
Engineering Tools
Ethics
Communication

Linked PO
CO1 3 2 2 3 2,4,6,10
CO2 2 2 2 3 2,8,10
CO3 2 2 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3
CO4 2 3 2 1 2 1 3 1,2,4,5,6,7,10
CO5 3 1 1 2 2 2,3,4,6.10
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks
Assignment 1 5
Seminars 1 5
Total 60
562

question
MID SEM-I EXAM
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
question

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
563
DCE V semester
Course Code: 18C-505E(A) Duration:1 hour

Course Name: Soil Mechanics Max.Marks:20 Marks
PART-A
1) List any two types of soils.
2) Define plasticity of soil.
3) Define Degree of saturation of soil.
4) Define density index.
PART-B
Answer two questions. Each question carries three marks 2x 3= 6 Marks
5(a) State the formation of soils

(OR)
5(b) State the origin of soil.
6(a) Establish a relationship between porosity and void ratio.

(OR)
6(b) Determine void ratio of soil sample when porosity is 40%
PART-C
Answer two questions. Each question carries five marks 2x 5= 10Marks
7(a) Explain the dry sieve analysis of soil

(OR)
7(b) Describe semi- logarithmic grain size curve.
8(a) Describe the three-phase diagram of soil.

(OR)
8(b) Describe the test procedure for determination of moisture content by oven dry method
564
DCE V semester
Course Code: 18C-505E(A) Duration:1 hour

PART-A
1) Define soil classification.
2) List any two soil classification systems.
3) Define permeability of soil.
4) Define liquefaction of sand.
PART-B
Answer two questions. Each question carries three marks 2x 3= 6 Marks
5(a) Explain any one test for field identification of soil.

(OR)
5(b) State how coarse grained soils are classified as per IS classification system.
6(a) Explain Darcy’s law.

(OR)
6(b) State any three factors which are affecting the permeability of soil.
PART-C
Answer two questions. Each question carries five marks 2x 5= 10Marks
7(a)Explain the textural classification of soils with neat sketch.

(OR)
7(b) Explain IS classification of soils.
8(a) Explain shear resistance concept of soil.

(OR)
8(b) Describe the direct shear test experiment.
565
DCE V semester
Course Code: 18C-505E(A) Duration:2 hours

PART-A
Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark8x1= 8 Marks
1) Define the term cohesion
2) Define the term degree of saturation.
3) State any two methods of measurement of field density of soils.
4) Define liquefaction of sand.
5) Define ultimate bearing capacity of soil.
6) List any two methods for determining bearing capacity of soil.
7) Define consolidation of soil.
8) Define compaction of soil.
PART-B
Answer four questions. Each question carries three marks 4x 3= 12 Marks
9(a) state the formation of soil.

(OR)
9(b) State the importance of bearing capacity in the design of foundation.
10(a) State the essentiality of permeability in soil engineering.

(OR)
10(b) State any three objectives of compaction.
11(a) Distinguish between net safe bearing capacity and net ultimate bearing capacity.
(OR)
11(b) State the importance of factor of safety values in foundation design.
12(a) Distinguish between consolidation and compaction.

(OR)
12(b) State any three factors which are affecting compaction of soil.
566
PART-C
Answer four questions. Each question carries five marks 4x 5= 20Marks
13(a)Describe sieve analysis of soil particles.

(OR)
13(b) Explain local shear failure with neat sketch.
14(a) Explain the compressibility of confined layers of soil.

(OR)
14(b) Explain in detail the Terzaghi’s model analogy of compression of springs showing the
process of consolidation.
15(a) Explain the field plate load test for determining the ultimate bearing capacity of soils.
(OR)
15(b) State the presumptive bearing capacity values and the IS code equation for calculation
of bearing capacity.
16(a) Describe the Proctor’s compaction test.

(OR)
16(b) Explain measurement of field density by core cutter method.
567

Course Title Theory of Structures Course Code 18C-505E(B)
Semester V Semester Course Group Elective
periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture+Assignments Total Contact periods 60 Periods
Pre requisites
Knowledge of Engineering Mechanics and Strength of Materials
Course Outcomes
On completion of the course, the student shall be able to
CO1 Calculate the thickness of thin cylinder based on hoop stress and longitudinal stress
CO2 Evaluate various loads acting on the dams and retaining walls.
CO3 Calculate stresses at the base of retaining walls with surcharge.
CO4 Analyse indeterminate structures like Propped cantilevers and Fixed beams.
CO5 Acquire the knowledge of applying Moment Distribution method to continuous beams.
CO6 Calculate axial forces in determinate trusses.

No
R U A
1 Thin Cylinders 8
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
2 Dams 12
3 Retaining Walls 08
4 Statically indeterminate
beams-Propped Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
12
Cantilevers and Fixed Q4
beams
5 Statically Indeterminate
Q9(b), Q13(b),
beams-Continuous 10 Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
beams Q3
6 Q10(b), Q14(b),
Stresses in Frames 10 Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8
Course Contents
UNIT 1: Thin Cylinders Duration: 8Periods(L:6.0 – T:2.0)
568
Introduction - Thin cylinders - Failures of thin cylinders-Longitudinal and Hoop stresses in
thin cylinders (Derivations not required) – Calculation of thickness of thin cylinder under
internal pressure – Problems - strains and changes in dimensions (d, l, v) of thin cylinders
– Problems.
UNIT 2: Dams Duration:12Periods(L: 9.0 – T:3.0)

Introduction – rectangular dams – trapezoidal dams - Calculation of maximum and
minimumstresses at the base of a dam - trapezoidal dams having water face vertical and
inclined – Conditions for the stability of a dam – Minimum base width of a dam.
UNIT 3: Retaining Walls Duration:8Periods(L:6.0 – T:2.0)

Active and passive earth pressure - Angle of internal friction – Angle of surcharge –
calculation of active earth pressure by Rankine’s formula with and without surcharge -
Calculation of Maximum and Minimum stresses at the base of retaining wall having soil
face vertical with levelled earth and surcharge. (walls with batter on earth face not
included). General conditions of stability of retaining walls – middle third rule –
Distribution of pressure on foundation of retaining walls – calculation of minimum base
width.
UNIT 4: Statically indeterminate beams-Propped Cantilevers and Fixed beams

Duration:12Periods(L:9.0 – T:3.0)
a) Statically determinate and indeterminate structures –Analysis of propped
cantileverswithUDL on whole span andpoint load between fixed and propped ends –
Calculation of prop reaction – SFD and BMD.
b) Fixed Beams: Introduction- Determination of Fixed end moments by moment Area

method – standard cases – fixed beams subjected to symmetrical concentrated loads –
Fixed beams subjected to U.D.L throughout – sketching B.M.D. and S.F.D – problems
(without sinking of props) – Max deflection formulae of fixed beams subjected to
central point load and U.D.L throughout (No derivation) – problems.
UNIT 5: Statically indeterminate beams-Continuous beams

Duration:10Periods(L:7.5 – T:2.5)
Analysis of beams by Moment Distribution Method (Hardy cross method) – Sign
conventions – stiffness factor – carry over factor – distribution factor – Application to
continuous beams with same moment of inertia through out the span carrying single
point load (central or eccentric) or UDL throughout the individual spanof two span
569
and three span beams(No combination of UDL and point loads)-sketching B.M.D
only
UNIT 6: Stresses in frames Duration:10 Periods(L:7.5 – T:2.5)
Frames – Definition – classification based on number of members and number of

joints – Determination of forces in members of statically determinate pin jointed
frames – method of joints and method of sections – Application to simple frames and
trusses (simply supported and cantilever) under loads at joints.
Recommended Books
1. Strength of Materials by R. Subramaniam , Oxford university Press
2. Analysis of Structures by Thandavamoorthy, oxford university Press
3. Strength of Materials by S.S. Rattan Tata Mcgraw hill
4. Strength of Materials by S.Ramamurtham
5. S.M and T.S – by B.C.Punmia
6. Strength of Materials – by R.S. Khurmi
7. Graphical Methods in structural analysis by D S PrakashRao
8. Structural Analysis – A Unified Approach by D S PrakashRao
9. Mechanics of solids by – R.K .Rajput
10. Strength of Materials – by R.K. Bansal

On completion of the subject the student shall be able to
1.1. Define thin cylinder

1.2. Explain failures of thin cylinders
1.3. Explain longitudinal and hoop stresses in the cylinder under internal pressure
1.4. State the formulae for longitudinal and hoop stresses in riveted and welded thin
cylinders.
1.5. Calculate the longitudinal and hoop stresses in the cylinder under internal pressure,
given the dimensions of the riveted and welded thin cylinders
1.6. Calculate the thickness of a thin cylinder(riveted/welded)
1.7. State the formulae for strains and changes in dimensions of a thin cylinder
1.8. Calculate the changes in dimensions of a thin cylinder under internal pressure
2.1 Define a dam/ retaining wall.
570
2.2 List the forces acting on a dam / retaining wall.
2.3 Calculate maximum and minimum stress intensities at the base of a Trapezoidal dam
with water face vertical and inclined.
2.4 Sketch the stress distribution at the base of a dam for different conditions
2.5 Calculate the stress intensity at base of a Rectangular / Trapezoidal dam with or
without free board
2.6 List the conditions for stability of a dam
2.7 Check the safety of dam to avoid tension in the masonry dam at its base, to prevent
the over-turning of the dam, the sliding of dam and to prevent the crushing of
masonry/concrete at the base of the dam
2.8 Define middle third rule
2.9 Minimum base width of a dam
2.10 Calculate minimum base width of a trapezoidal / rectangular / triangular sections of
a dam without free board to avoid tension at the base
2.11 Calculate the minimum base width of a trapezoidal dam with vertical water face and
having free board to avoid tension and sliding.
2.12 Solve the problems on checking the stability of a dam with water face vertical
3.1 Define: i) Angle of repose of soil ii) Angle of Surcharge

iii) Active earth pressure iv) Passive earth pressure
3.2 Differentiate between active earth pressure and passive earth pressure
3.3 Compute the lateral earth pressure on a retaining wall having soil face vertical with
levelled earth and surcharge.
3.4 Calculate the stresses at the base of a retaining wall for the above cases
3.5 Calculate the minimum base width of a retaining wall with vertical soil face and
levelled earth to avoid tension and sliding at base
3.6 Check the stability of a retaining wall with soil face vertical and having levelled /
surcharged earth
4.1. Differentiate between a statically determinate and indeterminate structure.

4.2. Define degree of static indeterminacy
4.3. Calculate degree of static indeterminacy for a propped cantilever, fixed and two span
continuous beams.
4.4. Calculate prop reaction of propped cantilever subjected to UDL throughout OR a
single point load between fixed and propped ends
571
4.5. Calculate SF and BM values and draw SFD and BMD for a propped cantilever with
above type of loading only.
4.6. Calculate the location of point of contra flexure in propped cantilever for above
loading.
4.7. State the merits and demerits of fixed beams.
4.8. Sagging and hogging bending moments
4.9. Derive the conditions required for the analysis of fixed beams by moment area
method.
4.10. Derive the formulae for the fixed end moments due to central point load or UDL
throughout on a fixed beam.
4.11. Draw SFD and BMD for a fixed beam with above type of loading only.
4.12. State the formulae for maximum deflection in a fixed beam due to above loading.
4.13. Calculate the maximum deflection in a fixed beam using above formulae.
5.1 Define stiffness factor, distribution factor and carry over factor.
5.2 Calculate stiffness factor and distribution factor at an intermediate support of a beam
or non-hinged joint.
5.3 Calculate span moments and support moments for two span or three span continuous
beams with different end conditions, carrying single point load (central or eccentric)
or UDL throughout the individual span, using Moment Distribution method
5.4 Draw BMD only for the two span or three span continuous beams with the above type
of loading and end conditions, using moment distribution method.(overhangs, beams
with varying moment of inertia, supports at different levels not included)
6.1. Define a frame.

6.2. Classify the fames based on number of members and number of joints.
6.3. Show the sign convention for different types of stresses in members of a truss / frame
6.4. Explain the rules for assuming the direction of stresses in the members.
6.5. Explain the method of calculating stresses / forces in the members of a truss / frame
by the method of joints.
6.6. Calculate the stresses / forces in the members of a simply supported or cantilever
truss / frame subjected to DL & LL at nodal points by the method of joints and
prepare force table.
6.7. Explain the method of calculating stresses / forces in the members of a truss / frame
by the method of sections.
6.8. Differentiate method of joints and method of sections.
572
6.9. Calculate the Forces in the members of a simply supported or cantilever truss/frame
subjected to DL and LL at nodal points by the method of sections and prepare force
table
1. Prepare a program in M.S.Excel to analyze a beam in Moment Distribution method
2. Prepare a report on the Identifying and analyzing the trusses found in nearby workshop
3. Prepare the list of dams constructed as part of Mission Kakatiya project executed by
Government.
4. Submit a detailed report on Kaleswaram Project.

Engineering Tools
Ethics
Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge
Communication

Linked PO
10
CO1 1 3 2 1 1 3 1,2,5,6,8,9,10
CO2 2 3 1 2 2 1 3 1,2,3,5,6,8,10
CO3 1 3 1 2 3 1,2,3,5,10
CO4 2 3 3 1,2,10
CO5 1 3 2 2 2 3 1,2,4,5,9,10
CO6 1 3 2 3 1,2,4,10
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks
Assignment 5
s
QUESTION Seminars 5
PAPER
PATTERN Total 60 FOR MID
SEMESTER EXAMS
573
question
MID SEM-I EXAM
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)

question

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
574
Model Question Paper
DCE VSemester Mid Semester-I Examination
Course Code:18C-505E(B) Duration:1 hour

Course Name: THEORY OF STRUCTURES Max.Marks:20 Marks
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PART-A
1. What is hoop stress?

2. Write the formula to calculate hoop stress and longitudinal stress.
3. State the forces acting on the dam.
4. What is middle third rule?
PART-B
5(a). A cylindrical shell of diameter 2.5m and 18mm thickness is subjected to an internal pressure
of 5 N/mm2. Find circumferential and longitudinal stresses developed in the material of the
cylinder.
(OR)
5(b). A boiler shell is to be made of 12mm thick plate having limiting tensile stress of 120 N/mm 2.
If the efficiency of joint is 70%. Find the diameter for an internal pressure of 2.5 N/mm 2.
6(a). If the magnitude of horizontal water pressure on the vertical back of a dam and the weight of
the dam are 320kN and 920kN respectively. Determine the resultant thrust acting on the dam.
(OR)
6(b). Briefly explain about the factor of safety against
a) Over turning
b) Sliding
PART-C
7(a). A cylindrical shell 2.5m long has 1.2m internal diameter and 10mm thickness. Calculate
circumferential and longitudinal stresses and changes in dimensions of the shell, if it is
subjected to an internal pressure of 2.5 N/mm2. Take E = 2 x 105 N/mm2 and 1/m = 0.3
(OR)
7(b). Calculate the minimum wall thickness required for a thin cylinder 1.2m diameter, if it is to
withstand an internal pressure of 3 N/mm2 and
(i) Longitudinal stress is not to exceed 30 N/mm2
(ii) Hoop stress is not to exceed 40 N/mm2
8(a). A trapezoidal masonry dam 5m high, 1m wide at its top and 3m wide at its bottom retains
water on its vertical face. What are the maximum and minimum stresses at the base when the
reservoir is empty? Take ωm= 22kN/m3 and ωw= 9.81kN/m3.
575
(OR)
8(b) A trapezoidal masonry dam 6m high, 1.5m wide at its top and 3.5m wide at its bottom retains
water on its vertical face. What are the maximum and minimum stresses at the base when the
reservoir is full? Take ωm= 22kN/m3 and ωw= 9.81kN/m3.
576
Course Code:18C-505E(B) Duration:1 hour

Course Name:THEORY OF STRUCTURES Max.Marks:20 Marks
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PART-A
Answer ALL questions, Each Question carries ONE mark 4x1 = 4 Marks
1. List any two failures of a retaining wall.
2. What is active earth pressure.
3. Define Prop.
4. Define point of contraflexure.
PART-B
5(a). A trapezoidal retaining wall 10m high, 3m top width retains earth on vertical face and has a
slope of 1:2.5 on the other side. Calculate the distance of its centre of gravity from the toe of
the wall.
(OR)
5(b). A trapezoidal masonry retaining wall 2m wide at top and 5m wide at bottom is 7m high. The
vertical face retains earth having an angle of repose of 30 0 at a surcharge of 20 0 with the
horizontal. Calculate the earth pressure.
6(a). A propped cantilever beam of span 4m carries a Point load of 22 kN at the mid span. Find the
prop reaction.
(OR)
6(b). A fixed beam of span 5m carries a UDL of 10kN/m over entire span. Calculate net positive
bending moment.
PART-C
7(a). A trapezoidal masonry retaining wall is 12m high and 2m wide at top and 5m wide at bottom
with a vertical face retained earth up to its top. Specific weight of masonry and earth are
22kN/m3 and 18kN/m3 respectively. Angle of repose of soil = 320. Calculate the stresses at the
base.
(OR)
7(b). A trapezoidal masonry retaining wall is 10m high and 2.5m wide at top and 6m wide at
bottom with a vertical face retained earth up to its top. Check the stability of the wall if the
allowable pressure on soil is 300kN/m 2, co-efficient of friction between masonry and the earth
is 0.6. The earth pressure on the wall is 960 kN and self weight of wall is 1400 kN.
8(a). A cantilever beam of span 3m propped at its free end is subjected to a u.d.l of 10kN/m over its
entire span. Determine the prop reaction and draw the SFD and BMD showing the values at
salient points.
(OR)
8(b). A cantilever of 5m span subjected to a point load of 10kN at a distance of 3m from fixed end.
If it is propped at its free end, determine the prop reaction and draw the SF and BM diagrams.
577
DCE V semester
Course Code: 18C-505E(B) Duration:2 hours
Course Name: THORY OF STRUCTURES Max. Marks: 40 Marks
PART-A
1. Write any two stability conditions of a dam.

2. What is the difference between a dam and a retaining wall.
3. Define a truss and draw a simple truss.
4. What is meant by statically indeterminate beam
5. Define ‘Distribution Factor’ in Moment Distribution Method?
6. Draw the deflected shapes of a two span continuous beam.
7. State the difference between perfect frame and imperfect frame.
8. Mention any two assumptions made in the analysis of frames.
PART-B
Answer FOUR questions. Each question carries three marks. 4 x 3 = 12 Marks
9(a). A boiler shell is made of 10mm thick plate having limiting tensile stress of 120 N/mm 2. The
efficiencies of longitudinal and circumferential joints are 70% and 40% respectively. Find
the maximum permissible diameter of the shell to withstand a pressure of 1.5 N/mm 2.
(OR)
9(b). A two span continuous beam ABC of spans 4m and 5m is fixed at A and C. Calculate the
distribution factors.
10(a). A fixed beam of span 4.5m carries a point load of 50kN at the centre. Calculate net positive
bending moment.
(OR)
10(b). Determine the forces in all the members of the truss shown in figure by method of joints.
10kN
B
600 600
A C
6m
11(a). A three span continuous beam ABCD of spans 4m, 5m and 4m is fixed at A and D. Calculate
the distribution factors at the joint B.
(OR)
11(b). Explain “Distribution factors” and “Carry over factors”.
12(a). Distinguish between a deficient frame and redundant frame with the help of an example.
(OR)
12(b). Briefly explain the method of sections of determining the forces in the members of a frame.
578
PART-C
Answer FOUR questions. Each question carries five marks. 4 x 5 = 20 Marks
13(a) The inside diameter of the shell is 0.8m and its length is 1.8m. The thickness of the shell is
15mm. Find the changes in diameter, length and volume when a fluid is introduced in it at a
pressure of 1.5 N/mm2. Take E=200 kN/mm2 and 1/m = 0.35
(OR)
13(b) A two span continuous beam ABC is fixed at A and C. Span AB = 5m and span BC = 4m. A
central point load of 20kN acts in span AB and a UDL of 8 kN/m acts over span BC.
Calculate fixed end moments using Moment Distribution method and draw bending moment
diagram.
14(a) A cantilever beam of span 3m propped at its free end is subjected to a u.d.l of 10kN/m over
its entire span. Determine the prop reaction and draw the SFD and BMD.
(OR)
14(b) Determine the forces in the members AB, AE, and BC of the truss shown in figure by method
of joints.
15(a) A two span continuous beam ABC is fixed at A and C. Span AB = 5m and span BC = 6m. A
central point load of 20kN acts in span AB and a central point load of 40kN acts over span
BC. Calculate fixed end moments using Moment Distribution method and draw bending
moment diagram.
(OR)
15(b) A two span continuous beam ABC is simply supported at A, B and C. Span AB = 6m and
span BC = 4.5m. A central point load of 20kN acts in span AB and a UDL of 8kN/m acts
over span BC. Calculate fixed end moments using Moment Distribution method and draw
bending moment diagram.
16(a) Determine the forces in the members BC, DC and BD of the truss shown in figure by method
of sections.
579
(OR)
16(b) Determine by method of sections the magnitude and nature of forces induced in the
members BD, CA and CE of the girder shown in the figure. Span AC=CE=EG=3m,
580
Course Title: Air Pollution Management Course Code : 18C-505E(C)
Periods(L:T:P):
Knowledge of Engineering Chemistry and Environmental studies
Pre requisites
Course Outcomes
CO1 Explain the nature and characteristics of air pollutantsand basic concepts of air quality
management
CO2 Identify, formulate and solve air and noise pollution problems
CO3 Design stacks and particulate air pollution control devices to meet applicable standards
CO4 Identify and Explain the mechanism involved in various pollution control equipment

No
R U A
1 Sources of Air pollutants 08
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
2 Effects of Air pollutants 12
3 Dispersion of Pollutants 9
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
4 Air Pollution Control 11 Q4
5 Q9(b), Q13(b),
Air Quality Management 12 Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
6 Q10(b), Q14(b),
Noise Pollution 8 Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8
Course Contents
UNIT I: SOURCES OF AIR POLLUTANTS Duration: 8Periods (L: 6.0 – T: 2.0)
581
Classification of Air Pollutants – Particulate and Gaseous Pollutants – Secondary air pollutants –
pollution caused by Nuclear Energy program– Sources of Air Pollution – Types of gases causing air
pollution– Source Inventory
UNIT II: EFFECTS OF AIR POLLUTANTS Duration: 12Periods (L: 9.0 – T: 3.0)
Effects of Air Pollution on Human Beings, Materials, Vegetation, Animals – Atmospheric stability –
Global Warming–Green house gases – Ozone Layer Depletion – Sampling and Analysis – Basic
Principles of Sampling – Objective of sampling –Iso-kinetic sampling – Source and Ambient
Sampling – Stack sampling – Equipment used – Economical aspects of air pollution controlling
equipments – Methods of Analysis of Pollutants – Principles
UNIT III: DISPERSION OF POLLUTANTS Duration: 9Periods (L: 7 – T: 2)
Elements of Atmosphere – Meteorological parameters – Wind role in air pollution– Wind Roses –
Lapse Rate – Atmospheric Stability and Turbulence – Plume Rise–Types of Plume behaviour –Plume
rise formula suggested by Indian standards – Dispersion of Pollutants – Factors affecting Dispersion
of Pollutants – Dispersion Models – Merits and Demerits– Applications –Types of Inversion –
Particulate emission rate of the power plant
UNIT IV : AIR POLLUTION CONTROL Duration:11Periods(L:8–T:3)
Concepts of Control – Principles And Design Of Control Measures – Particulates Control
By Gravitational, Centrifugal, Filtration, Scrubbing, Electrostatic Precipitation – Selection Criteria
For Equipment – Objective – Gaseous Pollutant Control By Adsorption, Absorption, Condensation,
Combustion– Scrubbing– Types– Collection mechanism– Cyclone separator– Working principle–
Types of Electro static Precipitators (ESP) – Working principle– Factors influencing the
performances–Bag house filter – Working– Operational problems – Efficiency in gravitational settling
chamber – Constitution of Pollution control board– Functions of state and central pollution control
boards– Pollution Control For Specific Major Industries-Green building concept.
UNIT V : AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT Duration: 12Periods (L: 9.0 – T:3.0)
Air Quality Standards of EPA and Indian Standards– Emission standards – Air Quality Monitoring –
Air quality index – Purpose –Different stages of work involved– Air act– Industries specified in Air
Act 1981 – Legal provisions in India against Air pollution – Ambient air quality standards –
Objective– Preventive Measures – Air Pollution Control Efforts – Zoning – Types of Industrial Zone
– Town Planning Regulation of New Industries – Legislation and Enforcement – Environmental
Impact Assessment and Air Quality
UNIT VI: NOISE POLLUTION Duration: 8Periods (L: 6.0 – T: 2.0)

Noise –Types of Noise Pollution –Sources of Noise Pollution–Causes of Noise Pollution – Ill Effects
of Noise Pollution– Noise indicator – Assessment – Standards– Ambient Noise level for Residential
and Industrial Zones –LN and Lequi concept in noise rating – Control Methods – Prevention– Threshold
shift
582
Reference Books
1. Anjaneyulu, D., “Air Pollution And Control Technologies”, Allied Publishers, Mumbai,
2002.
2. Rao, C.S. Environmental Pollution Control Engineering, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New
Delhi, 1996.
3. Rao M.N., And Rao H. V. N., Air Pollution Control, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1996.
4. Heumann. W.L., “Industrial Air Pollution Control Systems”, McGraw Hill, New Yark,
1997.
5. Mahajan S.P., “Pollution Control In Process Industries”, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company, New Delhi, 1991.
6. Peavy S.W., Rowe D.R. And Tchobanoglous G. “Environmental Engineering”, McGraw
Hill, New Delhi, 1985.
7. Garg, S.K., “Environmental Engineering Vol. II”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1998
8. Mahajan, S.P., “Pollution Control In Process Industries”, Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi, 1991.
9. Thod Godesh, “Air Quality, Lewis India Edition, 2013.
4. E- Lessons prepared by sbtet,TS
5. http://www.youtube.com/user/nptelhrd/search?query=air+pollution

1.1 List the sources of air pollution
1.2 Explain about the classification of various air pollutants
1.3 State the secondary air pollutants with examples
1.4 List out the various air pollution caused by nuclear energy program
1.5 Give the detailed account on sources and classification of air pollutants
1.6 Differentiate between particulate and gaseous pollutants
1.7 Discuss about the various types of gases causing air pollution
2.1 Describe in detail the effects of air pollution on human beings, materials, vegetation
and animals
2.2 Define atmospheric stability
2.3 Define sampling, what is basic objective of air sampling
2.4 Define iso-kinetic sampling
2.5 State are the basic principles of ambient air sampling and stack sampling, mention the
equipment used for the same
2.6 Explain global warming, green house gases, state the contribution of GHG to this
583
2.7 Explain the economical damage caused by air pollution to a country,
2.8 Discuss in detail about Economical aspects of various air pollution controlling
equipments
2.9 Explain methods for analysis of air pollutant at source
2.10 Explain the causes, effects and control of ozone layer depletion
3.1 Discuss about the various metrological parameters that are influencing air pollution
3.2 List the dispersion models
3.3 Describe various Dispersion models in Air pollution control
3.4 write its merits and demerits of various Dispersion models in Air pollution control
3.5 Explain the factors affecting dispersion of air pollutants
3.6 Define plume.
3.7 Describe various types of plume behaviour with neat sketches
3.8 Write the plume rise computing formula suggested by Indian standard (IS:8829)
3.9 Explain the role played by wind in air pollution
3.10 Define lapse rate
3.11 Explain plume behaviour from a stack with respect to the different prevailing lapse
rate. with neat sketches.
3.12 Define wind rose
3.13 Write the purpose of wind rose diagram.
3.14 List the types of inversion
3.15 Determine the particulate emission rate of the power plant with given details
4.1 List the factors to be considered while selecting the air pollution control equipment
4.2 Explain the objective of using air pollution control equipment
4.3 Write brief notes on Constitution of pollution control boards, functions of state and
central pollution control boards
4.4 State the list of Industries specified in the scheduled Under Air Act 1981
4.5 State the functions of the central board to control air pollution
4.6 Define a cyclone separator
4.7 Explain working principle of cyclone separator
4.8 Explain with the help of neat sketch the working principle of various types of Electro
static precipitators (ESP).
4.9 State the factors influencing its performances
4.10 Define bag house filter.
4.11 Explain the working principle of a bag house filter
584
4.12 List the operational problems involved in bag house filter
4.13 Discuss the collection mechanism and controlling methods of gaseous pollutants from
industries.
4.14 Define adsorption.
4.15 Explain the use of adsorption principle for air pollution control
4.16 Explain the control of Gaseous pollutants by adsorption technique
4.17 Suggest a method for control of air pollutants in cement industry and Justify.
4.18 List pollution control equipments
4.19 Explain the principle behind “Combustion” in air pollution control.
4.20 Explain pollution control by combustion.
4.21 Define scrubbing.
4.22 List the types of Scrubbing
4.23 State the collection mechanism of scrubbers
4.24 State the equipment to control particulate matter
4.25 Write the formula to calculate the efficiency in gravitational settling chamber
4.26 Explain the concept and principles used in designing of green building
5.1 Define Emission standards.

5.2 Explain various air quality standards of EPA and Indian Standards , emission
standards
5.3 Explain air quality monitoring of a city,
5.4 Explain the different stages of work involved in quality monitoring of a city.
5.5 State guidelines for town planning regulation of new industries in general
5.6 Discuss the role of town planning and zoning in air pollution control.
5.7 Define Air act
5.8 Explain the legal provisions in India against air pollution
5.9 Define air quality index
5.10 State the purpose of air quality index
5.11 State ambient air quality standards
5.12 State objectives of Air quality standards
5.13 Define Environmental Impact Assessment.
5.14 Discuss the role of Environmental Impact Assessment in control of air pollution
5.15 Explain types of industrial zone
5.16 List the measures to be taken to prevent air pollution
6.1 Define noise

6.2 Define sound pressure level
585
6.3 Explain various types of Noise Pollution
6.4 Explain various sources of noise pollution
6.5 Explain various causes of noise pollution
6.6 Explain the ill-effects of noise pollution on human being
6.7 Define Noise indicator
6.8 Explain the steps in assessment of noise pollution
6.9 State the ambient Noise level for Residential Zone
6.10 State the ambient Noise level for Industrial Zone
6.11 Explain LN and Lequi concept in noise rating
6.12 Explain the importance of design to control the noise at the source
6.13 Explain the methods to control noise pollution in an industrial area
6.14 Explain the principles of achieving noise control in the transmission path
6.15 Explain preventive measures of noise pollution
6.16 Explain the controlling strategies of noise pollution
6.17 Define threshold shift

1. Prepare a chart on causes of air pollution and diseases caused due to that pollutant
2. Know the level of pollution in your city.
3. Visit a nearby industry and observe the equipments they use to control air pollution & noise
pollution
4. Know IS codal provisions on maximum permissible limits of air pollution and noise
pollution that an industry can be allowed
5. Give presentation on working principles of ESP and latest advancements
8. Quiz
9. Group discussion
10. Surprise Test
586
Ethics
Communication
Engineering Tools
Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge

Linked PO
CO1 2 2 2 3 2,4,5,10
CO2 2 2 2 2 1 2,5,6,7
CO3 2 2 3 2 2 2,4,5,7,8
CO4 3 2 3 2 2 3 2,3,4,5,8,10
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks

Assignment 5
s
Seminars 5
Total 60
587

question
MID SEM-I EXAM
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
question

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
588
DCE VSemester
Course Code: 18C-505E(C) Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: Air Pollution Management Max.Marks: 20 Marks
PART-A
1) List any two sources of Air pollution.

2) What are the secondary air pollutants
3) Define sampling
4) Define Atmospheric stability
PART-B

5(a)Classify various sources of Air pollution
(OR)
5(b) List various air pollutants in nuclear energy program.
6(a) Explain the basic objective of air sampling

(OR)
6(b) Explain the control of ozone layer depletion
PART-C
7(a) Differentiate between particulate and gaseous pollutants

(OR)
7(b) Discuss about the various types of gases causing air pollution
8(a) Describe in detail the effects of air pollution on human beings, vegetation and animals
(OR)
8(b) Identify the methods for analysis of air pollutant at source and Explain any two methods.
589
DCE VSemester
Course Code:18C-505E(C) Duration:1 Hour

Course Name: Air Pollution Management Max.Marks:20 Marks
PART-A
1) What is lapse rate?

2) List any two factors affecting dispersion of air pollutants
3) What is scrubbing?
4) List any two equipments to control particulate matter
PART-B
5(a) Write the merits of dispersion models in Air pollution control

(OR)
5(b) Write the types of Inversion
6(a) Write brief notes on Constitution of pollution control boards

(OR)
6(b)Explain how Gaseous pollutants can be controlled by adsorption technique?
PART-C
7(a) Discuss about the various metrological parameters that are influencing air pollution
(OR)
7(b) What is Wind rose and mention the purpose of wind rose diagrams?
8(a) Justify -Which method will you suggest for control of air pollutants in cement industry.
(OR)
8(b) Examine the factors influencing performance of Electrostatic Precipitator and with help of a
neat sketch explain the working principle of a ESP.
590
DCE VSemester
Semester EndExamination
Course Code: 18C-505E(C) Duration: 2 Hours

Course Name: Air Pollution Management Maximum .Marks: 40 Marks
PART-A
Answer all questions.Each question carries one mark 8x1 = 8 Marks
1) List any two pollutants from nuclear energy program

2) What is plume?
3) What is Air Act?
4) What is iso-kinetic sampling?
5) Define Emission standards.
6) Define air quality index.
7) Define noise.
8) List any two preventive measures to control noise pollution
PART-B
Answer four questions. Each question carries three marks 4x3= 12 Marks
9(a) Classify various sources of air pollution.

(OR)
9(b) Explain types of industrial zone?
10(a) How do wind play its role in air pollution, explain?

(OR)
10(b) Classify various types of Noise pollution
11(a) Give the guidelines for town planning regulation of new industries in general
(OR)
11(b) What are ambient air quality standards?
12(a) Explain the steps in assessment of noise pollution

(OR)
12(b) What is noise indicator?
PART-C
Answer four questions. Each question carries five marks 4x 5=20 Marks
13(a) Discuss in detail about Economical aspects of various air pollution controlling equipments
(OR)
13(b) Define Environmental Impact Assessment, discuss how it helps in control of air pollution
14(a) Explain plume behaviour form a stack with respect to the different prevailing lapse rate use neat
sketches.
(OR)
14(b) How could noise control be achieved at the source by design, Explain?
15(a) List and explain the measures to be taken to prevent air pollution
(OR)
15(b)How do town planning and zoning could bring air pollution control?
591
16(a) Explain the principles of achieving noise control in the transmission path
(OR)
16(b) Explain briefly the various sources and causes of noise pollution and the ill-effects of noise
pollution on human being.
592

Course Title: Structural Engineering Drawing Course Code : 18C-506P
Semester: V Semester Course Group : Practical
Periods(L:T:P):
Pre requisites
Course Outcomes
Basic knowledge of Engineering Drawing and Design principles of RCC , ability to visualize
2D and 3D.
CO1 Explain structural planning of building and marking of frame components

CO2 Prepare detailed structural drawings of Beams and Lintels
CO3 Prepare detailed structural drawings of R.C.C Slabs
CO4 Prepare detailed structural drawings of footings, stair cases and earthquake resisting
structures

No
R U A
Structural Planning And marking of Frame 1
1 Components 15
1
R.C.C Drawings- Beams and Lintels 1
2 R.C.C Drawings – Slabs 15
R.C.C Drawings - Columns with footing,
Stair cases and Earthquake resistant 1
3 15 1
structures
Reading and interpretation of drawings 1
Total 45 1 3 2
Course Contents
593
UNIT 1: Structural planning of a building and marking of Frame components and R.C.C
Drawings- Beams and Lintels
Duration: 15 Periods.(L:5-P:10)
a) Draws the position of columns, beams, slabs, stairs and footing in a given line
diagram of building-guidelines and space standards for barrier free built environment
b) Prepare member reference scheme of given building following Column reference
scheme & Grid reference scheme as per IS: 5525 – (recommendations for detailing of
reinforced concrete works). & SP:34
c) Singly reinforced simply supported rectangular beam
d) Lintel cum sunshade
UNIT 2: R.C.C Drawings- Slabs Duration: 15 Periods.(L:5-P:10)
a) Simply supported one-way slab.

b) Two-way slab simply supported corners not held down.
c) Two-way slab simply supported corners held down.
d) One-way continuous slab and T-beam (with details of slab and T-beam)
UNIT 3: R.C.C Drawings -Columns with footing, Stair cases and Earthquake resistant
structures and Read and interpret the drawings
Duration: 15 Periods.(L:5-P:10)
a)Column with square footing of uniform thickness.

b) Stair case – stairs spanning longitudinally (Dog legged stair case)
c) Frame showing the details of reinforcement for earth quake resistant structures
d) Take the details of reinforcement from the given drawings
e) Preparation of Schedule of reinforcement for a given structural drawing.
Recommended Books
1. Hand book on Concrete reinforcement and detailing (IS CODE – SP 34)

2. IS 5525: Recommendations for detailing of reinforcement in reinforced concrete works
by Bureau of Indian Standards
594
Upon completion of the subject the student shall be able to

1.1 Understand Positioning and Orientation of beams and column base upon the
guidelines and space standards for barrier free built environment.
1.2 Understand Spanning of slabs , layout of stairs
1.3 List types of footings
1.4 Prepare member reference scheme of given building following
a) Column reference scheme and
b) Grid reference scheme (Scheme recommended by IS:5525 –recommended for
detailing of reinforced concrete works and SP-34)
1.5 Draw the longitudinal section and cross sections of singly reinforced simply supported
rectangular beam.
1.6 Prepare schedule of reinforcement and quantity of steel for singly reinforced simply
supported rectangular beam
1.7 Draw the longitudinal and cross section of lintel cum sunshade
1.8 Prepare schedule of reinforcement and quantity of steel for lintel cum sunshade
2.1 Draw the plan and longitudinal section of one-way slab showing reinforcement details.
2.2 Prepare schedule of reinforcement and quantity of steel for one-way slab showing
reinforcement details
2.3 Draw the details of reinforcement of two-way simply supported slab with corners not held
down condition.
2.4 Draw top and bottom plan and section along short and long spans of two way simply
supported slab with corners not held down condition
2.5 Prepare schedule of reinforcement of two-way simply supported slab with corners not
held down condition
2.6 Draw the details of reinforcement of two-way simply supported slab with corners held
down conditions.
2.7 Draw top and bottom plan and section along short and long spans have to be drawn
(Scheduling of reinforcement is not necessary).
2.8 Draw the details of reinforcement of one-way continuous slab along with T- beam with
details of slab and T-beam (plan and section of continuous slab and longitudinal section
of T-beam have to be drawn). (Scheduling of steel is not necessary)
3.1 Draw the details of column and square footing (plan and sectional elevation) prepare
schedule of reinforcement of column and footing and quantity of steel required.
3.2 Draw the reinforcement details of dog legged stair case (section only) prepare schedule of
reinforcement for one flight including landing.
595
3.3 Understand the details of reinforcement from the given drawings
3.4 Fill in the details of reinforcement in a drawing.

13. Quiz
15. Surprise Test
Lifelong learning
Engineering Tools
Ethics
Basic knowledge
Communication

Linked PO
CO1 2 3 2 1 2 2 2 1,2,3,5,7,8,10
CO2 3 2 3 2 2 2 2,3,4,8,9,10
CO3 3 2 3 2 2 2 2,3,4,8,9,10
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 3 2,3,4,8,9,10
596

question
and
Understanding(U)

question
and
Understanding(U)
597
DCE V Semester
Course Code: 18C-506P Duration: 1 Hour

Course Name: Structural Engineering Drawing Max.Marks: 20 Marks
PART-A
Answer all questions. Each question carries four marks

2x4=8Marks
Instructions : (1) To be drawn not to scale.

(2) Assume suitable data, if necessary.
1. State any two guiding principles for positioning in a structural planning of a building for the
following. a) Columns b) Beams.
2. Mark the position of columns in the given diagram and name them as per ‘Grid Reference
Scheme’
ROOM ROOM
4000 X 3600 MM 2000 X 3600 MM
PART-B
Answer any one questions. Each question carries twelve marks1 x 12=12 Marks
Instructions :
(1) Draw all questions to scale.
(2) Any missing data may be assumed suitably
3. A singly reinforced rectangular beam of width 230mm and gross depth 400mm is simply supported
over a clear span of 3000 mm. Bearing on each side is 200 mm.It is reinforced with 4 nos
16mm dia bars with a clear cover of 40 mm and 2 anchor bars of 12 mm dia are provided.
Middle bars of tension reinforcement are cranked through 45 0at a distance of 0.1 times the clear
span from the face of the support. To resist shear two legged stirrups of 8 mm dia at 225 mm
c/c are provided. The end covers are 40mm.The materials used were M20 grade concrete and
deformed bars of grade Fe415.
598
Draw the longitudinal section for the above specifications to a scale of 1:15
4. A RCC lintel with sunshade has the following specifications :

Clear span of Lintel—1·50 m
Width of wall—230 mm
Size of Lintel—230 mm × 200 mm
Bearing on walls—150 mm
Reinforcement of Lintel
Main reinforcement—4 Nos. of 12 mm dia (middle two bars cranked at 45° at 220 mm
fromface of the support)
Hanger bars—2 Nos. of 10 mm dia
Stirrups—6 mm dia 2 legged at 180 mm c/c throughout
Projection of sunshade from face of the wall—600 mm
Thickness of sunshade—80 mm at fixed end. 60 mm at free end
Reinforcement of sunshade :
Main bars—10 mm dia bars at 150 mm c/c
Distribution steel—8 mm dia @ 180 mm c/c
Covers:
Bottom clear cover in lintel:30 mm
Top clear cover in sunshade:20 mm
All the remaining covers :25 mm
Draw to a scale of 1 : 5thecross-section of Lintel with sunshade at mid span.
599
DCE V Semester

PART-A

2x4=8Marks

(2) Assume suitable data, if necessary.
1. Draw the cross section showing reinforcement details of simply supported one way slab along
shorter span with the following specifications
I. Clear span [shorter] = 2.8m
II. Clear span [longer ] = 6.0m
III. Bearing on all the sides = 230mm
IV. Overall depth of the slab = 130mm
V. Steel
Main steel = # 10 at 170mm c/c, all main bars are cranked on one side alternatively at
a distance of 280mm from the face of the support.
Distribution steel = # 8 @ 200mmc/c
Hanger bars = 3 # 8 on each side (to support cranked bars)
VI. Covers
Bottom clear cover=20mm
Top clear cover = 20mm
Side covers = 25mm
VII. Materials
Concrete = M 20 grade concrete
Steel = Fe415
2. Prepare the bar bending schedule and find the total quantity of steel required for one way
slab shown in figure below. Top and bottom covers are 20 mm and side cover is 25mm.
600
PART-B
Answer any one question. Each question carries twelve marks. 1 x 12 = 12 Marks
Instructions :
3. Draw to scale of 1:20 the bottom plan of reinforcement of a simply supported Two way slab
with the following specifications:
Size of the room : 4.2 m x 5.0 m
Edge conditions : simply supported, corners not held down
Overall depth of the slab:140mm
Bearing on walls :230mm
Reinforcement:
Steel for shorter span = #12 at 220mm c/c (alternate bars are cranked at a distance of
400mm from face of support)
Steel for longer span = # 10 at 250mm c/c (alternate bars are cranked at a distance of
500mm from the face of the support)
Covers:
Bottom clear cover = 20mm
Top clear cover = 20mm
Side covers = 25mm
Materials:
Concrete : M20 grade
Steel : Fe415
4. Draw the reinforcement details of a simply supported two way slab whose corners are held
down with the following specifications.
Specifications:
Size of the room = 4.8 m x6.2 m

Edge conditions = simply supported, corners held down
Overall depth of the slab =160mm
Bearing on walls = 300mm
601
Reinforcement Along shorter span:
In middle strip = 12m dia. at 180mm c/c
In edge strip = 12mm dia. at 300mm c/c
(Alternate bars are cranked at a distance of 480 mm from the face of the support)
Reinforcement Along longer span
In middle strip=12mm dia at 220 mm C/C
In edge strip=12mm dia at 300 mm C/C
(Alternate bars are cranked at a distance of 620mm from the face of the support)
Torsion reinforcement
In the form of mesh 990 mm x990 mm in four layers with 8mm dia. bars 10 nos in each
layer at all four corners
Covers:
Bottom clear cover = 20mm
Top clear cover =20mm
Side covers =25mm
Materials;
Concrete: M20 grade concrete
Steel : Fe415 steel
Draw to a scale of 1:25 bottom plan of the reinforcement
602
DCE V Semester

PART-A

4x4=16Marks

(2) Assume suitable data, if necessary
1. State any five guiding principles for positioning of columns in a structural planning of a
building.
2. A singly reinforced rectangular beam of width 230mm and gross depth 400mm is simply
supported over a clear span of 3000 mm. Bearing on each side is 200 mm.It is reinforced with
4 nos 16mm dia bars with a clear cover of 40 mm and 2 anchor bars of 12 mm dia are
provided.
Middle bars of tension reinforcement are cranked through 45 0at a distance of 0.1
times the clear span from the face of the support.To resist shear two legged stirrups of 8 mm
dia at 225 mm c/c are provided. The end covers are 40mm.The materials used were M20
grade concrete and deformed bars of grade Fe415.
Draw the cross section of the beam at middle span for the above specifications
3. Draw the longitudinal section of an isolated square footing for a column with the following
specifications.
Size of the column = 400x400mm

Size of the footing=2100x2100mm
Thickness of the footing=450mm
Base course thickness: 150mm with P.C.C, 1:2:4
Reinforcement for footing :
12mm dia at 160 mm c/c in both the directions at bottom with a clear cover
of 50mm. The horizontal lap length of the column reinforcing bar is
500mm each.
Reinforcement for the column:
Main bars: 16mm dia bars 4nos
Lateral ties: 8mm dia ties at 220mm c/c ,
All covers 50mm
Materials Used:
M20 Grade Concrete and Fe415 Steel
603
4. Prepare the bar bending schedule and find the quantity of steel required for the main
reinforcement for lintel shown in the figure below. Top and bottom covers are 25mm and
all the remaining covers are 40mm
PART-B
Answer any one question. Each question carries Twenty four marks 1 x 24= 24 Marks
Instructions :
5. Draw the reinforcement details of a simply supported singly reinforced RCC beam with the
following specifications:
Specifcations;
Clear span of the beam : 3800mm
Bearing on either side : 200mm
Width of the beam : 300mm
Overall depth of the beam :500mm
Materials:
Concrete :M20 grade
Steel : Fe 415 steel
Reinforcement :
Bars in tension : 4 # 16,out of which 2 middle bars are cranked at a distance of 400mm from
the face of the support at 45 °
Hanger bars :2#12
Stirrups: #8,two legged stirrups at 200mm c/c throughout .
Covers:
Top and bottom clear cover :25mm
604
Side clear cover:40mm
Draw the following views to a scale of 1:20
I. Longitudinal section of beam
II. Cross section at the mid span
6. Draw the reinforcement details of a longitudinally spanned doglegged stair case with the
following specifications to a scale of 1:20.
Specifications:
Size of the stair case room: 2500x4000mm
Height of the floor : 3600mm
Tread(T) : 270mm
Rise(R) : 150mm
Thickness of the waist slab : 200mm
Bearing in the wall: 200mm
Thickness of the wall: 300mm
Projection into the basement :300x300mm
Width of the staircase:1200mm
Reinforcement:
Main bars:12mm dia bars at 160mm c/c (Alternate bars are cranked at L/7 from the bottom
end)
Distribution bars: 8mm dia bars at170mm c/c
Additional bars of 12mm dia at 140mm c/c at the junction of landing slab with the waist slab.
Project this bars through a distance of 1000mm from the junction point downwards parallel to
the waist slab.
Covers:
Bottom clear cover= 20mm
All the remaining covers= 25mm
Materials used:
Concrete: M20 grade
Steel: Fe 415
605
Course Title: Construction Technology Lab Course Code : 18C-507P

Pre requisites
This
course requires the knowledge of Construction Materials , Strength of materials, Reinforced Cement Concrete
Course Outcomes
CO1 Use standard equipment like UTM, Hardness testing machine etc for conducting different tests and
determine different properties of metals
CO2 Check the suitability of aggregates and soils for use in different works as per standards
CO3 Test for workability of fresh concrete for use in a particular RCC work as per standards
CO4 Prepare Concrete cubes and cylinders as per standards to determine the compressive strength and
tensile strength of concrete

No
1 Tests on Metals 15
2 Tests on Aggregates and soils 15
3 Tests on Concrete 15
Total 45
Course Contents
UNIT 1: Tests on Metals Duration: 15 Periods (L:5 – P:10)
a) Tension test on mild steel rod
b) Torsion test on mild steel rod
c) Hardness Test on different metals(Brinell’s/Rockwell’s)
d) Izod/Charpy’s Impact test on metals
e) Deflection test on beam
UNIT2: Tests on Aggregates and Soils Duration: 15 Periods(L:5 – P:10)
606
a) Specific Gravity of fine and coarse aggregate
b) Flakiness and Elongation Index of Coarse Aggregate
c) Field density of soil (sand replacement method)
d) Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Shrinkage Limit(Atterberg’s Limits)
e) Proctor Compaction Test
UNIT 3: Tests on Concrete Duration: 15 Periods(L:5-P:10)

a) Workability by slump cone test.
b) Workability by compaction factor test
c) Casting and Testing of Cement concrete cubes for compression
d) Split tensile strength of concrete.
e) Non destructive and Destructive tests on hardened concrete theory only
S.
Experiment Title Key Competency
No
1.Marking of gauge length on the MS Rod

1 Tension test on mild steel rod 2.Fixing the specimen correctly in between jaws
3.Application of load at required rate carefully
4..Measuring the load at failure accurately
1.Measurment of length and diameter of the
2 Torsion test on mild steel rod specimen accurately
2.Application of load accurately
3.Measuring the angle of rotation accurately
1.Placing of specimen at exact position
3 Brinell/Rockwell Hardness test 2.Application and release of load at required
rate
1.Preparation of standard specimen and fixing
Izod/Charpy test on mild
4 the specimen in the right position of anvil
steel/brass 2.Recording down the reading by observing the
appropriate scale
1.Measuring the dimensions of specimen
Deflection test on beams(central accurately
5 2.Application of load at exact point of
point load)
application
3.Measurement of deflection accurately
Specific Gravity of fine and Coarse
6 1.Take weights accurately, record the
aggregate observations and calculate accurately
1.Correct arrangement of sieves used for the
Flakiness and Elongation Index of
7 sieve analysis of fine or coarse aggregate
coarse aggregate 2.Weighing of aggregate passing through
thickness /length gauge correctly
Field density of soil (Sand 1.Calibrate the apparatus correctly
8 2. Weigh the samples accurately
Replacement Method)
3.Calculate the density accurately
607
9 Attenberg’s Limits 1. Collecting required sample of soil and
determining its water content
1.Weigh the soil accurately

2.determine the water content accurately
10 Proctor’s Compaction Test 3. Apply required number of blows of
compaction accurately
4. Record the observations correctly and draw
the graph
1. Weigh the material accurately
11 Workability by Slump Cone Test 2.Apply required number of tampings for each
layer of concrete
3. Measure the subsidence accurately
Compaction Factor test on 1. Weigh the material accurately
12 2.Weigh the mould and concrete accurately
Concrete
3. Calculate the compaction factor correctly
1.Weigh the material accurately
Casting of Cement Concrete 2.Vibrate the concrete filled in moulds to the
13 required time correctly
Cubes
3. Cure the demoulded cubes to the required
period
1.Apply the load at required rate correctly
Testing of cement concrete cubes
13a 2. Record the load at failure correctly
for compression 3. Calculate the compressive strength
accurately
1.Apply the load at required rate correctly
14 Split Tensile Strength of Concrete 2. Record the load at failure correctly
3. Calculate the Split Tensile Strength
accurately
15 Non Destructive test Calculate compressive strength of concrete by
using rebound hammer.
Recommended Books
1. Laboratory manual on Testing of Engineering Materials by Hemant Sood,New Age

International Publishers,New Delhi
2. Building and Construction materials Testing and Quality Control by M.L.Gambhir and
Neha Jamwal,McgrawHill,India
3. Material Testing Laboratory manual by C.B.Kukreja, Kishore.K and Ravi
Chawla,Standard Publishers Distributors
7. https://docslide.us/documents/som-bmt-lab-manual-final.html
608
1.1 State the properties of mild steel used as reinforcement in concrete

1.2 State various tests conducted on mild steel by using UTM
1.3 Explain the tension test on Mild steel specimen
1.4 Conduct tension test on mild steel using UTM
1.5 Interpret the behaviour of the steel with increasing load
1.6 Draw inferences from tests on different grades of steel
1.8 Explain the Torsion test on mild steel specimen
1.9 Find the rigidity modulus by conducting the Torsion test on mild steel specimen
1.10 State the significance of hardness of metals
1.11 Explain the hardness test by Brinell/ Rockwell testing machine
1.12 Calculate BHN and Rockwell’s hardness on given steel samples
1.14 State of effect of impact loading over structures made of different metals
1.15 Explain method of Izod/Charpy impact test on Mild steel specimen
1.16 Calculate Impact load on Mild steel specimens by sing Izod/Charpy Testing machine
1.17 Use apparatus required for conducting deflection tests on beams under central point
load
1.18 Find the Young’s modulus by conducting deflection test on steel and wooden beams
at different positions of loading
2.1 State the importance of specific gravity of fine and coarse aggregate
2.2 State the range of specific gravity values for various naturally available fine and
coarse aggregate
2.3 Use the apparatus required for conducting specific gravity test on both fine and coarse
aggregate
2.4 Calculate the specific gravity of fine and coarse aggregates
2.5 State the significance of flakiness index of aggregate on strength and workability
properties of concrete
2.6 State the standards of flakiness index of aggregates
2.7 Explain the procedure and calculate the flakiness index for given sample of coarse
aggregate
2.8 State the significance of elongation index of aggregate on strength and workability
properties of concrete
2.9 State the standards of elongation index of aggregate
609
2.10 Explain the procedure and calculate the elongation index of given sample of coarse
aggregate
2.11 Study the significance of field density of soil
2.12 Use the apparatus required for conducting field density of soil
2.13 Explain the procedure for conducting field density test on soil by sand replacement
method
2.14 Calculate the field density of given sample of soil by sand replacement method
2.15 Study the significance of Atterberg’s limits of soil in Civil Engineering activities
2.16 Use apparatus required for conducting tests to determine Atterberg limits of soil
2.17 Explain the procedure for finding Atterberg’s limits of soil
2.18 Perform tests to determine liquid limit, Plastic limit and Shrinkage limit of a given
soil sample
2.19 Calculate the values of Atterberg limits of given soil sample from the observation of
tests
2.20 Study the significance of proctor compaction test
2.21 Use the apparatus required for conducting proctor compaction test
2.22 Explain the procedure for conducting proctor compaction test
2.23 Conduct proctor compaction test over given sample of soil
2.24 Compare the observations of tests conducted on different types of soils
2.25 Draw the graph for proctor’s compaction test
2.26 Calculate the values OMC and MDD of given soil sample from the observations of
test
3.1 State the importance of workability on strength properties of concrete
3.2 State various types of tests used for measuring the workability of fresh concrete
3.3 State standards of workability of concrete used for different places of construction
work
3.4 Explain and perform slump test of workability on fresh concrete for given
ingredients
3.5 Draw inference from test results on slump test on workability of concrete made with
Coarse aggregate having different elongation index
3.6 Draw inference from test results on slump test on workability of concrete made with
Coarse aggregate having different flakiness index
3.7 Compare the slumps of concrete made with gap graded coarse aggregate and well
graded coarse aggregate
3.8 State the purpose of compaction of concrete
3.9 Explain and Perform compaction factor test of workability on fresh concrete for
given ingredients
610
3.10 Draw inference from test results on compaction factor test of workability of
concrete made with coarse aggregate having different elongation index values
3.11 Draw inference from test results on compaction factor test of workability of
concrete made with coarse aggregate having different flakiness index values
3.12 Compare the compaction factors of concrete made with gap graded coarse aggregate
and that made with well graded coarse aggregate
3.13 Study the purpose of casting of concrete cubes

3.14 Use equipment required for casting of cement concrete cubes
3.15 Explain the procedure for casting concrete cubes
3.16 Cast the concrete cubes with given ingredients
3.17 State the importance of testing concrete cubes
3.18 Use equipment required for conducting compression test concrete cubes
3.19 State the precautions to be taken for testing of concrete cubes
3.20 Explain the procedure for conducting compression test on concrete cubes
3.21 Draw inference from test results on compressive strength of concrete cubes Made
with coarse aggregate having different elongation index values
3.22 Draw inference from test results on compressive strength of concrete cubes Made
with coarse aggregate having different flakiness index values
3.23 Compare the compressive strengths of concrete cubes of concrete made with gap
graded coarse aggregate and that made with well graded coarse aggregate
3.24 Compare the compressive strengths of concrete cubes of concrete made with Potable
water and concrete cubes made and cured with non-potable water
3.25 State the importance of split tensile strength of concrete
3.26 Cast the concrete cylinders with given ingredients
3.27 Find the split tensile strength test on concrete cylinder
3.28 Calculate compressive strength of concrete by using rebound hammer.

1. Take the students for industrial visit for a nearby industry Select any two materials
used for various mechanical engineering applications. Compare their mechanical
properties
2. Collecting and study of various IS codes regarding testing of materials
3. Presentation on Strain gauges, strain indicators, extensometer.
4. Report on working principles of equipment
611
5. Tools and equipment used with pictorial presentation chart
6. Collecting Specifications of various materials and correlate with standards.
7. Study the methods of enhancing workability of concrete without using any
admixtures
8. Collect different soils and test for their properties in the lab
9. Collection of minimum compression strength values and water cement ratio of
concrete used for different structural components from IS codes
Lifelong learning
Engineering Tools
Ethics
Basic knowledge
Communication

Linked PO
CO1 2 2 1 2 2,4,8,10
CO2 2 3 2 1 2 2 2 2,3,4,7,8,9,10
CO3 3 2 2 1 3 2 2 2,3.4,7,8,9,10
CO4 2 3 2 3 2 2 2,.4,7,8,9,10
612
DCE V semester
Course Name: Construction Technology Lab Max.Marks:20 Marks
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(i)Answer any One of the following Questions..Each question carries 20 marks
1) Determine the various parameters of stress strain curve for the given mild steel
specimen.
2) Determine the modulus of rigidity for the given sample by conducting torsion test
3) Determine the Brinell’s harness number for the given metal sample
4) Determine the Rockwell’s hardness number for the given metal sample
5) Find the Izod impact value for the given metal specimen
6) Find the Charpy impact value for the given metal specimen
7) Determine the Young’s modulus of the given material by conducting deflection

test under central point load

Mid Sem-IIModel Question paper
DCE V semester
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(i)Answer any One of the following Questions.Each question carries 20 marks
1) Calculate the specific gravity of the given aggregate

2) Calculate the flakiness index of given sample of aggregate
3) Calculate the elongation index of given sample of aggregate
4) Calculate the field density of soil using sand replacement method
5) Determine the liquid limit of the given soil sample
6) Determine the plastic limit of the given soil sample
7) Calculate the optimum moisture content and maximum dry density for the given
sample using Proctor’s compaction test
613
DCE V semester
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(i)Answer any One of the following Questions.Each question carries 40 marks
1) Determine the various parameters of stress strain curve for the given mild steel
specimen.
2) Determine the modulus of rigidity for the given sample by conducting torsion test
3) Determine the Brinell’s harness number for the given metal sample
4) Determine the Rockwell’s hardness number for the given metal sample
5) Find the Izod impact value for the given metal specimen
6) Find the Charpy impact value for the given metal specimen
7) Determine the Young’s modulus of the given material by conducting deflection

test under central point load
8) Calculate the flakiness index of given sample of aggregate

9) Calculate the elongation index of given sample of aggregate
10) Calculate the field density of soil using sand replacement method
11) Determine the liquid limit of the given soil sample
12) Determine the plastic limit of the given soil sample
13) Calculate the optimum moisture content and maximum dry density for the given
sample using Proctor’s compaction test
14) Determine workability of the fresh concrete prepared with the given mix
proportion and water cement ratio using slump test
15) Determine the compaction factor of the fresh concrete prepared with the given
mix proportion and water cement ratio using compaction factor test.
16) Prepare three sample concrete cubes with the given mix proportion and water
cement ratio
17) Calculate the compressive strength of the given cement concrete cubes
18) Calculate the split tensile strength of the given concrete cylinders
614

Course Title: Civil Engineering Computer Course Code : 18C-508P
Applications Lab
Pre requisites
Basic core knowledge of designing, Project management and Building services
Course Outcomes

CO1 Create a model of the structure, apply properties, apply loads, give supports
CO2 Analyse and Design the Structure and summarize results
CO3 Prepare Schedules for resource allocation and networks for execution of projects
CO4 Calculate Duration and Critical Path of the Project
CO5 Prepare layout of various building services designs for multi-storeyed structures
Course Content
No
1 Structural analysis and design using latest version of STAAD PRO 15

2 Practice on Project Management software. . 15
3 Practice on Software for Building Services 15
Total
45
615
Course Contents
UNIT 1: Structural analysis and Design using latest version of STAAD PRO
Duration: 15Periods(L: 5 – P: 10)
Model Generation – Navigating the STAAD.Pro Graphical User Interface, Creating Structure
Geometry, Editing Structure Geometry, Viewing Structure Geometry
Property Assignment – Creating groups to quickly select groups of elements, Assigning materials,
sections and beta angles to structural members, Assigning specifications to nodes and members,
Assigning supports to nodes
Model Loading and Analysis – Defining primary load cases in STAAD.Pro and load the structure,
Generating load combinations, Defining load envelopes and reference loads, Analyzing a model
Concrete Design and Post-Processing – Specifying the appropriate Concrete design code and
associated design parameters, Issuing the Concrete design commands and perform a code check,
Using the Post-Processor to review and verify analysis and design results,
Steel Design and Post-Processing, Specifying the appropriate steel design code and associated design
parameters, Issuing the steel design commands and perform a code check, Using the Post-Processor to
review and verify analysis and design results
UNIT 2: Practice on Project Management software. Duration: 15Periods(L: 5 – P: 10)

Various Menus available in MS-Project, Identify various activities for a given project, Input data
required for the given project, Prepare schedules using MS-Project for resources like men, material,
machinery, money, Calculate duration of project and Critical Path, Generate various reports for the
supervision of the project.
UNIT 3:Practice on Software for Building Services Duration: 15 Periods(L: 5 – P: 10)

Components of Building information Model (BIM) like 4M software.
For Heat, Ventilation and Air conditioning design, For Water supply and sewage design, For
Electrical design, For Design of lifts, For design of Firefighting System, For Gas supply pipes design
Preparing Layout of HVAC design for a given multistoried building plan, Layout of water supply and
sewerage design for a given multistoried building plan, Layout of Electrical design for a given
multistoried building plan, Layout of Lift design for a given multistoried building plan, layout of
firefighting design for a given multi-storeyed building plan
Key Competencies to be achieved by the student
616
S.No Experiment Title Key competency
1 Structural Analysis and  Analyze R.C.C members(building) for a particular

Design using latest loading
version of STAAD PRO  Designs a R.C.C member(building) for a particular
loading
 Analyze Steel member(Truss) for a particular loading
 Design a Steel member(Truss) for a particular loading
2 Practice on Project  Learns the applications of Project management
Management software.
software  Learns various menus available in MS-Project
 Learns inputting data
 Learns various commands to execute the given input
data
 Prepares schedules for resource allocation
 Prepares networks for execution of projects
3 Practice on  Learns the applications of Building services soft ware

Software for  Learns various menus available in 4M-IDEA-BIM
Building Services software.
 Prepares Layout of HVAC design for a given multistoried
building plan using 4M-IDEA software.
 Prepares Layout of water supply and sewerage design
for a given multi storied building using 4M-IDEA
software.
 Prepares Layout of Electrical design for a given
multistoried building plan using 4M-IDEA software.
 Prepares Layout of Lift design for a given multistoried
building plan using 4M-IDEA software
 Prepares Layout of fire fighting design for a given
multistoried building plan using 4M-IDEA software
Reference Books
1. Online manuals and tutorials-Staad Pro
2. Online manuals and tutorials-MS Project
3. Online manuals and tutorials -4M software
2. http://www.comp-engineering.com/ETABManE.htm
617
1.1 Navigate through the STAAD Pro Graphical User Interface
1.2 Create, Edit and view Structure Geometry
1.3 Create groups of elements, Assign the materials, sections and beta angles to structural
members
1.4 Assign specifications to nodes and members
1.5 Assign supports to nodes
1.6 Define primary load cases, load the structure, generate load combinations
1.7 Define load envelopes and reference loads, analyze a model
1.8 Specify the appropriate Concrete and steel design code and associated design parameters,
issue the Concrete design commands and perform a code check.
1.9 Make use of the Post-Processor to review and verify analysis and design results.
2.1 Identify and Make use of various menus available in MS-Project.
2.2 List and enter the input data required for the Project
2.3 Identify various activities in the project
2.4 Identify and make use of various commands to execute the given input data.
2.5 Prepares schedules for resource allocation.
2.6 Prepares networks for execution of projects
2.7 Calculate duration of project and Critical Path
2.8 Show and summarize various reports for the supervision of the project
3.1 Identify and Make use various menus available in 4M-IDEA-BIM software.
3.2 Prepare Layout of HVAC design for a given multistoried building plan using 4M-IDEA
software.
3.3 Develop Layout of water supply and sewerage design for a given multi storied building using
4M-IDEA software.
3.4 Prepare Layout of Electrical design for a given multistoried building plan using 4M-IDEA
software.
3.5 Develop Layout of Lift design for a given multistoried building plan using 4M-IDEA
software.
3.6 Prepare Layout of firefighting design for a given multistoried building plan using 4M-IDEA
software.
1. Collect information regarding various software available on computer applications in civil

engineering and give a presentation on them.
2. Visit an Engineering consultancy which deals with building design and drafting and prepare a
report based on the observations made regarding use of computer applications in civil
engineering
618
3. Collect videos showing Staad –Pro models of various buildings.
4. Visit a construction site of a building observe the execution of services work and model them
using BIM software
7. Quiz
8. Group discussion
9. Surprise Test
Ethics
Basic knowledge
Communication
Engineering Tools
Lifelong learning

Linked PO
CO1 1 3 2 3 1 2 1,2,3,4,8,10
CO2 3 2 3 2 2,3,4,10
CO3 3 2 3 1 2 2,3,4,9,10
CO4 3 3 3 1 2 2,3,4,8,10
CO5 1 3 3 3 1 2 1,2,3,4,9,10
619
DCE V Semester practical
Course Code:18C-508P Duration:1Hour
Course Name: Civil Engineering Computer Applications Lab Max.Marks:20 Marks
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(i)Pick and Answer any One of the following Questions from given list. 1x20=20M
1. Create, Edit and view Structure Geometry, Assign the materials, sections and beta angles to
structural members, Assign specifications to nodes and members, Assign supports to nodes as
per the given details
2. Define primary load cases, load the structure, generate load combinations, Define load
envelopes and reference loads, analyze a model for the given model
3. Specify the appropriate Concrete and steel design code and associated design parameters,
issue the Concrete design commands and perform a code check. Make use of the Post-
Processor to review and verify analysis and design results for the given model

DCE VSemester practical
Course Code:18C-508P Duration:1 Hour
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(i)Pick and Answer any One of the following Questions from given list. 1x20=20M
1. List and enter the input data required for the Project, execute the given input data for the
given project
2. Prepares schedules for resource allocation, Prepares networks for execution of projects for the
given project
3. Calculate duration of project and Critical Path, Show and summarize various reports for the
supervision of the project for the given project
620
DCE V Semester
Course Code:18C-508P Duration: 2Hours
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Create, Edit and view Structure Geometry, Assign the materials, sections and beta angles to
structural members, Assign specifications to nodes and members, Assign supports to nodes as
per the given details
2. Define primary load cases, load the structure, generate load combinations, Define load
envelopes and reference loads, analyze a model for the given model
3. Specify the appropriate Concrete and steel design code and associated design parameters,
issue the Concrete design commands and perform a code check. Make use of the Post-
Processor to review and verify analysis and design results for the given model
4. List and enter the input data required for the Project, execute the given input data for the
given project
5. Prepares schedules for resource allocation, Prepares networks for execution of projects for the
given project
6. Calculate duration of project and Critical Path, Show and summarize various reports for the
supervision of the project for the given project
7. Prepare Layout of HVAC design for a given multistoried building plan using 4M-IDEA
software.
8. Develop Layout of water supply and sewerage design for a given multi storied building using
4M-IDEA software.
9. Prepare Layout of Electrical design for a given multistoried building plan using 4M-IDEA
software.
10. Prepare Layout of firefighting design for a given multistoried building plan using 4M-IDEA
software.
621
PROGRAMMING IN C LAB PRACTICE
Course Title : Programming in C lab practice Course Code 18C-509P
Semester V Course Group Practical
Teaching Scheme in
15:0:30 Credits 1.5
Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact Hours : 45Periods
Pre requisites
Basic knowledge of Computer Operation.
Course outcomes
Course Outcome
CO1
Write programs using input/output statements, variables and operators
CO2
Work on Constants, Variables, Data Types, Operators and Expressions in C
CO3
Construct programs on Decision making and Looping statements.
CO4
Develop programs using arrays, Strings and structures
Course Content
1. Programming Methodology and Introduction to C Language Duration: 5

Periods
Program - Define High level language and low level language-history of C language -
importance of C language – Define & Differentiate Compiler, Assembler - structure of C
language - programming style of C language - steps involved in executing the C program
2. Understand Constants, Variables and Data Types in C and Understand Operators and
Expressions in C Duration: 15
Periods
Character set - C Tokens - Keywords and Identifiers- Constants and Variables - data types and
classification - declaration of a variable - Assigning values to variables - Define an operator -
Define an expression -Classify operators - List and explain various arithmetic operators with
examples -Illustrate the concept of relational operators - List logical operators - various
assignment operators - Increment and decrement operators - Conditional operator - List
bitwise operators -List various special operators- Arithmetic expressions- precedence and
associativity of operators- Evaluation of expressions - formatted input and output.
622
3. Decision making and Looping statements Duration: 10
Periods
Simple if statement with sample program – if else statement – else if statement – switch
statement -Classification of various loop statements- while statement – do-while statement -
for loop statement - break and continue statements.
4. Arrays and Structures Duration: 15

Periods
Arrays -declaration and initialization of One Dimensional - Accessing elements in the Array -
Declaration and initialization of two Dimensional Arrays - sample programs on matrix
addition and matrix multiplication–Strings – String handling functions - Declaration of a
Structure – Structure members – Array of structures.
Teaching
Course Outcome CL Linked PO
Hours
CO1 Write programs using input/output statements, variables R, U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 5

and operators
CO2 Work on Constants, Variables, Data Types, Operators and R, U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15

Expressions in C
CO3 Construct programs on Decision making and Looping R,U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 10

statements.
CO4 U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15
Develop programs using arrays, Strings and structures
Total Sessions 45
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Let Us C -- YeshwanthKanetkar BPB Publications

2. Programming in ANSI C -- E. Balaguruswamy Tata McGrawHill
3. Programming with C -- Gottfried Schaum’outline
4. C The complete Reference -- Schildt Tata McGraw Hill
List of Experiments
1. Exercise on structure of C program

2. Exercise on Keywords and identifiers
3. Exercise on constants and variables
4. Execution of simple C program
5. Exercise on operators and expressions
6. Exercise on special operators
623
7. Exercise on input and output of characters
8. Exercise on formatted input and output
9. Exercise on simple if statement
10. Exercise on ifelse statement
11. Exercise on elseif ladder statement
12. Exercise on switch statement
13. Exercise on conditional operator
14. Exercise on while statement
15. Exercise on for statement
16. Exercise on do...while statement
17. Exercise on one dimensional arrays
18. Exercise on two dimensional arrays
19. Exercise on string handling functions.
20. Exercise on structure
21. Exercise on array of structures
624
Course Title: Project Work Course Code : 18C-510P

Methodology : Practical Total Contact Periods : 45
CIE : 60 SEE : 40
Pre requisites
Knowledge of Civil engineering Programme &Inter disciplinary courses.
Course outcomes
Upon completion of Project Work, the student shall be able to
CO1 Reflect upon and explore problems in depth, to develop technical decisions to tackle
them, with skills of curiosity, initiative, independence, reflection and knowledge transfer
CO2 Demonstrate ability to pursue new knowledge necessary to share their expertise in Civil
engineering arena.
CO3 Appreciate the values of social, legal and ethical responsibility principles, through the
analysis and discussion of problem and real time projects .
CO4 Prepare documents in team and enhance written and oral communication presentations
Course Content and Blue Print of Marks for CIE and SEE
Sl. Max Marks

Subject Items
No
CIE
1. Mid - I:Abstract submission–
(Marks awarded by the Guide) 20
2. Mid – II: Content development/
literature survey, data collection/prototype 20
etc. - (Marks
Project awarded by the Guide)
1 3.Internal evaluation - (Marks awarded 20
by the Guide)
SEE
4.a) Final report Submission 20
b) Seminar /Viva Voce 20
(Marks awarded by the External
Examiner, Head of Section (i.e.
Internal Examiner)and Guide.
Total 100
Note:
625
The Project work carries 100 marks and pass marks are 50% and minimum of
50% in SEE. Internal assessment is done by guide and external assessment is conducted by
guide, Head of section and external examiner.
A candidate failing to secure the minimum marks has to reappear for the project.
Course Contents
Project work is intended to provide training in the solution of field engineering problems
involving Surveying, Planning, drawing plans, designing, estimating and marking out of a
building/highway/irrigation/public health project. Project work will also include the
preparation of the feasibility report for any one type of enterprise under self – employment
schemes.
Students shall be divided into groups of five each and shall be assigned a problem that
calls for application of the knowledge he/she acquired in the course and also which involves
some extra study of reference materials.
Projects:
a) Planning and designing of a Residential Colony.
b) Multi storied Building project.
c) Industrial complex
d) Irrigation project.
e) Rural Water Supply Scheme.
f) Sanitary Engineering Scheme.
g) Bridge project.
h) Low Cost Housing Scheme.
i) Set up of a small enterprise under self-employment scheme.
Every student should prepare a project report and submit the same for assessment.
Every student puts his share to the work in all the operations of the project. The end
examination in Project work shall consist of power point presentation and Viva-voce test to
be assessed by a panel of examiners comprising of an External examiner, the Head of
Section, and member of staff who guided the project as internal examiner.
626
After completion of the subject, the student shall be able to
1.1 Identify different works to be carried out in the Project.

1.2 Collect data relevant to the project.
1.3 Carry out Site Surveys.
1.4 Select the most efficient method from the available choices based on preliminary
investigation.
1.5 Design the required elements of the project as per standard Practice.
1.6 Prepare working drawings for the project.
1.7 Estimate the cost of project, men, materials and equipment required.
1.8 Prepare schedule of time and sequence of operations.
1.9 Prepare project report.
1.10 Prepare C.P.M. Chart.
1.11 Collect the requirements to start a Small Enterprise/Industry under Self Employment
Scheme.
1.12. Collect the necessary information to procure necessary finance, site and equipment.
1.13 Prepare the chart or model for each project.
The aim of the Project work is to develop capabilities among the students, for a
comprehensive analysis of implementation of Good Hygienic Practices in conducting
investigation and report writing in a systematic way and to expand students understanding on
the subject.
1. Plan and work out an action plan in a team for completion of a civil engineering
problem
2. Take up a task with skills of curiosity, initiative, independence, reflection and
knowledge
transfer which will allow them to manage new knowledge in their professional
careers.
3. Assign students with quantitative and qualitative tools to identify, analyze and
develop opportunities as well as to solve Civil Engineering problems.
627
4. Develop students’ ability to think strategically, and to lead, motivate and manage
with teams.
5. Develop students’ written and oral communication competencies to enhance
Technical effectiveness.
6. Enhance students’ appreciation of the values of social responsibility, legal and ethical
principles, through the analysis and discussion of relevant articles and real time
projects.
9. Group discussion
Engineering Tools
Basic knowledge

Ethics
Communication
Lifelong learning
KnowledgeDiscipline
Linked PO
CO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CO1 1 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
CO2 1 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
CO3 1 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
CO4 1 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
628
Project Work - I spell
RUBRICS 1:
GOOD AVERAGE ACCEPTABLE UNACCEPTABLE
Identification Good average Moderate Minimal

of problem explanation of explanation of explanation of explanation of the
the purpose and the purpose and the purpose and purpose and need
need of the need of the need of the of the project
project project project
Study the Collects a great Collects some Limited Incomplete

existing deal of basic information information
systems information information
and good study
of the existing
systems
Objectives and Good Incomplete Only some Objectives of the

methodology justification to justification to objectives of the proposed work are
the objectives the objectives proposed either not identified
or not well
Project Work- II spell

RUBRICS2:
GOOD AVERAGE ACCEPTABLE UNACCEPTABLE
Incorporation Changes are All major Few changes are Suggestions are not
of suggestions made as per changes are made incorporated
modification made as per
modification
Project All defined All modules Some of the Defined objectives

demonstration objectives are are achieved defined objectives are not achieved
achieved are achieved
Demonstration Objectives Objectives Objectives No

and achieved as per achieved as per achieved as per
presentation time frame time frame time frame Objectives
achieved as per
time frame
629
Periods(L:T:P):
Type of Course : Practicals Total Contact Periods : 105Period
s
SKILL UPGRADATIONACTIVITIES
1. Visit any Public Works Department, Collect and study the following
documents and prepare a report on their utility and significance in any
construction project.
 Bill of Quantities(BOQ)
 Measurement Book(MB)
 Tender Document
 Schedule of Rates (SSR) and
 Lead Statement.
2. Prepare a detailed report on various activities withCPM and PERT
analysis to be carried out in any construction project.
3. Visit the nearby construction site, collect the soil samples and Perform
field and lab teststo determine the shear strength, compressive strength
and bearing capacity of soil and prepare a report.
4. Draw your dream house plan in CAD and carry out design and detailing of
each and every structural member of the building as per latest IS codes.
5. Visit nearby multistoried building and collect the structural detailing of
various elements in all the floors and prepare a detailed report.
6. Prepare a report on water supply arrangement in your city and different
methods to optimize water usage.
7. Collect the soil investigation report for any nearby construction project
and analyze the results for the suitability of soil and present a report on it
630
8. Visit nearby site and interact with Geo-Technical Engineer to know how
the soil investigation is conducted and submit a detailed report.
9. Organize a Field trip to the nearest Municipal Solid Waste handling
facility to know the various methods of disposing and recycling the solid
waste
10.Visit any NGO/Public Health Department dealing with the environmental
health program, collect detailed information of their programs and submit
a report.
11.Collect and study different photographs of various prefabricated structures
constructed by major Civil Engineering firms and prepare an analysis
report.
12.Submit a detailed Case study report on Handling and Transporting of
concrete for construction of Multi-storied buildings.
13.Visit and Submit a Case study report on various heavy equipment used at
the site during construction of high-rise Buildings.
14. Visit a site with unfavorable ground conditions and suggest suitable and
specific ground improvement techniques to restore the ground for

construction of buildings.
15.Carry out the building age calculation for the given complex of buildings
and assess the condition of the building and suggest suitable remedies to
enhance the life of the building
Note:

631
Needs
improvement
relevance
Presentation
of data
meaningful manner
Performs all
duties of
assigned
team roles
Normally
does the
assigned
work
with sometimes
mates much
to speak others
and unclear clear
Some depth of
improvement
Content is
accurate and
information is
presented in a
logical order
632
1. Carrying self
2. Punctuality
4. Moral values

3 Reliable
4 Helping nature

identified project
4. Reliable

against your sides.
8 Speak more clearly.
633
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATION
18C-601P INDUSTRIAL TRAINING
CIVIL ENGINEERING
VI SEMESTER
Course Title: Industrial Training Course Code : 18C-601P
Semester: VI Semester Course Group : Practical

Teaching Scheme in Periods(L:T:P): --- Credits : 25
Methodology : Practical Total Contact Period : 6 Months
Rationale: Industrial is introduced in the VI semester for the students as a part of the
program to make the passed out students industry ready thus saving the training and
apprenticeship needs in the industry and also help in capacity building of the Telangana
state and the country.
Course Objective:
To enable the students to
1. Acquaint with Industry environment and culture.

2. Develop professional skills
3. Enhance the usage skills of modern tools
4. Develop Communication and leadership skills.
5. Encourage entrepreneurship
Course Outcomes:
CO Outcome CO/PO
Mapping
CO Appreciate the organizational setup and hierarchy 5,6,7,8,9,10

1
CO Practice the use of Resource optimization techniques 5,6,7,8,9,10

2
CO Develop core engineering skills 5,6,7,8,9,10

3
CO Develop an understanding of solutions for Environmental 5,6,7,8,9,10

4 issues in the industry
CO Get acquainted to industry culture and professionalism 5,6,7,8,9,10

5
Evaluation:
1. The student should submit a report describing the profile of the company, Nature of the job
assigned to him /her and other details in a standard format duly attested and approved by
634
the head of the industry after two weeks and before Four weeks from the date of joining
through e mail. Hard copy of the report may be submitted in person or by post.
2. A candidate shall be assessed twice in the spell of industrial training i.e. at the end of third
month and finally before he/she completed the industrial training
3. The assessment shall be carried out by a committee comprising of a representative of the
Industry where the candidate is undergoing training and a faculty member from the
respective program from the Polytechnic.
For Institution level evaluation of industrial training, a committee consisting
following faculty members (1) Head of Dept. concerned. (2) Faculty member who
assessed the student in the industry (3) any other staff member of department
concerned may be formed.
 Evaluation and assessment of Industrial Training, shall be done and marks be awarded in the
following manner, provided the candidates concerned have put up minimum 90%
attendance of Industrial Training.
Industrial assessment at Industry : 600 marks (in two spells of 300 marks each)
Institutional Evaluation : 300 marks
Semester End Examination : 100 marks

(Seminar/viva-voce at Institution)
_________
TOTAL 1000 marks
Assessment parameters at Industry

Assessment I Assessment
Sl No (First II (Second
Learning Parameter
Quarter) Quarter)
1 Attendance and punctuality 20 20
2 Familiarity of tools and material 30 30
3 Engineering skills 50 50
4 Application of knowledge & Problem solving skills 50 50
5 Comprehension and observation 10 10
6 Professionalism/Professional ethics 20 20
7 Safety and environmental consciousness 10 10
8 Communication skills 20 20
9 Supervisory skills 50 50
10 General conduct during the period 40 40
Total marks for Industry Evaluation 300

300
635
600 marks
Assessment parameters at Institution (End Examination)
Institution Level Evaluation Scheme
Sl Criteria Marks Time

No
1 1st Report Submission 50 within 4 Weeks
2 Seminar-I 50 9th to 10th week
3 2nd Report Submission 50 Within 12 weeks
4 Log book 100 --
5 Seminar-II 50 Before Viva-Voce
Institute Evaluation 300

Total
1 Viva-Voce 50 After 24 weeks
2 Presentation/Demonstration 50
of skills
Total 100
The assessment at the institute level will be done by a minimum of three members i.e.
Internal Faculty, Industrial Experts/External Examiner and H.O.D. and the shall be averaged
Learning Outcomes
1.0 Observe Safety Precautions and rules of the industry
1.1. Know the importance of safety in industries

1.2. Understand the safety about personnel protection, equipment protection
1.3. Know the usage of various safety devices
1.4. Precautionary measures to be taken.
2.0 Appreciate organizational set up from top executive to workmen level
2.1. Acquaint with the function of each department/section

2.2. Comprehend the inter relationship among various departments/sections.
636
3.0. Observe the construction and various Components/ materials used in the
construction and Identify their source.
3.1. Identify the various phases involved in the construction project.
3.2. List the various stages of the project, its commercial importance, uses and Applications.
4.0. Develop an Understanding of the various stages involved in processing, sequential

arrangement of different equipment.
4.1. Represent the whole process and each sub processes with a flow diagram, detail Flow
diagram
4.2. Observe and appreciate the resource optimization of space (the arrangement of various
equipment and machinery in systematic manner in a less possible area of site),
Men.materials, machinery, money and Time.
5.1. Explain various analytical methods used in the quality control process
5.1. Practice the Testing methods for quality assurance and bench mark standards
5.2. Practice use of various tools, instruments used for quality checking.
6.0. Observe trouble shooting /servicing /maintenance techniques used during the
construction
6.1. Observe preventive precautions and maintenance of each equipment in the unit
6.2. Follow Servicing procedures for the equipment in the construction unit.
7.0 Identify the various pollutants emitted from the plant/Industry.

7.1. State effects of pollutants.
7.2. Explain handling methods of E waste and pollutants disposal
Engineering Tools
Ethics
Basic knowledge
Communication
Lifelong learning
sustainability Environment &
practice Experiments and
work Individual and Team
Linked PO
CO1 1 3 3 3 2 3 3 1 1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10
CO2 1 3 3 3 2 1 1 3 3 3 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
CO3 1 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
CO4 1 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
CO5 1 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
During Industrial Training the candidate shall put in a minimum of 90% attendance.
The Project report should be signed by the Organizational Representative and contain the
observations made by the Candidate.
637
The Industrial Training shall carry 1000 marks and pass marks are 50% a candidate
failing to secure the minimum marks should repeat the training.
For obtaining Provisional certificate the student has to submit training completion
certificate from the industry after six months of training.
638

Diploma in Civil Engineering C18 Curriculum: Sankethika Vidya Bhavan, Masab Tank, Telangana, Hyderabad

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Diploma in Civil Engineering C18 Curriculum: Sankethika Vidya Bhavan, Masab Tank, Telangana, Hyderabad

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DIPLOMA IN CIVIL ENGINEERING

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING

1. Duration of course is 3 years of Regular Academic instruction.

II. RULES AND REGULATIONS

1. 2 PROCEDURE FOR ADMISSION INTO THE DIPLOMA COURSES:

1.3 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION

The medium of instruction and examination shall be English.

1.4 PERMANENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)

A cumulative / academic record is to be maintained of the Marks secured in sessional work

to the 31st March of the succeeding year.

c). Candidates having less than 65% attendance shall be detained.

a) Within 15 days after commencement of class work in any semester

2.1 I, II, III, IV, V and VI Semesters:

THEORY EXAMINATION: Each semester end examination carries 40 marks in

2.2 ASSESSMENT SCHEME

Part 3 ‘Understanding’ based

V. Award of Grades and Grade points criteria for C-18 Curriculum

a) The students are permitted to choose two electives in V semester.

Industrial Training (VI Semester)

Swapping of Industrial Training in C-18 Curriculum in V and VI Semesters

Institutional Evaluation : 300 marks

Semester End Examination : 100 marks

Assessment parameters at Industry

2 Familiarity of tools and material 30 30

4 Application of knowledge & Problem solving skills 50 50

5 Comprehension and observation 10 10

7 Safety and environmental consciousness 10 10

10 General conduct during the period 40 40

Total marks for Industry Evaluation 300

Institution Level Evaluation Scheme

(b) A candidate is eligible to appear for 6th (Industrial Training) semester

i) Puts the required percentage of attendance i.e., 90% in 6thsemester (Industrial

Promotion rules for C-18 (IVC)

4.1 EXAMINATION FEE SCHEDULE:

4.2 ISSUE OF GRADE CARD:

4.5.2 MALPRACTICE CASES:

18C- Basic English

18C- Basic Surveying

11 Skill Upgradation 0 0 7 105 2.5 0 0 Rubrics -- -

20 5 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 170 1000 425

Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of English Language

UNIT – 1: SPEAKING Duration: 12 Periods

UNIT - 2: LISTENING Duration: 6 Periods

UNIT –3: VOCABULARY Duration: 8 Periods

7. How to use a Dictionary

UNIT -4 : GRAMMAR Duration: 16 Periods

UNIT - 5: READING Duration: 6 Periods

UNIT- 6: WRITINGDuration: 12 Periods

16. Paragraph Writing - I

Suggested Learning Outcomes:

On completion of the course the students will be able to

Slip Test 2 Vocabulary 5 2 questions out of 3 questions

Suggested Student Activities

Textbook: English for Polytechnics

Semester End Examination

Remembering (R) 1 Mark

i. Anger ii. Jealousy iii. Worry

6. a) Identify the describing words in the following sentences.

b) Write any five expressions used by the teacher in the classroom.

2. Write any three basic uses of a dictionary?

a. He always ____ (visit) his parents on Sunday.

3.Change the voice.

a. Satish likes sweets.